1353NM Equipment Specific - Operator's Handbook Vo.l3 - 3 PDF

NR5 Equipment Specific Operator’s Handbook
Alcatel 1350NM
Network Management
1353NM
Equipment management operations applicable to Alcatel
Network Elements supported by 1350 suite in Network
Release 5.x
Release 7.0 on
VOLUME 3/3:
1st generation terrestrial WDM and Submarine NEs
SDH Network-Element Manager
3AL 89062 AAAA Ed.01

1353NM NR5 EQP–SPEC. OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.2 Edition scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.3 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2 Document structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2 1686WM NETWORK EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2 Inter–office line system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.2 1686WM LT NE R3.1 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3.3 Graphical Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3.4 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.4 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.4.1 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.4.2 1686WM LT NE R3.2 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.4.4 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.5 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.5.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.5.4 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.6 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.6.1 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
01 040130 V.SCORTECCI ITAVE B.Moglia ITAVE

L.Foresta J.Berthomieu
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
NR5 EQP–SPEC. OPER. HDBK
Release 7.0 on
ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 128
128
2.6.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.6.4 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.7 1686WM Optical Repeater NE Release 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

2.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

2.7.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.7.4 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.8 1686WM OADM Repeater NE Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.8.1 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.8.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.8.4 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3 WDM TERRESTRIAL MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

3.1 Select NE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.1.1 Release 3.1 for LT only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.1.2 Release 3.2 for LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.1.3 Release 3.2 for OR and LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.2 Subrack management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.1 Removing a subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.2 Setting a subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.3 Board management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.3.1 Setting a board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.3.2 Channel connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.3.3 Removing a board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.4 Port features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.4.1 Set Port in/out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.4.2 List of unequipped port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.4.3 Optical TP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.4.4 Configure Far End Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.4.5 View WDM Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.4.6 View WDM Channel Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.4.7 Regenerator Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.5 Add and Drop management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.6 ALS management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.6.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.6.2 Manual restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.6.3 Test Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.7 Laser On/Off management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.7.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.1 1686LT NE restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.2 1686OR NE restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5 ALARM MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.1 Alarms in release 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.1.1 Equipment alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.1.2 Communication alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.1.3 Quality Of Service alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.1.4 Environmental alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

5.2 Alarms in release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 128
128
5.2.3 Quality Of Service alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.2.4 Environmental alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 128
128
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
Figure 1. Inter–office line system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Figure 2. Line Terminal NE functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Figure 3. Line Terminal NE symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Figure 4. 1686LT 3.1 rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 5. 1686LT 3.1 MUX–DEMUX config subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 6. 1686LT 3.1 Simple Amplifier config subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 7. 1686LT 3.1 board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 8. 1686LT 3.1 Aggregate MUX–DEMUX config Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 9. 1686LT 3.1 Aggregate Simple Amplifier config Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 10. 1686LT 3.1 OGPI source Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 11. 1686LT 3.1 OGPI sink Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 12. 1686LT 3.1 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 13. 1686LT 3.1 Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 14. Line Terminal NE block diagram – Expanded configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 15. Line Terminal block diagram – Bidirectional configuration (West Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 16. Line Terminal block diagram – Bidirectional configuration (East Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 17. Line Terminal NE symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 18. 1686LT 3.2 rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 19. 1686LT 3.2 MUX–DEMUX config subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 20. 1686LT 3.2 RED MUX or BLUE MUX config subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 21. 1686LT 3.2 board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 22. 1686LT 3.2 Aggregate MUX–DEMUX config Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 23. 1686LT 3.2 RED MUX config Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 24. 1686LT 3.2 BLUE MUX config Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 25. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI source Port view (without RWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 26. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI source Port view (with RWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 27. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (without TWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 28. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (with TWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 29. 1686LT 3.2 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 30. 1686LT 3.2 Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 31. Line Repeater NE functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 32. Line Repeater NE symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 33. 1686LR 3.1 Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 34. 1686LR 3.1 board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 35. 1686LR 3.1 Aggregate East Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 36. 1686LR 3.1 Aggregate West port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 37. 1686LR 3.1 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 38. Line Repeater NE block diagram Dual fiber configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 39. Line Repeater NE block diagram configuration 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 40. Line Repeater NE block diagram configuration 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 42. 1686LR 3.2 Dual Fiber configuration Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 43. 1686LR 3.2 Configuration 1 Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 44. 1686LR 3.2 board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 45. 1686LR 3.2 Aggregate East Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 46. 1686LR 3.2 Aggregate West port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 47. 1686LR 3.2 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 48. OADM Repeater block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 49. Default configuration after upload operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Figure 50. 1686OR 3.1 NE symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 51. 1686OR 3.1 rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 52. 1686OR 3.1 Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3AL 89062 AA AA 4 / 128
128
Figure 53. 1686OR 3.1 board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 54. 1686OR 3.1 Aggregate Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 55. 1686OR 3.1 OGPI source Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 56. 1686OR 3.1 OGPI sink Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 57. 1686OR 3.1 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Figure 58. 1686OR 3.1 Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Figure 59. OADM Repeater block diagram Dual fiber configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 60. OADM Repeater block diagram Single fiber configuration 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 61. OADM Repeater block diagram Single fiber configuration 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 62. Default configuration after upload operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 63. 1686OR 3.2 NE symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 64. 1686OR 3.2 rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 65. 1686OR 3.2 Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 66. 1686OR 3.2 Single fiber configuration 1 or 2 Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 67. 1686OR 3.2 board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 68. 1686OR 3.2 Aggregate Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 69. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI source Port view (without RWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Figure 70. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI source Port view (with RWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 71. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (without TWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 72. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (with TWLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 73. 1686OR 3.2 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 74. 1686OR 3.2 Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 75. Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 76. LT 3.1 Set new configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 77. LT 3.2 Set New Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 78. OR/LR 3.2 Set New Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 79. Removing a subrack in Release 3.1, 3.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 80. The different subrack list for a LT NE in Release 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 81. The different subrack list for a LT NE in Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 82. The different subrack list for an OR NE in Release 3.1, 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 83. Set board window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 84. Set board for LT NE Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 87. Set board for OR NE Release 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 88. Set board for OR NE Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 89. Set board for OR NE Release 3.1, 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 92. Optical TP Channel Connection option selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 93. Channel Connection Config window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 94. Remove board confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 95. OGPI source port option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 96. GOC (on left) annd OGPI (on right) sink port on TWLA board option menu . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 97. GDC (on left) and OGPI (on right) port option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 98. GOC (on left) and OGPI (on right) port option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 99. GDC (on left) and OGPI (on right) port option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 100. OCH port option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 101. OTS port option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 102. OMS_TT port option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 103. Set port in service confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Figure 104. Set port out of service confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 105. List of unequipped ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 106. Unequipped port window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 128
128
Figure 107. Optical TP Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 108. Far End Label Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 109. View WDM Level window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 110. Wdm Channel Spacing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Figure 111. Regenerator Type window for asynchronous boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Figure 112. Regenerator type window for synchronous STM–16 boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 113. Board menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 114. Optical Switch State Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 115. Board menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 116. Automatic Laser Shutdown window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 117. Manual restart confirnation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 118. Manual restart confirnation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 119. Board menu in Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 120. Laser Shutdown window in Release 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 128
128
HISTORY
as internal document 3AL 71455 0001 OMZZA
Edition Authors Date Page / Observations

Paragraph
1.1 J.Berthomieu 99–08–25 All 1353SH5 1686WM 3.1 scope
1.2 J.Berthomieu 99–09–06 All 1353SH5 1686WM 3.1 scope after re–reading re-
marks
1 J.Berthomieu 99–09–27 All 1353SH5 1686WM 3.1 scope after external re–
reading
2.1 J.Berthomieu 99–10–22 All 1353SH5 1686WM 3.1 and 3.2 scope
2.2 J.Berthomieu 99–11–08 All 1353SH5 1686WM 3.1 and 3.2 scope after inter-
nal re–reading remarks
2 J.Berthomieu 99–12–13 All 1353SH5 1686WM 3.1 and 3.2 scope after exter-
nal re–reading remarks
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
Applicable documents (for Alcatel Internal use only)
[1] TSD–France, Manuel Qualite Branche Systemes de Transmission – TSD,

8AS 11002 0001 UZALB, Ed8
[2] TSD, TSD Product Life–Cycle,

3CK 00051 0002 ASZZA, Ed2
[3] TSD, Product Control Plan,

3AL 36712 AAAA DCZZA, Ed1
[4] TSD, 1353SH5.0 Quality Assurance Plan,

3AL 69901 AAAA QMZZA, Ed1
[5] Alcatel/NMU, NMU Application Development Process,

NMU/GT/96/022, Ed1
[6] Alcatel/NMU, NMU Documentation Management Procedure,

8AY 02000 0000 ASZZA, Ed4
[7] Alcatel/NMU, Amendment of SQF, DMP, DIP, PDL procedures,

NMU/L/VG/98/051, Ed1
[8] Alcatel/NMU, EMLCore 98 Technical Requirement Specification,

3BP 22100 0008 DSZZA, Ed1
[9] Alcatel/NMU, NMU Technical Glossary,

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
See NMU Web Server
[10] TSD Vimercate, 1353SH R5 Technical Requirements Specification,

3AL 70805 AAAA DTZZA, Ed2
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 128
128
[11] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH R5 User Interface Specification QB3*,
3AL 71310 0001 PBZZA, Ed1
[12] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH R5 1686WM R3.1 Mngt Infomod External Specifications,

3AL 70871 AAAA PBZZA, Ed1

Reference documents (for Alcatel Internal use only)
[13] Alcatel/NMU, EMLCore 98 Introduction manual,

3BP 22100 0066 OMZZA, Ed1.2
[14] Alcatel/NMU, EMLCore 98 Getting Started manual,

3BP 22100 0067 OMZZA, Ed1.2
[15] Alcatel/NMU 1353SH3.1 Operator Manual EML Construction,

NMU/C/98/0071, Ed2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 8 / 128
128
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 Document scope
This document describes the specific functionalities provided by the 1353SH to manage the line system
1686WM Wavelength Division Multiplexer (WDM), commonly refered to as the 1686WM or WDM
Terrestrial Network Element.
This document refers only to the 1686WM release 3.1 and 3.2 managed by the 1353SH.
1.1.2 Edition scope
None
1.1.3 Target audience
This document is intended for all the users of the SDH Manager system.
The documents that should be read before starting this document are:
– Getting Started section of the 1353NM Operator’s Handbook (for example 7.0).
– QB3* NE Management Manual.

See Section 2.3 of this handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 128
128
1.2 Document structure
This document is composed of the following chapters:

– Chapter 2: 1686WM Network equipment

• Overview
• Inter–office line system configurations
• 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 3.1
• 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 3.2
• 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 3.1
• 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 3.2
• 1686WM Optical Repeater NE Release 3.1
• 1686WM Optical Repeater NE Release 3.2
– Chapter 3: WDM Terrestrial Management.
• Select NE configuration
• Subrack Management
• Board management
• Port features
• Add and Drop management
• ALS management
• Laser On/Off management
– Chapter 4: Restrictions.
• 1686LT NE restrictions
• 1686OR NE restrictions
– Chapter 5: Alarm Mapping.
• Alarms in release 3.1

• Alarms in release 3.2
– Chapter 6: Frequently Asked Questions.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 10 / 128
128
1.3 Terminology
1.3.1 Definitions
1.3.2 Abbreviations
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APS Automatic Protection Switching
APSD Automatic Protection ShutDown
AT ATtended Alarm
CC Controller Card
CT Craft Terminal
CTP Coonection Termination Point
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Channel Communication
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
GDC Generic Digital Client
GOC Generic Optical Client
IECB Intra Equipment Card Bus
IICB Inter Integrated Circuit Bus
ITU–T International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Protocol D
LOS Loss Of Signal
MNE Master or Mediation Network Element
MOC Managed Object Class
NE Network Element
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OADM Optical Add Drop Multiplexer
OCH Optical Channel
OGPI Optical Generic Physical interface
OLA In Line Optical Amplifier
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OS Operation System
OTS Optical Transmission Section
PFE Power Feeding Equipment
RECT REmote Craft Terminal
SC Slave Card
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SMEC2 Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment Controller 2
SU Software Unit
SWDL SoftWare DownLoad
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
12 / 128
2 1686WM NETWORK EQUIPMENT
2.1 Overview
The line system 1686WM Wavelength Division Multiplexer (also called 1686WM) Network Element (NE)
is associated to point–to–point transmission systems.
It provides a high transmission capacity on a single fiber, by multiplexing up to sixteen STM–16 optical
channels, each one being associated to a distinct wavelength.
The STM–16 signals may come from line systems NEs (such as 1664SL) or from Add–Drop Multiplexer
NEs (such as 16xx SM). In addition of the STM–16 (SDH) signal, the 1686WM allows asynchronous
inputs.
Three types of 1686WM Network Element are defined:

– the 1686WM Line Terminal (LT),
– the 1686WM Line Repeater (LR).
– the 1686WM Add and Drop Multiplexer–Repeater (OR) or OADM repeater.
Each optical input tributary is associated to a channel number as given below:
– Long Band (LB) MUX–DEMUX
• channel:23 (192,3 THz), channel:25 (192,5 THz), channel:27 (192,7 THz), channel:29 (192,9
THz), channel:31 (193,1 THz), channel:33 (193,3 THz), channel:35 (193,5 THz), channel:37
(193,7 THz).
– Short Band (SB)
(195,7 THz).
2.2 Inter–office line system configurations
The next figure gives the inter–office line system configuration:

System
STM–16 or
asynchronous 1686 OR
1686 LT 1686 LR 1686 LT
Line Terminal Line Terminal
Line Repeater OADM Repeater

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 1. Inter–office line system configuration
The number of Line repeater NEs is limited to 7.
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 128
128
2.3 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 3.1
2.3.1 General

STM–16 OPTICAL
LINE
IN8
WLA λ8 OBA
OMX
IN1 WLA
λ1
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
E
SER_PLUS X
ÉÉÉÉÉ
P
WDM out
DC_DC_CNVR SPV_CPL
SPV_Channel
OMDX
WDM in
λ λ8
WLA
ODX OPA
λ λ1
ÉÉÉÉÉ
WLA
ÉÉÉÉÉSER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
ÉÉÉÉ
F
SMEC2 DCC_AUX
IN16
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
WLA λ16
OMX
IN9 WLA
λ9
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
OMDX
DC_DC_CNVR
λ λ16
WLA
ODX
λ λ9
WLA
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
EAST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 2. Line Terminal NE functional block diagram
3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 128
128
2.3.2 1686WM LT NE R3.1 description
The Line Terminal NE R3.1 is composed of one or two racks. One of this rack must at least be equipped
with the Master subrack.
The Master subrack is on the upper left corner. The Master subrack supports four possible configurations:
– no OMDX board,
– LB OMDX board,
– SB OMDX board,
– LB and SB OMDX board.
Two main configurations are possible:
– Normal MUX DEMUX,

– Simple Amplifier.
According to the needs, several optional subracks can be used:
– the TWLA1 (Transmit WaveLength Adapter) subrack,

– the TWLA2 (Transmit WaveLength Adapter) subrack,
– the RWLA1 (Reception WaveLength Adapter) subrack,
– the RWLA2 (Reception WaveLength Adapter) subrack .
In the Rack view involving a 1686WM R3.1, six subrack housings are displayed.
The four optional subracks can take place anywhere in the six subrack housings.
One subrack or even a rack can remain empty.
2.3.3 Graphical Representation
A Line Repeater NE is represented on the Network Topology as below.
86 LT
WMT
1686LT3.1
Figure 3. Line Terminal NE symbol
N.B. 1686LT3.1 is an example of NE name given at the NE creation by the operator.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 15 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
2.3.4 Views
Rack view

Figure 4. 1686LT 3.1 rack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
16 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Subrack views
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 5. 1686LT 3.1 MUX–DEMUX config subrack view
17 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 6. 1686LT 3.1 Simple Amplifier config subrack view
18 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Board view

Figure 7. 1686LT 3.1 board view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
19 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Port views
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 8. 1686LT 3.1 Aggregate MUX–DEMUX config Port view
20 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 9. 1686LT 3.1 Aggregate Simple Amplifier config Port view
21 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 10. 1686LT 3.1 OGPI source Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
22 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 11. 1686LT 3.1 OGPI sink Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
23 / 128
• Transmission view

Port icon
Figure 12. 1686LT 3.1 Transmission view
N.B. The transmission view allows the operator to access the port view, used in transmission, by
clicking on the port icon.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 128
128
• Reception view
Port icon
Figure 13. 1686LT 3.1 Reception view
N.B. The reception view allows the operator to access the port view, used in reception, by clicking
on the port icon.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 25 / 128
128
2.4 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 3.2
2.4.1 Configurations

a) Expanded configuration
STM–16 OPTICAL
LINE
IN8
WLA λ8 OBA
OMX
IN1 WLA
λ1
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
E
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS X
P
WDM out
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR SPV_CPL
SPV_Channel
OMDX
WDM in
λ λ8
WLA
ODX OPA
λ λ1
WLA
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
F
SMEC2 DCC_AUX
IN16
WLA λ16
ÉÉÉÉÉ DC_DC_CNVR
IN9
WLA
λ9
OMX
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
λ16
OMDX
λ
WLA
λ λ9
WLA ODX
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉDC_DC_CNVR
EAST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 14. Line Terminal NE block diagram – Expanded configuration
3AL 89062 AA AA 26 / 128
128
b) Bidirectional configuration (red MUX)
STM–16 OPTICAL
LINE
IN8
WLA λ8 OBA
OMX
Long Band
IN1 WLA
λ1
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
E
ÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS X
VA P
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR VB BI_DIR #1
SPV_Channel
ÉÉÉÉ
bi–dir Line
F
SMEC2
λ λ16
WLA
ODX OPA
Short Band
λ λ9
WLA
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
VA
VB
DCC_AUX
ÉÉÉÉÉ
VA
VB
WEST
Figure 15. Line Terminal block diagram – Bidirectional configuration (West Side)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 27 / 128
128
c) Bidirectional configuration (blue MUX)
STM–16 OPTICAL
LINE

IN8
WLA λ16
OBA
OMX
Short Band
λ9
IN1 WLA
ÉÉÉÉÉ E
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS X
VA P
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR VB BI_DIR #2
SPV_Channel
ÉÉÉÉ
bi–dir Line
F
SMEC2
λ λ8
WLA
ODX OPA
Long Band
λ1
λ WLA
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
VA
VB
DCC_AUX
ÉÉÉÉÉ
VA
VB
EAST
Figure 16. Line Terminal block diagram – Bidirectional configuration (East Side)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 128
128
2.4.2 1686WM LT NE R3.2 description
The Line Terminal NE R3.2 is composed of one or two racks. One of this rack must at least be equipped
with the Master subrack.
The Master subrack is on the upper left corner.The Master subrack supports five possible configurations:
– LB OMDX board,
– SB OMDX board,
– LB and SB OMDX board,
– LB OMX + SB ODX boards (Red Mux),
– SB OMX + LB ODX boards (Blue Mux).
Three configurations are possible:
– Normal MUX DEMUX,

– Red Mux,
– Blue Mux.
According to the needs, four optional subracks can be used:
– WLA 1 to 4 subracks,
In the Rack view involving a 1686WM R3.2 LT, six subrack housings are displayed.
The four optional subracks can take place anywhere in the six subrack housings.
86 LT
WMT
1686LT3.2
N.B. 1686LT3.2 is an example of NE name given at the NE creation by the operator.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 29 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
2.4.4 Views
Rack view

Figure 18. 1686LT 3.2 rack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
30 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Subrack views
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 19. 1686LT 3.2 MUX–DEMUX config subrack view
31 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 20. 1686LT 3.2 RED MUX or BLUE MUX config subrack view
32 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Board view

Figure 21. 1686LT 3.2 board view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
33 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Port views
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 22. 1686LT 3.2 Aggregate MUX–DEMUX config Port view
34 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 23. 1686LT 3.2 RED MUX config Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
35 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 24. 1686LT 3.2 BLUE MUX config Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
36 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 25. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI source Port view (without RWLA)
37 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 26. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI source Port view (with RWLA)
38 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 27. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (without TWLA)
39 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
Figure 28. 1686LT 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (with TWLA)
3AL 89062 AA AA
40 / 128
Port icon
Figure 29. 1686LT 3.2 Transmission view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 41 / 128
128
• Reception view

Port icon
Figure 30. 1686LT 3.2 Reception view
on the port icon.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 42 / 128
128
2.5 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 3.1
2.5.1 General
The Line Repeater NE is mainly composed of two in line amplifiers which amplify the 40 Gbit/s aggregates.
Optical line Optical line
OLA # 3
WDM in WDM out
SPV
SPV ÉÉÉ
DCC_AUX
ÉÉÉ
SMEC2 F
SPV
SPV
OLA # 1 WDM in
WDM out
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
WEST EAST
(side 2) (side 1)
Figure 31. Line Repeater NE functional block diagram
2.5.2 Description
One subrack is required.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 43 / 128
128

86 LR
WMT
1686LR3.1
Figure 32. Line Repeater NE symbol
N.B. 1686LR3.1 is an example of NE name given at the NE creation by the operator.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 44 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
2.5.4 Views
Subrack view

Line Repeater NEs need only one subrack, the Repeater one.
Figure 33. 1686LR 3.1 Subrack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
45 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Board view

Figure 34. 1686LR 3.1 board view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
46 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Port views

Figure 35. 1686LR 3.1 Aggregate East Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
47 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 36. 1686LR 3.1 Aggregate West port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
48 / 128
Figure 37. 1686LR 3.1 Transmission view
N.B. Alarms from the board in slot 2 concern the East to West direction.
Alarms from the board in slot 4 concern the West to East direction.
East and West are conventional directions, defined at the time of the insertion of the WDM in
the network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 49 / 128
128
2.6 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 3.2

a) Dual fiber configuration
OLA # 3
WDM in WDM out
SPV
SPV
DCC_AUX
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
SMEC2 F
SPV
SPV
OLA # 1 WDM in
WDM out
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
WEST EAST
(side 2) (side 1)
Figure 38. Line Repeater NE block diagram Dual fiber configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 50 / 128
128
b) Single fiber Configuration 1

OLA # 1
SPV Channel RX EAST SPV Channel TX WEST

BI_DIR2 SPV Channel RX WEST
BI_DIR1
bi–directional Line
SPV Channel TX EAST DCC_AUX bi–directional Line
OLA # 3
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ SMEC2
ÉÉÉÉÉ
VA
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
VB
F
EAST WEST
(side 1) (side 2)
Figure 39. Line Repeater NE block diagram configuration 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 51 / 128
128
c) Single fiber Configuration 2

OLA # 1

BI_DIR1 SPV Channel RX WEST
BI_DIR2
bi–directional Line
SPV Channel TX EAST DCC_AUX bi–directional Line
OLA # 3
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ SMEC2
ÉÉÉÉÉ
VA
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
VB
F
EAST WEST
(side 1) (side 2)
Figure 40. Line Repeater NE block diagram configuration 2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 52 / 128
128
2.6.2 Description

The Line Repeater NE is mainly composed of two in line amplifiers which amplify the 40 Gbit/s aggregates.
The BIDIR boards are in charge of extracting / inserting the supervision channel, inserting the wavelengths
coming from the transmitting OLA and extracting the wavelengths to feed the opposite OLA.
The subrack has three possible configurations:
– 2 OLA
– 2 OLA and BIDIR1/BIDIR2 configuration 1
– 2 OLA and BIDIR2/BIDIR1 configuration 2
86 LR
WMT
1686LR3.2
N.B. 1686LR3.2 is an example of NE name given at the NE creation by the operator.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 53 / 128
128
2.6.4 Views
• Subrack views

Figure 42. 1686LR 3.2 Dual Fiber configuration Subrack view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 54 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 43. 1686LR 3.2 Configuration 1 Subrack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
55 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Board view

Figure 44. 1686LR 3.2 board view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
56 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Port views

Figure 45. 1686LR 3.2 Aggregate East Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
57 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 46. 1686LR 3.2 Aggregate West port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
58 / 128
Figure 47. 1686LR 3.2 Transmission view
N.B. Alarms from the board in slot 2 and slot 3 concern the East to West direction. Alarms from the
board in slot 4 and slot 6 concern the West to East direction.
N.B. East and West are conventional directions, defined at the time of the insertion of the WDM in
the network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 59 / 128
128
2.7 1686WM Optical Repeater NE Release 3.1
2.7.1 General

A 1686OR NE can be composed of a maximum of 3 subracks:
– OADM REPEATER subrack,

– WAVELENGTH ADAPTER (WLA) subrack #1,
– WAVELENGTH ADAPTER (WLA) subrack #2.
The WLA subracks can contain either TWLA or RWLA boards (both card types may be blended in the
same subrack).
At EML–USM level, the equipment view is composed of one rack including three subracks.
On NE creation, the MASTER subrack is set in the upper position of the rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 60 / 128
128
WDM in OLA #3 WDM out

OLA in OLA out
SPV
SPV
STM–16
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #1
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
WLA IN l
ÉÉÉÉ
LOOP in
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
F
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ SMEC2 DCC_AUX
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #2
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
WLA IN l
ÉÉÉÉ
LOOP in
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DC_DC_CNVR
SPV
SPV
WDM out OLA out OLA in WDM in
OLA #1
WEST EAST
Figure 48. OADM Repeater block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 61 / 128
128
2.7.2 Description
Once the configuration is uploaded from the NE, if wavelength adapter subracks exist, they are displayed
as follows:

OADM
REPEATER
Shelf
WLA#1
Shelf
WLA#2
Shelf
Figure 49. Default configuration after upload operation
86 OR
WDM
OADM3.1
Figure 50. 1686OR 3.1 NE symbol
N.B. OADM3.1 is an example of NE name given at the NE creation by the operator

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 62 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
2.7.4 Views
Rack view

Figure 51. 1686OR 3.1 rack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
63 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Subrack view

Figure 52. 1686OR 3.1 Subrack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
64 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Board view

Figure 53. 1686OR 3.1 board view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
65 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Port views

Figure 54. 1686OR 3.1 Aggregate Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
66 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 55. 1686OR 3.1 OGPI source Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
67 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 56. 1686OR 3.1 OGPI sink Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
68 / 128
• Transmission view (West to East)
Figure 57. 1686OR 3.1 Transmission view
Example of an 1686OR without Add and Drop connectivity, i.e. the NE behaves as a repeater.
N.B. The transmission view allows the operator to access the port view, used in
transmission, by clicking on the port icon.
East and West are conventional directions, defined at the time of the insertion of the
WDM in the network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 69 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Reception view (East to West)

Figure 58. 1686OR 3.1 Reception view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
70 / 128
2.8 1686WM OADM Repeater NE Release 3.2
a) Dual fiber configuration
WDM in OLA #3 WDM out

OLA in OLA out
SPV
SPV
STM–16
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #1
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
WLA
ÉÉÉÉ
IN l
LOOP in
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
F
ÉÉÉÉ SMEC2 DCC_AUX
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #2
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
WLA
ÉÉÉÉ
IN l
LOOP in
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
SPV
SPV
WDM out OLA out OLA in WDM in
OLA #1
WEST EAST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 59. OADM Repeater block diagram Dual fiber configuration
3AL 89062 AA AA 71 / 128
128
b) Single fiber configuration 1

OLA in OLA #1 OLA out
STM–16
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #2
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
ÉÉÉÉÉ
WLA IN l
LOOP in
VA
VB
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
BI_DIR2 DCC_AUX BI_DIR1

bi–directional Line bi–directional Line
STM–16
SPV Channel TX EAST SPV Channel RX WEST
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #1
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
ÉÉÉÉÉ
WLA IN l
LOOP in
VA
VB
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
OLA out OLA in

OLA #3
EAST
(side 1) ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ SMEC2
F
WEST
(side 2)
Figure 60. OADM Repeater block diagram Single fiber configuration 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 72 / 128
128
c) Single fiber configuration 2

OLA in OLA #1 OLA out
STM–16
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #2
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
ÉÉÉÉÉ
WLA IN l
LOOP in
VA
VB
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
BI_DIR1 DCC_AUX BI_DIR2

bi–directional Line bi–directional Line
STM–16
SPV Channel TX EAST SPV Channel RX WEST
IN i WLA λi
OADM in
LOOP in
INl WLA
λl
OADM in
LOOP in
λ λi OADM #1
WLA IN i
LOOP in
λ λl
ÉÉÉÉÉ
WLA IN l
LOOP in
VA
VB
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
SER_PLUS
DC_DC_CNVR
OLA out OLA in

OLA #3
EAST
(side 1) ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ SMEC2
F
WEST
(side 2)
Figure 61. OADM Repeater block diagram Single fiber configuration 2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 73 / 128
128
2.8.2 Description
A 1686OR NE can be composed of a maximum of 3 subracks:

– OADM REPEATER subrack,

– WAVELENGTH ADAPTER (WLA) subrack #1,
– WAVELENGTH ADAPTER (WLA) subrack #2.
The WLA subracks can contain either TWLA or RWLA boards (both card types may be blended in the
same subrack).
At EML–USM level, the equipment view is composed of one rack including three subracks.
On NE creation, the MASTER subrack is set in the upper position of the rack.
Once the configuration is uploaded from the NE, if wavelength adapter subracks exist, they are displayed
as follows:
OADM
REPEATER
Shelf
WLA#1
Shelf
WLA#2
Shelf
Figure 62. Default configuration after upload operation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 74 / 128
128

86 OR
WDM
OADM3.2
Figure 63. 1686OR 3.2 NE symbol
N.B. OADM3.2 is an example of NE name given at the NE creation by the operator

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 75 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
2.8.4 Views
Rack view

Figure 64. 1686OR 3.2 rack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
76 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Subrack views

Figure 65. 1686OR 3.2 Subrack view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
77 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 66. 1686OR 3.2 Single fiber configuration 1 or 2 Subrack view
78 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Board view

Figure 67. 1686OR 3.2 board view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
79 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Port views

Figure 68. 1686OR 3.2 Aggregate Port view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
80 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 69. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI source Port view (without RWLA)
81 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 70. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI source Port view (with RWLA)
82 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 71. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (without TWLA)
83 / 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 72. 1686OR 3.2 OGPI sink Port view (with TWLA)
84 / 128
• Transmission view (West to East)
Figure 73. 1686OR 3.2 Transmission view
Example of a 1686OR without Add and Drop connectivity, i.e. the NE behaves as a repeater.
N.B. The transmission view allows the operator to access the port view, used in
transmission, by clicking on the port icon.
WDM in the network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 85 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Reception view (East to West)

Figure 74. 1686OR 3.2 Reception view
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
86 / 128
3 WDM TERRESTRIAL MANAGEMENT
3.1 Select NE configuration

This feature allows to set a default configuration to a NE.
– In Configuration pull down menu, click on Select NE Config...:
Configuration
MIB >
Select NE Config...
Alarms Severities...
NE Time...
Figure 75. Configuration menu
Switching for a configuration to another will destroy the boards set in the main subrack and the related
one(s) in the WLA subrack(s). Therefore, a configuration selection is usually performed only upon NE
creation.
The following Set New configuration window is displayed:
3.1.1 Release 3.1 for LT only
Figure 76. LT 3.1 Set new configuration window
The list of the allowed configurations for one NE is given:
– Mux Demux Configuration: the standard configuration,

– Simple Amplifier configuration: with this configuration at most one TWLA and one RWLA boards can
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
be set, and the equipped/unequipped port attribute is no longer managed in that configuration.
3AL 89062 AA AA 87 / 128
128
3.1.2 Release 3.2 for LT

Figure 77. LT 3.2 Set New Configuration window
The list of the allowed configurations for one NE is given:
– MUX_DEMUX: standard configuration (as per R3.1). Beware, that configuration demands two fibers
(one for Transmission, another for Reception).
– Single Fiber Red MUX: allows to transmit and receive in a single fiber. The transmitted channels
belong to the lower edge of the ITU grid (channels ranging from 23 to 37).
– Single Fiber Blue MUX: allows to transmit and receive in a single fiber. The transmitted channels
belong to the upper edge of the ITU grid (channels ranging from 43 to 57).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 88 / 128
128
3.1.3 Release 3.2 for OR and LR
Figure 78. OR/LR 3.2 Set New Configuration window
The list of the allowed configurations for one equipment is given:
– Dual Fiber: standard configuration (as per R3.1).

– Single Fiber Configuration 1: BIDIR1 board transmits to the West side whereas BIDIR2 board
transmits to the East side.
– Single Fiber Configuration 2: BIDIR2 board transmits to the West side whereas BIDIR1 board
transmits to the East side .
N.B. BIDIR1 provides 1480nm SPV channel insertion and 1510nm SPV channel extraction.
BIDIR2 provides 1510nm SPV channel insertion and 1480nm SPV channel extraction.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 89 / 128
128
3.2 Subrack management
This feature is similar to the change board type feature but concerns subracks in an equipment rack view.
It allows to configure subracks according to a list of allowed subracks.

The subracks can be changed or removed using the menu options of the equipment rack view.
The remove and set subrack is only allowed if the NE management states are the followings:
– Assignment: Any state – Supervision: Supervised/ Declared – Local access: Any
– Operational: Any – Alignment: Aligned/ misaligned/ in configuration
3.2.1 Removing a subrack
Click on the subrack you wish to remove. The outline of the housing becomes highlighted. This
indicates that the subrack is selected and that operations can be done on the housing.
N.B. If the selected housing cannot be changed the menu option will be greyed.
In the Equipment view, select the Remove option from the Subrack pull down menu.
Subrack
Set subrack ... Ctrl+S

Remove subrack Ctrl+R
Figure 79. Removing a subrack in Release 3.1, 3.2.
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, the operator can confirm or cancel the ”Remove
subrack” operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 90 / 128
128
3.2.2 Setting a subrack
Click on the empty housing in which you want to add a subrack. The outline becomes highlighted to
show that you can do operations on it.
Select the Set ... option from the Subrack pull down menu.
N.B. A new subrack may be created in either an empty housing or it may replace an
existing one.
The different subrack list depends on the NE type and the Release.
Figure 80. The different subrack list for a LT NE in Release 3.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 91 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 81. The different subrack list for a LT NE in Release 3.2
Figure 82. The different subrack list for an OR NE in Release 3.1, 3.2
92 / 128
N.B. The list of subracks displayed during a ”Change subrack” operation is restricted to
those which the NE may accept in the selected housing. Therefore the list will vary
depending on which housing has been selected.
Choose the subrack type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The name of the
subrack is highlighted. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice.

The subrack representation appears on the NE view in the housing when the subrack change is
effective.
In the Set subrack dialogue box, the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the
dialogue box. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 93 / 128
128
3.3 Board management
3.3.1 Setting a board

To set a board, click on the empty housing in which you want to add a board in the subrack view. The outline
becomes highlighted to show that you can do operations on it.
– Select the Board option from the Equipment pull down menu.
– Select the Set Board option from the Board menu:
a) Selection for any board except WLA boards for LT 3.2 and OR 3.1/3.2:
The following Allowed board Types list is displayed, for example:
Figure 83. Set board window
Select a board and click on OK.
N.B. The operator must then execute a Channel connection if a RWLA board was selected in a LT
Release 3.1 (see paragragh 3.3.2.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 94 / 128
128
b) WLA selection for LT Release 3.2
Figure 84. Set board for LT NE Release 3.2
– Select in the list a board with double click on.

The list of the available channel numbers is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
With the white arrow you can return to the previous window.
3AL 89062 AA AA 95 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
Select the channel number with double click on and then click on the OK button.
96 / 128
c) WLA selection for the OADM Repeater Release 3.1, 3.2
Figure 87. Set board for OR NE Release 3.1
Figure 88. Set board for OR NE Release 3.2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 97 / 128
128
– Select in the list a board with double click on.
The directions of the board selected are displayed. Each direction (East–West or West–East) is
related to a given board.

Figure 89. Set board for OR NE Release 3.1, 3.2
– Select the East–West or the West–East with double click on.

The list of the available channel numbers is displayed.
With the white arrow you can return to the previous window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 98 / 128
128
– Select the channel number with double click on and then click on the OK button.
The board is then set, its reference is displayed in the Expected Board field.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 99 / 128
128
3.3.2 Channel connection
This feature is only available for the LT NE in the release 3.1.

In fact, each RWLA board is not assigned to a specific channel (as a TWLA board). Therefore the operator

has to decide which is the corresponding channel for each RWLA board by performing the following
operations:
– In a RWLA subrack view, select a WLA board.

– Click on the Equipment menu.
– Select the Board option, then the Channel Connection option.
Equipment
Board > Set Board... Ctrl+S

Slots Labels On/OFF Remove Board Ctrl+R
Channel Connection... Ctrl+C
Figure 92. Optical TP Channel Connection option selection
The following window is displayed with the list of allowed channels:
Figure 93. Channel Connection Config window
– Click on a channel number in the Channels Allowed list.

– Click on the white right arrow.
– Click on the OK button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 100 / 128
128
3.3.3 Removing a board
To remove a board, click on the board in the subrack view. The outline becomes highlighted to show that
you can do the remove.
– Select the Board option from the Equipment pull down menu.
– Select the Remove Board option from the Board menu:
The following confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 94. Remove board confirmation box
Click on OK in the confirmation box to execute the remove.
Removing a board leads to the following by products:
– the associated alarms are cleared.

– should the board perform a multiplexing function (OMDX, OMX, ODX or OADM), the carried OCH
objects and the related OGPI objects are removed as well. You will notice that they no longer appear
in the board view or in any other view of the NE.
– the removal of OCH and OGPIs (owed to the removal of a multiplexing board) may also entail the
removal of WLA boards that supported the destroyed OGPIs.
– if the removed board is a WLA, the previously carried OGPI object is sent back to the multiplexing
board that supports the related OCH object.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 101 / 128
128
3.4 Port features
Depending on the port selected in Port view, the Port pull down menu gives various options.

– For OGPI source port on the LT NE, the option menu is:

Port
Navig to Supported Board

Show linked port(s)
Configure Far End Label...
View WDM Channel Spacing...
Figure 95. OGPI source port option menu
– For GOC and OGPI sink port on the LT NE without TWLA board, the option menu is:
Port Port
Navig to Supported Board Navig to Supported Board
Show linked port(s) Show linked port(s)
Configure Far End Label... Configure Far End Label...
View WDM Channel Spacing... View WDM Channel Spacing...
Set Port In service Set Port In service
Set Port Out of service Set Port Out of service
Figure 96. GOC (on left) annd OGPI (on right) sink port on TWLA board option menu
– For GDC and OGPI sink port on TWLA board on the LT NE, the option menu is:
Port Port
Regenerator type Regenerator type
Set Port In service Set Port In service
Set Port Out of service Set Port Out of service
Figure 97. GDC (on left) and OGPI (on right) port option menu
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 102 / 128
128
– For GOC and OGPI sink port without TWLA on the OADM NE, the option menu is:
Port Port


View WDM Channel Spacing... View WDM Channel Spacing...
Figure 98. GOC (on left) and OGPI (on right) port option menu
– For GDC and OGPI sink port on the TWLA on the OADM NE, the option menu is:
Port Port
Regenerator type Regenerator type
Figure 99. GDC (on left) and OGPI (on right) port option menu
– For OCH port, the option menu is:
Port

Show linked port(s)
View WDM Level
Optical TP Configuration...
Figure 100. OCH port option menu
– For OTS port, the option menu is:
Port

Show linked port(s)
View WDM Level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 101. OTS port option menu
3AL 89062 AA AA 103 / 128
128
– For OMS_TT port, the option menu is:
Port


Show linked port(s)
View WDM Level
Figure 102. OMS_TT port option menu

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 104 / 128
128
3.4.1 Set Port in/out of service
This feature is only available for OGPI sink port of LT NEs.

To set in service the port selected in the Port view, click on Set Port In service option in the Port menu.
The following confirmation box is displayed.
Figure 103. Set port in service confirmation
You click on OK to confirm your choise.
To set out of service the port selected in the Port view, click on Set Port Out of service option in the Port
menu.
Figure 104. Set port out of service confirmation
You click on OK to confirm your choise.
N.B. Beware that no transmission alarm is handle for unequipped ports.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 105 / 128
128
3.4.2 List of unequipped port
This feature is only available for LT NEs.

To list the unequipped port of the NE:

– In Diagnosis pull down menu, click on List of option and then click on Unequipped port option
Diagnosis
Compare
Show NE Alarms...
View >
List Of > Unequipped Ports...
Figure 105. List of unequipped ports
The folowing window is displayed:
Figure 106. Unequipped port window

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 106 / 128
128
3.4.3 Optical TP configuration
This feature, only available for the Terminal equipment LT and OR, allows the operator to know the channel
number and the channel frequency (in THz) of any optical source or sink port.
To display these characteristics:
– Open the port view of the optical port.

– Click on the Port menu.
– Select the Optical TP Configuration option.
The following window is displayed:
Figure 107. Optical TP Configuration window
3.4.4 Configure Far End Label
This feature is only available for OGPI and OTS ports.
The Far End Label is chosen as a new attribute which allows to indicate the ”user name” of the far end
entity (i.e. the entity connected to the other end of the fiber).

– Select the Far End Label Configuration option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 108. Far End Label Configuration window
Enter the Far End Label (40 characters at most) and then push on the OK button.
3AL 89062 AA AA 107 / 128
128
3.4.5 View WDM Level
This feature is available for OMS_TT port of LT NEs and OR NEs but it is only meaningful for the former
NE type.

– Select the View WDM Level option.
The following window giving the Number of wavelenghs (number of OGPI–sink equipped) is displayed:
Figure 109. View WDM Level window
The value range spreads from 0 to 16.
N.B. For the 1686OR NE, the number of wavelengths is ”unknown”.
3.4.6 View WDM Channel Spacing
This feature is only available for GOC (on OADM or OMDX board) and OCH port of LT or OR NE.

– Select the WDM Channel Spacing option.
The following window giving the Channel Spacing (in Ghz) is displayed:
Figure 110. Wdm Channel Spacing window

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The value is always 200.000 Ghz
3AL 89062 AA AA 108 / 128
128
3.4.7 Regenerator Type
This feature is only available for GDC sink port on TWLA board.


– Select the Regenerator Type option.
The Regenerator Type depends on the board type:
– For an asynchronous board the following window is displayed:
Figure 111. Regenerator Type window for asynchronous boards
– For a synchronous STM–16 board the following window is displayed:
Figure 112. Regenerator type window for synchronous STM–16 boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 109 / 128
128
3.5 Add and Drop management
Cross–connection operations can be performed in both directions (East to West, West to East) on 4 fixed
wavelengths extracted from the Aggregate signal.

One switch is associated to each of the four wavelengths. The switch can have two states:
– Drop/Insert,
– Pass–Through.
10 combinations of 4 wavelengths are available by means of 10 different board types.
In the Board view, click on the Board pull down menu and select the Optical Switch config... option.
Board
Navig to Subrack
Optical Switch config...
Figure 113. Board menu
Figure 114. Optical Switch State Configuration window
The Switch State has two possible values:
– Pass–Through: the signal on the channel is just amplified,

– Drop/Insert: the wavelength corresponding to the sink optical channel is extracted from the inbound
aggregate signal and dropped into the source tributary port. The sink tributary port corresponding
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
to that channel is inserted in the source optical channel at the transmit side to complete the outbound
aggregate signal.
3AL 89062 AA AA 110 / 128
128
3.6 ALS management
In a hardware point of view, the ALS function is supported by:

– the EXP and OBA boards for the Line Terminal equipment,
– the OADM and OLA boards for the OAM Repeater equipment.
From the OS point of view, the ALS function is always implemented on these boards.
If the ALS function is not implemented on one of these boards (this operation is possible using a Craft
Terminal), the Alignment State, following an upload operation, will be misaligned. So a download operation
has then to be performed to align the OS and NE MIBs.
In the Board view click on the Board pull down menu and select the Laser management option:
Board
Navig to Subrack
Laser Management > Configuration...
Manual Restart
Test Restart
Figure 115. Board menu
N.B. That menu is only available from the OBA board view (LT) and the OLA board views (OR).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 111 / 128
128
3.6.1 Configuration
When you click on Configuration... option, the following window is displayed:

Figure 116. Automatic Laser Shutdown window
Three parameters are displayed:
– ALS function:
• Enabled: the laser operates with the automatic protection,

• Forced ON: the laser activation is forced,
• Forced OFF: the laser is stopped.
– ALS Auto Restart:
• Enabled: if the laser is stopped, the restart is automatic after a wait time of x seconds (x is the
value displayed in Wait To Restart Time field),
• Disabled: if the laser is stopped, the restart is manual.
– Wait To Restart Time: the number of seconds to wait before a restart.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 112 / 128
128
3.6.2 Manual restart
To restart laser manualy, click on Manual restart option, the following confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 117. Manual restart confirnation box
Click on OK to confirm the manual laser restart.
3.6.3 Test Restart
To test a laser restart, click on Test Restart option, the following confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 118. Manual restart confirnation box
Click on OK to confirm the test laser restart.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 113 / 128
128
3.7 Laser On/Off management
In a hardware point of view, the Laser On/Off function is supported by:

– the WLA boards for the Line Terminal equipment Release 3.2,

– the WLA boards for the OADM Repeater equipment Release 3.2.
In the Board view click on the Board pull down menu and select the Laser management option:
Board
Navig to Subrack
Laser Management > Configuration...
Figure 119. Board menu in Release 3.2
3.7.1 Configuration
When you click on Configuration... option, the following window is displayed:
Figure 120. Laser Shutdown window in Release 3.2
Three parameters are displayed:
– Laser function:
• Enabled: the laser operates with the automatic protection,

• Forced ON: the laser activation is forced,
• Forced OFF: the laser is stopped.
N.B. The Auto Laser Shutdown rectangle in the WLA board view is not meaningful and will remain
in an inactive state regardless the triggered Laser Function.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 114 / 128
128
4 RESTRICTIONS
4.1 1686LT NE restrictions

No information is supplied from the NE in order to indicate the rack/subrack positions. This data has to
be internally created and persisted from the OS.
After the NE creation and before uploading the configuration, the operator has to assign the shelves in
their wanted relevant subracks. Only Master subrack is present at the first position of the first rack at the
creation. The default positions for Release 3.1 are as below:
– Rack #1 (the left one):

• subrack 1: Master,
• subrack 2: TWLA 1,
• subrack 3: RWLA 1.
– Rack #2 (the right one):
• subrack 1: empty,
• subrack 2: TWLA 2,
• subrack 3: RWLA 2.
The default positions for Release 3.2 are as below:
– Rack #1 (the left one):

• subrack 1: Master,
• subrack 2: WLA 1,
• subrack 3: WLA 2.
– Rack #2 (the right one):
• subrack 1: empty,
• subrack 2: WLA 3,
• subrack 3: WLA 4.
4.2 1686OR NE restrictions
On the same way, default positions are:
– subrack1: Master,
– subrack 2: WLA 1
– subrack 3: WLA 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 115 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
116 / 128
5 ALARM MAPPING
5.1 Alarms in release 3.1

This section is aimed at presenting the correspondance between the craft alarms and the 1353SH alarm
type. For each type of alarm defined at the Craft interface, the corresponding SH probable cause is given.
The equipment alarms appear on the bottom of the board view. There are two alarm lines.
The mapping list of this section concerns the 1686WM NE in release 3.1.
5.1.1 Equipment alarms
Alarm Description (Craft) Probable Cause (1353SH)
Abnormal Condition: board present in an replaceableUnitTypeMismatch

unassigned slot
AIS received on the 2Mbit/s channel 2 side 1 (4) aux2MbChannelProblem
Board not responding on IECB bus equipmentMalfunction
Card (board) absent in the slot replaceableUnitMissing
Card (board) not accessible replaceableUnitProblem
Card (board) Type in the slot not correct (5) replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Converter #1 card (board) not accessible replaceableUnitProblem
Cover removed opticalConnectorCoverOpen
Excessive Bit Error Rate #1 on side 1 receivedSpvChannelonEWside
Excessive Bit Error Rate #1 on side 2 receivedSpvChannelonWEside
Failure of the 5V Remote Inventory Power remoteInventoryFailure
Failure of the 5V Service Power powerProblem
Failure on the Card (board) present in the slot replaceableUnitProblem
Failure on the east Regeneration Section DCC auxEastRsLapDFail

channel
Failure on the IIC bus internalBusFailure
Failure on the Multiplex Section DCC channel auxEastRsLapDFail
Failure of the Network IECBus lossOfSupervChannel
Failure on the Regeneration Section DCC channel auxRsLapDFail

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Failure on the west Regeneration Section DCC auxWestRsLapDFail

channel
3AL 89062 AA AA 117 / 128
128
Hardware Failure hardwareFailure

Hardware Failure synthesis hardwareFailure

Hardware Failure OR no response on IIC bus hardwareFailure
Input Loss of Optical Signal lossOfInputSignal
Input Loss of Signal (1) lossOfInputSignal
Input Loss of Signal of channel 23 (input 8) (2) ch23InputLOS
Input Loss of Signal of channel <w1> (input 1) (6) ch<w1>InputLOS
Input Signal Over Load opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Loss of Frame alignement on SPV outgoing frame receivedSpvChannelonEWside

side 1 (East)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Loss of Frame alignement on SPV outgoing frame receivedSpvChannelonWEside

side 2 (West)
Loss of Input Optical Signal from OPA board lossOfInputSignal
3AL 89062 AA AA 118 / 128
128
Loss of Input Signal lossOfInputSignal

Loss of Input Signal 2nd stage lossOfInputSignal2ndStage

Loss of Input Signal on the 2Mbit/s channel 2 side aux2MbChannelProblem

1 (4)
Loss of Saturation signal lossOfSaturationSignal
Loss of Signal on SPV incoming frame side 1 (East) receivedSpvChannelonEWside
Loss of Signal on SPV incoming frame side 2 receivedSpvChannelonWeside

(West)
Loss of Supervision channel on transmit (TX) side lossOfTxSupervChannel
Multiplexing Section AIS received on SPV auxMSAISChannelOne

incomming frame
Multiplexing Section Ferf indication received on auxMSPERFChannelOne

SPV incomming frame
Optical loss of Supervision channel on transmit opticalLossOfTxSupervChannel

(TX) side
Out of Frequency on the 2Mbit/s channel2 side 1 aux2MbChannelProblem

(4)
Output Loss of Signal lossOfOutputSignal
Power Failure powerProblem
Software mismatch between the one transmitted versionMismatch

by the board and the one stored in the SMEC2
Switch 1 Mismatch switch1Mismatch
Tone Generator failure toneMissing
(1): only relevant when EXP board and/or OPA board is present in the Master shelf
(2): probable cause with (T)WLA boards for LB_OMDX_F type
(3): probable cause with (T)WLA boards for SB_OMDX_F type
(4): only supported by the DCC_AUX4 board
(5): USM view only for WLA board
(6): only when TWLA boards are present
N.B. Converters have no abnormal condition even if the board is present in the slot and not declared
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
in the configuration.
3AL 89062 AA AA 119 / 128
128
5.1.2 Communication alarms

Input Loss of optical Signal lossOfMultiplexSection

Input Loss of Signal (2) lossOfMultiplexSection
Input Loss of Signal of channel 23 lossOfSignal
Input Loss of Signal of channel <w1> (input 1) lossOfSignal
Input Signal Over Load degradedSignal
Loss of Input Signal lossOfMultiplexSection
Loss of Input Signal OFA lossOfMultiplexSection
Loss of Supervisory channel on Receive (RX) side lossOfSupervisoryChannel
Output Loss of optical Signal transmitFailure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(2): only relevant when neither the OPA board nor the EXP board are present in the Master shelf
3AL 89062 AA AA 120 / 128
128
5.1.3 Quality Of Service alarms

Auxiliary Pumping Laser Degradation auxiliaryPumpingLaserDegradation
Auxiliary Pumping Laser 2nd stage Degradation auxiliaryPumpingLaserDegradation
Degraded Output Signal txDegraded
Laser Current Over Bias laserBiasThresholdCrossed
Laser Temperature Out Of Range laserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Mux or Demux Temperature Out Of Range laserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Optical Signal Power Out Of Range opticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
Pumping laser 1st stage Degradation firstStagePumpingLaserDegradation
Pumping laser 2nd stage Degradation secondStagePumpingLaserDegradation
Pumping laser Degraded pumpingLaserDegradation
Temperature Out Of Range laserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
5.1.4 Environmental alarms
AND/OR power fail equipmentMalFunction
OR Battery failure batteryFailure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 121 / 128
128
5.2 Alarms in release 3.2
This section is aimed at presenting the correspondance between the craft alarms and the 1353SH alarm
type. For each type of alarm defined at the Craft interface, the corresponding SH probable cause is given.

The equipment alarms appear on the bottom of the board view. There are two alarm lines.
The mapping list of this section concerns the 1686WM NE in release 3.2.
Abnormal Condition: board present in an replaceableUnitTypeMismatch

unassigned slot
AIS received on the 2Mbit/s channel 2 side 1 (4) aux2MbChannelProblem
Board not responding on IECB bus equipmentMalfunction
Card (board) absent in the slot replaceableUnitMissing
Card (board) not accessible replaceableUnitProblem
Card (board) Type in the slot not correct (5) replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Excessive Bit Error Rate #1 on side 1 receivedSpvChannelonEWside
Excessive Bit Error Rate #1 on side 2 receivedSpvChannelonWEside
Failure on the Card (board) present in the slot replaceableUnitProblem
Failure on the east Regeneration Section DCC auxEastRsLapDFail

channel
Failure on the Multiplex Section DCC channel auxEastRsLapDFail
Failure of the Network IECBus internalCommunicationProblem
Failure on the Regeneration Section DCC channel auxRsLapDFail
Failure on the west Regeneration Section DCC auxWestRsLapDFail

channel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Hardware Failure hardwareFailure
Hardware Failure synthesis hardwareFailure
3AL 89062 AA AA 122 / 128
128
Hardware Failure OR no response on IIC bus hardwareFailure

Input Loss of Optical Signal lossOfInputSignal

Input Loss of Signal (1) lossOfInputSignal
Input Signal Over Load opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Loss of Frame alignement on SPV outgoing frame receivedSpvChannelonEWside

side 1 (East)
Loss of Frame alignement on SPV outgoing frame receivedSpvChannelonWEside

side 2 (West)
Loss of Input Optical Signal from OPA board lossOfInputSignal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Loss of Input Signal 2nd stage lossOfInputSignal2ndStage
3AL 89062 AA AA 123 / 128
128
Loss of Input Signal on the 2Mbit/s channel 2 side aux2MbChannelProblem

1 (4)

Loss of Saturation signal lossOfSaturationSignal
Loss of Signal on SPV incoming frame side 1 (East) receivedSpvChannelonEWside
Loss of Signal on SPV incoming frame side 2 receivedSpvChannelonWeside

(West)
Loss of Supervision channel on transmit (TX) side lossOfTxSupervChannel
Multiplexing Section AIS received on SPV auxMSAISChannelOne

incomming frame
Multiplexing Section Ferf indication received on auxMSFERFChannelOne

SPV incomming frame
Optical loss of Supervision channel on transmit opticalLossOfTxSupervChannel

(TX) side (7)
Out of Frequency on the 2Mbit/s channel2 side 1 aux2MbChannelProblem

(4)
Output Loss of Signal lossOfOutputSignal
Power Failure powerProblem
Software mismatch between the one transmitted versionMismatch

by the board and the one stored in the SMEC2
Tone Generator failure toneMissing
(1): only relevant when EXP board and/or OPA board is present in the Master shelf
(2): probable cause with TWLA boards for the LB_OMDX_F or LB_OMX type
(3): probable cause with TWLA boards for the SB_OMDX_F or SB_OMX type
(4): only supported by the DCC_AUX4 board
(5): USM view only for WLA board
(6): only when TWLA boards are present
(7): not supported by WB_OXA, WB_OXA_P, WB_OXA2 and WB_OXA2_P board types
N.B. Converters have no abnormal condition even if the board is present in the slot and not declared
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 124 / 128
128

Alternate Modulated Signal aMS
High Bit Error Rate excessiveBER
Input Loss of optical Signal lossOfMultiplexSection
Input Loss of Signal (2) lossOfMultiplexSection
Input Signal Over Load degradedWavelength
Input Signal Over Load degradedSignal
Loss of Frame alignement lossOfFrame

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Loss of Input Signal lossOfMultiplexSection
3AL 89062 AA AA 125 / 128
128
Loss of Input Signal lossOfWavelenght

Loss of Input Signal OFA lossOfMultiplexSection


(1)
Low Bit Error Rate lowBer
Output Loss of optical Signal transmitFailure
(1): not supported by WB_OBA, WB_OXA_P and WB_OXA2_P board types

(2): only relevant when neither the OPA board nor the EXP board are present in the Master shelf
5.2.3 Quality Of Service alarms
Auxiliary Pumping Laser Degradation auxiliaryPumpingLaserDegradation
Auxiliary Pumping Laser 2nd stage Degradation auxiliaryPumpingLaserDegradation
Degraded Output Signal txDegraded
Laser Current Over Bias laserBiasThresholdCrossed
Laser Temperature Out Of Range laserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Mux or Demux Temperature Out Of Range laserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Optical Signal Power Out Of Range opticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
Pumping laser 1st stage Degradation firstStagePumpingLaserDegradation
Pumping laser 2nd stage Degradation secondStagePumpingLaserDegradation
Pumping laser Degraded pumpingLaserDegradation
Temperature Out Of Range laserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
5.2.4 Environmental alarms
AND/OR power Fail equipmentMalFunction

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 126 / 128
128
6 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Question: The OS refused to upload the MIB of a NE. How can I retrieve the refusal grounds?
Answer: In Diagnosis menu, click on View option and then on Upload Failure. You can displayed a
upload failure diagnosis file (xxx.ufd). This file gives a diagnosis in plain english of the 1st
encountered error.
Question:What are the difference between the Simple Amplifier configuration and the MUX–DEMUX
configuration?
Answer: With the Simple Amplifier configuration, there are only a tributary sink port and a tributary
source port and the EXP board. There is no OMDX board.
With the MUX–DEMUX configuration, at least one OMDX board is mandatory (8 channels in 3.1
release).
Question: What are the differences with respect to the management between a 1686WM LT and a
1686WM OR in 3.1 release?
Answer:
With 1686LT NE: the subracks are specialized either for the TWLA or for the RWLA.
With 1686OR NE: any type of TWLA or RWLA is allowed in the same subrack.
Question: What are the differences with respect to the management of a 1686WM LT between the 3.1
and the 3.2 release?
Answer:
With 1686LT R3.1 NE: the subracks are specialized either for the TWLA or for the RWLA.
With 1686LT R3.2 NE: any type of TWLA or RWLA is allowed in the same subrack.
Question: How to change the Optical Switch state?
Answer: Select the OADM board in the subrack view with the chosen direction and then the Optical
switch option (see paragraph 3.5.)
Question: After setting TWLA/RWLA, OGPI ports do not appear anymore in the OMDX in the OADM board
view?
Answer: The OGPI ports are supported by the RWLA and TWLA, to see them display the RWLA or
TWLA subrack views.
Question: Some alarms do not raise on OGPI sink port. What is wrong?
Answer: First, make sure that the target ports are equipped, if the NE is a Line Terminal, alarm
handling is automatically disabled on unequipped ports.
Then, you shall check that the alarms are notified to the CT. If the CT does not receive the alarms,
refer to the NE document for further troubleshooting information.
Question: Am I always notified of the problem that may affect the Transmission object which is currently
displayed?
Answer: Yes, either by the Transmission alarm or by an URU synthesis on the TP. There is one minor
restriction: if a multiplexing board (including OADM) issues on equipment alarm, no transmission
alarm is generated for the OGPI objects carried by that board. Note the OTS part(s) is/are affected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
thanks to the usual URU mechanism.
3AL 89062 AA AA 127 / 128
128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
END OF DOCUMENT
128
3AL 89062 AA AA
128 / 128
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1 Purpose of the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Document description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1 Inter–office line system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.1 Inter–office line system without Line Repeater NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.2 Inter–office line system with Line Repeater NE(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.3 Inter–office line system with Line Terminals structured as Add–Drop Multiplexer(s) . . . 8
2.2 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3 GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1 Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.2 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2 Line Repeaters NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.2.2 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4 WDM TERRESTRIAL MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

4.1 Subrack Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1.1 Removing a subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1.2 Setting a subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2 Optical TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
01 040130 M. Uszynski B.MOGLIA ITAVE

L.Foresta L.Picot
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
Release 7.0 on
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 36
36
4.2.1 Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.2 Channel connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3 WDM Aggregate signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

5 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

5.1 Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.1 Equipment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.2 External points configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.3 ALS Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.4 Protection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.5 Synchronization management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.6 Performance monitoring management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.2 Line Repeaters NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.2.1 External input points configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.2.2 ALS Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6 ALARM MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.1 Equipment alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.2 Communication alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.3 Quality Of Service alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.4 Environmental alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

7.1 1686 WM Line Terminal NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
7.1.1 ALS Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 36
36
Figure 1. Inter–office line system without Line Repeater NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Figure 2. Inter–office line system with Line Repeater NE(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3. Inter–office line system with Line Terminals structured as Add–Drop Multiplexer(s) . . . . 8
Figure 4. Line Terminal NE functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Figure 5. Line Repeater NE functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 6. Line Terminal NE symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 7. Line Terminal rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 8. Line Terminal subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 9. Line Terminal Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 10. Line Terminal Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 11. Line Terminal Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 13. Line Repeater Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 14. Line Repeater Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 15. Line Repeater Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 16. Removing a subrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 17. The list of different subracks relative to an NE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 18. Optical TP Configuration option selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 19. Optical TP Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 20. Optical TP Channel Connection option selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 21. Channel Connection Config window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 36
36
HISTORY
as internal document NMU/C/98/0079


Paragraph
1.2 L. Picot 98–08–19 All Conversion CDT to ALCATEL format.
1 L. Picot 98–10–01 All 1353SH3.1.0 scope – Validated.
2.1 L. Picot 98–10–13 All 1353SH3.1.1 scope.
2 L. Picot 98–10–30 All 1353SH3.1.1 scope – Validated.
Applicable documents (for Alcatel internal use only)
[1] Alcatel/NMU Application Development Process

NMU/GT/96/022, Ed. 1
[2] Alcatel/NMU 1353SH3.0, Software Specific Development Process

NMU/GT/96/020, Ed. 1.2
[3] Alcatel/NMU, 1353SH3.x Quality Assurance Plan

NMU/GT/96/024, Ed. 02
[4] Alcatel/NMU, NMU Documentation Management Procedure

8AY 02000 0000 ASZZA, Ed. 04
[5] Network Release 3.1 Feature List

3AL 37004 0001 MRZZA, Ed. 1.5
[6] Alcatel/NMU, 1353 SH R3.1 Technical Requirements Specification,

NMU/L/VE/98/158, Ed. 1.1
[7] Alcatel/NMU, 1353SH R3.1 System Architecture Document: Application,

3AL 70887 0001 EBZZA, Ed. 02
[8] Alcatel/NMU, 1353SH R3.1 System Architecture Document: Defence,

3AL 70887 0002 EBZZA, Ed. 01
[9] Alcatel/NMU, 1353SH R3.1 User Interface Specification,

NMU/C/98/0161, Ed. 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 4 / 36
36
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of the document

This document describes the specific functionalities provided by the 1353SH to manage the line system
1686WM Wavelength Division Multiplexer (WDM), commonly refered to as the 1686WM or WDM Terres-
trial Network Element.
The 1353SH3.1.1 manages all 2.1 releases.
1.2 Target audience
This document is intended for all the users of the SDH Manager system.
– QB3* NE Management Manual (See Section 2.3 of this handbook).
1.3 Document description
– Chapter 2: Overview.
• Inter–office line system configurations

• 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d
• 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d
– Chapter 3: Graphical Representation.
• Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d

• Line Repeater NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d
– Chapter 4: WDM Terrestrial Management.
• Subrack Management
• Optical TP Configuration
• WDM Aggregate Signals
– Chapter 5: Restrictions.
• Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d Restrictions

• Line Repeater NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d Restrictions
– Chapter 6: Alarm Mapping.
• Equipment Alarms
• Communications Alarms
• Quality Of Service Alarms
• Environmental Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Chapter 7: Frequently asked questions.
• 1686WM Line Terminal NE
3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
6 / 36
2 OVERVIEW
The line system 1686WM Wavelength Division Multiplexer (also called 1686WM) Network Element (NE)
is associated to point–to–point transmission systems.
It provides a high transmission capacity on a single fiber, by multiplexing up to sixteen STM–16 optical
channels, each one is associated to a distinct wavelength.
The STM–16 signals may come from line systems NEs (such as 1664SL) or from Add–Drop Multiplexer
NEs (such as 16xx SM).
Two types of 1686WM Network Element are defined:
– the 1686WM Line Terminal (LT),

– the 1686WM Line Repeater (LR).
2.1 Inter–office line system configurations
3 configurations of inter–office line systems are possible:
– without Line Repeater NEs,

– with Line Repeater NE(s),
– with Line Terminals structured as Add–Drop Multiplexer(s).
2.1.1 Inter–office line system without Line Repeater NEs
1664 SL
/
16xx SM
STM–16
1686 WM 1686 WM
Figure 1. Inter–office line system without Line Repeater NEs

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 36
36
2.1.2 Inter–office line system with Line Repeater NE(s)

1664 SL

/
16xx SM
STM–16
1686 WM 1686 WM 1686 WM

Line Repeater
Figure 2. Inter–office line system with Line Repeater NE(s)
The number of Line repeater NEs is limited to 7.
2.1.3 Inter–office line system with Line Terminals structured as Add–Drop Multiplexer(s)
1664 SL
/
16xx SM
STM–16
ADM structure
1686 WM 1686 WM 1686 WM 1686 WM
Line Terminal Line Terminal Line Terminal Line Terminal
Figure 3. Inter–office line system with Line Terminals structured as Add–Drop Multiplexer(s)
The Add–Drop Multiplexer is realized by putting back to back two Line Terminals. The previous configura-
tion applies between each couple of line terminals. The number of Add–Drop Multiplexers is unlimited.
Drop and insert capabilities of fixed channels are provided only.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 8 / 36
36
2.2 1686WM Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d
2.2.1 General
The Line Terminal NE is mainly composed of (see Figure 4. ):
– two multiplexers: each multiplexer can process up to 8 STM–16 signals. The use of the two
multiplexers generates a 40 Gbit/s aggregate signal (composed of 16 STM–16 tributary signals).
– two demultiplexers: each demultiplexer can process up to 8 STM–16 signals. The use of the two
demultiplexers generates 16 STM–16 tributary signals (from a 40 Gbit/s aggregate signal).
ÄÄ
STM–16 Optical line
IN 1
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
MULTIPLEXER
(20 Gbit/s)
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
IN 8
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
OPTICAL INTERFACE
OUT 1
(20 Gbit/s)
OUT 8
DEMULTIPLEXER
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
(40 Gbit/s)
IN 9
(20 Gbit/s)
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
IN 16
MULTIPLEXER
ÄÄ
ÄÄ (40 Gbit/s)
OUT 9
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
OUT 16
DEMULTIPLEXER
(20 Gbit/s)
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
Figure 4. Line Terminal NE functional block diagram
2.2.2 Description
The Line Terminal NE is composed of two (Release 2.1a, R2.1b, R2.1c) or three (R2.1d) racks. One of
this rack must at least be equipped with the Master subrack.
The master subrack can take place at any position.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 36
36
According to the needs, several optional subracks can be used:
– the Expansion subrack,

– the WLA1 (WaveLength Adapter) subrack,

– the WLA2 (WaveLength Adapter) subrack,

– the RWLA1 (Reception WaveLength Adapter) subrack (only for R2.1d),
– the RWLA2 (Reception WaveLength Adapter) subrack (only for R2.1d).
In the Rack view (see chapter Graphical Representation / Line Terminal NE) involving a 1686WM R2.1d,
nine subrack housings are displayed.
The Master subrack and the five optional subracks can take place anywhere in the nine subrack housings.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 10 / 36
36
2.3 1686WM Line Repeater NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d
2.3.1 General
The Line Repeater NE is mainly composed of two in line amplifiers which amplify the 40 Gbit/s aggregates
(see Figure 5. ).
IN LINE AMPLIFIER
WDM in WDM out
IN LINE AMPLIFIER WDM in

WDM out
Figure 5. Line Repeater NE functional block diagram
2.3.2 Description

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
12 / 36
3 GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION
3.1 Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d

A Line Terminal NE is represented on the Network Topology as below.
86 LT
WMT
1686LT

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 36
36
3.1.2 Views
• Rack view

Figure 7. Line Terminal rack view
N.B. Six types of shelf are available for the nine subracks (see Line Terminal Restrictions chapter).
At least, three subracks will remain empty. Each type of shelf can be assigned to any of the nine
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
subracks.
3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Subrack view

Figure 8. Line Terminal subrack view
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
15 / 36

Port icon
Figure 9. Line Terminal Transmission view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 16 / 36
36
• Reception view
Port icon
Figure 10. Line Terminal Reception view
on the port icon.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 17 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
Port view

Figure 11. Line Terminal Port view
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
18 / 36
3.2 Line Repeaters NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d

A Line Repeater NE is represented on the Network Toppology as below.
86 LR
WMT
1686LR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 19 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
•
01
3.2.2 Views
Subrack view

Figure 13. Line Repeater Subrack view
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
20 / 36
Figure 14. Line Repeater Transmission view
N.B. The transmission view allows the operator to access the port view, used in transmis-
sion, by clicking on the port icon.
N.B. Alarms from the board in slot 2 (or slot 2 plus slot 3) concern the East to West direc-
tion.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Alarms from the board in slot 4 (or slot 4 plus slot 6) concern the West to East direc-
tion.
3AL 89062 AA AA 21 / 36
36
WDM in the network.
• Port view

Figure 15. Line Repeater Port view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 22 / 36
36
4 WDM TERRESTRIAL MANAGEMENT
4.1 Subrack Management

This feature is similar to the change board type feature but concerns subracks in an equipment rack view.
It allows to configure subracks according to a list of allowed subracks.
The subracks can be changed or removed using the menu options of the equipment rack view.
The remove and set subrack is only allowed if the NE management states are the followings:
– Assignment: Any state – Supervision: Supervised/ Declared – Local access: Any
– Operational: Any – Alignment: Aligned/ misaligned/ in configuration
4.1.1 Removing a subrack
Click on the subrack you wish to remove. The outline of the housing becomes highlighted. This
indicates that the subrack is selected and that operations can be done on the housing.
N.B. If the selected housing cannot be changed the menu option will be greyed.
In the Equipment view, select the Remove option from the Subrack pull down menu.
Subrack
Set ... Ctrl+A

Remove Ctrl+M
Info ...
Figure 16. Removing a subrack.
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, the operator can confirm or cancel the ”Remove subrack”
operation.
4.1.2 Setting a subrack
Click on the empty housing in which you want to add a subrack. The outline becomes highlighted to
show that you can do operations on it.
Select the Set ... option from the Subrack pull down menu (see Figure 16. ).
N.B. A new subrack may be created in either an empty housing or it may replace an
existing one.
The following dialogue box containing a list of the different types of subracks is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 23 / 36
36
Figure 17. The list of different subracks relative to an NE.
N.B. The list of subracks displayed during a ”Change subrack” operation is restricted to
those which the equipment may accept in the selected housing. Therefore the list will
vary depending on which housing has been selected.
Choose the subrack type required, by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The name of the
subrack is highlighted. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice.
The subrack representation appears on the NE view in the housing when the subrack change is
effective.
In the Set subrack dialogue box, the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the
dialogue box. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 36
36
4.2 Optical TP Configuration
4.2.1 Visualization
This feature, only available for the Terminal equipments, allows the operator to have the channel number
and the channel frequency (in THz) of any of the optical source or sink ports.
Each optical input tributary is associated to a channel number as given below:
– Long Band (for Master MUX)
(193,7 THz).
– Short Band (for Expansion MUX)
(195,7 THz).
N.B. The number of input tributaries depends on the equipment configuration.

The master subrack launches the instanciation of 8 OptTribSinkStm16 ports.
The expansion subrack launches the instanciation of 8 other OptTribSinkStm16 ports (16 in to-
tal).
The channel number is equal to the two last digits of the frequency.
Each optical tributary output is associated to a channel number as given below:
– Long Band (for Master DEMUX):
(193,7 THz).
– Short Band (for Expansion DEMUX):
(195,7 THz).
N.B. The number of output tributaries depends on the equipment configuration.

The master subrack launches the instanciation of 8 OptTribSourceStm16 ports.
The expansion subrack launches the instanciation of 8 other OptTribSourceStm16 ports (16 in
total).
The channel number is equal to the two last digits of the frequency.
To display these characteristics (see Figure 18. ):

– Select the Optical TP Configuration option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 25 / 36
36
Port

Browse Cross–Connection(s)... Ctrl+B
Show linked port(s)
Set Port In service
Set Port Out service
Figure 18. Optical TP Configuration option selection
Figure 19. Optical TP Configuration window
4.2.2 Channel connection
This feature is only available for the release 2.1d.
In fact, each RWLA board is not assigned to a specific channel (as a WLA board). Then the operator has
to decide which is the corresponding channel for each RWLA board. To do this (Figure 20. ):
– In an RWLA subrack view, select a WLA board.
– Click on the Equipment menu.
– Select the Board option, then the Channel Connection option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 26 / 36
36
Equipment
Board > Set Board... Ctrl+S

Slots Labels On/OFF
Remove Board Ctrl+R

Channel Connection... Ctrl+C
Figure 20. Optical TP Channel Connection option selection
Figure 21. Channel Connection Config window
– Click on a channel number in the Channels Allowed list.
– Click on the white right arrow.
– Click on the OK button.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 27 / 36
36
4.3 WDM Aggregate signals
The WDM aggregate output signal is associated to a wdmTTPSource object. Following the configuration,
it is constituted by 8 or 16 wavelength optical signals.

In the reverse direction, the WDM aggregate input signal is associated to a wdmTTPSink object. Following
the configuration, it is constituted by 8 or 16 wavelength optical signals.
These Aggregate signals are available for both Terminal and Repeater equipments.
The Port view corresponding to the Aggregate signal can be accessed through:
– the Transmission and Reception views for the Line Terminal equipments,
– the unique Transmission/Reception view for the Line Repeater equipments.
Once the Transmission/Reception view is displayed, double–click on the Aggregate port icon to display
the port view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 36
36
5 RESTRICTIONS
5.1 Line Terminal NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d Restrictions

5.1.1 Equipment configuration
No information is supplied from the NE in order to indicate the racks/subracks positions. This data has to
be internally created and persisted from the OS.
After the NE creation and before uploading the configuration, the operator has to assign the shelves in
their wanted relevant subracks. Only Master subrack is present at the first position of the first rack. Else
the default positions are as below:
– Main rack, subrack #1 : Master shelf.

– Main rack, subrack #2 : Expansion shelf.
– Main rack, subrack #3 : first Slave Wavelength adapter shelf.
– First Expansion rack, subrack #1 : second Slave Wavelength adapter shelf.
– First Expansion rack, subrack #2 : first Reception Slave Wavelength adapter shelf.
– First Expansion rack, subrack #3 : second Reception Slave Wavelength adapter shelf.
5.1.2 External points configuration
The output House Keeping can be set ON/OFF. Open state corresponds to OFF.
5.1.3 ALS Management
Two types of ALS management are available:
– Individual ALS function: each WLA board of the WLA subracks supports its own ALS function. A loss
of signal at the input of a WLA board induces a cut of signal at the board output.
– Global ALS function: the Booster board of the Master subrack supports the ALS function. A loss of
signal at the input of a Booster board induces a cut of signal at the board output.
From the OS point of view, the ALS function is always implemented on these boards.
If the ALS function is not implemented on one of these boards (this operation is possible using a Craft Ter-
minal), the Alignment State, following an upload operation, will be misaligned. So a download operation
has then to be performed to align the OS and NE MIBs.
5.1.4 Protection management
EPS and APS are not applicable.
5.1.5 Synchronization management
Not applicable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.1.6 Performance monitoring management
Not applicable.
3AL 89062 AA AA 29 / 36
36
5.2 Line Repeaters NE Release 2.1 / 2.1d Restrictions
5.2.1 External input points configuration

The polarity can not be modified and is set to ”Active high”.
ALS management is not required.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 30 / 36
36
6 ALARM MAPPING
This section is aimed at presenting the mapping of the NECTAS and the 1353SH3.1 alarm type. For each
type of alarm defined at the NECTAS interface, the corresponding SH probable cause is given.
The alarms appear on the bottom of the board view. There are two alarm lines.
The first alarm line concerns the transmission alarms (i.e. alarms implied from the input/output ends of the
NE. These alarms are generaly displayed at the port level (from the transmission/reception view) too.
The second alarm line is for the internal board alarms.
For the repeaters the transmission alarms are displayed only at the port level because the related board
is implicited.
The mapping list of this section concerns the 1686WM NE.
6.1 Equipment alarms
Alarm Description (NECTAS) Probable Cause (1353SH)
Abnormal Condition AbnormalConditions
Card fail replaceableUnitProblem
Card mismatch ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Card missing ReplaceableUnitMissing
Card not accessible ReplaceableUnitProblem
Card not responding equipmentMalfunction
CT connected craftTerminalConnected
Demux Temperature Out Of Range temperatureOutOfRange
Hardware Failure HardwareFailure
Hardware Failure OR no response on IIC bus HardwareFailure
Laser Temperature or Mux Temperature Out Of temperatureOutOfRange

Range
Pumping Laser Degradation pumpingLaserDegradation
Pumping Laser Fist Stage Degradation firstStagePumpingLaserDegradation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Pumping Laser Second Stage Degradation secondStagePumpingLaserDegradation
3AL 89062 AA AA 31 / 36
36
Alarm Description (NECTAS) Probable Cause (1353SH)
Pumping Laser Third Stage Degradation AuxiliaryPumpingLaserDegradation

Software mismatch versionMismatch

N.B. Converters have no abnormal conditions even if the board is present in the slot and not declared
6.2 Communication alarms
Alarm Description (Nectas) Probable Cause (1353SH)
Degraded Output DegradedSignal
EAST_RS_LAPD_FAIL auxEastRsLapdFail
Failure of the Network IECB LossOfSupervChannel
LOS_1 or LOF_1 or EXBER1_1 or EXBER2_1 (*) receivedSpvChannelProblem
LOS_2M2_1 or AIS_2M2_1 or OOF_2M2_1 (*) aux2MbChannelProblem
Loss of Input Signal LossOfInputSignal
Loss of Input Signal Inter Stage LossOfInputSignalInterStage
Loss of Input Signal of Channel 37..23 LossOfInputSignalChannel<37..23>
Loss of Input Signal of Channel 57..43 LossOfInputSignalChannel<57..43>
Loss of Input Optical Signal LossOfInputSignal
Loss of Input Optical Signal from OPA LossOfInputSignal
Loss of Output Signal LossOfOutputSignal
Loss of Supervision Channel on Rx Side LossOfRxSupervChannel
Loss of Supervision Channel on Tx Side LossOfTxSupervChannel
Loss of Saturation Signal lossOfSaturationSignal
MS_AIS_1 auxMsAisOne
MS_FERF_1 auxMsFerfOne
MS_LAPD_FAIL auxMsLapdFail
Optical Loss of Supervision Channel on Tx Side opticalLossOfTxSupervChannel
RS_LAPD_FAIL auxRsLapdFail
MS_AIS_1 auxMsAisOne
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tone Generator Failure ToneMissing
WEST_RS_LAPD_FAIL auxWestRsLapdFail
3AL 89062 AA AA 32 / 36
36
N.B. (*) : ”or” means logical OR
6.3 Quality Of Service alarms

Degraded Output Signal OpticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
Degraded Output Signal (WLA board) DegradedSignal
Input Signal Over Load OpticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Laser Current Over Bias LaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Laser Temperature Out Of Range LaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Optical Signal Power Out Of Range OpticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
Output Signal Power Out Of Range OpticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
Temperature Out Of Range (MUX, DEMUX) TemperatureOutOfRange
Temperature Out Of Range (WLA, EXP) LaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
6.4 Environmental alarms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 33 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
34 / 36
7 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
7.1 1686 WM Line Terminal NE

Question: On an upload operation, the Alignment state is misaligned. Why ?
Answer: From the OS point of view, the ALS function is always implemented on these boards. So perform
a download operation to align the OS and NE MIBs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 35 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
END OF DOCUMENT
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
36 / 36
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.2 Edition scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.3 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2 CONCEPTS AND GENERALITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1 Submarine Transmission System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2 Power Feeding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.1 PFE Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3 Power Feeding Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.3.1 Power Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.3.2 Power Monitoring and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.3.3 Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4 Equipment Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.5 PFE View Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.6 Analog Measurements Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3 ASN PFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1 ASN PFE Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1.1 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1.2 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2 ASN PFE Graphical Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.1 R3 Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.2 R3 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.3 R4 Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
Release 7.0 on
ED 01 SC.3.3: WDM SUBMARINE PFE
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 100
100
3.2.4 R4 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.5 Power Feeding View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3 ASN PFE Power Feeding Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.3.1 Features Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.3.2 Threshold Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.3.3 Reference Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.3.4 Cable Head Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3.5 PFE Routing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3.6 NavigateToSubrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4 ASN PFE R3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.1 Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.2 Environmental Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.4.3 Quality of Service Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.5 ASN PFE R4 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.5.1 Equipment Domain Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.5.2 PFE Domain Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.6 ASN PFE Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.6.1 Measurement Points Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.6.2 Measurement Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.6.3 Run Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.6.4 Display Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4 SAFT PFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.1 SAFT PFE Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.1.1 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.2 SAFT PFE Graphical Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2.1 Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2.2 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3 SAFT PFE Power Feeding Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.3.3 Routing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.4 SAFT PFE Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.4.3 Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.5 SAFT PFE Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5 NEC PFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.1 NEC PFE Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.1.1 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2 NEC PFE Graphical Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.2.1 Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.2.2 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

5.3 NEC PFE Power Feeding Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 100
100
5.3.3 Routing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.4 NEC PFE Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74


5.5 NEC PFE Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6 FUJITSU PFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.1 Fujitsu PFE Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.1.1 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.2 Fujitsu PFE Graphical Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.2.1 Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.2.2 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.3 Fujitsu PFE Power Feeding Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.3.3 Routing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.4 Fujitsu PFE Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.5 Fujitsu PFE Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 100
100
FIGURES

Figure 1. Example of Submarine Transmission System (STS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Figure 2. Views pull down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 3. ASN PFE R3 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 4. ASN PFE R4 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 5. ASN PFE R3 Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 6. ASN PFE R3 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 7. ASN PFE R4 Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 8. ASN PFE R4 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 9. ASN PFE Power Feeding View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 10. ASN Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 11. ASN PFE Voltage Alarms Threshold configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 12. ASN PFE Reference values window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 13. ASN PFE Cable Head Status window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 14. ASN PFE Routing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 15. Measurement Polling selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 16. ASN PFE Measure Polling window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 17. Show NE Measurement Data selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 18. Analog Measures selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 19. SAFT PFE racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 20. SAFT PFE Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 21. SAFT PFE Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 22. SAFT PFE Power Feeding View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 23. SAFT Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 24. SAFT PFE Reference values window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 25. SAFT Routing Status window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 27. SAFT PFE Measure Polling window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 30. NEC PFE Rack Layout : Low Voltage Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 31. NEC PFE Rack Layout : High Voltage Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 32. NEC PFE Equipment View (Low Voltage Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 33. NEC PFE Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 34. NEC PFE Power Feeding View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 35. NEC Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 36. NEC PFE Reference values window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 37. NEC Routing Status window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 39. NEC PFE Measure Polling window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 42. Fujitsu PFE: Example of Mechanical Configuration (Type L+ : configuration of Shima) 86
Figure 43. Fujitsu PFE: Rack Layout Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 44. Fujitsu PFE Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 45. Fujitsu PFE Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 46. Fujitsu PFE Power Feeding View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 47. Fujitsu Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. Fujitsu PFE Reference values window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Figure 49. Fujitsu PFE Routing Status window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3AL 89062 AA AA 4 / 100
100
Figure 51. Fujitsu PFE Measure Polling window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
TABLES
Table 1. NE Types and Current Releases for PFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Table 2. ASN PFE – Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 3. ASN Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 4. SAFT PFE – Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 5. SAFT Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 6. NEC PFE – Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 7. NEC Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 8. Fujitsu PFE – Pfe menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 9. Fujitsu Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 100
100
HISTORY
as internal document 3DW 10145 AAAA PCGNA


Paragraph
1.1 J.Berthomieu 00–01–20 All Creation.
1.2 J.Berthomieu 00–05–03 All Update after re–reading remarks
1 J.Berthomieu 00–07–05 All Update after re–reading remarks
2.1 J.Berthomieu 01–01–04 All Update for ASNPFE R4
2 J.Berthomieu 01–10–11 All Update after re–reading remarks

3CK 00051 0002 ASZZA, Ed2



NMU/GT/96/022, Ed1

8AY 02000 0000 ASZZA, Ed4


3BP 22100 0008 DSZZA, Ed1

See NMU Web Server
[9] TSD Vimercate, 1353 SH R5 Technical Requirements Specification,

[10] TSD Marcoussis, 1353 SH R5 User Interface Specification QB3*,

3AL 71310 0001 PBZZA, Ed1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
[11] SND, 1353SH R3.1 NEC PFE R1.0 Mapping Specification,

3DW 10052 AAAA DSGNA, Ed.1.1
3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 100
100
[12] TSD, 1353SH R3.1 PFE Mngt IM External Specification,
3DW 00508 0005 DTGNA, Ed.4
[13] SND, 1353SH R3.1 FUJITSU PFE R1.0 Mapping Specification,

3DW 10077 AAAA DSGNA, Ed1

[14] SND, 1353SH R5 ASN PFE R4.0 Mapping Specification,

3DW 10190 AAAA DSGNA, Ed1
Reference documents (for Alcatel internal use only)

3BP 22100 0066 OMZZA, Ed1

3BP 22100 0067 OMZZA, Ed1
[17] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH5 Generic NE Management manual,

3AL 71389 0015 OMZZA, Ed1
[18] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH5 Performance Management manual,

3AL 71389 0016 OMZZA, Ed1
[19] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH5 Software Management manual,

3AL 71389 0017 OMZZA, Ed1
[20] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH5 Synchronization Management manual,

3AL 71389 0018 OMZZA, Ed1
[21] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH5 Transmission Management manual,

3AL 71389 0019 OMZZA, Ed1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.3: WDM SUBMARINE PFE
100
3AL 89062 AA AA
8 / 100
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document describes all the functionalities provided by the 1353SH to manage the Wavelength Divi-
sion Multiplexer (WDM) Submarine NEs.
The following equipment are documented:
– ASN PFE (Alcatel Submarine Networks)

– SAFT PFE
– NEC PFE
– Fujitsu PFE
1.1.2 Edition scope
None
This manual is intended for all the operators of the 1353NM in charge of managing WDM Submarine NEs.
– QB3* NE Management manual (See Section 2.3 of this handbook).
– QB3* Transmission Management manual (See Section 2.4 of this handbook).
– QB3* Synchronization Management manual (See Section 2.5 of this handbook).
– QB3* Performance Management manual (See Section 2.6 of this handbook).
– QB3* Software Management manual (See Section 2.7 of this handbook).
– Chapter 2: Concepts and Generalities
• Submarine Transmission System

• Power Feeding Equipment
• Power Feeding Management
• Equipment Management
• PFE View Access
• Analog Measurement Principles
– Chapter 3: ASN PFE
• ASN PFE Physical Description

• ASN PFE Graphical Views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• ASN PFE Power Feeding Features

• ASN PFE R3 Alarms
• ASN PFE R4 Alarms
3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 100
100
• ASN PFE Measurement
– Chapter 4: SAFT PFE

• SAFT PFE Physical Description

• SAFT PFE Graphical Views
• SAFT PFE Power Feeding Features
• SAFT PFE Alarms
• SAFT PFE Measurement
– Chapter 5: NEC PFE
• NEC PFE Physical Description

• NEC PFE Graphical Views
• NEC PFE Power Feeding Features
• NEC PFE Alarms
• NEC PFE Measurement
– Chapter 6: Fujitsu PFE
• Fujitsu PFE Physical Description

• Fujitsu PFE Graphical Views
• Fujitsu PFE Power Feeding Features
• Fujitsu PFE Alarms
• Fujitsu PFE Measurement
1.3 Terminology
1.3.1 Definitions
None
1.3.2 Abbreviations
Refer to the Alcatel/NMU, NMU Technical Glossary [8] for general abbreviations.
Refer to the Alcatel/NMU, EMLCore 98 Introduction manual [15] for dedicated abbreviations.
The following list enumerates specific abbreviations.
BU Branching Unit
CAD Current Alarm Detector
CMISE Common Management Information Service Element
CT Craft Terminal
CCC Control and Converter Cubicle
CTC Cable Termination Cubicle

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CTB Cable Termination Box
DLC Dummy Load Cubicle
3AL 89062 AA AA 10 / 100
100
EML Element Management Level
GIS Generator Insertion Switch

GUI Graphical User Interface

IM Information Model
LT Load Transfer
MIB Managed Instance Base
MS Management System (CT/OS)
MNE Mediation Network Element
MPC Measurement and Protection Channel
NE Network Element
NML Network Management Layer
OS Operation System
PCC Power Converter Cubicle
PCS Powering Control Sequence
PM Power Monitoring
PR Power Regulator
PSU Power Supply Unit
PSW Path Switch
PU Power Unit
RC Remote Control
RX Reception
SBS Stimulated Brouillouin Scattering
SLTE Submarine Line Terminal Equipment
SME Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment
SPC SLTE Processor Card
STM–16 Synchronous Transport Module 16

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
STS Submarine Transmission System
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 100
100
SW Switch
TBC To Be Confirmed

TMN Telecommunication Management Network

TMP Transport Monitoring Processor
TL Test Load
TX Transmission
VAD Voltage Alarm Detector

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 12 / 100
100
2 CONCEPTS AND GENERALITIES
2.1 SUBMARINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

The WDM Submarine Network Elements (NEs) are used in the Submarine Transmission System (STS).
they adapt terrestrial signals for transmission over submerged cables.
The STS provides a high transmission capacity through optical fibres by multiplexing several STM64 opti-
cal channels.
A Submarine Transmission System is composed of the following elements (see Figure 1. ):
– Several Landing Stations, one for each terrestrial–submarine interface. They process not only the
terrestrial to/from submarine conversion, but they also provide remote management and power facili-
ties for undersea equipment. They are composed of:
• One or several Submerged Line Terminal Equipment (SLTE): each SLTE actually adapts and
multiplexes SDH signals for submarine optical transmission. The TERA10 manage STM64 sig-
nals. Depending on the requirements, a single station can include several SLTEs.
• Power Feeding Equipment (PFE): used to remotely energize the submerged line cable.
– A Submerged Line Cable which supports the physical transmission of the signal from one landing
station to another. It can provide long distance services and add–and–drop facilities. According to
the topology, it can be composed of the following Line Equipment:
• Undersea Repeaters (URs) (also called Repeaters): to amplify the multiplexed transmission
signal. A repeater is composed of optical amplifiers.
• Branching Units (BUs): placed at junction points of a branched cable allow some routing flexibil-
ity in the traffic management.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 100
100
PFE PFE
Landing Landing
Station 1 Station 2

Submerged Line Cable

SLTE UR SLTE SDH
SDH URs BU
signals signals
URs
Landing
Station 3
SDH PFE SDH

Optical Fiber signals signals
(Energized)
SLTEs
Figure 1. Example of Submarine Transmission System (STS)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 100
100
2.2 POWER FEEDING EQUIPMENT
The Power Feeding Equipment (PFE) is used to energize the Repeaters and Branching Units from the
landing station. An electric current is sent along the cable through a copper sheaf that surrounds the optical
fibres. The circuit is closed through the earth: this is normally ”system earth”, i.e. the sea.
The PFEs managed by the 1353SH are:
– the ASN PFE has gone through several releases
– the SAFT PFE. This was installed for GIGA 5 systems, but these can be upgraded to WDM
– the NEC PFE
– the Fujitsu PFE
Table 1. NE Types and Current Releases for PFE
Manufacturer NE Type Current NE Release
ASN ASN PFE 3.1 and 4.0
SAFT SAFT PFE 1.0
NEC NEC PFE 1.0
FUJITSU FUJITSU PFE 1.0
2.2.1 PFE Features
The PFE features are the following:
– Power Generation
– Power Regulation and Ramp Control
– Power Monitoring and Protection
– Power Load
– Switching
– Safety Functions
a) Power Generation
A power generator converts a DC power supply into a regulated current using pulse width modula-
tion, under the control of the Power Regulation function. This function is performed by ”generators”
(SAFT) or ”converters” (ASN, NEC, Fujitsu).
Some portions of line are fed from both ends. If the PFE at one end fails, the other is capable of taking
up the whole load. The normal scheme is to doubly feed the ”trunk” of the cable while singly feeding
the ”spurs”, if any.
b) Power Regulation and Ramp Control
It consists in controlling generator output through pulse width modulation:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• The Power Regulation maintains a requested level of voltage (in voltage regulation mode) or
current (in current regulation mode). These levels are called Reference Values.
3AL 89062 AA AA 15 / 100
100
• An additional function connected to Power Regulation is Low Frequency Modulation, also
known as Electroding. This makes the cable emit low frequency radio waves, which are useful
for locating it on the sea bed.

• As smooth transitions are desirable, Ramp Control commands are used to vary the output level

at a predetermined rate, e.g. to pass from the ”OFF” state to the reference value in a given time
interval. A ”ramping state” is associated with this process, so that the operator can tell which
is the current ramp phase.
Power Regulation and Ramp Control are implemented differently according to the equipment:
• The ASN PFE is organized in one or two Power Units (PUs). A Power Unit is a set of power
converters with associated control and switching equipment, which are ramped up or down col-
lectively.
• In the SAFT PFE, each Generator is equipped with its own regulation and can be independently
controlled (by the local operator). In addition, PFE output can be regulated as a whole by a
Centralized Control subrack.
• The NEC PFE has the same basic structure as the ASN PFE: there are two sets of converters,
each with its own regulation equipment (though there is some overlap in the case of the Low
Voltage Configuration). NEC refers to these two sets as ”Regular PFE” and the ”Standby PFE”.
• The Fujitsu PFE is organized in one or two Power Units (PUs). A Power Unit is a set of power
converters with associated control and switching equipment, which are ramped up or down col-
lectively.
c) Power Monitoring and protection
It consists in measuring output characteristics and comparing them with thresholds. If a dangerous
threshold is crossed an emergency shutdown is performed directly by the monitoring equipment.
N.B. It is independent from general monitoring and control functions (NE Management, e.g.
alarm surveillance), which are performed by other PFE components and which work in the
same way as in other NEs.
d) Power Load
The Power Load designates the outlet of generated energy. This can be one of the following:
• ”Cable Head”: the coupling between the PFE and the submarine cable
• ”Test Load” or ”Dummy Load”: a variable resistance used for calibration
• ”Earth” or ”short circuit”: current is fed to earth (through a resistance)
• ”Open Circuit”: circuit is interrupted, current cannot pass. (Differs from the above since nothing
is connected – there is no actual ”load”)
e) Switching
Switches are used to direct the generated power to one load or another: as well as the submarine
line, it is usually possible to route generator output onto a dummy load (for calibration), or to earth.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Switching is of various kinds:
• Power Routing consists in connecting the generators/converters with the power loads in differ-
ent configurations,
3AL 89062 AA AA 16 / 100
100
• Cable Head Switching controls the connection between the submarine cable and the PFE as
a whole, e.g. the cable head may be short–circuited (to earth).
• Measurement Switching determines the position of measurement equipment in the electrical

circuit.
• Polarity Switching is not always required – it consists in swapping positive and negative termi-
nals, thus inverting the voltage.
Switching is organized differently according to PFE versions.
f) Safety Functions
In order to prevent dangerous operations such as opening doors or turning switches of equipment
that supplies power, various interlock systems are added.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 17 / 100
100
2.3 POWER FEEDING MANAGEMENT
The role of the OS is restricted in PFE equipment operations due to their risks. Therefore the local operator
is the only one who can perform the most sensitive operations :

– State changes
– Configuration changes
– Measurement values
However the OS monitors the following operations:
– Power generation
– Power monitoring and protection
– Switching
2.3.1 Power Generation
Power Generation is the main function of PFE equipment.
A power generator converts a DC power supply into a regulated current using pulse width modulation.
Then, Power Regulation is used to maintain a Reference Value, that is a desired level of voltage (in voltage
regulation mode) or the current one (in current regulation mode).
The implementation of Power Regulation and Ramp Control depend on the PFE version:
– In the SAFT PFE, generators are equipped with their own regulation and can be independently con-
trolled.
– The ASN PFE uses one or two sets of power converters (Power Units) with associated control and
switching equipment. These Power Units are ramped up or down collectively.
– The NEC PFE has the same basic structure as the ASN PFE: two sets of converters referred as the
”Regular PFE” and the ”Standby PFE”.
– The Fujitsu PFE uses one or two sets of power converters (Power Units) with associated control and
switching equipment. These Power Units are ramped up or down collectively.
Electroding (or Low Frequency Modulation) makes the cable emit low frequency radio waves so that it can
be easily located on the sea bed.
2.3.2 Power Monitoring and Protection
This function consists in measuring output characteristics and comparing them with thresholds. If a dan-
gerous threshold is crossed, an emergency shutdown is directly performed by the monitoring equipment.
Measurement thresholds are neither monitored nor controlled by the OS. They are actually calculated by
the PFE according to located set reference values.
2.3.3 Switching
There are four types of Switching :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Power Routing consists in connecting SAFT generators (or ASN, NEC converters) with the Power
Loads in different configurations.
The Power Load is the outlet of generated energy. It can be one of the following :
3AL 89062 AA AA 18 / 100
100
• ”Cable Head” : the coupling between the PFE and the submarine cable.
• ”Test Load” or ”Dummy Load” : a variable resistance used for calibration.
• ”Earth” or ”short circuit” : current is fed to earth through a resistance.
• ”Open circuit” : circuit is interrupted, current cannot pass.
– Cable Head Switching controls the connection between the submarine cable and the PFE. The
three following states may be returned :
• NORMAL : The PFE terminals are connected to Cable and Earth.
• SHORT CIRCUIT : PFE is disconnected and the cable is connected to earth. This allows the
cable to be fed from the PFE at the far end.
• OPEN CIRCUIT : PFE is disconnected and the cable is in open circuit.
– Measurement Switching determines the position of measurement equipment in the electrical cir-
cuit.
– Polarity Switching is an optional method. It consists in swapping positive and negative terminals,
thus inverting the voltage.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 19 / 100
100
2.4 Equipment Management
The operator can display the PFE configuration: the mechanical arrangement and the options selected
at the installation time. The Equipment view reflects the real location of the PFE shelves.

The operator cannot change the mechanical layout of the PFE. The mechanical layout information is
upload from the NE.
Parameters can be modified from the OS and downloaded into the NE.
When a configuration change is detected by the OS:
– the operator is warned that an alignment procedure is activated, or

– the operator can activate an alignment procedure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 20 / 100
100
2.5 PFE View Access
These types of views are provided for the PFE:

– Equipment view
• Subrack views
– Power Feeding view
These views are accessible by Views pull down menu.
Views
Previous Esc
Equipment
Power Feeding
Open object Alt+O
Open in Window Alt+W
Close
Figure 2. Views pull down menu
The Previous command displays the previous window.
The Open object command displays the object selected in the window.
The Open in Window command displays the object selected in a new window.
The Close command closes the equipment window.
N.B. However, some subrack views may lead to empty board views. These views are used to display
the alarms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 21 / 100
100
2.6 ANALOG MEASUREMENTS PRINCIPLES
Analog measurements are used for submarine transmission network elements such as the SLTE and the
PFE, in order to follow as closely as possible the deterioration of equipment with age and to be warned

as early as possible of any impeding problem. Those equipment must satisfy stringent requirements for

long period of time (typically 25 years).
From the point of view of the operator, there are two ways of interacting with the OS:
a) Operator query: the operator requests the current value of some measurements (grouped in one
Measurement Point). The OS relays this request to the NE, which responds with the measurement
values. The OS can then display the results to the operator, and record them.
b) Periodic polling: for the operator, this works along the same principles as for Performance Monito-
ring. The following steps can be distinguished:
1) In a preliminary setup phase, the operator specifies which measurements are to be polled
(choice of measurement points), as well as the time interval between polls for each measure-
ment point (every15 minutes (at 0, 15, 30, 45 past) or every 24hours (at midnight)).
2) For each measurement point, the OS periodically requests current measurement values from
the NE and stores them in its database.
3) In a subsequent ”off–line” consultation phase, the operator can display measurement results.
The PFEs perform analog measurements continually, independently of the OS. Measurements are trans-
ferred to the OS in blocks called Measurement Points, on OS request. The NE does not periodically store
measurement values as in performance monitoring: on OS measurement request, the NE sends back the
current (present) value of each measurement.
For PFEs, analog measurements are performed to monitor the power supply parameters, which are a vital
aspect of submerged line operation. In addition, statistical measurements (min., max. and average values)
are calculated. On periodic measurement request from the OS, the NE resets the values and restart their
calculations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 22 / 100
100
3 ASN PFE
3.1 ASN PFE Physical Description

3.1.1 Terminology
BEC: Bottom Entry Cubicle
CCC: Control & Converter Cubicle
CTC/ DLC:Each cubicle may have its own rack or they may share the same rack.
CTC: Cable Termination Cubicle
DLC: Dummy Load Cubicle
PCC: Power Converter Cubicle
PU: Power Unit.

A PU is a set of generators with complete monitoring and control functions. It may be com-
posed of one CCC or one CCC and a PCC
3.1.2 Physical Description
As the possible configurations of the ASN PFE are multiple, here are the main parameters:
– the number of converters (Converter Shelf) for each PU,

– the presence or absence of the Dummy Load option.
The architecture of the ASN PFE is based on:
– one or two PUs (can work independently)

– an optional CTC
– an optional DLC (used for calibration)
There are six different types of racks within an ASN PFE:
– Control Cubicle (CC1 and CC2)

– Power Control Cubicle (PCC1 and PCC2)
– Cable Terminating Cubicle (CTC)
– Dummy Load Cubicle (DLC)
– Cable Terminating and Dummy Load Cubicle (CT–DLC)
– Bottom Entry Cubicle (BEC)
The following figure gives the types of rack and their subracks composition for the ASN PFE R3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 23 / 100
100
D.C. Input Alarms Alarms
Concentrator Concentra-

Control/ tor

H.V. Po- CV 4 Cable Cable
larity Terminating Terminating
Switch
Fiber Fiber
logic Terminating Terminating
Dummy
EOW key/ load
CV 3 Earth Earth
Monitor and Isolation Isolation
H.V. fans
Switch (Long
Dummy
Haul)
load and
fans
CV 1 CV 2
(Short
Haul)
CC PCC DLC CTC CTC–DLC BER
Figure 3. ASN PFE R3 racks
The following figure gives the types of rack and their subracks composition for the ASN PFE R4.
D.C. Input Alarms Alarms

CV 6 Concentrator Concentrator
Control/
H.V. Po- Cable Cable
larity Terminating Terminating
Switch CV 5
Fiber Fiber
Terminating Terminating
logic Dummy
CV 4 load Earth Earth
EOW key/ and Isolation Isolation
Monitor fans
(Long
H.V. CV 3 Dummy
Switch
Haul)
load and
fans
CV 2 (Short
CV 1 Haul)
CC PCC DLC CTC CTC–DLC BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 4. ASN PFE R4 racks
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 100
100
3.2 ASN PFE Graphical Views
3.2.1 R3 Equipment View

To display the Equipment View:
– Click on Equipment option in the Views pull down menu.
CCC
CCC
Rear DLC
CTC PCC View PCC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 5. ASN PFE R3 Equipment View
The CCC rear view allows to show the subracks only accessible through the rear door of the cubicle.
3AL 89062 AA AA 25 / 100
100
3.2.2 R3 Subrack View
To display the Subrack View:

– Click on a subrack in the Equipment view,

– Click on Open object option in the Views pull down menu.
– Or: double–click on a subrack in the Equipment View.
Figure 6. ASN PFE R3 Subrack View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 26 / 100
100
3.2.3 R4 Equipment View


CCC
CCC PCC
Rear
CTC PCC View
Figure 7. ASN PFE R4 Equipment View
The CCC rear view allows to show the subracks only accessible through the rear door of the cubicle.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 27 / 100
100
3.2.4 R4 Subrack View


Figure 8. ASN PFE R4 Subrack View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 100
100
3.2.5 Power Feeding View
To display the Power Feeding View:

– Select the Power Feeding option in the Views pull down menu.
Figure 9. ASN PFE Power Feeding View
N.B. For further information, refer to chapter 3.3.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 29 / 100
100
3.3 ASN PFE Power Feeding Features
N.B. Available for R3 and R4 ASN PFE

The Power Feeding View displays a functional organization of the ASN equipment.

Each functional block can be selected.
Information are available from the Pfe menu depending on the selected block.
Pfe
Threshold alarms
Reference values...
Cable Head Status
Routing status
NavigateToSubrack
Figure 10. ASN Pfe menu
3.3.1 Features Availability
The following table gives the features depending on the selected block.
Selected block Threshold Reference Cable Head Routing NavigateToSubrack

alarms values Status status
PU1 / PU2 X X – X X
Converter 1 / Converter 2 – – X X X
Common1 / Common 2 – – – X X
Cable head – – – X –
DUMMY_LOAD_LH – – – X X
Table 2. ASN PFE – Pfe menu
X: option available
–: option not available

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 30 / 100
100
3.3.2 Threshold Alarms
This option allows to inhibit or to authorize the alarms relative to the crossing of the low and high voltage
thresholds.
– Select the Threshold alarms option, the following window is displayed.
Figure 11. ASN PFE Voltage Alarms Threshold configuration window
– Choose the configuration: Inhibited or Authorized.

– Click on OK to validate the choice.
The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box, without modifications.
3.3.3 Reference Values
This option allows to display the voltage, current and frequency parameters of the selected PU.
No modifications of the values are allowed.
– Select the Reference values... option, the following window is displayed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 12. ASN PFE Reference values window
3AL 89062 AA AA 31 / 100
100
3.3.4 Cable Head Status
This option allows to display the status of the cable head.


– Select the Cable Head Status option, the following window is displayed.
Normal
Figure 13. ASN PFE Cable Head Status window
The different statuses that can be displayed are the following:
– Open Circuit
– Normal
– Busy
– Unknown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 32 / 100
100
3.3.5 PFE Routing Status
This option allows to display the different types of connection between the functional blocks.

When selecting the option, the following window is displayed.
Normal
Busy
Dummy Load Or In Test
Figure 14. ASN PFE Routing Status
– Off Line
– On Line
– Busy
– Unknown
– Between Off Line and Dummy (transient)
– Between On Line and Off Line (transient)
– Dummy Load or In Test
3.3.6 NavigateToSubrack
When selecting this option, the subrack view corresponding to the selected block is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 33 / 100
100
3.4 ASN PFE R3 Alarms
This section is aimed at presenting the mapping between the NE alarms and the 1353SH alarm types. For
each type of alarm defined in the NE, the corresponding 1353SH probable cause is given.

3.4.1 Equipment Alarms

Alarm concentrator comms fail externalIFDeviceProblem
Alarm unit1 failed replaceableUnitMissing
Alarm unit 1 FS2 failed powerProblem
Alarm unit 2 failed replaceableUnitMissing
Alarm unit 2 FS1 failed powerProblem
Aux. 12V supply failed (PSU #2) pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Auxiliary DPM supply FS5 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Auxiliary logic supply FS4 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Calibration drift outside limit pfeCalibrationProblem
Calibration process failed pfeCalibrationProblem
cable head relays FS3 failed powerProblem
CC or PCC door open pfeDoorOpen
Charge filter failed – converter 1 equipmentMalfunction
Common current monitor signal failed communicationSubsystemFail
Common mons FS6 failed powerProblem
Common voltage monitor signal failed communicationSubsystemFail
Common Very high current pfeVeryHighCurrent
Common Very high voltage pfeVeryHighVoltage
Common very high current – software backup pfeVeryHighCurrent
Common very high voltage – software backup pfeVeryHighVoltage
Common current below minimum working level pfeVeryLowCurrent

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Comms from other PU failed internalBusFailure
3AL 89062 AA AA 34 / 100
100

Configuration different between PUs pfeConfigurationProblem

Contactor 1 failed equipmentMalfunction

Control panel FS1 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Converter 1 electronic failed replaceableUnitProblem
Converter 1 output failed equipmentMalfunction
Converter control card failed replaceableUnitMissing
CTC alarm annunicator FS3 failed powerProblem
CTC comms failed internalBusFailure
CTC controller supply 1 FS1 failed powerProblem
CTC controller supply 2FS2 failed powerProblem
CTC door open pfeDoorOpen
CTC DL rheostats and fans FS4 failed powerProblem
CTC earth switch–station and system earths pfeStationAndSystemEarthShorted

shorted
CTC earth switch–station earth only pfeStationEarthOnly
Current control FS3 failed powerProblem
DL comms failed internalBusFailure
DL door open pfeDoorOpen

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DLC rheostats and fans FS2 failed powerProblem
DL shutdown pfeDummyLoadShutdown
3AL 89062 AA AA 35 / 100
100

DPM 12V supply failed (PSU #3) pfeDeferredPowerProblem

DPM FS2 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem

Earth current imbalance pfeEarthCurrentImbalance
Earth current monitor signal failed communicationSubsystemFail
Earth voltage monitor signal failed communicationSubsystemFail
Earthy line protector (upper apparatus shelf) pfeEarthLineProtector
EI and PU mons FS4 failed powerProblem
Electrical interface card failed replaceableUnitMissing
Emergency shutdown pfeEmergencyShutdown
ESD Latch Active (Shutdown) pfeEmergencyShutdown
Event log fault processorProblem
Flash memory fault processorProblem
Hot repair shutdown pfeHotRepairShutdown
Hot repair mode set pfeHotRepairModeSet
Invalid calibration data pfeCalibrationProblem
Invalid configuration data pfeConfigurationProblem
Line voltage protector (monitor shelf) pfeLineVoltageProtector
Local control panel comms failed internalBusFailure
Main 50V FS1 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Main 12V supply failed (PSU #1) pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Main DPM supply FS3 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Main logic supply FS2 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem
Micro unit FS5 failed powerProblem
Microprocessor has restarted processorProblem
Opencircuit/dischage relays connection failed pfeInconsistentPositionInformation
Optical interface card failed unitProblem
Output current DPM fail internalBusFailure
Output voltage DPM fail internalBusFailure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Pfe Hot Repair Mode Set pfeHotRepairModeSet
Pfe Hot Repair Shut Down pfeHotRepairShutDown
3AL 89062 AA AA 36 / 100
100

Pfe routing switch door open pfeDoorOpen

Polarity switch comms fail internalBusFailure

Polarity switch failed to change position unitProblem
Polarity switch in invalid position unitProblem
Polarity switch inconsistent position information pfeInconsistentPositionInformation
Power unit current DPM fail internalBusFailure
Power up ramp step failed pfeRampStepFail
Printer comms fail externalIFDeviceProblem
PU battery voltage DPM fail internalBusFailure
PU very high current pfeVeryHighCurrent
PU very high voltage pfeVeryHighVoltage
PU voltage monitor signal failed communicationSubsystemFail
PU current monitor signal failed communicationSubsystemFail
PU1 routing switch door open pfeDoorOpen
PU2 routing switch door open pfeDoorOpen
Ramp end of step unstable pfeRampEndOfStepUnstable
Ramp failed–current control card fault equipmentMalfunction
Rear chassis 1 FS1 failed powerProblem
Rear chassis 1 FS2 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Remote control panel comms failed internalBusFailure
3AL 89062 AA AA 37 / 100
100

Routing switch comms fail internalBusFailure

Routing switch failed to change position unitProblem

Routing switch in invalid position unitProblem
Routing switch inconsistent position information pfeInconsistentPositionInformation
SMS to SPC comms fail externalIFDeviceProblem
SPC comms unit FS4 failed pfeDeferredPowerProblem
SPC to micro unit comms fail internalBusFailure
System to station earth voltage limit exeeded pfeSystemToStationEarthLimit Exceeded
Transient measurement log fault processorProblem
3.4.2 Environmental Alarms

Auxiliary 50V supply failed auxDcSupplyFailure
Battery volt high pfeBatteryVoltHigh
Battery volt low pfeBatteryVoltlow
DL over temperature highTemperature
Main 50V supply mainDcSupplyFailure
3.4.3 Quality of Service Alarms

Common high current pfeHighCurrentThresholdCrossed
Common low current pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed
Common very low current pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed
PU current share pfeCurrentShareThresholdCrossed
PU high voltage pfeHighVoltageThresholdCrossed
PU low voltage pfeLowVoltageThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 38 / 100
100
3.5 ASN PFE R4 Alarms
3.5.1 Equipment Domain Alarms

ALARMS_CONC internalBusFailure cTCCommsFailed
powerProblem cTCFS3Failed
ALARM 1 replaceableUnitMissing alarmUnit1Failed
ALARM 2 replaceableUnitMissing alarmUnit2Failed
APPARATUS pfeInconsistentPositionInforma- openCircuitSwitchFailed

tion
CABLE TERM pfeDoorOpen cTCCableTermShelfDoorOpen
CPAN internalBusFailure localControlPanelCommsFailed
internalBusFailure remoteControlPanelComm-
sFailed
CV_1 equipmentMalfunction converter1ChargeFailed
equipmentMalfunction converter1LowOutputCurrent
equipmentMalfunction converter1ElectronicFail
powerProblem converter1FuseFailed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 39 / 100
100



CV_CONTROL replaceableUnitMissing currentControlCardFault
replaceableUnitProblem rampFailedCCCardFault
DC_INPUT pfeDeferredPowerProblem dCInputShelfFS5Failed
pfeDeferredPowerProblem dCInputShelfFS4Failed
pfeDeferredPowerProblem dCInputShelfMain50vFS1Failed
DISPLAY internalBusFailure pUBatteryVoltageDPMFailed
internalBusFailure outputVoltageDPMFailed
internalBusFailure outputCurrentDPMFailed
internalBusFailure powerUnitCurrentDPMFailed
DUMMY_LOAD_ pfeDoorOpen dummyLoadDoorOpen

LH
internalBusFailure dummyLoadCommsFailed
pfeDummyLoadShutdown dummyLoadShutdown
powerProblem cTCDLFS4Failed
powerProblem dLFS2Failed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
highTemperature dummyLoadCommsFailed
3AL 89062 AA AA 40 / 100
100

DUMMY_LOAD_ pfeDoorOpen dummyLoadDoorOpen

SH
internalBusFailure dummyLoadCommsFailed
pfeDummyLoadShutdown dummyLoadShutdown
powerProblem cTCDLFS4Failed
powerProblem dLFS2Failed
highTemperature dummyLoadCommsFailed
EARTH pfeStationEarthOnly stationEarthOnly
pfeStationAndSystemEarths- stationAndSystemEarthsShorted
Shorted
ELECTR IFACE replaceableUnitMissing electricalInterfaceCardFailed
FUSE_PANEL pfeDeferredPowerProblem logicShelfFusePanelFS4Failed
powerProblem logicShelfFusePanelFS3Failed
pfeDeferredPowerProblem logicShelfFusePanelFS2Failed
pfeDeferredPowerProblem logicShelfFusePanelFS1Failed
HV_POLAR internalBusFailure polaritySwitchCommsFailure
pfeInconsistentPositionInforma- polaritySwitchInconsistentInfo
tion
unitProblem polaritySwitchInvalidPosition
unitProblem polaritySwitchFailedToMove
HV_SWITCH pfeDoorOpen pU2RoutingSwitchDoorOpen
pfeDoorOpen pU1RoutingSwitchDoorOpen
internalBusFailure routingSwitchCommsFailure
pfeInconsistentPositionInforma- routingSwitchInconsistentInfo
tion
unitProblem routingSwitchInvalidPosition
unitProblem routingSwitchFailedToMove
LOGIC unitProblem opticalInterfaceCardFailed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 41 / 100
100

LOGIC_FUSE powerProblem logicShelfLogicFusesFS6Failed

powerProblem logicShelfLogicFusesFS5Failed

LOGIC SPC unitProblem opticalInterfaceCardFailed
MICRO_UNIT processorProblem microprocessorHasRestarted
processorProblem transientMeasurementLogFault
processorProblem eventLogFault
MON_COMMON communicationSubsystemFail comCurrentMonitorCommsFailed
communicationSubsystemFail comVoltageMonitorCommsFailed
MON_EARTH communicationSubsystemFail earthVoltageMonitorCommsFail
communicationSubsystemFail earthCurrentMonitorCommsFail
MON_PU communicationSubsystemFail pUCurrentMonitorCommsFailed
communicationSubsystemFail pUVoltageMonitorCommsFailed
PSU 1 pfeDeferredPowerProblem main12VSupplyFailed
PSU 2 pfeDeferredPowerProblem aux12VSupplyFailed
PSU 3 pfeDeferredPowerProblem dPM12VSupplyFailed
SPC internalBusFailure sPCToMicroUnitCommsFailed
internalBusFailure CommsFromOtherPUFailed
pfeConfigurationProblem invalidConfigurationData
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 42 / 100
100
3.5.2 PFE Domain Alarms

PFE pfeDoorOpen emercencyShutdown
pfeDoorOpen pFERoutingSwitchDoorOpen
pfeCalibrationProblem invalidCalibrationData
pfeHotRepairModeSet hotRepairModeSet
pfeCalibrationProblem calibrationDriftOutsideLimit
pfeCalibrationProblem calibrationProcessFailed
pfeEmergencyShutdown shutdown
pfeHorRepairShutdown hotRepairShutdown
pfeBatteryVoltHigh batteryVoltHigh
pfeBatteryVoltlow batteryVoltlow
pfeSystemToStationEarthLimi- systemStationEarthVoltsLimit
tExceeded
pfeEarthCurrentImbalance earthCurrentUnbalance
pfeEarthyLineProtector earthyLineProtector
pfeLineVoltageProtector lineVoltageProtector
PFE_CON- pfeVeryHighVoltage commonVeryHighVoltage

TROLLER
pfeVeryHighCurrent commonVeryHighCurrent
pfeVeryLowCurrent commonCurrentBelowMinLevel
pfeVeryHighVoltage commonVeryHighVoltageSW
pfeVeryHighCurrent commonVeryHighCurrentSW
pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed commonVeryLowCurrent
pfeHighCurrentThreshold- commonHighCurrent
Crossed
pfeHighCurrentThreshold- commonLowCurrent
Crossed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 43 / 100
100

PFE_REGULA- pfeDoorOpen cCOrPCCDoorOpen

TION

pfeVeryHighCurrent pUVeryHighCurrentSW

pfeVeryHighVoltage pUVeryHighVoltageSW
pfeHighVoltageThreshold- pUHighVoltage
Crossed
pfeLowVoltageThresholdCrossed pULowVoltage
pfeVeryHighVoltage pUVeryHighVoltage
pfeVeryHighCurrent pUVeryHighCurrent
pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed commonVeryLowCurrent
RAMP_CON- pfeRampEndOfStepUnstable rampEndOfStepUnstable

TROL
pfeRampStepFail powerUpRampStepFailed
SUPERVI- pfeConfigurationProblem pUConfigurationsDiffer

SION_COORD
auxDcSupplyFailure aux50vSupplyFailed
mainDcSupplyFailure main50vSupplyFailed
externalIFDeviceProblem sMSToSPCCommsFailed
externalIFDeviceProblem alarmConcentratorCommsFailed
internalBusFailure commsFromOtherPUFailed
pfeConfigurationProblem invalidConfigurationData
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 44 / 100
100
3.6 ASN PFE Measurement
3.6.1 Measurement Points Definition

Two kinds of PFE performance information are monitored:
– Voltage
– Current
Measurements are set in measurement points. A measurement point includes several measurement val-
ues.
Many measurement points are available. The list of measurement points is given below.

PU1 Main Value PU current – Instantaneous (mA)

Common current – Instantaneous (mA)
Common voltage – Instantaneous (V)
PU Battery voltage – Instantaneous (V)
Earth to station differential voltage (V)
PU2 Main Value PU current – Instantaneous (mA)

Common current – Instantaneous (mA)
Common voltage – Instantaneous (V)
PU Battery voltage – Instantaneous (V)
Earth to station differential voltage (V)
CTC earth values Earth rod 1 current (mA)

Earth rod 2 current (mA)
PFE line data Line current – Min (mA)

Line current – Max (mA)
Line current – Average (mA)
Line voltage – Min (V)
Line voltage – Max (V)
Line voltage – Average (V)
Table 3. ASN Measurement Points
For all measurements, an instantaneous value is sent.
For the Line data, three analog measurements are sent:
– The minimum value obtained in a time period

– The maximum value obtained in a time period
– The ”average” value of the period
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 45 / 100
100
3.6.2 Measurement Management
There are three possible ways to run measurements for specific measurement point:

– a polling every 24 hours: a measurement is automatically performed by the OS every 24 hours

– a polling every 15 minutes: a measurement is automatically performed by the OS every 15 minutes
– an immediate measurement: a measurement is immediately performed when requested
By default, no periodic polling are performed.
The operator can start/stop the periodic polling for a list of selected measurement points.
The OS will automatically interrupt the periodic polling in case of Stop Supervision.
Periodic polling and immediate measurement concern all measurements of the concerned measurement
points.
All measurements are stored/displayed in a database.
No measurement threshold management are available from the OS.
3.6.3 Run Measurements
To either start/stop periodic polling, or perform an immediate measurement on some measurement points,
the operator needs to display the Measure Polling window:
– From any view, click on the Configuration pull–down menu.

– Select the Measure then Measure Polling options.
Configuration
MIB >
NE Time...
Measure > Measure Polling
Figure 15. Measurement Polling selection
The following window is then displayed:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 46 / 100
100
Figure 16. ASN PFE Measure Polling window
– Click on one or several toggles depending on operator needs

– Click on OK to validate the choices.
3.6.4 Display Measurements
In a graphical interface, measurements can be selected using many criteria.

To activate this graphical interface:
– From any view, click on Diagnosis pull–down menu,

– Select the Show NE Measurement Data option:
Diagnosis
Compare
Show NE Alarms
View >
Show NE Measurement Data
Figure 17. Show NE Measurement Data selection
The measurements are then displayed.
Latest performed immediate measurements can also displayed in a text format.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 47 / 100
100
To display them:

– Select the View option,

– Select the Analog measures option :

Diagnosis
Compare
Show NE Alarms Remote Inventory
View > Analog Measures
Show NE Measurement Data MIB Dump
Upload Failure
Mib Audit
Events Log
Figure 18. Analog Measures selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 48 / 100
100
4 SAFT PFE
4.1 SAFT PFE Physical Description

4.1.1 Terminology
GIS: Generator Insertion Switch
MIS: Measurement Insertion Switch
MPC: Measurement and Protection Switch
As the possible configurations of the SAFT PFE are multiple, here are the main parameters:
– the presence of the MPC B and of the MIS B

– the number of Generator Racks (one to four)
– in each Generator Rack, the number of generators (one to four per rack)
There are seven different types of racks:
– Cable Termination Rack (CABLE TERM)

– Measurement and Control Rack (MEAS–CTRL)
– Protection Rack (PROT)
– Measurement and Control and Protection Rack (MEAS–CTRL–PROT)
– Generator Rack (GEN)
– Test Load Rack (TEST LOAD)
– Power Supply Rack (PWR SUP)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 49 / 100
100
Generator
Interface Test load
(Short
GIS Haul)
Gen. 1 Key Measur.
1 Control
GIS Protection A
Gen. 2 Alarm
2
Centraliser
(Large)
Measur.
GIS
Insertion
Gen. 3 Key
Switches
3
Gen. 4 GIS4 Protection B
Pwr Sup Gen Rack Meas–Ctrl Prot Rack

Rack Rack
Test load
(Short Power
Measur. Haul) Switching
Control
Alarm
Protection A Test load
Centraliser
(Long
(Small)
Haul)
Measur. In- Fiber Ter-

sertion mination
Switches
Protection B
Meas–Ctrl–Prot Cable Term Test Load

Rack Rack Rack
Figure 19. SAFT PFE racks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 50 / 100
100
4.2 SAFT PFE Graphical Views
4.2.1 Equipment View

Figure 20. SAFT PFE Equipment View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 51 / 100
100
4.2.2 Subrack View

– Click on a subrack in the Equipment View,

Figure 21. SAFT PFE Subrack View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 52 / 100
100

Figure 22. SAFT PFE Power Feeding View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 53 / 100
100
4.3 SAFT PFE Power Feeding Features
The Power Feeding View displays a functional organization of the SAFT equipment.


Pfe
Reference values...
Routing status
NavigateToSubrack
Figure 23. SAFT Pfe menu
Selected block Reference values Routing status NavigateToSubrack
Meas–Ctrl X X X
Generator – X X
MPC_A / MPC_B – X X
Cable head – X –
TEST_LOAD_SH – X X
Table 4. SAFT PFE – Pfe menu
X: option available

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 54 / 100
100
This option allows to display the voltage and current parameters of the selected PU.

Figure 24. SAFT PFE Reference values window
4.3.3 Routing Status
– Select the Routing status option, the following window is displayed.
On Line
On Line
On Line
On Line
On Line
On Line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 25. SAFT Routing Status window
3AL 89062 AA AA 55 / 100
100
– Off Line
– On Line


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 56 / 100
100
4.4 SAFT PFE Alarms

AB on LINE pfeBothMpcsOnLine
B on LINE pfeMpcBOnLine
CIA board fault or CIB board fault replaceableUnitProblem
Fault (break) in local earth circuit pfeStationEarthFault
Fault (break) in normal current return circuit (Sy- pfeStationEarthOnly

stem Earth). Power feed is working on local earth
Fault at CPC board equipmentMalfunction
Fault in 48V/5V converter supplying power to CPC powerProblem

and CIA
Fault in 48V/5V converter supplying power to CPC powerProblem

and CIB
Fault in 48V/5V converter supplying power to gen- pfeGeneratorRack1PowerProblem

erator rack 1

erator rack 2

erator rack 3

erator rack 4
Fault in 48V/5V converter supplying power to re- powerProblem

corder
Fault in 48V/5V converter supplying power to MDO powerProblem

module
Fault in 48v/5V converter supplying power to MPC powerProblem

A
Fault in 48v/5V converter supplying power to MPC powerProblem

B
Fault in generator rack 1 pfeGeneratorRack1Fault

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 57 / 100
100


Generator 1 failure replaceableUnitProblem

LV shut ol pfeVeryHighVoltage
LV shut ot pfeVeryHighVoltage
LC<0.5 ol pfeVeryLowCurrent
LC < 0.5 ot pfeVeryLowCurrent
LC<CminTAT pfeVeryLowCurrent
LCA > 110% pfeVeryHighCurrent
LCB > 110% pfeVeryHighCurrent
LF Modulator fault equipmentMalfunction
PFE FAULT pfeFaultSynthesis
SHUTDOWN pfeEmergencyShutdown
Shunted
Swi.ZENER pfeZenerSwitchOpen
T.N.S pfeLineUnmonitored
ZCA > 90 mA pfeHighZenerCurrent
ZCB > 90 mA pfeHighZenerCurrent

LCA > 102% pfeHighCurrentThresholdCrossed
LCB > 102% pfeHighCurrentThresholdCrossed
LCA < 98% pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed
LCB < 98% pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed
LV –25% pfeLowVoltageThresholdCrossed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
LV +25% pfeHighVoltageThresholdCrossed
3AL 89062 AA AA 58 / 100
100

MIN LV pfeLowVoltageThresholdCrossed
MAX LV pfeHighVoltageThresholdCrossed
4.4.3 Communication Alarms

Transmission fault at CPC board communicationProtocolError

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 59 / 100
100
4.5 SAFT PFE Measurement

– Voltage
– Current
ues.

MPC A Measurements Current

Voltage
Zener current
MPC B Measurements Current

Voltage
Zener current
Earth and reference values Earth current

Earth voltage
Reference current
Reference voltage
PFE line data Line current – Min

Line current – Max
Line current – Average
Line voltage – Min
Line voltage – Max
Line voltage – Average
Table 5. SAFT Measurement Points
All the PFE measurement data have the following characteristics :
– voltage : " 10000 V, accuracy 1 V

– current : " 3000 mA, accuracy 10 mA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 60 / 100
100
– a polling every 24 hours: a measurement is automatically performed by the OS every 24 hours,

– a polling every 15 minutes: a measurement is automatically performed by the OS every 15 minutes,
– an immediate measurement: a measurement is immediately performed when requested.
points.

Configuration
MIB >
NE Time...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 61 / 100
100
Figure 27. SAFT PFE Measure Polling window



Diagnosis
Compare
Show NE Alarms
View >

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 62 / 100
100
To display them:

– Select the Analog measures option:

Diagnosis
Compare
Upload Failure
Mib Audit
Events Log
The measurements are displayed in text format.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 63 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
100
3AL 89062 AA AA
64 / 100
5 NEC PFE
5.1 NEC PFE Physical Description

5.1.1 Terminology
FFTU: Fuse Filter &Terminal Unit
CTB : Cable Termination Box
TRM: Termination
C/V SENS: Current and voltage sensor
The NEC PFE is structured in three levels:
– Rack Level.
– Unit (Subrack) Level. NEC practice allows two ”units” to occupy two halves of a single vertical ”shelf”
level, or one ”unit” to occupy several ”shelf” levels.
– Package Level, i.e. board level. This level is not present in all units.
NEC PFE equipment configuration depends on the following parameters (obtained from the PFE):
– Presence of Racks
– Presence of Subracks
The NEC PFE exists in two configurations: ”High Voltage” (or standard) and ”Low Voltage”.
The difference between Low Voltage and High Voltage configuration consists in the presence or not of
different types of racks.
a) Low Voltage Configuration Type
There are two different types of racks within a Low Voltage NEC PFE :
– Basic Rack: BASIC

– Option Rack: OPTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 65 / 100
100
METER and Alarm RECORDER Load Transfer
Operation C/V–SENS Operation C/V_SENS
Converter 2 Converter 1
Converter 1
TEST_LOAD
Switch Earth test
FFTU FFTU
CTB
BASIC RACK OPTION RACK
Figure 30. NEC PFE Rack Layout : Low Voltage Configuration
b) High Voltage Configuration
There are five different type of racks within a High voltage NEC PFE.
– Power Monitoring Rack : PM, a PM can be regular (PMR) or standby (PMS)
– Load Transfer Rack : LT
– Switch Rack : SW
– Test Load Rack : TL, three TL can be present (TL[1..3])
– Power Regulator Rack : PR, five PR can be present. A PR can be Regular (PRR[1..5]) or
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Standby (PRS[1..5])
3AL 89062 AA AA 66 / 100
100
Meter and Alarm (empty) FAN 2
Operation Alarm Detector TEL
TEST_LOAD
Load Transfer
C/V SENS
recorder1 recorder 2 FAN 1
(empty) Control & Power Unit
FFTU FFTU FFTU
PM Rack LT Rack TL Rack
Switch Meter Converter 4
EARTH TEST
Converter 3
Termination
Converter 2
Switch DISCHARGE
Converter 1
RESISTOR RETURN
COMMON
FFTU FFTU
CTB
SW Rack PR Rack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 31. NEC PFE Rack Layout : High Voltage Configuration
3AL 89062 AA AA 67 / 100
100
5.2 NEC PFE Graphical Views

Figure 32. NEC PFE Equipment View (Low Voltage Configuration)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 68 / 100
100
5.2.2 Subrack View


Figure 33. NEC PFE Subrack View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 69 / 100
100


Figure 34. NEC PFE Power Feeding View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 70 / 100
100
5.3 NEC PFE Power Feeding Features
The Power Feeding View displays a functional organization of the NEC equipment.

Pfe
Reference values...
Routing status
NavigateToSubrack
Figure 35. NEC Pfe menu
Regular_PFE / Standby _PFE X X X
Converter 1 / Converter 2 – X X
Power Monitor R / S – X X
V2_TEST_LOAD – X X
Table 6. NEC PFE – Pfe menu
X: option available

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 71 / 100
100
This option allows to display the voltage, current and frequency parameters of the selected PU.


Figure 36. NEC PFE Reference values window
Normal
Busy

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 37. NEC Routing Status window
3AL 89062 AA AA 72 / 100
100
– On Line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 73 / 100
100
5.4 NEC PFE Alarms


ADJ Fail powerProblem
Basic rack C/V SENS Analog Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
Basic rack C/V SENS Scene Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
Basic rack EARTH TST analog Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
Basic rack OPE Scene Bus Cable Disconnected internalBusFailure
Basic rack SW Scene Bus Cable Disconnected internalBusFailure
CA1 CPU Error processorProblem
CA1 fail powerProblem
CA1 Missing replaceableUnitMissing
CS1 fail powerProblem
CS1 Missing replaceableUnitMissing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 74 / 100
100


Cont & PU fail powerProblem

Curr Cont PU1 Fail powerProblem
Det1 CPU Error processorProblem
Det1 CPU Fail processorProblem
DSP Alm processorProblem
DSP Alarm on Meter 1 processorProblem
DSP Alarm on Meter 2 processorProblem
Earth Analog Bus cable Disconnect internalBusfailure
Earth C/O Fail powerProblem
Emergency stop (local) pfeEmergencyShutDown
Emergency stop (remote) pfeEmergencyShutDown
High Voltage Protection Cover Open pfeHighVoltageCoverOpen
Key unlock pfeInterlockKeyOpen
LID open enclosureDoorOpen
LT Rack Scene Bus Cable Disconnected internalBusFailure
Main Fuse Problem powerProblem
Maintenance state notify pfeMaintenance
Missing replaceableUnitMissing
Missing Det1 replaceableUnitMissing
Missing Det2 replaceableUnitMissing
Missing EXPSI replaceableUnitMissing
Missing Meter replaceableUnitMissing
Missing on Meter1 replaceableUnitMissing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Missing on Meter2 replaceableUnitMissing
Missing on PU replaceableUnitMissing
3AL 89062 AA AA 75 / 100
100

Missing on SV replaceableUnitMissing

Missing PSI replaceableUnitMissing

Missing PU1 replaceableUnitMissing
Missing PU2 replaceableUnitMissing
Missing RLI replaceableUnitMissing
NFB Trip equipmentMalfunction
OPE CPU Error processorProblem
OPE CPU PU Error processorProblem
Output Current Problem replaceableUnitProblem
Output Voltage Problem equipmentMalfunction
Pfe cable open pfeCableOpen
PU1 Fail powerProblem
PU2 Fail powerProblem
PU Fail powerProblem
PM Rack ALMDET Scene Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
PM Rack C/V SENS analog Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
PM Rack C/V SENS Scene Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
PM Rack C/V OPO Scene Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
PMS Rack Meter&Alarm Scene Bus Cable Discon- internalBusFailure

nected
PR1 Rack Scene Bus Cable Disconnected internalBusFailure
Polarity Change Plug Missing UnitProblem
Polarity Change Plug Missing Diode UnitProblem

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Polarity Plug Mismatch UnitProblem
Power supply current abnormal increase 10% pfeVeryHighCurrent
3AL 89062 AA AA 76 / 100
100

Power supply current earth problem pfeEarthProblem

Power supply voltage abnormal increase VSD pfeVeryHighVoltage

Rack AC input Power Failure powerProblem
Rack main1 input Power Failure pfeInputPowerProblem
Rack main2 input Power Failure pfeInputpowerProblem
Rack main3 input Power Failure pfeInputpowerProblem
Rack main’ input Power Failure pfeInputpowerProblem
RL. DRIV. Fail powerProblem
Rotation Failure equipmentMalfunction
Scene Bus Timeout internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on ACM internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on EXPSI internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on Meter internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on Meter 1 internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on Meter 2 internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on PSI internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on RLI internalBusFailure
Scene Bus Timeout on SV internalBusFailure
Send/Return current difference problem pfeCurrentProblem
Sens 2 Fail powerProblem
SV Fail powerProblem
SV&Com Fail powerProblem
SV&Com CPU Fail powerProblem
SW Rack Scene Bus Cable Disconnected internalBusFailure
Temperature unacceptable pfeDummyLoadShutdown
TL1 Scene Bus Cable Disconnected internalBusFailure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Test Frise Failure powerProblem
Unit Mismatch replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
3AL 89062 AA AA 77 / 100
100

Unit Mismatch on ACM replaceableUnitTypeMismatch

Unit Mismatch on EXPSI replaceableUnitTypeMismatch

Unit Mismatch on Meter replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Unit Mismatch on Meter 1 replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Unit Mismatch on Meter 2 replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Unit Mismatch on RLI replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Unit Mismatch on SV replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
VA1 CPU Error processorProblem
VA1 fail powerProblem
VA1 Missing replaceableUnitMissing
VS1 Fail powerProblem
VS1 Missing replaceableUnitMissing

Rear door open enclosureDoorOpen
Temperature unacceptable pfeDummyLoadShutdown

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 78 / 100
100

Power supply current abnormal increase 2% pfeHighCurrentThresholdCrossed
Power supply current abnormal decrease 2% pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed
Power supply voltage abnormal increase 15% pfeHighVoltageThresholdCrossed
Power supply voltage abnormal decrease 15% pfeLowVoltageThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 79 / 100
100
5.5 NEC PFE Measurement

– Voltage
– Current
ues.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 80 / 100
100

Cable values Cable current–Average

Cable current–Max
Cable current–Min
Cable voltage–Average
Cable voltage–Max
Cable voltage–Min
Cable current–Instantaneous
Cable voltage–Instantaneous
Earth point values Earth current–Average

Earth current–Max
Earth current–Min
Earth voltage–Average
Earth voltage–Max
Earth voltage–Min
Station gnd current–Average
Station gnd current–Max
Station gnd current–Min
Earth current–Instantaneous
Earth voltage–Instantaneous
Station gnd current–Instantaneous
Regular PU values Power supply current–Average

Power supply current–Max
Power supply current–Min
Power supply voltage–Average
Power supply voltage–Max
Power supply voltage–Min
Power supply current–Instantaneous
Power supply voltage–Instantaneous
Standby PU values Power supply current–Average

Power supply current–Max
Power supply current–Min
Power supply voltage–Average
Power supply voltage–Max
Power supply voltage–Min
Power supply voltage–Instantaneous
Power supply voltage–inst
Table 7. NEC Measurement Points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 81 / 100
100


points.

Configuration
MIB >
NE Time...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 82 / 100
100
Figure 39. NEC PFE Measure Polling window



Diagnosis
Compare
Show NE Alarms
View >

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 83 / 100
100
To display them:



Diagnosis
Compare
Upload Failure
Mib Audit
Events Log

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 84 / 100
100
6 FUJITSU PFE
6.1 Fujitsu PFE Physical Description

6.1.1 Terminology
C/V SENS:Current and Voltage Sensor
CTB : Cable Termination Box
PR: Power Regulator Rack
POWER_DIS: Power distribution
PM: Power Monitor Rack
LT: Load Transfer Rack
TL: Test Load Rack
PSW: Path Switch Rack
The FUJITSU PFE (Power Feeding Equipment) is a multi–racks, multi–subracks and multi–boards equip-
ment.
The FUJITSU PFE exists in different types of configuration:
– type L : the NE has at most 9 racks (3 PR + 1 PM +1 LT + 1 PSW + 3 TL)
– type L+ : the NE has at most 13 racks (6 PR + 2 PM +1 LT + 1 PSW + 3 TL)
– type SS : the NE has at most 5 racks (1 PR + 1 PM +1 LT + 1 PSW + 1 TL)
– type SS+ : the NE has at most 7 racks (2 PR + 2 PM +1 LT + 1 PSW + 1 TL)
N.B. The operator can not change dynamically some rack’s type and position, subrack’s type and
position or board’s type and position.
There are five different types of racks within Fujitsu PFE :
– Power Regulator Rack: PR

– Power Monitor Rack: PM
– Load Transfer Rack: LT
– Test Load Rack: TL
– Path Switch Rack: PSW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 85 / 100
100
PR1 PR2 PR3 PM LT TL1 TL2 TL3

(A) (A) (A) (A)
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9
PM PR1 PR2 PR3 PSW

(B) (B) (B) (B)
R10 R11 R12 R13 R14
Figure 42. Fujitsu PFE: Example of Mechanical Configuration (Type L+ : configuration of Shima)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 86 / 100
100
COMMON METER Alarm Display
Current
Converter 1 Control & Operation

Load Transfer
Alarm Detector
Converter 2 Transfer Control
Converter 3 Telephone Set
Converter 4 C/V_SENS
Communication
Converter 5 RECORDER
POWER_DIS POWER_DIS POWER_DIS

PR PM LT
METER
DISCHARGE
Operation
Test Load
Switch
EARTH_TEST
FAN C/V_SENS
RETURN
POWER_DIS POWER_DIS CTB

TL PSW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 43. Fujitsu PFE: Rack Layout Configuration
3AL 89062 AA AA 87 / 100
100
6.2 Fujitsu PFE Graphical Views

Figure 44. Fujitsu PFE Equipment View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 88 / 100
100
6.2.2 Subrack View


Figure 45. Fujitsu PFE Subrack View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 89 / 100
100


Figure 46. Fujitsu PFE Power Feeding View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 90 / 100
100
6.3 Fujitsu PFE Power Feeding Features
The Power Feeding View displays a functional organization of the Fujitsu equipment.

Pfe
Reference values...
Routing status
NavigateToSubrack
Figure 47. Fujitsu Pfe menu
PFE Plant A / B X X X
Converter A / Converter B – X X
Power Monitor A / B – X X
TEST_LOAD – X X
Table 8. Fujitsu PFE – Pfe menu
X: option available

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 91 / 100
100
This option allows to display the current parameter of the selected PU.


Figure 48. Fujitsu PFE Reference values window
Normal
Busy
Figure 49. Fujitsu PFE Routing Status window
– On Line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 92 / 100
100
6.4 Fujitsu PFE Alarms

CABLE OPEN SD <A/B> pfeCableOpen
CARD OUT ARR ALM replaceableUnitMissing
CARD OUT CURR ALM 1 replaceableUnitMissing
CARD OUT IUMB ALM replaceableUnitMissing
CARD OUT VOLT ALM 1 replaceableUnitMissing
COMMON UNIT FAIL equipmentMalfunction
CONTROL CURRENT 1 equipmentMalfunction
CONV <A/B> CURR–UNB pfeCurrentProblem
CONV <A/B> LEAK CURR pfeCurrentProblem
CONV CARD ADD ALM equipmentMalfunction
CONV CARD ARR ALM equipmentMalfunction
CONV CARD CURR ALM 1 equipmentMalfunction
CONV CARD VOLT ALM 1 equipmentMalfunction
CONV CARD IUMB ALM equipmentMalfunction

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CONV UNIT equipmentMalfunction
CONV UNIT CURRENT CONTROLLER 1 equipmentMalfunction
3AL 89062 AA AA 93 / 100
100



CONV VOLTAGE equipmentMalfunction
CURRENT SD <A/B> pfeVeryHighCurrent
EMERGENCY SD <A/B> pfeEmergencyShutDown
FAN DEGRADED equipmentMalfunction
FUSE BLOWN OUT powerProblem
HIGH VOLTAGE COVER OPEN pfeHighVoltageCoverOpen
INTERLOCK KEY pfeInterlockKeyOpen
INPUT POWER FAIL 1 powerProblem
Maintenance state notify pfeMaintenance
NFB TRIB equipmentMalfunction
Safety key on PSW OPE&SW pfeInterlockKeyOpen
SEA EARTH FAIL pfeStationEarthOnly
U–LINK PLUG OUT SWITCH SELECT unitProblem
U–LINK PLUG OUT POLARITY unitProblem
UNIT OUT replaceableUnitMissing
VOLTAGE SD <A/B> pfeVeryHighVoltage

FRONT COVER OPEN enclosureDoorOpen
OVER TEMPERATURE SD A pfeDummyLoadShutdown
OVER TEMPERATURE SD B pfeDummyLoadShutdown

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
REAR DOOR OPEN enclosureDoorOpen
3AL 89062 AA AA 94 / 100
100

CONV <A/B> HC pfeHighCurrentThresholdCrossedMinor
CONV <A/B> LC pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossedMinor
CONV <A/B> HV pfeHighVoltageThresholdCrossedMinor
CONV <A/B> LV pfeLowVoltageThresholdCrossedMinor
CONV <A/B> VHC pfeHighCurrentThresholdCrossed
CONV <A/B> VLC pfeLowCurrentThresholdCrossed
CONV <A/B> VHV pfeHighVoltageThresholdCrossed
CONV <A/B> VLV pfeLowVoltageThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 95 / 100
100
6.5 Fujitsu PFE Measurement

– Voltage
– Current
ues.

Cable curr–inst
Cable values
Cable volt–inst
Earth curr SE1–inst

Earth volt SE1–inst
Earth curr SE2–inst
Earth values
Earth volt SE2–inst
Earth curr STE–inst
Earth volt PFE–inst
Power feeding (PUA)

Power Sup curr–inst
Power feeding (PUB) Power Sup volt–inst
Line curr–min
Line curr–max
Line curr–avg
PFE line data 15mn
Line volt–min
Line volt–max
Line volt–avg
Line curr–min
Line curr–max
Line curr–avg
PFE line data 24h
Line volt–min
Line volt–max
Line volt–avg
Table 9. Fujitsu Measurement Points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 96 / 100
100

points.

Configuration
MIB >
NE Time...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 97 / 100
100
Figure 51. Fujitsu PFE Measure Polling window
– Click on one or several toggles depending on operator needs,

In graphical interface, measurements can be selected using many criteria.


Diagnosis
Compare
Show NE Alarms
View >

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 98 / 100
100
To display them:


Diagnosis
Compare
Upload Failure
Mib Audit
Events Log

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 99 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
END OF DOCUMENT
100
3AL 89062 AA AA
100 / 100
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.2 Edition scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.3 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 SUBMARINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH REPEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 SLTE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.1 OALW16 SLTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.2 OALW40 SLTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.3 OALW16/OALW40 RSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.3 SLTE Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.3.1 OALW16 SLTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.3.2 OALW40 SLTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.3.3 OALW16/OALW40 RSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.4 Submerged Line Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4.1 Segment Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4.2 Sub Segment Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4.3 Sub System Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.5 Submerged Line Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.5.1 STC Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.5.2 SMC Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.5.3 R3 and R4 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.5.4 Branching Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
01 040130 V.SCORTECCI ITAVE B.MOGLIA ITAVE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
NR5 EQP–SPEC. OPER HDBK
Release 7.0 on
ED 01 SC.3.4: WDM SUBM OALW16&40
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 154
154
3 SLTE EQUIPMENT VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.1 OALW16 NE Graphical representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.1.1 OALW16 NE Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.1.2 OALW16 Views Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.1.3 OALW16 Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.2 OALW16 SLTE Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.1 Rack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.2 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.2.3 Board View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2.4 Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2.5 Submerged Line View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2.6 Transmission View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.2.7 Reception View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.2.8 External Points View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3 OALW16 RSU Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3.1 Rack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3.2 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.3.3 Board View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.3.4 Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.4 OALW40 NE Graphical Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.4.1 OALW40 NE Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.4.2 OALW40 Views Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.4.3 OALW40 Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5 OALW40 SLTE Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.5.1 Rack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.5.2 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.5.3 Board View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.5.4 Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.5.7 Reception View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.6 OALW40 RSU Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4 SLTE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.1 NE Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.2 Tributary Status (In/Out of Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.3 Tributary EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.4 Final Stage Boosters Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.5 Wavelength Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.6 Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.6.1 Channel Power Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.6.2 Increase/Decrease Channel Power Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.7 Segment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.7.1 Segment Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.7.2 Segment Tributaries Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.8 AMS Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.9 FEC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.9.1 Marker Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.9.2 FEC Error Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.9.3 FEC Correction Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.10 Laser Management (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.10.1 Laser Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 154
154
4.10.2 ALS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.10.3 Manual Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.10.4 Test Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.10.5 Laser Cut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.11 External points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.11.1 External Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.11.2 External Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.12 Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.12.1 APA View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.12.2 Reset Reference Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.12.3 Refresh Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.12.4 APA Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.12.5 Margin Measurement Commands (MM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.12.6 Back To Back Q Factor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5 PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.1.1 SDH–Combined protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.1.2 Autonomous protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.2 Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.1 Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.2 Invoke/Release a Channel Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.2.3 Invoke Protection Forced Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6 PERFORMANCE COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

6.1 Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.2 Performance Counters Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.2.1 Performance Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.3 Performance Thresholds Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.3.1 Performance Thresholds Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.3.2 Protection Switch Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7 ANALOG MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

7.1 Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.1.1 Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.1.2 SLTE NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.1.3 Submerged Line Elements Monitored by SLTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
7.2 Measurement Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.2.1 Activate Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.2.2 Show NE Measurement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7.2.3 View last Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.2.4 OALW16/OALW40 Measurement Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.2.5 Line Equipment Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.3 Measurement Thresholds Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.3.1 Display Measurement Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8 SUBMERGED LINE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

8.1 Sub Segments Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.2 Repeaters Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.2.1 Sub–Segment Repeaters Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.2.2 Sub–Segment Multi Repeaters Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
8.3 Branching Units Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

8.3.1 Branching Units Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.3.2 Branching Units Sub System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.3.3 Branching Unit Spur Latching Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 154
154
8.3.4 Branching Unit Trunk Latching Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
8.4 View Settings/Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
9 WDM SUBMARINE EQUIPMENT RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

9.1 OALW16/OALW40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

9.1.1 Software download management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.1.2 Connection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.1.3 Synchronization management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.1.4 Loopback management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.1.5 Maintenance Memory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.1.6 NE management : OS resilience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.1.7 MSP domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.1.8 EPS domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10 ALARM MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

10.1 OALW16/OALW40 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.1.1 Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.1.2 Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.1.3 Quality of Service Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.1.4 Environmental Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 4 / 154
154
FIGURES

Figure 2. OALW16/40 SLTE transmission functional blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Figure 3. OALW16 SLTE environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 4. OALW40 SLTE environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 5. Layout of 4+4 configuration SLTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 6. NE maximum layout (rack, subrack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 7. Layout of RSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 8. Submarine Network example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 9. Repeater schematic (two fibre pairs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 10. BU schematic (2 trunk fibre pairs and two channel Add–and–Drop Modules) . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 11. R1 Repeater bloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 12. SMC Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 13. R3 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 14. Branching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 15. OALW16 SLTE and RSU NE symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 16. Views pull down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 17. OALW16 icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 18. NE state icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 19. OALW16 SLTE rack view (1+1 configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 20. OALW16 SLTE subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 21. OALW16 SLTE board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 22. OALW16 SLTE port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 23. OALW16 SLTE Submerged Line view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 24. OALW16 SLTE Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 25. OALW16 SLTE Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 26. OALW16 SLTE External points view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 27. OALW16 RSU rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 28. OALW16 RSU subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 29. OALW16 RSU board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 30. OALW16 RSU port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 31. RSU Submerged Line view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 32. OALW40 SLTE and RSU NE symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 34. OALW40 icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 36. OALW40 SLTE rack view (variable configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 37. OALW40 SLTE subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 38. OALW40 SLTE board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 39. OALW40 SLTE port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 40. OALW40 Submerged Line view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 41. OALW40 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 42. OALW40 Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 43. OALW40 SLTE External points view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 44. Display NE Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 45. NE Characteristics view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 46. Display tributaries status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 47. Tributary Service view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Figure 49. Tributary EOW view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 50. Final Stage Boosters Adjustment option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 154
154
Figure 51. Final stage Boosters Adjustment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 52. Display Wavelength information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 53. Wavelength view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 54. Display channel power information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Figure 55. Channel Power view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Figure 56. Slem segment parameters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 57. Segment Parameters View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 58. Segment Tributaries Configuration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 59. AMS Management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 60. State of AMS insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 61. Marker Configuration option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 62. Marker Configuration view for the FECENC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 63. Marker Configuration view for the FECDEC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 64. FEC Error Insertion options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 65. FEC Error Insertion Configuration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 66. Insert FEC Error confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 67. Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Figure 68. Single Insert FEC Error confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Figure 69. States of FEC error insertion and single FEC error insertion on FECENC board. . . . . . 82
Figure 70. FEC Correction management for FECDEC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 71. FEC correction state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 72. Laser Management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 73. Automatic Laser Shutdown dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 74. Manual restart confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 75. Test restart confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 76. Config External Input Point dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 77. Config External Output Point dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 79. APA view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 80. APA Reset RPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 81. APA Reset RPI confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 82. APA Refresh Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 83. APA command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 84. Margin Measurement command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 85. Back to Back Q Factor commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 86. Combined SDH and SLTE protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 87. Autonomous SLTE protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 88. Protection Configuration selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 89. Protection Configuration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 90. Wdm Protection menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 91. List Of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 92. View Performance Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 93. Performance Point Counters view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 94. FEC Performance Thresholds view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 95. Measure Polling view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 96. Measurement Points List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 97. Measure Polling view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 98. NE measurement data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 99. Analog measures view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 100. Measure menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 101. Measure Thresholds view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Figure 102. Measure Thresholds Global Command view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 103. SubmergedLine menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 104. Sub Segment Parameters View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 154
154
Figure 105. Repeater selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 106. Repeaters List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 107. R0 Repeater Sub System View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 108. Repeater SubSystem Measurement View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 109. Repeater OA Commands View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Figure 110. Switch Pump OA R3–R4 Repeater Commands View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Figure 111. Switch Pump OA R0–R1 Repeater Commands View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 112. Setting Pump OA Commands View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 113. Multi Repeaters Measurement Command View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 114. Multi Repeaters Setting Command View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 115. Multi Repeaters Reset IFF Command View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 116. R2.0 BU Parameters View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 119. BU Sub Systems List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 120. R2 or R3.1 BU Module View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 121. R3.0 BU Module View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 122. BU Module Measurement View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 123. BU OA Commands View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 124. Switch Pump OA Command View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 125. Setting Pump OA Command view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 126. BU Spur Latching Controls dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 127. BU Trunk Latching Controls dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 128. Settings/Thresholds–Segment selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 129. Settings/Thresholds list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
TABLES
Table 1. OALW16 colour icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 2. OALW40 colour icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 3. Channel lockout options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Table 4. Forced switch options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Table 5. OALW16/OALW40 measurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 6. Line equipment measurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 7. Repeater command types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 8. BU command types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 154
154
HISTORY
as internal document 3DW 10146 AAAA PCGNA


Paragraph
1.1 J.Berthomieu 00–01–21 All Creation (1353SH 5.3)
3 J.Berthomieu 01–05–03 All Update for BU R3
[1] TSD–France, Manuel Qualite Branche Systemes de Transmission – TSD,

8AS 11002 0001 UZALB, Ed8

3CK 00051 0002 ASZZA, Ed2



NMU/GT/96/022, Ed1

8AY 02000 0000 ASZZA, Ed4


3BP 22100 0008 DSZZA, Ed1

See NMU Web Server
[10] TSD Vimercate, 1353SH R5 Technical Requirements Specification,

[11] TSD Marcoussis, 1353SH R5 User Interface Specification QB3*,

3AL 71310 0001 PBZZA, Ed1
[12] AAR, 1353SH R3.1 OALW40 SLTE Mapping Specification,

NMU/C/97/0117, Ed.2.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 8 / 154
154

3BP 22100 0066 OMZZA, Ed1

3BP 22100 0067 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0015 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0016 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0017 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0018 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0019 OMZZA, Ed1
[20] ASN Villarceaux, 1353SH5 WDM PFE Operator manual,

3DW 10145 AAAA PCGNA, Ed1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 154
154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.4: WDM SUBM OALW16&40
154
3AL 89062 AA AA
10 / 154
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document describes all the functionalities provided by the 1353SH to manage the 2.5 Gb/s Wave-
length Division Multiplexer (WDM) Submarine NEs.
The following equipments are documented:
– Alcatel OALW16 SLTE

– Alcatel OALW16 RSU
– Alcatel OALW40 SLTE
– Alcatel OALW40 RSU
1.1.2 Edition scope
None.
– QB3* NE Management manual (See Section 2.3 of this handbook).
– QB3* Transmission Management manual (See Section 2.4 of this handbook).
– QB3* Synchronization Management manual (See Section 2.5 of this handbook).
– QB3* Performance Management manual (See Section 2.6 of this handbook).
– QB3* Software Management manual (See Section 2.7 of this handbook).
– Chapter 2: Submarine Transmission System with Repeaters
• Overview
• SLTE overview
• SLTE physical description
• Submerged Line overview
• Submarine Line Equipment
– Chapter 3: SLTE Equipment views
• OALW16 NE graphical representation

• OALW16 SLTE views
• OALW16 RSU views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• OALW40 NE graphical representation

• OALW40 SLTE views
• OALW40 RSU views
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 154
154
– Chapter 4: SLTE functions
• NE characteristics
• Tributary Status (In/Out of Service)

• Tributary EOW

• Final Stage Boosters Adjustment
• Wavelength information
• Channel power
• Segment information
• AMS management
• FEC features
• ALS
• External points
• APA
– Chapter 5: Protection Management
• Overview
• Protection functions
– Chapter 6: Performance Counters
• Generalities
• Performance counters management
• Performance thresholds management
– Chapter 7: Analog Measurements
• Generalities
• Measurement management
• Measurement thresholds management
– Chapter 8: Submerged Line Management
• Sub–segments management
• Repeaters management
• Branching Units management
• View Settings/Thresholds
– Chapter 9: WDM Submarine Equipments Restrictions
• OALW16/OALW40 restrictions
– Chapter 10: Alarm Mapping
• OALW16/OALW40 alarms
1.3 Terminology
1.3.1 Definitions
None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 12 / 154
154
1.3.2 Abbreviations
AMS Alternate Maintenance Signal
APA Automatic Pre emphasis Adjustment
BER Bit Error Ratio
BU Branching Unit
CT Craft Terminal
EOW External Orderwire
EPS Equipment Protection System
FDU FEC Decoder Unit
FEC Forward Error Coding
FEU FEC Encoder Unit
IM Information Model
LRU Line Receiver Unit
LTU Line Transmitter Unit
NE Network Element
OPU Overhead Process Unit
OS Operation System
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OWE Orderwire equipment
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 154
154

RC Remote Control

RSU Remote Supervisory Unit
RX Reception
SW Switch
TBC To Be Confirmed
TP Transmission Point
TPU Tributary Protection Unit
TTEM Back to Back Q factor
TX Transmission
VAD Voltage Alarm Detector

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 154
154
2 SUBMARINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH REPEATERS
The WDM Submarine Network Elements (NEs) are used in the Submarine Transmission System (STS),
which adapts terrestrial signals for transmission over submerged cables.
The STS provides a high transmission capacity through optical fibers by multiplexing several STM–16
optical channels.
2.1 Overview
terrestrial to/from submarine conversion, but they also provide remote management and power
facilities for undersea equipment. They are composed of:
• One or several Submerged Line Terminal Equipments (SLTE): each SLTE actually adapts and
multiplexes SDH signals for submarine optical transmission. The OALW16 can manage up to
eight STM–16 signals. The OALW40 can manage up to sixteen STM–16 signals. Depending
on the requirements, a single station can include several SLTEs.
• Power Feeding Equipment (PFE): used to remotely energize the submerged line cable. The
management of this equipment type is described in [20].
the topology, it can be composed of the following Line Equipments:
• Undersea Repeaters (URs) (also called Repeaters): to amplify the SLTE line signals. A
Repeater is composed of optical amplifiers.
• Branching Units (BUs): placed at junction points of a branched cable and allow to get some
routing flexibility in the traffic management.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 15 / 154
154
PFE PFE
Landing Landing
Station 1 Station 2
Submerged Line Cable UR
SLTE SLTE

Up to URs BU Up to

sixteen sixteen
STM–16 STM–16
URs
Landing
Station 3
Up to PFE Up to
Optical Fiber
sixteen sixteen
(Energized)
STM–16 SLTEs STM–16

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 16 / 154
154
2.2 SLTE Overview
The Submerged Line Terminal equipment (SLTE) are used to adapt SDH signals for transmission over a
submerged cable and to multiplex these signals.
The equipment supported by the 1353SH 5 are the following:
– OALW16/OALW40 SLTE (Submerged Line Terminal Equipment)

– OALW16/OALW40 RSU (Remote Supervisory Unit)
The capacity of the OALW16 equipment is a maximum of 8 STM16 signals multiplexed.

The capacity of the OALW40 equipment is a maximum of 16 STM16 signals multiplexed.
SLTEs are considered as bidirectional and managed at Element Management Level (EML) and at the Craft
Terminal level.
They also collaborate to the process of fault detection and fault recovery on the submerged cable. The
OALW16/OALW40 equipment act as a mediation device between the Line Equipment (Repeaters,
Branching Units) located on the submerged cable and the OS.
For OALW16 SLTE and OALW40 SLTE the Element Manager Layer Operating System (EML–OS) is a
management system which offers a complete range of management functions for the SLTE. In each
station, the EML–OS performs centralized management of Line Terminals, PFEs and a subset of
Branching Units and Repeaters. The management domain of this EML–OS is assigned to one or a set of
stations.
The Craft Terminal (CT) may also manage the SLTE, but with a less user–friendly graphical interface.
The following figure (Figure 2. ) shows the SLTE functional blocks:
– an Optical/Electrical (O/E) conversion function which is the interface with the SDH equipment,
– a FEC function that performs the encoding / decoding of the FEC overhead on the electrical signal,
– an Electrical/Optical (O/E) conversion on a specific wavelength,
– a multiplex/demultiplex (MUX/DEMUX) function which put/extract on the same fiber pair all the
Tributary optical signals,
– a Submerged Line Physical Interface function which mainly performs an post / pre optical
amplification of the multiplexed signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 17 / 154
154
SLTE Transmit side
STM16

O/E O/E
FEC FEC
O/E O/E
MUX
Submarine Line
Physical Interface N*2.5 Gb/s
Submerged Line
SLTE Receive side
Submarine Line
Physical Interface
DEMUX
O/E O/E
FEC FEC
O/E O/E
Figure 2. OALW16/40 SLTE transmission functional blocks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 18 / 154
154
2.2.1 OALW16 SLTE
Figure 3. describes the environment of the Submerged Line Terminal Equipment in a fibre pair termination
station.
– The interface between the Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment (SME) and the SLTE are defined as
Synchronous Transport Module 16 (STM–16) at 2.48832 Gbit/s or OC–48 (SONET) at 2.48832
Gbit/s.
– The OWE equipment allows the transmission of service channels and order wire channels between
distant SLTEs, provided that there are STM–16 links between these SLTEs. These communication
channels are transmitted through the FEC frame overhead availability and come in addition to the
SDH Data Communication channels available at the SDH equipment level. Management of such
equipment is not in the scope of the 1353SH.
– The ”Environmentals” comprise the possible accessory equipment that could communicate with the
SLTE with low level interfaces such as dry loops.
– The SLTE can managed by 2 types of management system: Element Manager (or EML_OS) and
Craft Terminal (CT). The EML_OS offers a complete range of management functions while the Craft
Terminal offers fewer features but can still provide all the fundamental monitoring and control
functions.
Craft
Terminal
EML–OS
SLTE
STM161 Maximum
8 x 2.5 Gb/s
Tributaries
STM168
Undersea
amplifier
Synchronous
Multiplexer Environ–
Equipment OWE PFE
mentals
(SME)
Figure 3. OALW16 SLTE environment
The OALW16 SLTE can process up to 8 STM16 signals. It can protect up to 8 signals in a 1+1 protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 19 / 154
154
2.2.2 OALW40 SLTE

Craft

Terminal
EML–OS
SLTE
STM161 Maximum
16 x 2.5 Gb/s
Tributaries
STM1616
Undersea
amplifier
Synchronous
Equipment OWE PFE
mentals
(SME)
Figure 4. OALW40 SLTE environment
The OALW40 SLTE can process up to 16 STM16 signals with no protected signals. If less than 16 signals
are used, the remaining signals may be used as protecting signals in a 1+1 protection.
2.2.3 OALW16/OALW40 RSU
The OALW16/OALW40 RSU is a subset of the OALW16/OALW40 SLTE dedicated to submerged plant
management (Repeaters and Branching Units). This equipment has no Tributary (and protection) boards
and contains only submerged plant dedicated boards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 20 / 154
154
2.3 SLTE Physical Description
2.3.1 OALW16 SLTE

Several configurations exist for this SLTE (from 1+0 to 8+8).
The two main configurations for the SLTE are the following:
– 4 + 4 configuration: 4 ”X” tributaries protected by 4 ”Y” tributaries

– 8 + 8 configuration: 8 ”X” tributaries protected by 8 ”Y” tributaries
For a 4+4 configuration, the SLTE is composed of three racks (see Figure 5. ):
– one rack contains all the Tributary subracks (”X” tributaries: working channels),
– one rack contains all the common elements: switching, transmission and reception subracks,
– one rack contains all the channels for protection of the tributaries (”Y” tributaries: protecting
channels).
For a 8+8 configuration, two more racks are used for the 4 additional ”X” tributaries and the 4 additional
”Y” tributaries.
One or two Tributary subracks are needed for each wavelength depending on whether or not the protection
is used:
– an unprotected wavelength is transmitted by one Tributary subrack,

– a protected Tributary needs two subracks and switching boards:
• one Tributary subrack from the left rack

• two switching boards from the middle rack
• one subrack from the right rack for protection
If no tributaries are protected, the ”switch” subrack from the middle rack may be omitted.
Whatever the SLTE configuration, two subracks are necessary:
– TxAmp (Common multiplex transmission)

– RxAmp (Common multiplex reception)
The following figure gives a 4+4 SLTE configuration:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 21 / 154
154
Subrack 1 Subrack 1 Subrack 1

Trib 1X Switch 1 Trib 1Y

Trib 2X Tx Amp Trib 2Y

Trib 3X Rx Amp Trib 3Y
Subrack 4 Subrack 4
Trib 4X Trib 4Y
Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3

(X Tributaries) (Common) (Y Tributaries)
Figure 5. Layout of 4+4 configuration SLTE.
2.3.2 OALW40 SLTE
Several configurations exist for this SLTE. The general form is :

i + j with i + j <= 16 and j <= i.
i = number of multiplexed tributaries
j = number of protected tributaries. If j = 0 there is no protection.
The OALW40 SLTE (Submarine Line Terminal Equipment) is a multi–racks equipment.
The NE can have at most 7 racks with 4 subracks in each rack. All the racks have the same size.
The NE determines the number and the content of racks according to the number of wavelengths and the
fact that they are protected or not.
There are 11 types of Subrack :
– Tributary (specific to a Tributary wavelength)
– Switch (protection switching between Tributary subracks)
– Tx Amp (Common multiplex transmission)
– Rx Amp (Common multiplex reception)
– Rx Amp2 (Common multiplex reception – variant)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Aux Amp (Common multiplex reception – second stage)
– Tx Mux (Common multiplex transmission)
3AL 89062 AA AA 22 / 154
154
– Tx Demux (Common multiplex reception).
– SDH Mux
– SDH Demux
– Line Coupler
rack 1 rack 2 rack 3 rack 4 rack 5 rack 6 rack 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Figure 6. NE maximum layout (rack, subrack)
Any subrack type can be theorically fitted in any location of any rack.
2.3.3 OALW16/OALW40 RSU
As the OALW16/OALW40 RSU has no Tributary or protection boards, the equipment is only composed
of the two amplification subracks: TX AMP and RX AMP.
Subrack 1
Tx Amp
Subrack 2
Rx Amp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 7. Layout of RSU
3AL 89062 AA AA 23 / 154
154
2.4 Submerged Line Overview
The line management deals with the management of a segment, the associated Sub Segments and Line
Equipment (Branching Units (BUs), Repeaters) (see Figure 8. ).

BU Repeater1 Repeater2
SLTE1 SLTE2
OS OS
Repeater3
SLTE3
OS
Figure 8. Submarine Network example
2.4.1 Segment Definition
A Segment consists in a set of submerged and station equipment linked to the same submerged cable.
2.4.2 Sub Segment Definition
A Sub Segment is a section between a SLTE and a BU, between 2 BUs, or between 2 SLTEs (in case
of point to point line).
2.4.3 Sub System Definitions
Several generations of submerged equipment are managed via the OALW16/40 SLTE:
– STC Repeater (R0 and R1 Repeater)
– SMC Repeater
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– R3 Repeater (described as R3 – 2 pumps in QB3* tables)
– R4 Repeater (described as R3 – 4 pumps in QB3* tables)
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 154
154
– Branching unit (BU release 2, release 3.0 and release 3.1)
A line Equipment (Repeater or BU) is composed of Sub Systems. A Sub System is composed of Optical
Amplifiers (OA).
a) Repeater
A Repeater contains up to four Repeater Sub Systems, one for each fibre pair. A Repeater Sub
System is made of up to four Optical Amplifiers (OA) which provide amplification for line signal. The
two directions of a Repeater are referred to as ”direction X” and ”direction Y”.
An example of Repeater structure is given in Figure 9.
direction X
OA
OA
Repeater Sub System
OA
OA
Repeater Sub System
REPEATER
direction Y
Figure 9. Repeater schematic (two fibre pairs)
b) Branching Unit
A BU allows individual or group of channels at different wavelengths to be routed to different locations

in the Network. BU contains up to four BU Sub Systems out of four trunk fibre pairs.
• R2.0 BUs
For R2.0 BUs, a BU Sub System is composed of 0 to 2 BU module(s). This number depends
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
on the BU Sub System type. For example, a Pass–through BU Sub System or a Fibre–Routing
BU Sub System doesn’t contain any BU module.
3AL 89062 AA AA 25 / 154
154
A BU module is composed of 1 or 2 OA(s). This number depends on the BU type. For the
Add_Drop_Module_X (resp. Add_Drop_Module_Y) BU, the Add OA of the module Y (resp. X)
doesn’t exist.

• R3.0 BUs

For R3.0 BUs, two additional pairs of optical amplifiers are used: the trunk pair and the spur
pair. Since the amplifiers design in common to the R4.3 Repeaters design, the amplifiers are
named X optical amplifier and Y optical amplifier.
The number of BU modules can be 0 or 1, depending on the BU type. Hereafter the details of
the number of BU modules and optical amplifiers according to the type of BU Sub System:
– passThrough, fibre routing 2 directions, fibre routing X module, fibre routing Y module:
0 BU module, 0 OA
– passThrough with latching (trunk Sub System–spur latch):

1 BU module X with 1 OA dir. X and 1 OA dir. Y
– spur Sub System X module with fibre routing with latching, spur Sub System X module
without fibre routing with latching:
1 BU module X with 1 OA dir. X and 1 OA dir. Y
– spur Sub System Y module with fibre routing with latching, spur Sub System Y module
without fibre routing with latching:
1 BU module Y with 1 OA dir. X and 1 OA dir. Y
• R3.1 BUs
R3.1 BUs are made up 2 trunk amplifiers and 2 spur add drop pairs.
The instantiation of BU modules and BU Sub Systems is managed as a R2.0 BU.
The number of BU modules can be 0 or 2, depending on the BU type. Hereafter the details of
the number of BU modules and optical amplifiers according to the BU type is given:
– passThrough, fibre routing 2 directions, fibre routing X module, fibre routing Y module:
0 BU module, 0 OA
– add drop 2 directions with latching:

2 BU modules X and Y with 2 OAs per BU module (OA add and OA trunk)
An example of Branching Unit structure is given in Figure 10.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 26 / 154
154
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Branching Unit
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
BU Sub System
X X module Y module X
T ADM
D A
Trunk Y
Y
ADM T
D
A
T: Trunk
A: Add
D: Drop Y X Y X
ADM : Add & Drop Module Branch
Figure 10. BU schematic (2 trunk fibre pairs and two channel Add–and–Drop Modules)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 27 / 154
154
2.5 Submerged Line Equipment
The Line Equipment is the following:

– the Repeaters:

• the STC Repeaters: R0 and R1 Repeaters
• the SMC Repeaters
• the R3 Repeaters
• the R4 Repeaters
– the Branching Units
The following figures, given for each type of Line Equipment, specify the measurement points locations
for analog measurements.
2.5.1 STC Repeaters
Two types of ”STC” submerged Repeaters are managed via the OALW16/OALW40 equipment :
– R1 Repeater
– R0 Repeater
Repeater Sub System 1
P.In P.Out
Frequency F1 OA1
I.P1 I.P2 S
P.P1 pump 1 pump 2 P.P2 L
T
Frequency F2
OA2 E
pump 1 pump 2
Repeater Sub System 2
S
3
L
4 T
E
Measurement point (detailed in paragraph Line Equipment Measurement Points)
Figure 11. R1 Repeater bloc

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
STC Repeaters can support up to 4 fibre pairs, and then 8 optical amplifiers.
Two pumps are linked to each optical amplifier and are separately controlled.
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 154
154
Some commands are available on each Optical Amplifiers (OA), mainly the setting and resetting of optical
amplifier pump power and pump status.
Only one type of Repeaters can be installed on one sub–segment.

2.5.2 SMC Repeaters
The SMC Repeaters contains up to four Repeater Sub Systems, one for each fibre pair.
Each Repeater Sub System contains one optical amplifier in each direction. One pump is linked to each
direction.
Pin Pout
A
IPA
Pump A
IPB
Pump B
B
Pout Pin
Figure 12. SMC Repeater
2.5.3 R3 and R4 Repeaters
The R3 and R4 Repeaters contains up to four Repeater Sub Systems, one for each fibre pair.
Each Repeater Sub System contains one optical amplifier in each direction. The R3 Repeater is a
two–pump system, one pump is linked to each optical amplifier. The R4 Repeater is a 4–pump systems,
two pumps are implemented for each optical amplifier.
The two systems (two and four–pump) can be installed in the whole segment but they cannot be mixed
within the same sub–segment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 29 / 154
154
Pin Pout
A

IPA
Pump A
IPB
Pump B
B
Pout Pin
Figure 13. R3 Repeater
2.5.4 Branching Units
Each Branching Unit Sub System contains:
– the Module X, that contains Trunk and Add amplifiers for Direction X,
– the Module Y, that contains Trunk and Add amplifiers for Direction Y.
Each Module has its own physical address, that is not visible to the operator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 30 / 154
154
ADM: Add and drop Module
Line direction X
X Module Y Module
X P.In P.Out X
T ADM
Trunk D A
I.P
ADM T
Y P.Out Y
I.P D
A
P.In
T: OA Trunk
A: OA Add Y X Y X
D: OA Drop Branch
Figure 14. Branching Unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 31 / 154
154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
154
3AL 89062 AA AA
32 / 154
3 SLTE EQUIPMENT VIEWS
3.1 OALW16 NE Graphical representation

3.1.1 OALW16 NE Symbol
The OALW16 NE is represented on the Network Topology view as shown below.
16 16
SLTE RSU
OALW16 SLTE OALW16 RSU
Figure 15. OALW16 SLTE and RSU NE symbols
3.1.2 OALW16 Views Access
These types of views are provided for the OALW16 SLTE:
– Rack view
– Subrack views
– Board views
– Port views
– External points view
– Transmission view
– Reception view
– Submerged Line view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 33 / 154
154
Views
Previous Esc
Equipment

External Points
Transmission
Reception
Submerged Line
Open object Alt+O
Open New Submerged Line Window Alt+M
Close Alt+Q
The Previous command displays the previous view.
The Open New Submerged Line Window command displays the Submerged Line window in a new
window.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 34 / 154
154
3.1.3 OALW16 Icons
In the right column of the views, the following icons give information about the equipment status.
Supervision state
Alignment state
Local access state
Operational state
1354 SN assignment state
Default configuration state
External point alarm state
Craft terminal connected
Alarm filtering state
Multiple line command state
Line supervision state
Figure 17. OALW16 icons
The icons have two significant forms:
– round, a circular icon represents an unstable management state,

– square, a rectangular icon represents a stable management state.
round: square:
Figure 18. NE state icons
The icons have significant colours. The colours are different depending on the status icon:
Icon Status colour
SUP –supervised = green (the NE is supervised).

–activating = brown
–declared = near dark
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 35 / 154
154
Icon Status colour
ALI –aligned = green (the NE configuration is the one displayed in the OS).
–aligning = brown

–in configuration = sky blue
–misaligned = orange
”a key” –granted = sky blue (the NECTAS is allowed to act on to the NE: e.g. configuration
modification)
–denied = white
Q3 –enabled = green (the interface between OS and NE is working well).

–disabled = red
SNM –present = green (the submarine Network Manager (1354SN) is detected as pres-
ent).
–free = sky blue
DEF –not active = green

–active = alarm severity colour (the default configuration hard coded in the NE is the
one currently used).
EXT –cleared = green ( synthesis of Extenal Points).

–alarm = alarm severity colour
CTC –cleared = green (the craft (NECTAS) is connected to the NE).

AF –disabled = green (the Alarm filter is not activated: all alarms are reported into the
OS).
–enabled = dark blue
MLC –ready = green

–in progress = dark blue (the multiline command is on–going).
LSS –operational = green (hardware components allowing line supervision are opera-
tional).
–not operational = dark blue
Table 1. OALW16 colour icons

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 36 / 154
154
3.2 OALW16 SLTE Views
3.2.1 Rack View

To display the Equipment view (default open view):
Figure 19. OALW16 SLTE rack view (1+1 configuration)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 37 / 154
154
3.2.2 Subrack View
To display the Subrack view:


or:
– Double–click on a subrack in the Equipment view.
Figure 20. OALW16 SLTE subrack view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 38 / 154
154
3.2.3 Board View
To display the Board view:

– Click on a board in the Subrack view,


or:
– Double–click on a board in the Subrack view.
Figure 21. OALW16 SLTE board view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 39 / 154
154
3.2.4 Port View
To display the Port view:

– Click on a board in the Board view,

or:
– Double–click on a board in the Board view.
Figure 22. OALW16 SLTE port view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 40 / 154
154
3.2.5 Submerged Line View
This function is available for SLTE in stand alone mode only (1354SN not connected to 1353SH),
assignment state is visible in permanent item panel (SNM Item).
To display the Submerged Line view:
– Select the SubmergedLine option in the Views pull down menu.
Figure 23. OALW16 SLTE Submerged Line view
The Submerged Line view is separated in two parts: the left part is for subsegments, the right part
for Branching Units. This view can not be configured from the OS but from the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 41 / 154
154
3.2.6 Transmission View
The structure of the transmission view proceeds from the SLTE functional blocks (see Figure 2. ).
It allows to directly access the port view associated to the block.

To display the Transmission view:
– Select the Transmission option in the Views pull down menu.

!

" "
!

!

! !

!

Figure 24. OALW16 SLTE Transmission view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. The Alarm synthesis icon is extended to the whole size of the port icon if it is too small.
3AL 89062 AA AA 42 / 154
154
N.B. Links between wdmsource and OptPathSource ports are hidden if the port is not in service. An
icon with letter W (Working) is added to show the tributary in service.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 43 / 154
154
3.2.7 Reception View
The structure of the reception view proceeds from the SLTE functional blocks (see Figure 2. ).

To display the Reception view:
– Select the Reception option in the Views pull down menu.

!

"

Figure 25. OALW16 SLTE Reception view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 44 / 154
154
N.B. Links between wdmsink and OptPathSink ports are hidden if the port is not in service. An icon
with letter W (Working) is added to show the tributary in service.
3.2.8 External Points View

To display the External Points view:
– Select the External Points option in the Views pull down menu.
Figure 26. OALW16 SLTE External points view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 45 / 154
154
3.3 OALW16 RSU Views
The access to the OALW16 RSU views is the same as the OALW16 SLTE, see paragraph 3.1.2.

3.3.1 Rack View
To display the Equipment view:
Figure 27. OALW16 RSU rack view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 46 / 154
154
3.3.2 Subrack View



or:
Figure 28. OALW16 RSU subrack view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 47 / 154
154
3.3.3 Board View


or:
Figure 29. OALW16 RSU board view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 48 / 154
154
3.3.4 Port View



or:
Figure 30. OALW16 RSU port view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 49 / 154
154

Figure 31. RSU Submerged Line view
The Submerged Line view uses the same structure as the SLTE equipment view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 50 / 154
154
3.4 OALW40 NE Graphical Representation
3.4.1 OALW40 NE Symbol

The OALW40 NE is represented on the Network Topology view as shown below.
40 40
SLTE RSU
OALW40 SLTE OALW40 RSU
Figure 32. OALW40 SLTE and RSU NE symbols
3.4.2 OALW40 Views Access
These types of views are provided for the OALW40 SLTE:
– Rack view
– Subrack views
– Board views
– Port views
– Reception view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 51 / 154
154
Views
Previous Esc
Equipment

External Points
Transmission
Reception
Submerged Line
Open object Alt+O
Close Alt+Q
The Previous command displays the previous view.
The Open New Submerged Line Window command displays the Submerged Line window in a new
window.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 52 / 154
154
3.4.3 OALW40 Icons
Supervision state
Alignment state
Local access state
Operational state
1354 SN assignment state
External point alarm state
Multiple line command state
Line supervision state
FarEnd Margin Measurement
PreAmphasis Equalized
Margin Measurement
Figure 34. OALW40 icons
– round, a circular icon represents an unstable management state,

– square, a rectangular icon represents a stable management state.
round: square:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The icons have significant colours. The colours are different depending on the status icon:
3AL 89062 AA AA 53 / 154
154
Icon Status colour
SUP –supervised = green (the NE is supervised).

–activating = brown

ALI –aligned = green (the NE configuration is the one displayed in the OS).
–aligning = brown
”a key” –granted = sky blue (the NECTAS is allowed to act on to the NE: e.g. configuration
modification).
–denied = white
Q3 –enabled = green (the interface between OS and NE is working well).

–disabled = red
SNM –present = green (the submarine Network Manager (1354SN) is detected as pres-
ent).
–free = sky blue

–active = alarm severity colour (the default configuration hard coded in the NE is the
one currently used).
EXT –cleared = green ( synthesis of Extenal Points).

CTC –cleared = green (the craft (NECTAS) is connected to the NE).

AF –disabled = green (the Alarm filter is not activated: all alarms are reported into the
OS).
–enabled = dark blue
MLC –ready = green

–in progress = dark blue (the multiline command is on–going).
LSS –operational = green (hardware components allowing line supervision are opera-
tional).
–not operational = dark blue
FMM –working = dark blue

–not working = green
PEE –equalized = green

–not equalized = dark blue
MM –working = dark blue

Table 2. OALW40 colour icons

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 54 / 154
154
3.5 OALW40 SLTE Views
3.5.1 Rack View

Figure 36. OALW40 SLTE rack view (variable configuration)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 55 / 154
154
3.5.2 Subrack View


or:
Figure 37. OALW40 SLTE subrack view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 56 / 154
154
3.5.3 Board View



or:
Figure 38. OALW40 SLTE board view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 57 / 154
154
3.5.4 Port View


or:
Figure 39. OALW40 SLTE port view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 58 / 154
154
Figure 40. OALW40 Submerged Line view
The Submerged Line view is separated in two parts: the left part is for subsegments, the right part
for Branching Units. This view can not be configured from the OS but from the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 59 / 154
154


!

"
!
!

!

Figure 41. OALW40 Transmission view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Links between wdmsource and OptPathSource ports are hidden if the port is not in service. An
icon with letter W (Working) is added to show the tributary in service.
3AL 89062 AA AA 60 / 154
154
The structure of the reception view proceeds from the SLTE functional blocks (see Figure 2. ).

!

"

Figure 42. OALW40 Reception view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Links between wdmsink and OptPathSink ports are hidden if the port is not in service. An icon
with letter W (Working) is added to show the tributary in service.
3AL 89062 AA AA 61 / 154
154


Figure 43. OALW40 SLTE External points view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 62 / 154
154
3.6 OALW40 RSU Views
For the RSU equipment, there are four types of equipment views: the rack view, the subrack views,
the board views, the port views. A Submarine Line view and the External points view are also
available.
These views are almost identical to OALW16 RSU. Refer to chapter 3.3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 63 / 154
154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
154
3AL 89062 AA AA
64 / 154
4 SLTE FUNCTIONS
4.1 NE Characteristics
This function allows to display the local code of the SLTE. This code is used to define markers inserted
into the FEC frame.
– In the Supervision pull down menu, click on the NE option

– Click on the Characteristics option as follows.
Supervision
NE > Reset NE
Access State > Characteristics...
Alarms > Slem Segment >
Upload Remote Inventory
Dump NE MIB
Figure 44. Display NE Characteristics
The following dialogue box is displayed.
Figure 45. NE Characteristics view
The SLTE local code may be modified by entering a new value in the WDM SLTE Local code field.
– Click on the OK push button to validate your modifications and to close the window.
N.B. A MIB align down operation is necessary to download the new value to the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 65 / 154
154
4.2 Tributary Status (In/Out of Service)
Each Tributary can be set ”In Service” or ”Out of Service”.

When the Tributary is ”Out of Service”, the SLTE is equipped for future use or in maintenance but the

channel is not currently in service and the Tributary does not support traffic. The SLTE does not report
associated Transmission alarms to the OS.
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Tributaries Status option.
Configuration
MIB >
Alarms Severities ...
NE Time...
Tributaries Status ...
EOWs Status ...
Final Stage Boosters Adjustment ...
Performance >
Figure 46. Display tributaries status
The following dialogue box is displayed. This window is resizeable.
Figure 47. Tributary Service view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Each Tributary is associated to one wavelength.
3AL 89062 AA AA 66 / 154
154
– For each Tributary, select the option:
• In Service
• Out of Service
– Click on the OK push button to validate your choices and to close the window.
N.B. A MIB align down operation is necessary to download the new value in the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 67 / 154
154
4.3 Tributary EOW
This function is used to specify which EOW auxiliary channels are in use, and which related alarms must
be transmitted to the OS.

N.B. Alarms related to EOW auxiliary channels are not considered as Transmission alarms.
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the EOWs Status option.
Configuration
MIB >
NE Time...
EOWs Status ...
Final Stage Boosters Adjustement ...
Performance >
Figure 48. Configuration menu
Figure 49. Tributary EOW view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– This dialog box allows to modify for each tributary, the EOW Status value. Four option can be
selected:
• Channel 1 On
3AL 89062 AA AA 68 / 154
154
• Channel 2 On
• Both Channel Off
• Both Channel On
This attribute is used to inhibit alarms from the auxiliary channels per tributary.
– Click on the OK push button to validate your choices and to close the window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 69 / 154
154
4.4 Final Stage Boosters Adjustment
N.B. Only available for the OALW40 SLTE

In order to able to manage a sub–equipped configuration (few wavelength) the parameter indicates the

decreasing to apply in relation to the nominal output power value to all the final stage boosters of the SLTE.
To decrease the final stage Booster output power:
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Final Stage Boosters Adjustment ... option.
Configuration
MIB >
NE Time
EOWs Status ...
Final Stage Boosters Adjustment ...
Performance >
Figure 50. Final Stage Boosters Adjustment option
Figure 51. Final stage Boosters Adjustment view
– Enter a decrease value (from 0 to –6 dB)
– Click on OK to execute the command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 70 / 154
154
4.5 Wavelength Information
This function allows the operator to display the Tributary wavelength.

This value can be displayed for the port of the LTU and LRU boards of the OALW16/40 SLTE.
To display the Wavelength value:
– Open the port view of the LTU or LRU board of a tributary subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Wavelength ... option.
Port

Increase Channel Power
Decrease Channel Power
Channel Power ...
Wavelength ...
Protection Config ...
Wdm Protection >
Laser Management >
Figure 52. Display Wavelength information
Figure 53. Wavelength view
– Click on Close to close the dialogue box.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 71 / 154
154
4.6 Channel Power
4.6.1 Channel Power Value

N.B. This function is only available for LTU board of the OALW16/40 SLTE.
This function allows the operator to display the channel power value (in dBm) of a port.
The value displayed is the value (in dBm) set by the NE after an increase/decrease channel power remote
control.
To display the Channel Power value:
– Open the port view for the LTU board of a Tributary subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Channel Power ... option.
Port

Channel Power ...
Wavelength ...
Wdm Protection >
Laser Management >
Figure 54. Display channel power information
The following window is displayed.
Figure 55. Channel Power view
– Click on Cancel to close the dialogue box.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 72 / 154
154
4.6.2 Increase/Decrease Channel Power Value
The value can be increased or decreased by step of 0.5 dBm.

To increase/decrease the Channel Power value:

– Open the port view for the LTU board of a Tributary subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Increase Channel Power or Decrease Channel Power
option (see Figure 54. ).
– In the confirmation box that displays, click on OK to confirm your operation.
The NE modifies a configuration table with the new channel power value. The alignment state becomes
”misaligned” so the operator has to upload the configuration to see the new value.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 73 / 154
154
4.7 Segment Information
Information about the current segment can be displayed as follows:

– In the the Supervision pull down menu click on the NE option.

– Click on the Slem Segment parameters option.
Supervision
NE > Reset NE
Access State > Characteristics...
Alarms > Slem Segment > Segment Parameters ...
Upload Remote Inventory Segment Tributaries Conf ...
Dump NE MIB
Figure 56. Slem segment parameters menu
4.7.1 Segment Parameters
To display the segment parameters:
– Select the Segment Parameters option, the following window is displayed.
Figure 57. Segment Parameters View
The following attributes are displayed :
• the Segment Label

• the SLTE Orientation
• the Reply Detection On attribute
• the Modulation level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Click on Close to close the window.
3AL 89062 AA AA 74 / 154
154
4.7.2 Segment Tributaries Configuration
To display the segment Tributaries configuration:

– Select the Segment Tributaries Configuration option, the following window is displayed. This
window is resizeable.
Figure 58. Segment Tributaries Configuration view
• In the Tributaries list, select one Tributary,
The Modulation Percentage of the selected Tributary is displayed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 75 / 154
154
4.8 AMS Management
This function controls the insertion of an AMS (Alternate Maintenance Signal) in place of an SDH signal
detected as incorrect.

This function can be enabled or disabled from the FEC port view of the FECENC or FECDEC boards
(Tributary subracks) of the SLTE:
– FECENC for transmission side (to submerged Line),
– FECDEC for reception side (to terrestrial Line).
To enable or disable the AMS insertion:
– Open the port view of the FECENC or FECDEC board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Enable AMS Insertion or Disable AMS Insertion option.
Port

Enable AMS Insertion
Disable AMS Insertion
Marker Configuration
FEC Error Insertion >
Figure 59. AMS Management options
– Click on OK in the confirmation box to validate the operation.
The state of the AMS insertion feature is given in the Termination point view:
Figure 60. State of AMS insertion

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 76 / 154
154
4.9 FEC Features
4.9.1 Marker Configuration

Markers are inserted in the overhead of the FEC in a frame. They are received by the far–end SLTE.
The far–end SLTE compares the expected marker (configured in tables) with the received one and
generates an alarm when they are different.
The marker value can be displayed for the FECENC and FECDEC boards but the information displayed
is different.
The FECENC board is used in the emission process. The expected marker can be set by the operator.
The FECDEC board is used in the reception process. The inserted marker can only be set using the Craft
Terminal, except for the first part, the SLTE local code: (see paragraph 4.1. )
a) FECENC board
• Open the port view.
• In the Port pull down menu, click on the Marker Configuration ... option.
Port

FEC Error Insertion >
Figure 61. Marker Configuration option
Figure 62. Marker Configuration view for the FECENC board

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The window displays the marker composed of the SLTE identification and the channel number.
The FEC Tributary Marker field gives the marker value inserted in the FEC frame.
3AL 89062 AA AA 77 / 154
154
• Click on Cancel to close the window.
b) FECDEC board

• Open the port view.

• In the Port pull down menu, click on the Marker Configuration ... option (see Figure 61. ).
Figure 63. Marker Configuration view for the FECDEC board
The window displays the marker composed of the SLTE identification and the channel number:
– The Fec Tributary Marker: gives the current received value.

– The Fec Expected Tributary Marker: is used to enter the expected marker value defined
as follows:
• SLTE local code field: 3 characters maximum,

• Channel number field: 3 characters maximum.
– You can modified these parameters.
The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box, without
modifications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 78 / 154
154
4.9.2 FEC Error Insertion
This function allows the operator to insert FEC errors in frames (only available for the FECENC board).
This is available for FEC correction test.
Two kinds of insertion are available:
– insertion with specific duration and specific number of errors per Fec frame,
– single insertion with a specific number of errors.
a) FEC Error Insertion with duration parameter
1) FEC Error Configuration
– Open the port view of the FECENC board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the FEC Error Insertion ... option.
Port

FEC Error Insertion > Insert
Insert Config ...
Single Insert
Single Insert Config ...
Figure 64. FEC Error Insertion options
– Click on Insert Config ... option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 65. FEC Error Insertion Configuration view
3AL 89062 AA AA 79 / 154
154
The following parameters can be modified:
– FEC Error Insertion Duration: a value can be entered (in ms by step of 10 ms),
– FEC Error Insertion Rate: the number of errors by frame, from 64 to 960 by step of 64, can

be entered with the option button.

• Click on the OK push button to validate your modifications and to close the window.
modifications.
N.B. The Duration and Rate are the same for all tributaries: if parameter value changes, the new
value is set to all tributaries.
2) Insertion
To perform the FEC error insertion:
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Insert Fec Error option (see Figure 64. ).
– Click on the Insert option.
A confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 66. Insert FEC Error confirmation box
The State of the FEC error insertion is given in the Termination point view (see Figure 69. ).
b) Single FEC Error Insertion
1) Single Insert Configuration
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the FEC Error Insertion ... option (see Figure 64. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Click on Single Insert Config ... option
3AL 89062 AA AA 80 / 154
154
Figure 67. Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration view
The Single FEC Error Insertion Rate parameter can be modified, from 64 to 960 by step of 64,
with the option button.
• Click on the OK push button to validate your modifications and to close the window.
modifications.
N.B. The Rate is the same for all tributaries: if one rate value changes, the new value is set to
all tributaries.
2) Single Insertion
To perform single FEC error insertion:
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the FEC Error Insertion ... option (see Figure 64. ).
– Click on Single Insert option, the following confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 68. Single Insert FEC Error confirmation box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The State of the FEC error insertion is given at the bottom of the Termination point view.
3AL 89062 AA AA 81 / 154
154
Figure 69. States of FEC error insertion and single FEC error insertion on FECENC board.
4.9.3 FEC Correction Management
This function controls the FEC correction.
This function can be enabled or disabled from the FEC port view of the FECDEC board (Tributary subrack)
of the SLTE.
To enable/disable the FEC correction:
– Open the port view of the FECDEC board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Enable FEC Correction or Disable FEC Correction option.
Port

Performance Point Counter...
Show TP Performance Data >
Marker Configuration...
Enable FEC Correction
Disable FEC Correction
Figure 70. FEC Correction management for FECDEC board
A confirmation box is displayed.
– Click on OK to validate the operation.
The State of the FEC correction is given at the bottom of the Termination point view:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 71. FEC correction state
3AL 89062 AA AA 82 / 154
154
4.10 Laser Management (ALS)
4.10.1 Laser Commands

To display the Laser management options for one Tributary:
– Open the affected Port view of the tributary subrack, or of the TXAMP/RXAMP subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Laser Management option:
Port
Channel Power ...
Wavelength ...
Wdm Protection >
Laser Management > ALS Configuration
Manual Restart
Test Restart
Enable Laser Cut Off
Disable Laser Cut Off
Figure 72. Laser Management options
The commands displayed are described in the next sections.
4.10.2 ALS Configuration
This option allows to configure the Automatic laser shutdown (ALS).
– In the Laser Management pull down menu, click on ALS Configuration ... option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 83 / 154
154
Figure 73. Automatic Laser Shutdown dialogue box
The following parameters are displayed and can be modified:
• ALS State: Enable or Disable
• ALS Auto Restart:
– Enable: if the laser is stopped, the restart is automatic after a wait time of x seconds (x is
the value displayed in Wait To Restart Time field),
– Disable: if the laser is stopped, the restart needs to be manual.
• Wait To Restart Time: the number of seconds to wait before the automatic restart.
4.10.3 Manual Restart
To restart the laser manually:
– In the Laser Management pull down menu, click on Manual restart option.
Figure 74. Manual restart confirmation box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Click on OK to confirm the manual laser restart.

3AL 89062 AA AA 84 / 154
154
4.10.4 Test Restart
To test the laser restart:

– In the Laser Management pull down menu, click on Test restart option.
Figure 75. Test restart confirmation box
– Click on OK to confirm the test Laser restart.

4.10.5 Laser Cut Off
The operator can switch the laser OFF or ON on the following boards:
– all LRU boards (reception from the line),

– the PREMAIN board (pre–amplification at reception from the line).
The operator can only switch the laser OFF on the following boards:
– all LTU boards (transmission to the line). For those boards, commands are available on the
optPathSource object supported by the board.
– the POSTMAIN board (postamplification at transmission to the line)
N.B. In that case the restart of the laser is only possible by enabling the ALS and doing a Manual
Restart.
To enable or disable the Laser Cut Off:
– In the Laser Management pull down menu, click on Enable Laser Cut Off or Disable Laser Cut
Off.
– Click on OK to confirm the command.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 85 / 154
154
4.11 External points
For general information about the external points, refer to the NE MANAGEMENT manual.

4.11.1 External Input Points
For OALW16/OALW40 NEs, 24 external input points are available.

They have all modifiable user label.
To configure an external input point:
– From the External Points view, select an input point,

– In the External Points pull down menu, select the Config... option.
– or, from the External Points view, double click on the concerned row in the External Input points list.
Figure 76. Config External Input Point dialogue box
The following characteristic can be modified:
– User Label: a string has to be entered to define the point label
– Click on OK push button to validate the modification and close the dialogue box.
N.B. An MIB align down operation is necessary to download the new value in the NE.
4.11.2 External Output Points
For OALW16/OALW40 NEs, 8 external output points are available.

They have all modifiable characteristics.
To configure an external output point:
– From the External Points view, select an output point,

– or, from the External Points view, double click on the concerned row in the External output points list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 86 / 154
154
Figure 77. Config External Output Point dialogue box
The following characteristics can be modified:
– User Label: a string can be entered to define the new point label
– Type: Output, not modifiable
– State: On or Off, chosen with the option button
– Station Output Control Type: Latching (stable output) or Momentary (a pulse), chosen with the option
button
– Momentary Contact Time: indicates duration of the output in case of momentary type (in ms by step
of 10), you can enter a new value
– Click on OK push button to validate the modifications and close the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 87 / 154
154
4.12 Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment
N.B. This feature is only available for the OALW40 SLTE and if APA is authorized by 1354SN.

N.B. This function is available for SLTE in stand alone mode only (when1354SN is not connected

to 1353SH), assignment state is visible in permanent item panel (SNM Item).
It provides procedures to homogenize transmission quality of WDM Submarine equipment by power

adjustment of each channel. Measurement quality is based on FEC Bit Error Rate evaluation. APA is
performed during installation of network, but can be useful for readjustment due to system ageing or
capacity upgrade.
The APA view is accessible by Views pull down menu.
Views
Previous Esc
Equipment
External Points
Transmission
Reception
Submerged Line
Automatic Pre Emphasis
Open object Alt+O
Close Alt+Q

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 88 / 154
154
4.12.1 APA View
– Click on Automatic Pre Emphasis in Views menu, the following view is displayed.
Figure 79. APA view
All the equipped Tributaries are displayed. The Tributaries ’off–service’ are greyed.
From this view, the operator can visualize a table with one row per channel and following columns:
– Reference Power (RPi): contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value
– Current Power (Pi): contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value
– Channel Margin (Cmi): contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Number of Uncorrected Block: contains an integer or ’???’ if unknown value
– Channel Margin Discrepancy (delta Cmi): contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value
3AL 89062 AA AA 89 / 154
154
– System Margin (Sm): contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value
– Reference System Margin (RSm): contains an integer or ’???’ if unknown value

– APA Channel Status: a string (undefined, excessive cumulated correction, local transmission failure,

far end transmission failure, bad power variation).
The operator can send actions using APA pull down menu in menu bar.
4.12.2 Reset Reference Power
This function reset the power reference with the current values.
N.B. APA, MM and TTEM procedures must be stopped or aborted.
To activate the reset:
– Click on Reset RPI option in the APA pull down menu as follow:
APA
Reset RPI
Refresh Measurements
APA >
Margin Measurement >
Back To Back Q Factor >
Figure 80. APA Reset RPI
After execution a message box is displayed:
Figure 81. APA Reset RPI confirmation box
– Click on OK to close the message box.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 90 / 154
154
4.12.3 Refresh Measurements
This function allows to see the instantaneous APA measurement values>

To refresh measurement:
– Click on Refresh Measurements option in the APA pull down menu as follow:
APA
Reset RPI
APA >
Figure 82. APA Refresh Measurements
After execution a message box is displayed.
4.12.4 APA Commands
The Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment procedure (APA) is the main facility to optimize all channel
margin discrepancies by performing several iterations of margin measurement and pre–emphasis
adjustment.
To send a APA command:
– Click on APA option in the APA pull down menu as follow:
APA
Reset RPI
APA >
Start APA
Force APA
Abort APA
Figure 83. APA command

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Click on the chosen command.
This allows to activate, force or abort APA procedure by selecting Start APA, Force APA or Abort APA.
3AL 89062 AA AA 91 / 154
154
1) Start APA
N.B. APA, MM and TTEM must be stopped or aborted.

After execution, a message box is displayed if the command is successfully completed:

”Activate command successful”.
2) Force APA
N.B. APA must be in standby, MM and TTEM must be stopped or aborted.
A confirmation box is displayed to confirm the execution.
3) Abort APA
N.B. APA must be in running state.
4.12.5 Margin Measurement Commands (MM)
The Margin Measurement procedure (MM) is a sub part of APA procedure which only calculates all the
channel margin discrepancies. The operator can activate this procedure at any time even if an APA
procedure is not started.
To send a MM command:
– Click on Margin Measurement option in the APA pull down menu as follow:
APA
Reset RPI
APA >
Margin Measurement > Start MM
Back To Back Q Factor > Force MM
Abort MM
Figure 84. Margin Measurement command
This allows to activate, force or abort Margin Measurement procedure by selecting Start MM, Force
MM or Abort MM.
1) Start MM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 92 / 154
154
2) Force MM
N.B. MM must be in standby, APA and TTEM must be stopped or aborted.


3) Abort MM
N.B. MM must be in running state.
4.12.6 Back To Back Q Factor Commands
The Back To Back Q Factor Measurement procedure (TTEM) is a sub part of APA procedure to only
calculate all the channel Q Factor. The operator can activate this procedure only when the APA procedure
has detected a Q variation which does not correspond to the expected one.
To send a TTEM command:
– Click on Back To Back Q Factor option in the APA pull down menu as follow:
APA
Reset RPI
APA >
Back To Back Q Factor > Start TTEM
Force TTEM
Abort TTEM
Figure 85. Back to Back Q Factor commands
This allows to activate, force or abort Back To Back Q Factor measurement procedure by selecting
Start TTEM, Force TTEM or Abort TTEM.
1) Start TTEM

2) Force TTEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. TTEM must be in standby, APA and MM must be stopped or aborted.
3AL 89062 AA AA 93 / 154
154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
3)
01
N.B.
Abort TTEM

TTEM must be in running state.
154
3AL 89062 AA AA
94 / 154
5 PROTECTION MANAGEMENT
5.1 Overview
The aim of the mechanism is to protect the Tributaries (O/E, FEC and E/O functional blocks (see
Figure 2. ). The other functional blocks are passive optical components and they are supposed to be
reliable.
The SLTE protection consists in duplicating a Tributary signal for a protected SLTE on 2 Tributaries:
– Tributary X
– Tributary Y
Two modes for the 1+1 protection are available:
– SDH–Combined
– autonomous
5.1.1 SDH–Combined protection mode
A protected SLTE is used in conjunction with a protected SDH equipment (Multiplex Section protection).
Each Tributary on each side is physically duplicated.
Signal is received on both Tributaries from the SDH equipment and selection is made by SLTE before
sending it to the submarine line. Switch of the transmit path is based on local alarms or on Remote Switch
request sent by the distant SLTE.
Selection of the working receive path is made by the SDH equipment. In some cases (when SDH
equipment is provided by ALCATEL) the information of the receive path chosen by the SDH equipment
will be forwarded to the SLTE through an umbilical interface.
The operator has the ability to allow/inhibit the automatic protection switch and to force to protection
switch. The protection switch is non–revertible (this means that the switch remains on the new transmit
path even if alarms on the initial one are cleared).
X X
switch Submerged switch

Line
Y Y
SDH equipment SLTE SLTE SDH equipment
One direction of traffic shown

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 86. Combined SDH and SLTE protection
3AL 89062 AA AA 95 / 154
154
N.B. For the OALW40, not all the Tributaries are ”1+1 protected”. As the maximum number of
Tributaries subrack is 16, the following protection scheme are possible: (8+8), (7+7 and 2+0),
(6+6 and 4+0), (5+5 and 6+0), (4+4 and 8+0), (3+3 and 10+0), (2+2 and 12+0), (1+1 and 14+0),
(16+0).

5.1.2 Autonomous protection mode
N.B. This function is only available for the OALW40 SLTE
In this mode, the submarine protection is independent from the SDH protection:
– Each SLTE Tributary on each side is physically duplicated
– The signal received from the ADM, is splitted at the SLTE interface level and broadcasted to both
paths (working and spare). Selection is made by the SLTE before sending it to the transmission line.
Switch of the transmit path is based on local alarms or on Remote Switch request.
– At the receive side, the signal from the line is splitted after the WDM Demux and broadcasted to two
paths (working and spare). On the output side a selection is made and only the working path is
transmitted to the ADM.
– The operator has the ability to allow/inhibit the automatic protection switch and force to protection.
The protection switch is non–revertible, and side independent.
switch Submerged switch

Line
SDH SLTE SLTE SDH

equipment equipment
Figure 87. Autonomous SLTE protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 96 / 154
154
5.2 Protection Functions
In the Equipment view, the ”X” Tributary subracks and the ”Y” Tributary subracks protect each other.
No protection scheme is allowed. However, the protection can be configured, invoked or released.
N.B. All operations are performed from the port view of the LTU board.
5.2.1 Protection Configuration
For each couple of ”X” and ”Y” Tributary subracks, the protection can be configured from the port view of
the LTU board.
For each Tributary subrack, the protection can be configured as follows:
– Select the Port pull down menu.

– Select the Protection Config ... option.
Port

Channel Power ...
Wavelength ...
Wdm Protection >
Laser Management >
Figure 88. Protection Configuration selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 97 / 154
154
Figure 89. Protection Configuration view
The following parameters can not be modified:
– Revertive/Non Revertive mode: set to No. The switch to the protecting element is maintained even
after a recovery from failure.
– Wait To Restore Time: set to 0. The SLTE will wait 0 second before trying to switch back.
– Protection Group Type: set to 1+1. One ”X” is protected by one ”Y” subrack.
– Wdm Protection Speed: Slow or Fast, can be modified with the option button.
– Rdi Inclusion Status: Enable or Disable, can be modified with the option button.
– Hold Off Time (ms): a value can be entered (from 10 ms to 2550 ms by step of 10 ms).
– Click on OK to validate your modifications.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 98 / 154
154
5.2.2 Invoke/Release a Channel Lockout
This function enables to lock or unlock a Tributary from any protection switches. If a Tributary is locked
(”Invoke lockout”), a protected channel cannot be automatically switched by SLTE.
The following table gives the operator possibilities depending on current protection status.
X = option available
– = option not available
Switch type manual lockout local lockout forced auto switch

switch
invoke lockout – – X X
release lockout – X – –
Table 3. Channel lockout options
To invoke or release a Tributary lockout:
– In the Port pull down menu select the Wdm Protection option.
– Select Invoke option and then Lockout option: the protection mode is auto–remote, the switch can
occur only by an operator command,
– Select Release option and then Lockout option: the protection mode is auto–full, the switch can
occur either by an operator command or an automatic switch (if an invoke protection alarm is
detected).
As an example, in the following figure, a channel lockout is invoked.
Port
Channel Power ...
Wavelength ...
Wdm Protection > Invoke > Lockout
Laser Management > Release > Forced
Figure 90. Wdm Protection menu options

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 99 / 154
154
5.2.3 Invoke Protection Forced Switch
This function allows the operator to force the switching from the protected channel to the protecting
channel.

The following table gives the operator possibilities depending on current protection status.
X = option available
– = option not available
Switch type manual lockout local lockout forced auto switch

switch
invoke force switch – X X X
Table 4. Forced switch options
To invoke force switch:
– In the Port pull down menu select the Wdm Protection option.
– Select Invoke option and then Force option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 100 / 154
154
6 PERFORMANCE COUNTERS
6.1 Generalities
Two kinds of counters are managed.
a) FEC counters
FEC counters cumulate the number of erroneous bit corrected at reception side using FEC code
inserted in the Submarine FEC frame.
Two accumulation periods are supported: 15 minutes and 24 hours. For each Transmission Point (1
per tributary), a current block, a previous block and n more recent blocks of counters are stored in
the SLTE. The list of activated TPs is configureable and separately managed for CTs and OS. Once
a TP performance collect is activated from management systems, the SLTE manages the collect and
transfer on request all or part of the block counters.
One day of 15 minutes counters and one week of daily counters are stored in the SLTE.
The FEC alarm threshold configuration is part of the SLTE configuration. A low and a high thresholds
are defined for each counter to raise alarms or an urgent alarm when they are crossed.
Counters are collected and sent to the OS via the performance monitoring application.
b) B1 byte counters
The B1 byte (at the Regeneration section) is extracted from each STM16 frame and collected
according to performance monitoring principles. Counters cumulate an error number.
The management procedure is the same as for FEC counter: accumulation periods, collect,
threshold and alarm generation.
The SLTE manages at least two different counter lists (OS and CT).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 101 / 154
154
6.2 Performance Counters Management
6.2.1 Performance Points List

To display the all the Performance points, use the global command:
– Click on the Diagnosis pull–down menu,

– Select the List Of option:
Diagnosis
Compare
Show NE Alarms
View >
List Of > Perf Points ...
Show NE Performance Data > Meas Points ...
Figure 91. List Of options
– Select the Perf Points ... option, the following window is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 102 / 154
154
Figure 92. View Performance Points List
The list displays the boards where the performance requests are possible. For each board the
performance points already active are displayed:
• /WDay: a 24Hours performance point is already started.

• /W15: a 15Minutes performance point is already started.
Two types of measure request are available:
1) Unitary measure request
• In the Equipment list, select one board.

• Click on Details button, the following window is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 103 / 154
154
Figure 93. Performance Point Counters view
• Click on the chosen Performance points.

• Click on OK, to execute the command.
2) Global measure request
• In the Equipment list (see Figure 92. ), select the affected boards:
– to select a continuous group of boards keep the Shift button on and click on the first
element to be selected and then on the last,
– to select a discontinuous group of boards keep the Ctrl button on and click on every
element to be selected,
– to select all the boards click on Select All button.
• In the Global command area, select with the option button: Start or Stop for 15Minutes and
24Hours performance.
• Click on OK.
modifications.
• A In Progress window is displayed during the update setting up. You can stop the operation with
clicking on Abort.
The performance points are updated in the list (see Figure 92. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 104 / 154
154
6.3 Performance Thresholds Management
6.3.1 Performance Thresholds Configuration

To configure the thresholds:
– Click on the Configuration menu (see Figure 48. ).

– Select the Performance option.
– Select the Performance Thresholds... option.
– Select the requested counter name.
For the FEC counters, the following window is displayed.
Figure 94. FEC Performance Thresholds view
– The thresholds can be modified.
6.3.2 Protection Switch Level Adjustment
The operator can configure thresholds for B1 and FEC instantaneous Bit Error Ratio values, in order to
have the same values as Terrestrial associated NEs (ADMs).
BER thresholds are composed of low and high thresholds.
The SLTE generates alarms when a calculated instantaneous BER value crosses a threshold.
These BER thresholds are attached to boards:
– FECENC board for B1 BER thresholds (Reception of terrestrial signal),

– FECDEC board for FEC BER thresholds (Reception of submarine signal).
For OALW16, all values are NE dependant. For OALW40, all values are channel dependant.
They are displayed as analog measurement thresholds. See chapter 7.3 for more details.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 105 / 154
154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
154
3AL 89062 AA AA
106 / 154
7 ANALOG MEASUREMENTS
7.1 Generalities
7.1.1 Principles
Analog measurements are used for submarine transmission network elements such as the SLTE and the
PFE, in order to follow as closely as possible the deterioration of equipment with age and to be warned
as early as possible of any impeding problem. Those equipment must satisfy stringent requirements for
long period of time (typically 25 years).
From the operator point of view, there are three ways to do analog measurements:
a) Operator query: the operator requests the current value of some measurements (grouped in one
Measurement Point). The OS relays this request to the NE, which responds with the measurement
values. The OS can then display the results to the operator, and record them.
b) Periodic polling: for the operator, this works along the same principles as for Performance
Monitoring. The following steps can be distinguished:
1) In a preliminary setup phase, the operator specifies which measurements have to be polled
(choice of measurement points), as well as the time interval between polls for each
measurement point (every 15 minutes (at 0, 15, 30, 45 past) or every 24hours (at midnight)).
2) For each measurement point, the OS periodically recovers current measurement values from
the NE and stores them in the measurement database.
c) Peak automatic collection measurement
High and low alarm thresholds are defined for each measurement points. When the current
measurement value continuously measured by the SLTE, becomes over the high threshold, an alarm
is raised. When the measurement value is below the low threshold, an alarm is raised. The
associated measured value is called a Peak measurement.
Peak measurements are automatically collected when a threshold alarm is notified.
The SLTE recovers all latest peak measurements stored for the MP. Several peak measurements
values can be collected between two periodic collects.
Peak measurements are stored as extra–measurements.
N.B. Time management: the OS modifies the effective duration of the period according to time
changes. From the SLTE point of view, time changes have no impact on the measurement
management.
7.1.2 SLTE NEs
The SLTE NEs perform analog measurements continually, independently of the OS. Measurements are
transferred to the OS in blocks called Measurement Points, on OS request. The NE does not periodically
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
store measurement values as in performance monitoring: on OS measurement request, the NE sends

back the current (present) value of each measurement.
3AL 89062 AA AA 107 / 154
154
7.1.3 Submerged Line Elements Monitored by SLTE
The Line Equipments are the Repeaters and the Branching Units.

Some analog measurements can be retrieved by the OS from the submerged plant. They are mainly input

power, output power and pump current of optical amplifiers.
For the WDM Submerged equipment, many measurements are available. Nevertheless, reading requests
from management systems are needed to activate the measurement reading process, except for peak
measurements.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 108 / 154
154
7.2 Measurement Management
7.2.1 Activate Measurements

a) From a subrack view
From a subrack views, measurements can be run on a selected board of this subrack:
– From the Equipment view, open the subrack view in which the requested board is located.
– Click on the requested board.
– Click on the Equipment pull–down menu.
– Select the Measure option.
– Select the Measure Polling option (see Figure 100. ).
Figure 95. Measure Polling view
This window displays the measurement points accessible on the chosen board.
– To run measurements, click on toggles then on OK to validate the choices.

b) From the Measurement Points list
To display the list of the Measurement points for the whole NE:
– Click on the Diagnosis menu.

– Select the List of option.
– Select the Meas Points... option.
The following window is displayed. This window is resizable.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 109 / 154
154
Figure 96. Measurement Points List view
The list displays the boards where the measurement requests are possible. For each board the
measurement points already active are displayed:
• /WDay: a 24Hours measurement point is already started.

• /W15: a 15Minutes measurement point is already started.
1) Unitary measure request
• In the Equipment list, select one board.

• Click on Details button, the following window is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 110 / 154
154
Figure 97. Measure Polling view
• Click on the chosen measurement points.

2) Global measure request
• In the Equipment list (see Figure 96. ), select the affected boards:
– to select a continuous group of tributaries keep the Shift button on and click on the first
– to select a discontinuous group of tributaries keep the Ctrl button on and click on every
– to select all the boards click on Select All button.
• In the Global command area, select with the option button: Start or Stop for 15Minutes and
24Hours measurement.
• Click on OK.
A In Progress window is displayed during the update setting up. You can stop the operation with
clicking on Cancel.
The measurement points are updated in the list (see Figure 96. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 111 / 154
154
7.2.2 Show NE Measurement Data
To do specific research on all measurements already recovered from the NE:


– Select the Show NE Measurement Data option.
Figure 98. NE measurement data view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 112 / 154
154
7.2.3 View last Measurements
To display the Analog Measures:


– Select the View option.

– Select the Analog Measures option.
Figure 99. Analog measures view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 113 / 154
154
7.2.4 OALW16/OALW40 Measurement Points List
All measurement points in the SLTE are characteristic of individual boards.

N.B. A measurement point is in fact a block of measurements.

The SLTE does not manage measurement periods. Measurements reading is activated in the SLTE by
the reception of a reading request from OS.
The list of measurement points is flexible according to the NE configuration (mainly the number of
Wavelengths managed).
The following table gives the measurement points for each board.
!"
FEC Encoder FECENC_iX/Y – Receive Light Level
Line Transmitter LTU_iX/Y_Laser – Laser output power

– Laser bias current
– Laser temperature
LTU_iX/Y_PumpLaser – Pump laser temperature

– Pump laser bias
– Pump laser output power
– Output power
FEC Decoder FECDEC_iX/Y – Laser bias

– Laser output power
Line Receiver LRU_iX/Y_LightLevel – Receive Light Level

– Filtered light level
LRU_iX/Y_PumpLevel – Laser temperature

– Laser bias current
– Laser output power
Post– amplifica- OPAW_PumpLaser1/ – Receive Light Level

tion OPAW_PumpLaser2 – Pump laser temperature
– Pump laser current
– Output power
Pre–amplification OPRW_PumpLaser1/ – Receive Light Level

OPRW_PumpLaser2 – Pump laser temperature
– Pump laser current
– Output power
Booster OPABW_Rx_PumpLaser1/ – Receive Light Level

OPABW_Rx_PumpLaser2 – Pump laser temperature
OPABW_Aux_PumpLaser1/ – Pump laser current
OPABW_Aux_PumpLaser2 – Pump laser output power
– Output power
Table 5. OALW16/OALW40 measurement points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 114 / 154
154
7.2.5 Line Equipment Measurement Points
The Line Equipment include the different types of Repeaters and the Branching Units.
The measurements are mainly input power, output power and pump current of optical amplifiers,
composing the Repeaters and the Branching Units (see chapter 2.5).
The following table gives the measurements for each type of repeater and for the Add and Drop Branching
Unit.
Line Measurements Point Unit

equipment Name
STC Input power P.In dBm

Repeater Output power P.out dBm
(R0, R1) Pump 1 reserve current I.P1 %
Pump 1 power P.P1 dBm
Pump P1 status –– ON/OFF
Pump 2 reserve current I.P2 %
SMC Input power (apply to the Optical Amplifier (OA)) P.In dBm
Repeater Output power (apply to the OA) P.Out dBm
Pump current (apply to one pump of the 2 pumps) I.P %
R3 Repeater Input power (apply to the OA) P.In dBm

Output power (apply to the OA) P.Out dBm
Pump current 1480 nm I.P %
Pump current 980 nm –– ON/OFF
Intermittent fault flag

Pump current (apply to the pair of the pump lasers in series) I.P %
Intermittent fault flag –– ON/OFF
Branching Input power (apply to the OA) P.In dBm

Unit Output power (apply to the OA) P.Out dBm
(for OA Add Pump current (apply to one pump of the 2 pumps (BU 2 pumps) I.P %
and Trunk) or to the pair of the pump lasers in series (BU 4 pumps))
Table 6. Line equipment measurement points
No thresholds are managed for the Line Equipment measurements at EML level.
The measurements on Line Equipment can only be performed from the Submerged Line View and are
effectively performed when the Measurement push–button is clicked.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 115 / 154
154
7.3 Measurement Thresholds Management
7.3.1 Display Measurement Thresholds

The threshold(s) associated to each measurement point are displayed and some can be modified by the
operator:
– Select the requested board.
– Select the Measure Thresholds option.
Equipment

Slots Labels On/OFF Measure Thresholds
Ampli Power >
Figure 100. Measure menu
Figure 101. Measure Thresholds view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. The thresholds displayed in the window depend on the selected board.
3AL 89062 AA AA 116 / 154
154
For each measurement type, a high and a low threshold are displayed. Some can be modified.
– Click on OK to validate modified thresholds.

N.B. A MIB align down operation is necessary to download the new values to the NE.
Global command option:
This option is only relevant for boards which have modifiable thresholds.
– Modify the affected values.
– Click on the Global command button in the Measure Thresholds window. The following window is
displayed.
Figure 102. Measure Thresholds Global Command view
– In the Equipment list, select the affected boards:
• to select a continuous group of tributaries keep the Shift button on and click on the first element
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
to be selected and then on the last,

• to select a discontinuous group of tributaries keep the Ctrl button on and click on every element
to be selected,
3AL 89062 AA AA 117 / 154
154
• to select all the boards click on Select All button.
– Click on OK, the command is executed for all the selected boards.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 118 / 154
154
8 SUBMERGED LINE MANAGEMENT
8.1 Sub Segments Management
This function allows to display and/or to manage the Repeaters contained in that portion of submerged
cable (between a SLTE and a Branching Unit (BU) or between two BUs or between 2 SLTE when there
is no BU).
The Sub Segments are displayed in the left part of the Submerged Line view.
N.B. A Sub Segment is equipped with repeaters of the same type.
Information about a Sub Segment can be displayed as follows:
– In the Submerged Line view, click on the Sub Segment for which the parameters have to be
displayed,
– Click on the SubmergedLine pull down menu, the following menu is displayed:
SubmergedLine
Sub Segment Parameters...

Sub Segment Repeaters List...
Sub Segment Multi Repeaters Commands... >
BU Parameters...
BU Latching Controls...
BU Sub System List...
View Settings/Thresholds
Figure 103. SubmergedLine menu
– Select the Sub Segment Parameters... option: the following window is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 104. Sub Segment Parameters View
3AL 89062 AA AA 119 / 154
154
The following attributes are displayed :
• the Sub Segment Label

• the Number of Fibre Pairs

• the Accessibility: this value (Accessible or Not Accessible) can be modified by the operator with
the option button
– Click on the OK push button to validate your modification and to close the window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 120 / 154
154
8.2 Repeaters Management
This function allows the operator to display the list of all Repeaters on the selected sub–segment and to
display the characteristics of each of them.
The NE can be interfaced with the following Repeaters:
– the R0 Repeater
– the R1 Repeater
– the SMC Repeater
– the R3 Repeaters
– the R4 Repeater
– the R4.10 Repeater
8.2.1 Sub–Segment Repeaters Characteristics
a) Repeaters list
The Repeaters list can be displayed as follows:
• In the Submerged Line view, click on the sub–segment (Sx) for which the Repeaters list has to
be displayed,
• Click on the SubmergedLine pull down menu,
• Select the Sub Segment Repeaters List... option: the following window is displayed.
or by double click on a sub–segment.
Figure 105. Repeater selection
This window allows the selection of the Repeaters to list:
• Enter the name of the specific Repeater,
• Click on the OK push button to validate your choice.

The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box without
modifications.
The Figure 107. is then displayed.
Or:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Click on the Search Repeaters button

The following list of the all Repeater names is displayed:
3AL 89062 AA AA 121 / 154
154
Figure 106. Repeaters List View
N.B. Maximum number of Repeaters is: 50 for R0, 110 for R1, 50 for SMC and 250 for R3 or
R4 (i.e. R3 + R4 Repeaters are less than 250).
• Select a name in the list,

• Click on OK to submit the choice: the following window is displayed.
The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box without
modifications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 107. R0 Repeater Sub System View
3AL 89062 AA AA 122 / 154
154
b) Management of Repeater characteristics
N.B. The maximum number of sub–systems is 4 whatever the Repeater type is.
The following table indicates the availability of the command type according to the line equipment
type.
R3 Repeater R4 Repeater R0/R1 Re- SMC Repeat-

peater er
Set pump ON/OFF X X X
Replace power setting X X X
Set to default X
Reset Intermittent X X
Table 7. Repeater command types
Once the Repeater characteristics are displayed (see Figure 107. ), some may be modified.
The following characteristics can not be modified:
• the Sub Segment Label

• the Repeater Label
• the Repeater Type
• the Repeater Orientation
• the Sub–system Address
For each sub–system associated to a sub–segment, the sub–system characteristics can be modified
by the operator:
• State: this value (Accessible or Not Accessible) can be modified by the operator:
– Click on the option button(s) to choose the state(s),

– Click on the Apply push button to validate your modifications.
• Click on OK to confirm your command.
modifications.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 123 / 154
154
– Three push–buttons are available to access Optical Amplifier or send Measurement command from
the Repeater Sub System view (see Figure 107. ):
1) Measurement push–button: when clicked, the following window is displayed:

Figure 108. Repeater SubSystem Measurement View
– Sub Segment Label

– Repeater Label
– Sub System number
– In the Reply Detection list, select one equipment. To can modify characteristics, the
selected sub–system must be ’accessible’ (see Repeater Sub System view).
For the selected equipment the following characteristics can be modified:
– Modulation index: can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus Four
with the option button. The incrementation or decrementation is based on the default SLTE
configuration,
– Click on Measurement push–button to send the measurements command.
– A confirmation box is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

modifications.
3AL 89062 AA AA 124 / 154
154
– Click on Cancel to close the window.
2) OA X and OA Y push–buttons: when clicked, the following window is displayed:

N.B. These two options are greyed for the SMC Repeater (not available).
Figure 109. Repeater OA Commands View
N.B. The options displayed in the Repeater OA Commands view above depends on the
Repeater type:
– for the R0 and R1 Repeaters:
• Switch Pumps
• Set Pumps
• Reset OA
• Reset Global OA
– for the R3 Repeater:
• Switch Pumps
• Set Pumps
• Reset Intermittent Fault Detection (optional)
In the Figure 109. , the following characteristics can not be modified:
– Sub Segment Label

– Repeater Label
– Sub System number (value from 1 to 4)
– OA Type: X Amplifier when clicked on OA X, Y Amplifier when clicked on OA Y
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The following characteristic can be selected as command parameter:
– Modulation index: can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus Four
with the option button.
3AL 89062 AA AA 125 / 154
154
To send Action on OA:

– Switch Pumps push–button: when clicked, the following window is displayed:

Figure 110. Switch Pump OA R3–R4 Repeater Commands View
Figure 111. Switch Pump OA R0–R1 Repeater Commands View
The Switch Pump Command state can be modified (ON or OFF):
• Click on the option button to choose the value,

• Click on OK push button to send your command.
– Click on OK to confirm your command.
The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box,
without modifications.
– Set Pumps push–button: when clicked, the following window is displayed:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 126 / 154
154
Figure 112. Setting Pump OA Commands View
The Set Pumps Command allows to set the pumps to a value from Set Pumps to Setting
1 to Set Pumps to Setting 16.
The Set Pumps Command can be modified:

• Click on the OK push button to send your command.
N.B. The allowed setting values are sub–segment dependant.
– Reset Intermittent Fault Detection push–button (R3 Repeaters): when clicked a

confirmation box is displayed:
• Click on the OK push button to send the command.
modifications.
– Reset OA push–button (R0/R1 Repeaters): when clicked a confirmation box is displayed:

When the reset command is send, the default values are set to the OA.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Reset Global OA push–button (R0/R1 Repeaters): when clicked a confirmation box is

displayed:
3AL 89062 AA AA 127 / 154
154


The totality of the OA is resetting after confirmation.
8.2.2 Sub–Segment Multi Repeaters Commands
This function allows to send measurement commands or setting commands or reset IFF (optional) to a
list of Repeaters.
The commands are accessible as follows:
– In the Submerged Line view, click on the sub–segment for which the parameters has to be displayed,
– Click on the SubmergedLine pull down menu,
– Select the Sub Segment Multi Repeaters Commands... option.
Three options are available. For each, a warning dialogue box propose to open an other USM window
because the command can take a long time:
– OS is blocked during all multi commands, so a new view can be open with Open New Submerged
Line Window of Views menu, and a flag MLC (Multiple Line Command) indicates the state of a
multiple line command in alarm panel.
a) Multi Repeaters Measurement
• Click on the Multi Repeaters Measurement option, the following dialogue box is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 128 / 154
154
Figure 113. Multi Repeaters Measurement Command View
The following fields are displayed:
• Modulation Index Adjustment: with the option button you can choose a value for the modulation
parameter: 4 to –4.
• In the Reply Detection list, select one equipment. To can modify characteristics, the selected
sub–system must be ’accessible’ (see Repeater Sub System view).
• R0 / R1 Repeater types: gives the list of accessible R0 / R1 Repeaters.
To set command parameter:
• In the list, select the affected Repeaters:
– to select a continuous group of Repeaters keep the Shift button on and click on the first
– to select a discontinuous group of Repeaters keep the Ctrl button on and click on every
– to select all the Repeaters, click on All Repeaters button.
• Click on OK.
modifications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
A successful box is displayed at the end of the operation.

3AL 89062 AA AA 129 / 154
154
b) Multi Repeaters Adjustment
N.B. Multi Repeaters adjustment is not available for SMC Repeaters.

• Click on the Multi Repeaters Adjustment option, the following dialogue box is displayed:

Figure 114. Multi Repeaters Setting Command View
It contains a multiple selection list of sub–systems accessible Repeaters for measurement and
optical amplifiers of sub–system accessible Repeaters for setting and some command parameter.
• In the list (R0/R1 or R3/R4), select the affected Repeaters:
• With the option buttons, give a value to Set Pump 1 and Set Pump 2 (1 to 16 for R0/R1 Repeater
type) or to Set pumps (1 to 4 for R3/R4 Repeater type).
• Click on OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
modifications.
3AL 89062 AA AA 130 / 154
154
c) Multi Repeaters IFF

N.B. Only available for the R3 and R4 Repeaters
• Click on the Multi Repeaters IFF option, the following dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 115. Multi Repeaters Reset IFF Command View
• In the list, select the affected Repeaters:
• Click on OK.
modifications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 131 / 154
154
8.3 Branching Units Management
This function allows the operator to display the list of all BUs on the selected Sub Segment and to display
the characteristics of each of them.

The NE can be interfaced with the following Branching Units:
– the Add and drop BU (R2.0, R3.0 and R3.1)
8.3.1 Branching Units Parameters
The parameters relative to a specific Branching Unit can be displayed as follows:
– In the Submerged Line view, click on the Branching Unit (BUx) for which the parameters have to be
displayed,
– Click on the SubmergedLine pull down menu.
– Select the BU Parameters... option, the following window is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 116. R2.0 BU Parameters View
3AL 89062 AA AA 132 / 154
154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
154
3AL 89062 AA AA
133 / 154
• Spur Latch Relay Access state: can be set to Accessible or to Not Accessible with the option
button,
• Trunk Latch Relay Access state: can be set to Accessible or to Not Accessible with the option
button.
• Click on the option button(s) to choose the state,

– Click on the Apply push button to validate your modifications.
modifications.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 134 / 154
154
8.3.2 Branching Units Sub System Characteristics
This function allows the operator to display the list of all Sub Systems for one Branching Unit to display
a) Sub Systems list
N.B. The maximum number of Sub Systems is 4 with a maximum of 2 Add and Drop Sub
Systems.
The Sub Systems list can be displayed as follows:
• In the Submerged Line view, click on the branching unit (BUx) for which the Sub Systems list
has to be displayed,
• Click on the SubmergedLine pull down menu,
• Select the BU Sub System List... option, the following window is displayed.
The Sub Systems list can be also displayed as follows:
• Double click on the BU.
Figure 119. BU Sub Systems List View
N.B. Maximum number of BUs: 7.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 135 / 154
154
b) Display of Sub System characteristics
Once the Sub Systems list is displayed (see Figure 119. ), the characteristics of one Sub System can
be displayed:

• Select a name in the list,
• Click on OK to submit the choice.
The characteristics can be also displayed as follows:
• Double click on the BU Sub System.
Figure 120. R2 or R3.1 BU Module View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 136 / 154
154
Figure 121. R3.0 BU Module View
c) Management of Sub System characteristics
The following table indicates the availability of the command type according to the line equipment
type.
R3.0 BU R3.1 BU R2 BU
Set pump ON/OFF X X X
Replace power setting X X X
Set to default
Reset Intermittent X
Table 8. BU command types
Once the Sub System characteristics are displayed (see Figure 121. ), some may be modified.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• BU Label
• BU SubSystem Label
• BU Sub Type
3AL 89062 AA AA 137 / 154
154
• BU Orientation
For each Sub System associated to a Sub Segment, the Sub System characteristics can be modified
by the operator:

• State: this value (Accessible or Not Accessible) can be modified by the operator:
• Click on the option button(s) to choose the value(s),

• Click on the Apply push button to validate your modifications.
modifications.
• Click on Close to close the window.
– Three push–buttons are available to access OA or to send measurement command from the BU
Module View (Figure 121. ):
1) Measurement push–button: when clicked, the following window is displayed:
Figure 122. BU Module Measurement View
• BU Label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Sub System number

• Orientation
3AL 89062 AA AA 138 / 154
154
• In the Reply Detection list, select one equipment. To can modify characteristics, the
selected Sub System must be ’accessible’ (see BU Sub System view).
For the selected equipment the following characteristics can be modified:

• Modulation index: can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus
Four with the option button.
• Measurement push–button: send the measurements command.
• Click on Close to close the window.
2) OA Add and OA Trunk push–buttons: when clicked, the following window is displayed:
N.B. Depending on the Sub System, OA Add push–button may be absent.
Figure 123. BU OA Commands View
• BU Label
• SubSystem number
• Orientation
• OA Type:
– For R2 and R3.1 BU: Trunk when clicked on OA Trunk, Add when clicked on OA
Add
– For R3.0 BU: Y when clicked on OA Y, X when clicked on OA X
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 139 / 154
154
• Modulation index: can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus
Four with the option button.
Three push–buttons are available to send commands:

• Switch Pumps push–button: when clicked, the following window is displayed:
Figure 124. Switch Pump OA Command View
The Switch Pumps Command allows to set the pumps to On (”Switch Pumps ON”) or to
Off (”Switch Pumps OFF”).
The Switch Pumps Command can be modified:

• Set Pumps push–button: when clicked, the following window is displayed:
N.B. For OA Add push–button only.
Figure 125. Setting Pump OA Command view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Set Pumps Command allows to set the pumps value.
3AL 89062 AA AA 140 / 154
154
The Set Pumps Command can be modified:



• Reset Intermittent Fault Detection push–button: when clicked a confirmation box

is displayed:
– Click on the OK push button to send the command.

The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue
box, without modifications.
8.3.3 Branching Unit Spur Latching Controls
N.B. This function is only available for the R3 Branching Units.
This function allows the operator to send commands to BU to latch/unlatch the Spur relay.
displayed,
– Select the BU Spur Latching Controls... option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 141 / 154
154
Figure 126. BU Spur Latching Controls dialogue box
– In the Reply Detection list, select the signal on which you want to detect the reply.
– In the Request Location list, select the signal on which you want to modulate the request.
For the selected BU (BU Label) the following characteristics can be modified:
• Modulation index Adjustment: can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus
Four.
Push buttons are available to send command:
N.B. To send BU Latch Commands, Spur Latch Relay must be in Accessible state (see
paragraph 8.3.1 ).
• In the list, select one element.
For the selected element the following commands can be send:
– Spur Latch push button: click on it, to send the Spur Latch command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Click on OK
3AL 89062 AA AA 142 / 154
154
modifications.
A successful message box is displayed at the end of the command.
• Click on OK
– Spur Unlatch push button: click on it, to send the Spur Unlatch command.
• Click on OK
modifications.
• Click on OK
8.3.4 Branching Unit Trunk Latching Controls
N.B. This function is only available for the R3 Branching Units.
This function allows the operator to send commands to BU to latch/unlatch the Trunk relay.
displayed,
– Select the BU Trunk Latching Controls... option.
Figure 127. BU Trunk Latching Controls dialogue box
– In the Request Location list, select the signal on which you want to modulate the request.
For the selected BU (BU Label) the following characteristics can be modified:
• Modulation index Adjustment: can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Four.
3AL 89062 AA AA 143 / 154
154
Push buttons are available to send command:
N.B. To send BU Latch Commands, Trunk Latch Relay must be in Accessible state (see
paragraph 8.3.1 ).

• In the list, select one element.
For the selected element the following commands can be send:
– Trunk Latch push button: click on it, to send the Trunk Latch command.
• Click on OK
modifications.
• Click on OK
– Trunk Unlatch push button: click on it, to send the Trunk Unlatch command.
• Click on OK
modifications.
• Click on OK

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 144 / 154
154
8.4 View Settings/Thresholds
This option allows to display the list of the values of setting and threshold values for the Repeaters and
the BUs for one segment.

– Select the View Settings/Thresholds option.
Figure 128. Settings/Thresholds–Segment selection
The list of the available segments is displayed. The operator selects one and click on View push button.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 145 / 154
154
Figure 129. Settings/Thresholds list
For the selected segment, the list of Settings/Thresholds is displayed. The operator can print the list or
search characters with the File and Search command in the menu bar of the window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 146 / 154
154
9 WDM SUBMARINE EQUIPMENT RESTRICTIONS
9.1 OALW16/OALW40
9.1.1 Software download management
Not supported.
9.1.2 Connection management
Not supported.
9.1.3 Synchronization management
Not supported.
9.1.4 Loopback management
Not supported.
9.1.5 Maintenance Memory management
Not supported.
9.1.6 NE management : OS resilience
Not supported.
9.1.7 MSP domain
Not supported.
9.1.8 EPS domain
Not supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 147 / 154
154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
154
3AL 89062 AA AA
148 / 154
10 ALARM MAPPING
This section is aimed at presenting the mapping of the NECTAS and the 1353SH alarm type. For each
type of alarm defined at the NECTAS interface, the corresponding SH probable cause is given.
10.1 OALW16/OALW40 Alarms
The mapping list of this section concerns the OALW16 NEs and the OALW40 NEs.

#
Aux #1 shelf power fail replaceableUnitProblem
Backplane Comm fail internalBusFailure
Boost Pump Comm fail internalBusFailure
Boost Pump Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
Boost Pump Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Booster Amp Main Comm fail internalBusFailure
Buffer Overflow fecBufferOverflow
Channel Margin preEmphasisNotEqualized
Comm fail internalBusFailure
Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
Configuration module removed configurationModuleMissing
DEMUX Comm fail internalBusFailure
External SD input externalShutdown
FEC–Dec Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
FEC–Dec Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
FEC–Enc Comm fail internalBusFailure
FEC–Enc Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
FEC–Enc Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Hardware fail replaceableUnitProblem
LRU Comm fail internalBusFailure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
LRU Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
LRU Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
3AL 89062 AA AA 149 / 154
154

#
LTU Comm fail internalBusFailure

LTU Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError

LTU Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Main Unit Connector cover removed mainOpticalConnectorCoverOpen
MUX Comm fail internalBusFailure
OPU Comm fail internalBusFailure
OPU Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
OPU Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Own Connector cover removed opticalConnectorCoverOpen
Post Amp Main Comm fail internalBusFailure
Post Pump Comm fail internalBusFailure
Post Pump Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
Post Pump Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Pre Amp Main Comm fail internalBusFailure
Pre Pump Comm fail internalBusFailure
Pre Pump Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
Pre Pump Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
PSU fail replaceableUnitProblem
PSU Comm fail internalBusFailure
Rack Signalling Supply Breaker alarm supplyBreakerFailure
Removed card replaceableUnitMissing
RSSB alarm supplyBreakerFailure
RxAmp shelf power fail replaceableUnitProblem
Scrambler drive OOL scramblerProblem
Shelf power fail replaceableUnitProblem
SPC Comm fail internalBusFailure
SPC Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SPC IF Comm fail internalBusFailure
SPC IF Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
3AL 89062 AA AA 150 / 154
154

#
Subrack breaker alarm supplyBreakerFailure

Supy unit Comm fail internalBusFailure
Supy unit Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
Supy unit Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Switch #1 shelf power fail replaceableUnitProblem
Switch #2 shelf power fail
TMP Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
TPU Comm fail internalBusFailure
TPU Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
TPU Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Tributary X PSU fail replaceableUnitProblem
Tributary Y PSU fail
TSU Comm fail internalBusFailure
TxAmp shelf power fail replaceableUnitProblem
Wrong card replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
10.1.2 Communication Alarms

#
64k PLL Channel #1 OOL timingPbChannel64kOne
64k PLL Channel #2 OOL timingPbChannel64kTwo
64k PLL Channel #3 OOL timingPbChannel64kThree
AIS detect Rx Channel #1 aISdetectRxChannelOne
AIS detect Tx Channel #1 aISdetectTxChannelOne
AIS detect Rx Channel #2 aISdetectRxChannelTwo
AIS detect Tx Channel #2 aISdetectTxChannelTwo
AMS detected aMS
AMS inserted aMSinserted
B1 HER detected excessiveBER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
B1 LER detected degradedSignal
3AL 89062 AA AA 151 / 154
154

#
Buffer Overflow fecCorrectionOverflow

Data Loss cqtLossOfData

Fault Flag#N faultFlagDetected
FEC error High alarms (HBER) excessiveBER
FEC error Low alarms (LBER) degradedSignal
GFB Output Power OOL opticalSignalDegraded
Input clock signal fail lossOfClock
LOF (loss of frame) lossOfSdhFrame
LOS lossOfSignal
LOS Channel #1 lossOfSignalChannelOne
LOS Channel #2 lossOfSignalChannelTwo
Loss of Clock farEndLossOfClock
Loss of data lossOfData
Loss of line Mux signal farEndLossOfMuxSignal
Loss of line tributary signal farEndLossOfLineTribSignal
Loss of signal lossOfSignal
Marker mismatch markerMismatch
MS–RDI detect rDIdetected
MS–RDI rDldetected
ODL lossOfData
PLL 155MHz OOL timingProblem
PLL 2.4GHz OOL timingProblem
PLL OOL timingProblem
PLL OLL Channel #1 timingProblemChannelOne
PLL OLL Channel #2 timingProblemChannelTwo
Receive Degraded farEndReceivedDegraded
RLL OOL lossOfSignal
RSR inserted rSRinserted

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RSR received rSRReceived
Rx Clock or Sync Loss rxClockSyncLoss
3AL 89062 AA AA 152 / 154
154

#
SLL OLL transmitFailure

SLTE ttransmit problem lossOfFrame

Transmit fail transmitFailure
Transmitter Output OOL last measurement point transmitFailure
Transmitter output power OOL last measurement transmitFailure

point
Tx Clock or Sync Loss txClockSyncLoss
Uncorrected blocks fecUncorrectedBlocks

#
15 min B1 error ratio thresholdCrossed15Min
24 h B1 error ratio thresholdCrossed1Day
15 min FEC corrected error alarm thresholdCrossed15Min
1 day FEC corrected error alarm thresholdCrossed1Day
15 min FEC uncorrected error alarm fecUncorrectedErrorThresholdCrossed15Min
1 day FEC uncorrected error alarm fecUncorrectedErrorThresholdCrossed1Day
GFB output power OOL opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Laser Bias OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Laser Power OOL pumpLaserPowerThresholdCrossed
Laser Temp OOL pumpLaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Bias OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Power OOL pumpLaserPowerThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Temp OOL pumpLaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
RLL OOL opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Bias OOL laserBiasThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Output fail opticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Power OOL laserPowerThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Signal Laser Temp OOL laserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
SLL OOL opticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
3AL 89062 AA AA 153 / 154
154

#
wavelength OOLimit wavelengthOutOfLimit

wavelength OOLock wavelengthOutOfLock


#
Alarm Input#N houseKeeping
Station alarm#N houseKeeping
END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 154 / 154
154
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1.2 Edition scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1.3 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.1 New Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.2 New Features only available for TERA10 C and D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.3 New Features only available for TERA10 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2 CONCEPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1 Submarine Transmission System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2 SLTE Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.3 SLTEs and DFMEs Types and Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.4 Logical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.5 Optical Topology Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.6 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.6.1 Subrack Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.6.2 Subrack/Board/Port Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.7 Constructor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.8 Stand Alone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.9 Performance Counters Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.10 Analog Measurement Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.11 Laser Management Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.12 Protection Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.13 Dummy Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
01 040130 V.SCORTECCI ITAVE R.Lepido ITAVE

L.Foresta J. Berthomieu
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
NR5 EQP–SPEC.OPER. HDBK
Release 7.0 on
ED 01 SC.3.5:WDM SUBMAR. TERA10
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 266
266
2.14 TERA10 Craft Terminal (TERA10CT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3 MAIN VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.1 Access to Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

3.2 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

3.2.1 TERA10 A–B Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.2.2 TERA10 A–B Equipment View in Constructor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.2.3 TERA10 C–D Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2.4 TERA10 C–D Equipment View in Constructor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.2.5 Subrack View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.2.6 Board View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.2.7 Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.2.10 Reception View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.2.11 Submerged Line View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.2.12 Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.13 TERA10 D Connectivity View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4 NE STATE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5 FEATURES ACCESSIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.1 Features Accessibility versus NE States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2 Features Accessibility versus Particular NE States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.3 Features Accessibility versus Constructor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.1 Underlying Resource Unavailable (URU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.2 Transmission Alarms Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.3 NML Alarms Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.4 Alarms List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7 PERFORMANCE COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.1 Performance Counters Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.1.1 Activate Performance Counters Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.1.2 Force Performance Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7.1.3 Show Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7.2 Performance Thresholds Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.3 Performance Alarms Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

8.1 Measurement Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.1.1 Activate Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.1.2 Show NE Measurement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.1.3 View Last Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.1.4 TERA10 Measurement Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
8.1.5 Line Equipment Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8.2 Measurement Thresholds Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.2.1 Display Measurement Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.2.2 Optical Thresholds Auto–Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.2.3 TERA10 Measurement Thresholds List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
9 FEC FRAME AND AMS SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

9.1 FEC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.1.1 SLTE Local Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 266
266
9.1.2 Marker Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.1.3 FEC Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
9.1.4 FEC Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.1.5 FEC Error Correction Global Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.1.6 FEC Error Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

9.1.7 FEC Error Insertion Global Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

9.2 AMS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.2.1 AMS Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.2.2 AMS Insertion Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.2.3 AMS Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10 OPTICAL SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

10.1 Connectivity View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.2 SDH Optical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3 Tributary Wavelength Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.4 Tributary Wavelength Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.5 Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
10.5.1 Channel Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
10.5.2 Channel Power Value on one Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10.5.3 Increase/Decrease Channel Power on one Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10.5.4 Large Increase/Decrease Channel Power on one Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.5.5 Increase/Decrease Channel Power Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.5.6 Large Increase/Decrease Channel Power Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.5.7 Channel Power configuration on one Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.5.8 Channel Power on LCU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.6 Amplifier Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.6.1 WTA / WRA / WBA Output Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.6.2 PAU Output Power Level (TERA10 A–B Dummy Tributaries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
10.6.3 Compensation Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
10.6.4 WTA Input Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.7 Decision Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
10.8 Phase Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11 AUTOMATIC PRE–EMPHASIS ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

11.1 APA Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
11.2 APA View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
11.3 Reset Reference Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
11.4 Refresh Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
11.5 APA Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
11.5.1 Start APA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
11.5.2 Force APA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
11.5.3 Abort APA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
11.6 Margin Measurement Commands (MM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11.6.1 Start MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11.6.2 Force MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11.6.3 Abort MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11.7 Serial MPO (SMPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
11.7.1 Start Serial MPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
11.7.2 Abort Serial MPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
11.8 Individual MPO (IMPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
11.8.1 Start Individual MPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
11.8.2 Abort Individual MPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

11.9 Individual LFT (ILFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
11.9.1 Start Individual LFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 266
266
11.9.2 Abort Individual LFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
11.10 APA Tributary Involvement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
11.11 MPO Phase Amplitude Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
11.12 APA Algoritm Parameters Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

12 LASER MANAGEMENT (SHUTDOWN / RESTART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
12.1 Laser Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
12.2 ALS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
12.3 Manual Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
12.4 Test Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
12.5 ALS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
12.6 Laser Cut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12.6.1 Single Laser Cut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12.6.2 Laser Cut Off on LCU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12.7 Laser Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12.8 Laser Shutdown Configuration for OPS Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
12.8.1 Laser Shutdown Line Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
12.8.2 Laser Shutdown MS AIS Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.8.3 Laser Shutdown Criterion Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.8.4 Laser Shutdown Hold Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
13 PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

13.1 Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
13.1.1 Show Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
13.1.2 Protection Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
13.1.3 Enable/Disable Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
13.1.4 Tributaries Protection Configuration Coherency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
13.2 Tributary Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
13.2.1 Tributary Protection Switch examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
13.2.2 Tributary Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
13.2.3 Tributary Protection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
13.2.4 Tributary Protection Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
13.2.5 Example of Manual Invoke of a tribTx port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
13.2.6 Example of Manual Release of a tribTx port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
13.2.7 Error Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
14 SUBMERGED SEGMENT (LINE CONFIGURATION AT SEGMENT LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

14.1 Segment Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
14.1.1 Segment Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
14.1.2 Segment Tributaries Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
14.1.3 IFF Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
14.2 View Settings/Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
14.3 Initialize Line Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
15 SUBSEGMENT, REPEATERS AND RCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

15.1 Subsegment Parameter Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
15.2 Repeaters Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
15.2.1 Repeaters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
15.2.2 Repeater Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
15.2.3 Repeater Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
15.3 Multi Repeater Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
15.3.1 Multi Repeaters Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

15.3.2 Multi Repeaters Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
15.3.3 Multi Repeaters Reset IFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
15.4 RCE Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3AL 89062 AA AA 4 / 266
266
15.4.1 RCEs List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
15.4.2 RCE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
15.4.3 RCE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
16 BRANCHING UNITS MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

16.1 Branching Units Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

16.2 Branching Unit Subsystem Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
16.2.1 Subsystems list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
16.2.2 Subsystem Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
16.2.3 Subsystem Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
16.3 Branching Unit Spur Latching Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16.4 Branching Unit Trunk Latching Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
17 OTHER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

17.1 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
17.1.1 Warm Reset NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
17.1.2 Cold Reset NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
17.2 Tributaries Status (In/Out of Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
17.3 Dummy Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
17.4 2 Mb Order Wire Status (In/Out of Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
17.5 External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
17.5.3 External Output Points Switch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
17.5.4 External Output Points Partner Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
17.5.5 External Output Points Partner Alarm Article/Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17.6 OS/TERA10CT Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
18 SLTE UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

18.1 Subrack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
18.1.1 Rules for TERA10 A–B Subrack Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
18.1.2 Rules for TERA10 C–D Subrack Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
18.1.3 Mechanical and Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
18.1.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
18.2 Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
18.3 Board Connectivity Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 266
266
FIGURES


Figure 2. TERA10 SLTE environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 3. TERA10 SLTE Transmission Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 4. TERA10 SLTE Reception Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 5. R1 Common Optical Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 6. R3 Common Optical Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 7. Different Rack Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 8. Tributary Subrack R1 – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 9. Tributary Subrack R3 – subrack release 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 10. Tributary Amplifier Subrack Single Tributary (TribAmp) – subrack release 1 . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 11. Tributary Amplifier Subrack Double Tributaries (TribAmp) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . 34
Figure 12. Tramsmit Amplifier Subrack (TxAmp) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 13. Transmit Amplifier Subrack (TxAmp) – sbrack release 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 14. Receive Amplifier Subrack (RxAmp) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 15. Receive Amplifier (RxAmp) – subrack release 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 16. RX Booster Subrack (RxBoost) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 17. Mux/Demux Subrack (TribMuxDemux) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 18. Transmit Mux Subrack (TxMux) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 19. Receive Demux Subrack (RxDemux) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 20. Fully equipped Block Pre–emphasis Amplifier Subrack (BPAmp) – subrack release 0 . 38
Figure 21. Fully equipped Block Compensation Amplifier Subrack (BCAmp) – subrack release 0 39
Figure 22. Fully equipped Loading Channel Subrack (LCU) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 23. Management Subrack (MNGT) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 24. Line Coupler Subrack (LINECOUPLER) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 25. Protection Subrack (PROT) – subrack release 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 26. Stopped Constructor Mode dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 27. Warning Constructor mode for starting views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 28. Started Constructor mode dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 29. Warning Constructor mode for stopping views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 30. 1353SH Stand Alone Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 31. 1353SH Stand Alone Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 32. TERA10 1+N protection (one protection group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 33. TERA10 1:N protection (one protection group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 34. TERA10CT configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 35. Access State options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 37. TERA10 A–B Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 38. TERA10 A–B Equipment view in Constructor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 39. TERA10 C–D Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 40. TERA10 C–D Equipment view in Constructor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 41. R1 Tributary Subrack view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 42. Board view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 43. Port view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 44. External Points view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 45. Transmission view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 46. Reception view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 47. Submerged Line view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. Automatic Pre Emphasis Adjustment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Figure 49. Connectivity View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 50. NE State icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 266
266
Figure 52. Performance Point Counters dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 53. Performance Points List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 54. Force performance collection confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 55. TP Performance History Report data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Figure 56. Performance Thresholds dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Figure 57. Performance reset confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 58. Performance reset success message box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 59. Perf Alarms Reset on Tributaries dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 60. Measure Polling dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 62. Measurement Points List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 64. NE Measurement Data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 65. Analog Measures view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 66. Measure menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 67. Measure Thresholds dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 68. Measure Thresholds Global command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 69. Global Command Confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 70. Optical Thresholds Auto–Adjustment confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 71. Optical Thresholds Auto–Adjustment success message box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 72. Display NE Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 73. NE Characteristics dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 74. Marker Configuration dialogue box for the FEU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 75. Marker Configuration dialogue box for the FDU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 76. FEC Type dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 77. FEC Error Correction dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 78. FEC correction state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 79. FEC global commands in Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 80. FEC Error Insertion confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 81. TERA10 A–B FEC Error Insertion configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 82. TERA10 C–D FEC Error Insertion configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 83. Insert FEC Error confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 84. TERA10 A–B Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 85. TERA10 C–D Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 86. Insert Single FEC Error confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 87. States of FEC error insertion and single FEC error insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 88. FEC Error Insertion confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 89. AMS Insertion dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 90. State of AMS Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 91. AMS global commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 92. AMS Insertion confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 93. AMS Pattern dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 94. Initial Connectivity view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 95. Connectivity view with selected Block 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 96. Optical Parameters dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 97. Wavelength dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 99. Wavelength Frequency Offset dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 100. Channel Power menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 101. Channel Power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Figure 102. Channel power global commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 103. Channel Power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 104. Channel Power menu for LCU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 266
266
Figure 105. Ampli Power for a WRA board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 106. Amplifier Output Power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 107. Amplifier Output Power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 108. Compensation Output Power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Figure 109. Input Power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Figure 110. Decision Threshold dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 111. Phase Modulator dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 112. APA Authorization dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 113. Views pull down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 114. APA view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 115. Reset RPI command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 116. Reset RPI message box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 117. Start Individual MPO dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 118. Individual MPO confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 119. Start Individual LFT dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 120. Individual MPO confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 121. APA Tributary Involvement dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 122. MPO Phase Amplitude Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 123. APA Algorithm Parameter Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 124. Laser Management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 125. ALS states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 126. Automatic Laser Shutdown dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 127. Manual restart confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 128. Test Restart Confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 131. Laser Management options for LCU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 132. Transmission Laser global commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 133. Reception Laser global commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 134. Attributes statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 135. Laser Shutdown Line Criterion dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 136. Laser Shutdown MS AIS Line Criterion dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 137. LS Criterion Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 138. Laser Cut Off confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 139. LS Hold Off Time dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 140. Show Protection Group options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 141. Transmission view for Protection Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 142. Configuration menu Protection Group option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 143. Protection Group Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 144. Enable/Disable Protection Group dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 145. Example of (1+N) switched Transmission channel view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 146. Example of (1+N) switched Reception channel view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 147. sdhTx Protection Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 148. sdhRx Protection Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 149. Trib Protection Commands options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 150. Protection statuses on sdhTx port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 151. Reception channel view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 152. Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 153. Protection icons after manual invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 154. Protection icons after manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 155. Slem Segment options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Figure 156. Segment Parameters dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 157. Segment Parameters dialogue box for Raman Supy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 158. Segment Tributaries Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3AL 89062 AA AA 8 / 266
266
Figure 159. IFF Confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 160. Settings/Thresholds dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 161. Settings/Thresholds list window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 162. Initialize Line Config options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 163. Submerged Line menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Figure 164. Subsegment Parameters dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Figure 165. Repeater dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 166. Repeaters List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 167. R0 Repeater Subsystem dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 171. Repeater Subsystem Measurement dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 172. Repeater OA Commands dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 173. Switch Pump OA Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 174. Setting Pump OA Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 175. Subsegment Multi Repeaters Commands sub–menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 176. Multi Repeaters Measurement Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 177. Multi Repeaters Setting Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 178. Multi Repeaters Reset IFF Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 179. Remote Control Equalizers List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 180. RCE Subsystem Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 181. RCE TEQ Commands dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 182. Setting TEQ Slope Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 183. R2.0 BU Parameters dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 187. BU Subsystems List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 188. R3.0 BU Module dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 189. R3.1 BU Module dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 190. BU Module Measurement dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 191. BU OA Commands dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 192. Switch Pump OA Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 193. Setting Pump OA Command dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 194. Reset Confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 195. Reset Message box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 196. BU Spur Latching Controls dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 197. BU Trunk Latching Controls dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 198. Warm Reset on Tributaries dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 199. Cold Reset on Tributaries dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 200. Display tributaries status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 201. Tributaries Service dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 202. Dummy Tributaries List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 203. Tributary 2 Mb Order Wire dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 204. Configuring External Input Point dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 205. Configuring External Output Point dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 206. Switch Mode Selection dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 207. Partner Alarm dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 208. Partner Alarm Article/Bit dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 209. Address Setting dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Figure 210. Mechanical and Protection Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 211. Mechanical and Protection Configuration dialogue box for a Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 212. Board Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 266
266
Figure 213. BPAU or Trib MUX/DEMUX Connectivity Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 214. BCAU Connectivity Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 215. LCU Connectivity Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 216. TribAmp Connectivity Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

TABLES
Table 1. TERA10 Colour icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 2. TERA10 Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 3. Line Equipment Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 4. TERA10 thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 5. Protection Configuration Coherency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Table 6. TERA10 A–B Subrack Type lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Table 7. TERA10 C–D Subrack Type lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 10 / 266
266
HISTORY

Paragraph
1.1 J. Berthomieu 00–02–14 All Creation (1353SH 5.3)
1.2 J. Berthomieu 00–05–15 All Update with re–reading remarks
1.3 J. Berthomieu 00–09–01 All Update with re–reading remarks and new features
1.4 J. Berthomieu 00–10–10 All Update with IFA remarks
1 J. Berthomieu 00–11–23 All Update with re–reading remarks
2.1 J. Berthomieu 01–01–05 All Update for SMS5.4
2.2 J. Berthomieu 01–03–26 All Update with re–reading remarks
3.2 J. Berthomieu 01–09–06 All Update after re–reading remarks
4 C. Mandroux 02–05–29 All Update with re–reading remarks

3CK 00051 0002 ASZZA, Ed2



NMU/GT/96/022, Ed1

8AY 02000 0000 ASZZA, Ed4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3BP 22100 0008 DSZZA, Ed1
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 266
266
See NMU Web Server


3AL 71310 0001 PBZZA, Ed1
[11] SND Villarceaux, 1353SH R5 OALW64 R1.0 Mapping Specification,

3DW 10067 ABAA DSGNA, Ed.1
[12] SND Villarceaux, 1353SH R5 TERA10–C Mapping Specification,

3DW 10067 ACAA DSGNA, Ed.1

3BP 22100 0066 OMZZA, Ed1

3BP 22100 0067 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0015 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0016 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0017 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0018 OMZZA, Ed1

3AL 71389 0019 OMZZA, Ed1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 12 / 266
266
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document describes all the functionalities provided by the 1353SH to manage the Wavelength Divi-
sion Multiplexer (WDM) Submarine NEs.
– Alcatel TERA10 A, TERA10 B, TERA10 C, TERA10 D SLTEs

– Alcatel DFME B, DFME C, DFME D
1.1.2 Edition scope
None
This manual is intended for all the operators of the 1353SH in charge of managing TERA10 Submarine
NEs.
– QB3*NE Management manual (See Section 2.3 of this handbook).
– QB3*NE Transmission Management manual (See Section 2.4 of this handbook).
– QB3*NE Synchronization Management manual (See Section 2.5 of this handbook).
– QB3*NE Performance Management manual (See Section 2.6 of this handbook).
– QB3*NE Software Management manual (See Section 2.7 of this handbook).
– Chapter 1: Introduction
– Chapter 2: Concepts
• Submarine Transmission System

• SLTE Environment
• SLTEs and DFMEs Types and Releases
• Logical Description
• Optical Topology Description
• Physical Description
• Constructor Mode
• Stand Alone Mode
• Performance Counters Principles
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Analog Measurement Principles

• Laser Management Principles
• Protection Principles
• Dummy Tributaries
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 266
266
• TERA10 Craft terminal (TERA10CT)
– Chapter 3: Main Views

• Access to Views

• Views
– Chapter 4: NE State Panel
• Description
– Chapter 5: Features Accessibility
• Features Accessibility versus NE States

• Features Accessibility versus Particular NE States
• Features Accessibility versus Constructor Mode
– Chapter 6: Alarms
• Underlying Resource Unavailable (URU)

• Transmission Alarms Synthesis
• NML Alarms Mapping
• Alarms List
– Chapter 7: Performance Counters
• Performance Counters Management

• Performance Thresholds Management
• Performance Alarms Reset
– Chapter 8: Analog Measurement
• Measurement Management
• Measurement Thresholds Management
– Chapter 9: FEC Frame and AMS Signal
• FEC Features
• AMS Features
– Chapter 10: Optical Signal
• Connectivity View
• SDH Optical Parameters
• Tributary Wavelength Value
• Tributary Wavelength Frequency Offset
• Channel Power
• Amplifier Power
• Decision Threshold
• Phase Modulator
– Chapter 11: Automatic Pre–Emphasis Adjustment
• APA Authorization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• APA View
• Reset Reference Power
• Refresh Measurements
• APA Commands
3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 266
266
• Margin Measurement Commands (MM)
• Serial MPO (SMPO)
• Individual MPO (IMPO)
• Individual LFT (ILFT)
•
APA Tributary Involvement

• MPO Phase Amplitude Configuration

• APA Algorithm Parameters Configuration
– Chapter 12: Laser Management (Shutdown / Restart)
• Laser Commands
• ALS Configuration
• Manual Restart
• Test Restart
• ALS Control
• Laser Cut Off
• Laser Global Commands
• Laser Shutdown Configuration for OPS Networks
– Chapter 13: Protection Management
• Protection Group
• Tributary Protection
– Chapter 14: Submerged Segment (Line Configuration at Segment Level)
• Segment Management
• View Settings/Thresholds
• Initialize Line Configuration
– Chapter 15: Subsegment and Repeaters and RCE
• Subsegment Management
• Repeaters Management
• Multi Repeater Commands
• RCE Management
– Chapter 16: Branching Units Management
• Branching Unit Parameters

• Branching Unit Subsystem Parameters
• Branching Unit Spur Latching Commands
• Branching Unit Trunk Latching Commands
– Chapter 17: Other Functions
• Reset
• Tributaries Status (In/Out of Service)
• Dummy Tributaries
• 2 Mb Order Wire Status (In/Out of Service)
• External Points
• OS/TERA10CT Address Setting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Chapter 18: SLTE Upgrade
• Subrack Configuration
• Board Configuration
3AL 89062 AA AA 15 / 266
266
• Board Connectivity Configuration
1.3 New Features

The 5.6 release of the SMS offers new features in comparison with the SMS5.5 release.
1.3.1 New Equipment
The equipment managed by the SMS5.6 are:
– TERA10 SLTEs (see chapters 2 Concepts and 3.2 Views):
• TERA10 A managed since SMS5.3

• TERA10 B managed since SMS5.4
• TERA10 C managed since SMS5.5 with two releases:
– Release R1: Common R1 + Tributary R1

– Release R3: Common R3 + Tributary R1 (architecture with Block of Tributaries)
• TERA10 D managed since SMS5.6 with two releases:
– Release R1: Common R1 + Tributary R1 / R3

– Release R3: Common R3 + Tributary R1 / R3 (architecture with Block of Tributaries)
– DFME (see chapter 2 Concepts):
• DFME B R1 sub–equipped SLTE based on TERA10 B Common R1

• DFME C R1 sub–equipped SLTE based on TERA10 C Common R1
• DFME D R1 sub–equipped SLTE based on TERA10 D Common R1
– R3 Tributary Subrack
Only with TERA10 D
– Tributary Amplifier Subrack
• Only with TERA 10 D. Only used for R3 Tributary in R1 Common

• Two possible contents.
1.3.2 New Features only available for TERA10 C and D
a) Upgrade feature (see chapter 18.2 Board configuration)

Add/Remove board feature is available
b) Dump NE MIB improvement (see Generic NE Management manual)

An SLTE summary is added at the beginning of the Dump NE MIB displayed file.
1.3.3 New Features only available for TERA10 D
a) Connectivity view (see chapter 3.2.13 TERA 10 D Connectivity View)

A view to visualize the R3 Common optical topology through boards. This view helps the operator
to make a diagnosis in following the traffic through the units of the SLTE and allows the navigation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
to equipment views. Only available in R3 Common.
b) Type of FEC (see chapter 9.1 FEC Features)

The type of FEC is available for any Tributary subrack.
3AL 89062 AA AA 16 / 266
266
c) APA/MPO algorithms (see chapter 11 Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment)
Some parameters are now configurable to customize the algorithms.
d) ILFT (see chapter 11 Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment)

New procedure of Individual Laser Frequency Tuning is available.

e) 1:N Protection (see chapter 13 Protection Management)

On the contrary to 1+N protection, the 1:N protection allows to carry low priority traffic on protecting
Tributary when there is no protection switch.
f) Immediate Performance Threshold (see chapters 7.2 Performance Thresholds Management and
8.1 Measurement Management)
Immediate Performance Thresholds are available with 15 Minutes and 24 Hours Performance
Thresholds.
For TERA 10 A, B and C, they were available with measurement thresholds.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 17 / 266
266
1.4 Terminology


ALR Automatic Laser Restart
APA Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment
BER Bit Error Ratio
BU Branching Unit
CT Craft Terminal
DFME Dark Fibre Monitoring Equipment
EDF Engineering Data File
EOW External OrderWire
IFF Intermittent Fault Flag
ILFT Individual Laser Frequency Tuning
LRU Line Receiver Unit
LS Laser Shutdown
MPO Modulation Parameter Optimization

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NE Network Element
3AL 89062 AA AA 18 / 266
266
OA Optical Amplifier
OPS Optical Path Switch


OS Operation System
OWE Orderwire equipment
Port Access Point to the signal (traffic)
PSS Protection Subsystem
PSW Path Switch
RC Remote Control
RCE Remote Control Equalizer
RSU Remote Supervisory Unit
RX Reception
SLEM Submerged Line Equipment Management
STM–64 Synchronous Transport Module 64 (10 Gb/s signal)
SW Switch
TBC To Be Confirmed
TEQ Tilt Equalizer
TERA10CT Craft Terminal of TERA10 NE
TP Termination Point (see Port)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
TTP Trail Termination Point (see Port)
3AL 89062 AA AA 19 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
TX
URU
WDM
01
Transmission
Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Underlying Resource Unavailable
SC.3.5:WDM SUBMAR. TERA10
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
20 / 266
2 CONCEPTS
2.1 Submarine Transmission System

The WDM Submarine Network Elements (NEs) are used in the Submarine Transmission System (STS).
They adapt terrestrial signals for transmission over submerged cables.
The STS provides a high transmission capacity through optical fibres by multiplexing several STM64 opti-
cal channels.
terrestrial to/from submarine conversion, but they also provide remote management and power facili-
ties for undersea equipment. They are composed of:
• One or several Submerged Line Terminal Equipment (SLTE): each SLTE actually adapts and
multiplexes SDH signals for submarine optical transmission. The TERA10 manages STM64
signals. Depending on the requirements, a single station can include several SLTEs, one per
fibre pair.
• Power Feeding Equipment (PFE): used to remotely energize the submerged line cable.
the topology, it can be composed of the following Line Equipment:
• Undersea Repeaters (URs) (also called Repeaters): to amplify the multiplexed transmission
signal. A repeater is composed of optical amplifiers.
• Branching Units (BUs): placed at junction points of a branched cable allow some routing flexibil-
ity in the traffic management.
• Remote Control Equalizer (RCEs): to equalize the slope of the wavelengths comb.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 21 / 266
266
PFE PFE
Landing Landing
Station 1 Station 2

Submerged Line Cable

SLTE UR SLTE
URs BU
STM64 STM64
signals signals
URs
Landing
Station 3
STM64 PFE STM64

Optical fibre
signals signals
(Energized)
SLTEs

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 22 / 266
266
2.2 SLTE Environment
Figure 2. describes the environment of the Submerged Line Terminal Equipment in a fibre pair termination
station.
– The interface between the Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment (SME) and the SLTE are defined as
Synchronous Transport Module 64 (STM–64) or OC–192 (SONET).
– The OWE equipment allows the transmission of service channels and order wire channels between
distant SLTEs. These communication channels are carried by the FEC frame overhead availability
and come in addition to the SDH Data Communication channels available at the SDH equipment le-
vel. Management of such equipment is not in the scope of the 1353SH.
– The ”Environmentals” comprise the possible accessory equipment that could communicate with the
SLTE with low level interfaces such as dry loops (see External Points chapter).
– The SLTE can be managed by 2 types of management system: Element Manager (1353SH) and
Craft Terminal (TERA10CT).
Craft
Terminal
TERA10CT 1353SH
SLTE
STM641
N x 10 Gbit/s
Tributaries
STM64N
Undersea
amplifier
Synchronous
Equipment OWE PFE
mentals
(SME)
Figure 2. TERA10 SLTE environment
The Element Management Layer Operating System (1353SH) is a management system which offers a
complete range of management functions for the SLTE. In each station, the 1353SH performs centralized
management of Line Terminals, PFEs and a subset of Repeaters, RCEs and Branching Units. The mana-
gement domain of the 1353SH is assigned to one or a set of stations.
The Craft Terminal (TERA10CT) manages the SLTE locally.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 23 / 266
266
The 1353SH collaborates to the process of fault detection and fault recovery on the submerged cable. The
TERA10 equipment act as a mediation device between the Line Equipment (Repeaters, RCEs and
Branching Units) located on the submerged cable, and the OS.

The maximum capacity of the TERA10 is 106x10 Gbit/s depending on the equipment Type and Release.

If the SLTE is protected, 10 Gbit/s channels are grouped in protection groups. A common grouping is by
set of 21 channels (1+20 or 1:20), but it is up to the customer need. Some channels can remain unpro-
tected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 266
266
2.3 SLTEs and DFMEs Types and Releases
TERA10 SLTE
TERA10 SLTEs exist in different types identified by letters (TERA10 A, TERA10 B ...) and in different
releases identified by numbers (R1, R3).
The SLTE is composed of:
• Common part (multiplex/demultiplex part)

• Tributaries (separate channels)
Common part and Tributaries exist in different releases: R1 Common, R3 Common, R1 Tributaries,
R3 Tributaries. See chapter 2.5 Optical Topology Description for further information.
The TERA10 SLTE multiplexes/demultiplexes 10 Gbit/s channels. Depending on the SLTE type and
release, the maximum transmission capability will vary: N x 10Gbit/s.
The TERA10 SLTE may have Tributaries Protection capability. See chapter 2.12 Protection Prin-
ciples for further information.
DFME
The Dark Fibre Monitoring Equipment is dedicated to the management of unused optical fibres (dark
fibres). It allows the supervision of Submerged equipment such as Repeater Subsystems, BU Sub-
systems, RCE Subsystems.
DFMEs exist in different types identified by letters (DFME–B, DFME–C, DFME–D) and in different
releases identified by numbers (R1).
The DFME has only one Common part and no Tributaries.
The equipment supported by the 1353SH/TERA10CT and described in the manual are the following:
– TERA10 A
• Release R1: R1 Common + R1 Tributaries

The maximum capacity is 42 x 10 Gbit/s
– TERA10 B
• Release R1: R1 Common + R1 Tributaries. The Tributary Protection capability is 1+N.

– TERA10 C
• Release R1: R1 Common + R1 Tributaries. The Tributary Protection capability is 1+N

• Release R3: R3 Common + R1 Tributaries. The Tributary Protection capability is 1+N

– TERA10 D
• Release R1: R1 Common + R1 / R3 Tributaries. The Tributary Protection capability is 1+N or

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1:N
3AL 89062 AA AA 25 / 266
266
• Release R3: R3 Common + R1 / R3 Tributaries. The Tributary Protection capability is 1+N or
1:N

– DFME–B

• Release R1: R1 Common
– DFME–C
– DFME–D

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 26 / 266
266
2.4 Logical Description
The following figures shows the SLTE functional blocks:

– an Optical/Electrical (O/E) conversion function which is the interface with the SDH equipment,
– a FEC function that performs the encoding / decoding of the FEC overhead on the electrical signal,
– an Electrical/Optical (O/E) conversion on a specific wavelength,
– a multiplex/demultiplex (MUX/DEMUX) function which put/extract on the same fibre pair all the Tribu-
tary optical signals,
– a Optical Amplifier (OA) function,
– a Submerged Line Physical Interface function which mainly performs a post / pre optical amplification
of the multiplexed signal.
SLTE Transmit side
O/E FEC O/E OA

STM64
Post–Amp
M
U
O/E FEC O/E OA X

Submarine Line
Physical Interface
O/E FEC O/E OA

Spare
Figure 3. TERA10 SLTE Transmission Functional Blocks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 27 / 266
266
SLTE Receive side

O/E FEC O/E OA

STM64
D Pre–Amp
E
M
O/E FEC O/E OA
U Submarine Line
X Physical Interface
O/E FEC O/E OA

Spare
Figure 4. TERA10 SLTE Reception Functional Blocks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 266
266
2.5 Optical Topology Description
Depending on the release of Common part, the SLTE will have a different Optical Topology:
– In R1 Common, the channels are multiplexed/demultiplexed in one stage

CAU–TX(s) PAU
Trib Post–Amp
M WTA
U
X
Submarine Line
Physical Interface
CAU–RX(s)
Trib Pre–Amp
D WRA
E
M
U
X Submarine Line
Physical Interface
Figure 5. R1 Common Optical Topology
The R1 Common optical topology multiplexes/demultiplexes all the input/output Tributaries in one stage.
This stage is composed of up to 3 multiplexer/demultiplexer boards. Amplification boards are dedicated
to a Tributary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 29 / 266
266
– In R3 Common, the channels are multiplexed/demultiplexed in two stages

Trib BPAU
BCAU–TX(s)
M
U Post–Amp
X
M WTA
U
X
Submarine Line
Physical Interface
Trib D BCAU–RX(s)
E
M
U Booster(s) Pre–Amp
X D WRA
WBA
E
M
U
X Submarine Line
Physical Interface
Figure 6. R3 Common Optical Topology
The R3 Common optical topology multiplexes/demultiplexes the input/output Tributaries in two stages:
– The first stage multiplexes/demultiplexes the Tributaries in blocks of tributaries. This stage is com-
posed of one multiplexer/demultiplexer board per block of Tributaries.
– The second stage multiplexes/demultiplexes all the blocks of tributaries. This stage is composed of
up to 3 multiplexer/demultiplexer boards.
Amplification boards are dedicated to each block of Tributaries.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 30 / 266
266
2.6 Physical Description
The TERA10 SLTE is a multi–racks equipment.

It is structured in three levels: Racks contains Subracks (or shelves) which themselves contains plug–in
Boards (or units). The functional organization is based on the subrack, each of which has its own local
processor board (TMP) with knowledge of the expected boards.
Equipment configuration depends on two parameters:
– Number of working wavelengths. One Tributary subrack is needed for each working wavelength. The
number of multiplex/demultiplex units depends of the number of working wavelengths supported and
the number of Unit Amplifiers.
– Presence of protection. A dedicated protecting wavelength can be added per subset of working
wavelengths. This protecting wavelength is used to perform a 1+N protection mechanism (see chap-
ter Protection Principles for further information). In this case a protection switch controller subrack
is added for each subset of working wavelengths.
2.6.1 Subrack Description
The NE contains subracks of two heights:
– Tributary R1 and Protection subracks are double height subracks.
– Other subracks are considered as single height subracks.
Racks can contain 2, 3 or 4 subracks according to subrack height.
Single subrack Single subrack

Double subrack Double subrack

Double subrack Double subrack
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4
Figure 7. Different Rack Contents
For TERA10 C and D, an upper level is added: the Rows of Racks. The number and content of Rows de-
pend on rooms layout in the terminal station. The rows configuration done at installation allows to repre-
sent the equipment in a more realistic way.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 31 / 266
266
The subrack types are:

T R
P P
M M
C C C
A A A P
F S T U U U P S
E L M A
T T T U
U U U X X X U
1
1 2 3
C C C R
A A A F P
O R R F T
U U U U S
P A X D M
U
U R R R U T U U P
2
X X X F
1 2 3 U
Figure 8. Tributary Subrack R1 – subrack release 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 32 / 266
266
T
P T
M M
P P
S T R S P
S S
E X X D
U U U U U U
R 1 2
P
O
M
P
U
Figure 9. Tributary Subrack R3 – subrack release 1
C C C C C C C C C C C
A A A A A B A A A A A A P P
U U U U U P U U U U U U T S S
A M U U
T T T T T R R R R R R P
X X X X X U X X X X X X 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 10. Tributary Amplifier Subrack Single Tributary (TribAmp) – subrack release 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 33 / 266
266
C C C C C C C C C C
A A B A A A A A B A A A P P
U U P U U U U U P U U U T S S
A A M U U
T T R R R T T R R R P 1 2
X X U X X X X X U X X X
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3
Figure 11. Tributary Amplifier Subrack Double Tributaries (TribAmp) – subrack release 0
L L
S M M P P P P
S M W
S M M T S S
P P U U U T
P 1 2 M
C C X X X A U U
C I P
I W W C 1 2
1 2 1 2
Figure 12. Tramsmit Amplifier Subrack (TxAmp) – subrack release 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 34 / 266
266
L L
P P
S B B S W M M T P P
T M M M T M S S
1 2 P U U
U X X U A
Figure 13. Transmit Amplifier Subrack (TxAmp) – sbrack release 1
L L L L
S S W D P P
P P W P P T
T I R M M M M X S S
B M
U U A 1 2 1 2 U U U
A P
C 2
1
Figure 14. Receive Amplifier Subrack (RxAmp) – subrack release 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 35 / 266
266
L L L L
W P P P P
W
M M M M B B T P P
R 1 2 B D D S S
1 2 M
A A X X P U U
Figure 15. Receive Amplifier (RxAmp) – subrack release 1
B B B L L D D P P
W T
L L L M M S S
P P M
A A A B
M M X X U U
N N N A P
1 2 1 2 1 2
K K K
Figure 16. RX Booster Subrack (RxBoost) – subrack release 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 36 / 266
266
T T T T T T T B T P P
M M M M D D D L M S S
X X X X X X X A P U U
N
K
Figure 17. Mux/Demux Subrack (TribMuxDemux) – subrack release 0
W W W W
B
M M M M M
L
A U U U U U
N X X X X X
K 1 2 3 4
Figure 18. Transmit Mux Subrack (TxMux) – subrack release 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 37 / 266
266
W W W W

D D D D D B
M M M M M L
U U U U U A
X X X N
X X
K
1 2 3 4
Figure 19. Receive Demux Subrack (RxDemux) – subrack release 0
B B B B B B B B B B B B
P P P P P P P P P P T P P
P P
A A M S S
A A A A A A A A A A
P U U
U U U U U U U U U U U U
Figure 20. Fully equipped Block Pre–emphasis Amplifier Subrack (BPAmp) – subrack release 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 38 / 266
266
B B B B B B B B B B B B T P P
C C C C C C C C C C C C M S S
A A A A A A A A A A A A P U U
U U U U U U U U U U U U
Figure 21. Fully equipped Block Compensation Amplifier Subrack (BCAmp) – subrack release 0
L L L L L L L L L L L L T P P
C C C C C C C C C C C C M S S
U U U U U U U U U U U U P U U
Figure 22. Fully equipped Loading Channel Subrack (LCU) – subrack release 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 39 / 266
266
M C C C C M C C C C M B B S T P P
P I I I I P I I I I P L P I M S S
U U U U U U U U U U U U A U P U U
U
Figure 23. Management Subrack (MNGT) – subrack release 0
B B B B B B M D T P P
L L L L L L U X M S S
A A A A A A X U P U U
N N N N N N C C
K K K K K K
Figure 24. Line Coupler Subrack (LINECOUPLER) – subrack release 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 40 / 266
266
P T S
T S C
A U U
P R M P P
R S I S S
A U P U U
1 2
Figure 25. Protection Subrack (PROT) – subrack release 0
2.6.2 Subrack/Board/Port Naming
The User Labels are structured as follow:
userLabel = (subRackUserLabel | boardUserLabel | terminationPointUserLabel)
a) Subrack User Label Format
The subrack user label format is:
”rw” ”<rowNumber> ”r” <rackNumber> ”/” (tribSubRackInCR1 | tribSubRackInCR3 | otherSu-

brack)
with:
tribSubRackInCR1 = ”TRIB_R” <releaseID> ”#” <tribNumber> ”[”<wavelength>”]”

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
tribSubRackInCr3 = ”TRIB_R” <releaseID> ”_B” <blockNumber> ”#” <tribNumber> ”[”<wave-

length>”]”
3AL 89062 AA AA 41 / 266
266
otherSubrack = (”TMUX” | ”TXAMP” | ”RXAMP” | ”RXDEMUX” | ”LCU_” <IcuSubrackNumber>
| ”BCAMP_”<bcampSubrackNumber> | ”BPAMP_”<bpampSubrackNumber> | ”MNGT” |
”TRIBMUXDEMUX” <trmuxdemuxSubrackNumber> | ”TRIBAMP_” <tribAmpSubrackSingle-
Number> | ”LINECOUPLER” | ”PSS_” <pssNumber>)

Examples:
rw1r2/TRIB_R3_B1#1[1553.000 nm]
b) Board User Label Format
The board user label format is:
<physicalLocation> ”/” <boardType> (”_” (<boardId> | <logicalRole>)) (<suffix>)
with:
<physicalLocation> = ”rw” ”r” <j> ”sr” <k> ”sl” <t>
<boardType> = TMU | PAU | BCAU | BPAU | LCU | WBA | CAU | PAU | FDU | FEU ....
<boardId> = board number, if needed (rares cases, mainly PSU and WBA boards)
<logicalRole> =
– for any BCAU and CAU: ”TXP” (transmit direction, position i) | ”RXP” (receive direc-
tion, position i)
– for boards in PSS Subracks: ”PSS” (PSS subrack number)
– for LPM BOARDS of WBA: ”WBA” (WBA main board number within the optical topolo-
gy)
<suffix> =
– for Tributary Boards in Common R1: ”#” <tribId>
– For Block Boards in Common R3: ”_B” 
– for Tributary Boards in Common R3: ”_B” ”#” <tribId>
– for Common Boards in Common R1 and R3: no suffix
Examples:
Tributaries in Common R1:
rw1r2sr3s14 / TMU#6
rw1r2sr3s14 / BPAU#7 (for TERA10 D only: Tributary R3 in Common R1)
rw1r2sr3s14 / CAU_TXP3#6
Block:
rw1r2sr3s14 / BCAU_TXP2_B3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
rw1r2sr3s14 / BCAU_RXP3_B3
rw1r2sr3s14 / BPAU_B3
3AL 89062 AA AA 42 / 266
266
Tributary in Common R3:
rw1r2sr3s14 / FDU_B3#6
LCU Board:
rw1r2sr3s14 / LCU_B3
Protection Board:
rw1r2sr3s14 / PTA_PSS1
Common Board:
rw1r2sr3s14 / WBA_2
rw1r2sr3s12 / LPM1_WBA2
c) Termination Point User Label Format
The termination point user label format is:
(aggregateTerminationPoint | singleWLTerminationPoint)
with:
aggregateTerminationPoint = ”postAmp” | ”preAmp”
singleWLTerminationPoint = (”sdhTx” | ”sdhRx” | ”fecEncoding” | ”fecDecoding” | ”tribTx” |

”tribRx”) ”#” <tribNumber> ”[”<wavelenght>”]”
Examples:
sdhTx#1[1554.00nm]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 43 / 266
266
2.7 Constructor Mode
N.B. The Constructor Mode is only available for Administrator profile

Some features dedicated to specific configuration and installation are only available through the

Constructor Mode. Other features are also impacted by this mode (see chapter 5.3).
This mode is normally dedicated to the TERA10CT, but it can be invoked using a 1353SH. This mode is
however not intended to be used for regular operation & maintenance. It has been designed for configura-
tion and installation, equipment upgrade or advanced maintenance.
The Constructor mode is only supported on TERA10 NEs.

For other NEs such as PFEs, Constructor Mode will offer no more than Administrator profile.
N.B. No logout is needed to start / stop Constructor Mode.
1) How to launch the Equipment view in Constructor Mode?
In a ’dtterm’ window, enter the following UNIX command:
• /usr/1353sh/eml/usmsh5qb3/script/emlUsmConstructorMode.ptk
A window appears, giving the Constructor mode state:
Figure 26. Stopped Constructor Mode dialogue box
• Click on Start button.

The Cancel push button closes the window without action, the Constructor mode state is not
modified.
A warning window is displayed:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 27. Warning Constructor mode for starting views
3AL 89062 AA AA 44 / 266
266
• As written in the window, you are warned that all currently running Equipment views will be killed.
It is preferable that you close them now properly using Close item in Views menu in each Equip-
ment view. This has to be done to allow new Equipment view to be launched in Constructor
mode.
• Click on Continue button.

modified.
You can launch new Equipment views from the PNM view. They will be launched in Constructor
mode state.
The title of the Equipment view contains Constructor Mode label.
2) How to stop the Equipment view in Constructor Mode?
In a ’dtterm’ window, enter the following UNIX command:
• /usr/1353sh/eml/usmsh5qb3/script/emlUsmConstructorMode.ptk
A window appears, giving the Constructor mode state:
Figure 28. Started Constructor mode dialogue box
• Click on Stop button.

modified.
A warning window is displayed:
Figure 29. Warning Constructor mode for stopping views

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 45 / 266
266
• As written in the window, you are warned that all currently running Equipment views will be killed.
It is preferable that you close them now properly using Close item in Views menu in each Equip-
ment view. This has to be done to allow new Equipment view to be launched in Constructor
mode.

• Click on Continue button.
modified.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 46 / 266
266
2.8 Stand Alone Mode
The SLTE graphical interface is in Stand Alone mode when the 1354SN application is not assigning the
SLTE.
The Assignment state also called SN Management State is permanently displayed in the NE State panel
(right vertical part of the window): SNM icon (see Figure 50. ).
If the 1354SN application is not accessible from the 1353SH application (no more polling between them),
the 1353SH automatically works in Stand Alone mode. Information dialogue box are displayed:
Figure 30. 1353SH Stand Alone Messages
Figure 31. 1353SH Stand Alone Messages
In that mode, some specific views are accessible:

– Automatic Pre Emphasis view
The Stand Alone mode is a momentary mode.

It is not a permanent mode, except for the TERA10CT which is never assigned by 1354SN (see chapter
2.14).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 47 / 266
266
2.9 Performance Counters Principles
For performance monitoring two classes of counters are managed:

a) FEC counters

Two accumulation periods are supported: 15 minutes and 24 hours. For each TP (1 for each Tribu-
tary), a current block, a previous block and n more recent blocks of counters are stored in the SLTE.
The list of activated TPs is configured and separately managed for CTs and OS. Once TP perfor-
mance collect is activated from management systems, the SLTE manages the collect and transfer
on request all or part of the block counters.
One day of 15 minutes counters and one week of daily counters are stored in the SLTE.
The FEC alarm threshold configuration is part of the SLTE configuration. Low and high thresholds
are defined for each counter to raise a non urgent alarm or an urgent alarm when they are crossed.
b) B1 byte counters
The B1 byte (at the Regeneration section) is extracted from each STM64 frame and collected accord-
ing to performance monitoring principles. Counters cumulate an Error number.
N.B. Be aware that no value are given for ES (Erroneous Seconds), SES (Severely Erroneous
Seconds) and UAS (Unavailable Seconds) associated counters. These counters are usu-
ally given for SDH Equipment, but not for Submarine Equipment.
The management procedure is the same as for FEC counter: accumulation periods, collect, thresh-
old and alarm generation.
The SLTE manages at least two different counter lists (OS and CT).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 48 / 266
266
2.10 Analog Measurement Principles
a) Principles
Analog measurements are used for submarine transmission network elements such as the SLTE and
the PFE, in order to follow as closely as possible the deterioration of equipment with age and to be
warned as early as possible of any impeding problem. Those equipment must satisfy stringent re-
quirements for long period of time (typically 25 years).
From the operator point of view, there are three ways to do analog measurements:
1) Operator query: the operator requests the current value of some measurements (grouped in
one Measurement Point). The OS relays this request to the NE, which responds with the mea-
surement values. The OS can then display the results to the operator, and record them.
2) Periodic polling: for the operator, this works along the same principles as for Performance Mo-
nitoring. The following steps can be distinguished:
– In a preliminary setup phase, the operator specifies which measurements have to be

polled (choice of measurement points), as well as the time interval between polls for each
measurement point (every 15 minutes (at 0, 15, 30, 45 past) or every 24hours (at mid-
night)).
– For each measurement point, the OS periodically recovers current measurement values
from the NE and stores them in the measurement database.
– In a subsequent ”off–line” consultation phase, the operator can display measurement re-
sults.
3) Peak automatic collection measurement
High and low alarm thresholds are defined for each measurement points. When the current
measurement value continuously measured by the SLTE, becomes over the high threshold, an
alarm is raised. When the measurement value is below the low threshold, an alarm is raised.
The associated measured value is called a Peak measurement.
Peak measurements are automatically collected when a threshold alarm is notified.
The SLTE recovers all latest peak measurements stored for the Measurement Point. Several
peak measurements values can be collected between two periodic collects.
N.B. Time management: the OS modifies the effective duration of the period according to
time changes. From the SLTE point of view, time changes have no impact on the
measurement management.
High and low thresholds are defined for measurement points. When a threshold value is crossed
(peak measurement), an alarm is raised. This triggers a dedicated measurement request to upload
the peak value and the instantaneous analog measurement.
Two kinds of measurement points or thresholds are defined:
• Primary, if the measurement point or threshold is displayed to all operator profiles

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Secondary, if the measurement point or threshold is displayed only to the Constructor mode
3AL 89062 AA AA 49 / 266
266
b) SLTE NEs
The SLTE NEs perform analog measurements continually, independently of the OS. Measurements
are transferred to the OS in blocks called Measurement Points, on OS request. The NE does not peri-

odically store measurement values as in performance monitoring: on OS measurement request, the

NE sends back the current (present) value of each measurement.
c) Submerged Line Elements monitored by SLTE
N.B. This function is available only in Stand Alone mode (1354SN not connected to 1353SH),
The Line Equipment are the Repeaters and the Branching Units.
Some analog measurements can be retrieved by the OS from the submerged plant. They are mainly
input power, output power and pump current of optical amplifiers.
For the WDM Submerged equipment, many measurements are available. Nevertheless, reading re-
quests from management systems are needed to activate the measurement reading process, except
for peak measurements.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 50 / 266
266
2.11 Laser Management Principles
There are two kinds of Laser Shutdown in the SLTE:

– Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS): this configurable mechanism is used to shutdown automatically
the transmitter laser and pumps, when received signal is lost.
– Manual Laser Shutdown: used to shutdown manually the receiver pumps.
There are two kinds of Laser Restart in the SLTE:
– Automatic Laser Restart (ALR): this configurable mechanism is used to restart automatically the
transmitter laser and pumps, when received signal is recovered.
– Manual Laser Restart: used to restart manually the receiver pumps.
Four functional blocks are concerned:
– Line transmitter which implies 1 laser and up to 4 pumps

– Line receiver which implies up to 4 pumps
– Post amplifier which implies up to 2 pumps
– Pre amplifier which implies up to 2 pumps
For each board, the kind of Laser management is:
Board/Port Automatic Laser Shutdown Manual Laser Shutdown or Re-

or Restart start
Line Transmitter (TMU/tribTx) YES NO
Post Amplifier (WTA/postAmp) YES NO
Pre Amplifier (WRA/preAmp) NO YES
Line Receiver (RXU/tribRx) NO YES
FEC Decoder (FDU/sdhTx) YES NO
The Laser Commands are:
a) The ALS and ALR features correspond to the Laser management on the TMU, FDU and WTA boards.
The commands are available on tribTx, sdhTx and postAmp ports.
It covers four commands:
• ALS Configuration
• ALS Control
• Manual Restart
• Test Restart
b) The Manual Laser Shutdown feature corresponds to the Laser management on the TXU and WRA
boards. The commands are available on tribRx and preAmp ports.
It covers one command:
• Laser Cut Off
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
c) For Dummy tributaries, the Manual Shutdown is provided on PAU boards. A Laser Cut Off command
is available directly in PAU board view (because no tribTx port).
3AL 89062 AA AA 51 / 266
266
d) As many pumps or lasers, on several units, are used at the channel transmit side and receive side,
the synthesis laser states and controls are on transmission ports. However each pump or laser is able
to provide its state. One unit can support one or two laser–pumps, that is why one or two dedicated
state panels are displayed in board views. The concerned boards are SLU, CAU, RAU, PAU, WTA

pumps, WRA pumps.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 52 / 266
266
2.12 Protection Principles
The protection mechanism of the TERA10 SLTE allows the protection of N Tributaries (or protected chan-
nels) by one separate Tributary (or protection channels). Also called 1+N or 1:N, this protection allows N
protected channels to be protected by one protecting channel.

Two modes are possible:
– the 1+N protection mode which allows a switched signal on the protecting channel
– the 1:N protection mode which allows low priority traffic to be carried on the protecting channel when
protection is not used
The N protected channels are named Protection Group.
The protection mode (1+N or 1:N) is affected to a protection group.
The TERA10 D SLTE can manage some 1+N protection groups and some 1:N protection groups at the
same time.
a) 1+N Protection mode
SDH SDH
equipment SLTE SLTE equipment
working working
trib. trib.
switch
switch
Submerged
working Line working
trib. trib.
spare spare
trib. trib.
Figure 32. TERA10 1+N protection (one protection group)
The aim of the 1+N protection is to increase the reliability of the WDM network, with a lower cost than
with 1+1 protection. The solution consists in using 1+N WDM channel resources for N client SDH
signals. This means that the spare channel is always available to carry the traffic of a failed channel.
In order to increase reliability, each direction is independent.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
This mechanism protects the end to end unidirectional channels.
The protection used here is unidirectional 1+N protection (i.e. for each direction independently, a
dedicated added spare channel is used to protect N working channels).
3AL 89062 AA AA 53 / 266
266
This protection is dual ended (i.e. the protection switch is performed at both ends at the same time).
The operator can lockout one channel (in one direction or the other) from the protection scheme:
i.e. this channel is forced to stay unprotected until the operator has released this lockout. He can re-

quest it at one end or the other.

The operator can disable one protection group (in both directions at the same time): i.e. all chan-
nels are forced to stay unprotected until the operator enables it. He can request it at one end on the
other.
The Revertive mode means that, as soon as the failure disappears, the switch is automatically re-
moved in order to free the protection channel for another Tributary when required.
The Hold Off Time is the period for that the Subsystem shall wait before launching the protection,
to avoid contention with SDH protection.
b) 1:N Protection mode
The 1:N protection mode consists in using N+1 WDM channels resources for N+1 client SDH signals.
The protecting SDH signal is a ”low priority” traffic that may be pre–empted by protected traffic.
At any time, the ’low priority” traffic incoming signal can be interrupted for protection purposes. Thus,
when a failure occurs on a working tributary (a signal degrade or a signal fail) or when the operator
performs a manual or forced switch, the protected channel switches onto the protecting one. Conse-
quently, the ”low priority” traffic signal is not carried. A pre–emption status indicates if the ”low priority”
traffic is either carried or pre–empted.
SDH SDH
equipment SLTE SLTE equipment
working working
trib. trib.
switch
switch
Submerged
working Line working
trib. trib.
spare spare
trib. trib.
Low priority Low priority
traffic traffic
Figure 33. TERA10 1:N protection (one protection group)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 54 / 266
266
The 1:N protection follows the same assumptions as for 1+N protection i.e.:
• protection switching is uni–directional: each direction is independent. Therefore each”low prio-

rity” direction can be pre–empted independently
• protection is dual–ended: switching is synchronously performed at both end
• protection can be revertive: after the fault is cleared, the switched traffic is restored to its normal
path and the extra traffic can use the protecting tributary
For 1+N and 1:N protection modes, some rules are needed to manage the conflicts between two channels
in failure at the same time within the same protection group. The unidirectional dual ended protection
switch is performed for four reasons:
a) the operator requests a manual switch (he can request it at one end or the other)
b) the signal is degraded
c) the signal is failed
d) the operator requests a force switch (he can request it at one end or the other)
As there is only one spare channel for N protected channels, the following priority is specified:
a) < b) < c) < d)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 55 / 266
266
2.13 Dummy Tributaries
a) TERA10 A–B and TERA10 C–D R1

A dummy Tributary is a sub–equipped Tributary subrack reduced to the Transmission function (no

Reception function). It is composed of SLU, PAU, PSU and TMP boards.
Dummy tributaries are required to fill up the bandwidth when too few channels are in use.
Only few functions are available on those dummy tributaries, e.g. Ampli Power on PAU boards.
b) TERA10 C–D R3
For the TERA10 C–D R3, a new board has been designed, dedicated to dummy channel: the Loading
Channel Unit (LCU).
The LCU is used instead of dummy Tributary to fill up the bandwidth when too few channels are actu-
ally in use.
A LCU contains two lasers which play the role of two dummy Tributaries.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 56 / 266
266
2.14 TERA10 Craft Terminal (TERA10CT)
In terms of developed product, the TERA10CT is a 1353SH, i.e., there is only one set of delivered software
components for both applications: a single EML IM and a single EML USM for both TERA10CT and
1353SH.
a) TERA10CT Hardware Architecture
The TERA10CT shares the Local Area Network (LAN) on which the SLTEs are connected. It is composed
of a CPU workstation (the processing), and a PC (the user interface) hosting Go–Global, a kind of X termi-
nal emulation.
1353SH
SLTE SLTE
TERA10CT
terminal
LAN
DCN
TERA10CT
workstation
Figure 34. TERA10CT configuration
N.B. The connections are performed through a Hub allowing the PC to be positioned closed to the
SLTE. This hub has not been represented for clarity purpose.
As such, the TERA10CT has all facilities that a usual 1353SH offers (process management, Desktop, all
SMF services, AS, PNM, EMLIM, EMLUSM, PMV...).
To supervise the SLTE, installation teams need to send the following usual commands: create NE, set of
NE QB3* address and Start Supervision with Upload.
As such, the TERA10CT behaves like a craft in front of the SLTE. The Constructor mode (see chapter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Constructor Mode) has been designed and implemented for that purpose.
3AL 89062 AA AA 57 / 266
266
b) Configuration at the TERA10 SLTE Level
The SLTE has been designed to be supervised by two workstations at the same time:

– one workstation with the TERA10CT

– one workstation with the 1353SH (the Main or the Spare).
The SLTE will recognize the TERA10CT or the 1353SH depending on their QB3* addresses. Those ad-
dresses are initially configured in the SLTE.
c) Features added to the EML Software
The following features were added to EML software to allow configuration of the TERA10 SLTE or DFME.
Submerged Line configuration (see chapter 14.3):

This feature allows the operator to reconfigure Submerged Line in the TERA10 SLTE, using an EDF file
(a copy of the one used by the 1354SN).
Mechanical configuration (see chapter18.1):

This feature is dedicated to SLTE Tributary Upgrades. It allows the operator to modify the mechanical con-
figuration of the SLTE (add new Tributary, change the role of a Tributary (dummy or not, protected or not)).
OS addresses (see chapter 17.6):

This feature allows the operator to change OS QB3* addresses. This concerns the MAIN OS address, the
SPARE OS address and the TERA10CT address.
External Point Partner alarms (see chapter 17.5):

This feature allows the operator to define which alarm is associated to an external output point. While this
alarm will be ON, the SLTE will emit a signal on the related external point connector.
Only when the 1354SN and 1353SH are not supervising the NE. In addition, the Submerged Line view
is accessible on the TERA10CT.
d) TERA10CT Access State
As with a 1320NX Craft, the TERA10CT operator is not authorized, by default, to download new configura-
tion into the SLTE and to send remote controls to the SLTE. It is the 1353SH operator privilege.
But the 1353SH operator can authorize/inhibit the TERA10CT operator to do so (by sending the Access
State command to the SLTE).
– From 1353SH, in the Supervision pull down menu, click on the Access state option.
Supervision
NE >
Access State > OS
Alarms > Local
Upload Remote Inventory
Dump NE MIB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 35. Access State options
3AL 89062 AA AA 58 / 266
266
Two possibilities:
– OS indicates that only the 1353SH will be allowed to modify the configuration tables and
send remote controls. The TERA10CT will just be authorized to show the configuration.
It is the default value.

– Local indicates that the TERA10CT will be authorized by 1353SH to update the NE confi-
guration.
N.B. The current access state is displayed in the CT icon on NE State Panel (on TERA10CT and
1353SH). This icon is a key icon (local access denied or local access granted).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 59 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
60 / 266
3 MAIN VIEWS
This chapter presents the views available for the SLTE management. An example of each type of view
is given.
3.1 Access to Views
The following types of views are available:
– Equipment view
• Subrack view
– Board view
• Port view
– Reception view
– Automatic Pre Emphasis view
– Connectivity view (only for TERA10 D)
These views are accessible from Views pull down menu, except subrack, board and port views that are
accessible from Equipment view and Port views also accessible from the Transmission/Reception views.
Views
Previous Esc
Equipment
External Points
Transmission
Reception
Submerged Line
Connectivity
Open object Alt+O
Zoom Scroll Mode Alt+Z
Close Alt+Q
The Previous command displays the previous displayed view (if exists).
The Open object command displays the selected object in the view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Zoom Scroll mode command allows to choose the view format: with zoom and scroll bar, or the over-
all view (only available in Transmission/Reception views if needed).
The Open in Window command displays the selected object in a new window.
3AL 89062 AA AA 61 / 266
266
The Open New Submerged Line Window command displays the Submerged Line view in a new window.
The Close command closes the Equipment window.

N.B. The Automatic Pre Emphasis menu is visible only if APA is authorized and it is sensitive only

in Stand Alone mode. For Authorization, see Constructor Mode chapter.
N.B. Submerged Line menu is sensitive only in Stand Alone Mode.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 62 / 266
266
3.2 Views
3.2.1 TERA10 A–B Equipment View

Figure 37. TERA10 A–B Equipment view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 63 / 266
266
3.2.2 TERA10 A–B Equipment View in Constructor Mode
N.B. Constructor Mode label is visible in the window title


Figure 38. TERA10 A–B Equipment view in Constructor mode
N.B. In this view the spare racks are visible

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 64 / 266
266
3.2.3 TERA10 C–D Equipment View


Figure 39. TERA10 C–D Equipment view
This view is divided with white line to display the Rows of Racks. If it contains a lot of Racks, one Row can
be displayed in several stages.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 65 / 266
266
3.2.4 TERA10 C–D Equipment View in Constructor Mode
N.B. Only available in Constructor mode


Figure 40. TERA10 C–D Equipment view in Constructor mode
This view is divided with white line to display the Rows of Racks. If it contains a lot of Racks, one Row can
be displayed in several stages.
N.B. Five spare racks are available for upgrade purpose

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 66 / 266
266
3.2.5 Subrack View


N.B. Only one selection is necessary to get the whole tributary

or:
Figure 41. R1 Tributary Subrack view example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 67 / 266
266
3.2.6 Board View


or:
Figure 42. Board view example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 68 / 266
266
3.2.7 Port View



or:
Figure 43. Port view example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 69 / 266
266


Figure 44. External Points view example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 70 / 266
266

Figure 45. Transmission view example
N.B. In blocks, W icon (Working) indicates that the Tributary is in service. If Tributary is out of service,
W icon and links between tribTx and postAmp blocks are hidden.
Some global commands are available by selecting several blocks and using WDM Transmis-
sion menu.
If protection is supported, protecting tributary has Spare label. sdhTxProtect port is visible with-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
out W icon and Alarm Synthesis because this port only modelise reception of terrestrial signals.
This port is the flexibility point for protection purpose.
3AL 89062 AA AA 71 / 266
266
The structure of the Reception view proceeds from the SLTE functional blocks (see Figure 4. ).


Figure 46. Reception view example
N.B. In blocks, W icon (Working) indicates that the Tributary is in service. If Tributary is out of service,
W icon and links between tribTx and postAmp blocks are hidden.
Some global commands are available by selecting several blocks and using WDM Transmis-
sion menu.
If protection is supported, protecting tributary has Spare label. sdhTxProtect port is visible with-
out W icon and Alarm Synthesis because this port only modelise reception of terrestrial signals.
This port is the flexibility point for protection purpose.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 72 / 266
266
N.B. Only available in Stand Alone mode.

The Submerged Line view is separated in two parts: the left part for Subsegments, the right part for Branch-
ing Units.
The Segment label is visible at the top of the view before WET PLANT label.
Figure 47. Submerged Line view example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 73 / 266
266
3.2.12 Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment View
N.B. Only available in Stand Alone mode.

To display the Automatic Pre Emphasis Adjustment view:

– Select the Automatic Pre Emphasis option in the Views pull down menu.
Figure 48. Automatic Pre Emphasis Adjustment View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 74 / 266
266
3.2.13 TERA10 D Connectivity View
To display the Connectivity view:

– Select the Connectivity option in the Views pull down menu.

Figure 49. Connectivity View

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 75 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
76 / 266
4 NE STATE PANEL
In the right vertical part of the window, the icons are displayed:
Supervision state
Alignment state
Local access state
Operational state
SN Management state
Transmission Alarm synthesis (both Transmission/Reception)
External point alarm synthesis
Craft Terminal Connected state (only for OS)
Alarm Filtering state
Multiple Line Command state
Line Supervision State
FarEnd Margin Measurement state
Pre Emphasis Equalized alarm
Margin Measurement state
OS connected state (only for TERA10CT)
Figure 50. NE State icons
– round, a circular icon represents an unstable management state

– square, a rectangular icon represents a stable management state
round: square:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 77 / 266
266
The icons have significant colours. Colours are different depending on the icon status:
Icon Status Colour Details

SUP –supervised = green The supervision state indicates whether or not the
–activating = brown NE is under OS or TERA10CT supervision.
ALI –aligned = green The alignment state indicates whether or not the
–aligning = brown NE and the OS or TERA10CT MIBs are aligned.
”a key” –granted = sky blue The local access state (icon with a key symbol) in-
–denied = green dicates whether the NE is managed by a craft ter-
minal or by the OS.
Q3 –enabled = green The operational state (Q3 icon) indicates whether

–disabled = red or not the communication with the OS is estab-
lished.
SNM –assigned = green 1354SN is assigning the NE

–free = sky blue 1354SN is not assigning the NE
TRA –cleared = green Transmission Alarm Synthesis, both Transmission

–alarm = alarm severity color and Reception
EXT –cleared = green Synthesis of all alarms relative to External Input

–alarm = alarm severity color Points.
CTC –cleared = green Craft Terminal is connected to NE (OS information)

–alarm = alarm severity color
AF –disabled = green Secondary alarms visible.

–enabled = dark blue Secondary alarms not visible.
MLC –ready = green A Multi Repeater command under progress.

–in progress = dark blue
LSS –operational = green SLTE may have problem to send command to sub-
–not operational = dark blue merged equipment
FMM –working = dark blue A Margin Measurements working on the remote

–not working = green SLTE.
PEE –equalized = green Alarm when pre–emphasis needs to be adjusted.

–not equalized = dark blue
MM –working = dark blue A Margin Measurement is working

OSC –connected = green OS is connected to NE (TERA10CT information)

–not connected = sky blue
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Table 1. TERA10 Colour icons
3AL 89062 AA AA 78 / 266
266
5 FEATURES ACCESSIBILITY
5.1 Features Accessibility versus NE States

This chapter maps services defined in the Specification document to NE states. N/A means ”not applica-
ble”, it indicates that the access to the service is not concerned by NE states. ”Any” means that this NE
state can take any of the pre_defined values.
The management states, their possible values and the abbreviation used in the following tables are ex-
posed below.
a) Assignment State Assign

Assigned Ass
not Assigned (NotAss) NotAss (free or observed).
b) Supervision State Supervi

declared Declare
supervised Sup
activating Act
deactivating DeAct
c) Local Access State Access

granted CT
denied OS
d) Operational State Operat

disabled Disable
enabled Enable
e) Alignment State Align

aligned Al
in configuration In Conf
aligning/auditing Align
misaligned Mis
General applied rules:
– when the service consists of a ”Mib consultation” , the table contains the following values:
• Assignment State: any
• Supervision State: any
• Access State: any
• Operational State: any
• Alignment State: any
– when the service consists of a ”Mib modification” and the modifications are performed in Nectas
Tables, the table contains the following values:
• Assignment State: depends on the service
• Supervision State: Declare/Sup
• Access State: any
• Operational State: any
• Alignment State: Al/Mis/InConf
– when the service includes ”Remote Command” which can be performed only when the NE is super-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
vised, the table contains the following values:

• Assignment State: depends on the service
• Supervision State: Sup
3AL 89062 AA AA 79 / 266
266
• Access State: OS
• Operational State: Enable
• Alignment State: Al/Mis/InConf

The System Management, Security Management, Operator Support features are not dependent on NE

states. Therefore, they don’t appear in the following tables.
Element management
NE MANAGEMENT
Service Assign Supervision Access Operat Align
Secondary alarms management
– Activate/Inhibit secondary
alarms (Alarm Filtering) any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
Request/Modify WDM SLTE spe- any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
cific parameters (NE characteris- In Conf
tics)
APA
– Modify attributes not Ass Sup any Enable Al / Mis In-
Conf
– Actions not Ass Sup OS Enable Al / Mis In-
Conf
– Modify APA Trib Involvement Al / Mis In-
any Sup any Enable
Conf
MPO
– Modify attributes not Ass Sup any Enable Al / Mis In-
Conf
Conf
– Modify Phase Amplitude and Al / Mis In-
Phase Of Phase modulator any Sup any Enable
Conf
ILFT
Conf
SLTE software reset manage- any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
ment In Conf
Orderwire management any Declare/Sup any Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
Tributaries management any Sup any Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
SLTE line information reset ma- any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
nagement In Conf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 80 / 266
266
Addresses management any Sup any Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
Request associated Specific
Problems
not Ass Sup OS Enable Al / Mis In-
– Actions Conf
EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT
Manage external output point pa- any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
rameters In Conf
Manage post–amplifier output any Declare/Sup any Enable Al / Mis
power In Conf
Manage pre–amplifier output any Declare/Sup any Enable Al / Mis
power In Conf
Manage compensation amplifier any Declare/Sup any Enable Al / Mis
output power In Conf
Manage fan state any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
Subrack configuration
– Modify attributes any Sup any Enable Al / Mis In-
Conf
Dummy channel power
– Modify attributes any Sup any Enable Al / Mis In-
Conf
– Actions any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis In-
Conf
TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT
Control AMS insertion toward any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
submarine line In Conf
Control FEC error insertion any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
Configure FEC error insertion any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
parameters In Conf
Control single FEC error inser-
tion any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
– insert single FEC error In Conf
any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
– set FEC error insertion rate
In Conf
Control channel power any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Configure channel power any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis

In Conf
3AL 89062 AA AA 81 / 266
266
Phase modulator amplitude ma- any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
nagement In Conf
Phase modulator phase mana- any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis

gement In Conf

NRZ modulator bias level mana- any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
gement In Conf
Decision threshold amplitude any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
management In Conf
Wavelength frequency offset ma-
nagement any Declare/sup any any Al / Mis
–Replace on attribute In Conf
Decision threshold phase mana- any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
gement In Conf
Control AMS insertion toward any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
SDH In Conf
Set the AMS pattern any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Expected and receive markers
– Modify expected FEC marker any Declare/sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Manage FEC correction any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Control the submarine line laser any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
shutdown criterion In Conf
Control the SDH laser shutdown any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
criterion In Conf
AUTOMATIC LASER SHUTDOWN MANAGEMENT

Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
Control In Conf
Automatic laser restart (ALR) any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis

Control In Conf
Manage laser restart any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis

In Conf
Control manual laser shutdown any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 82 / 266
266
SUBMARINE PROTECTION MANAGEMENT
Control Protection Group Opera- any any any any Al / Mis
tional State :
In Conf
Enable/Disable Protection Group
Protection Group Configuration any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Tributary Protection Configura- any Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
tion ( Signal degrade, signal fail In Conf
configuration )
Tributary Protection Commands any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
control protection unit switch and In Conf
lockout
SUBMERGED LINE MANAGEMENT

Line Equipment management
parameters
– Modify attributes not Ass Declare/Sup any Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
Initialize line configuration not Ass Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
In Conf
Management of Subsegment pa-
rameters
–Modify attribute not Ass Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Set repeater parameter not Ass Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Management of repeater Sub-
system parameters
–Set attribute not Ass Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Request measurement of repeat- any Sup OS Enable Al / Mis
er Subsystem In Conf
Management of BU module pa-
rameters
In Conf
Latching controls not Ass Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Control OA parameters not Ass Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
Manage RCS subsystem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In Conf
TEQ controls not Ass Declare/Sup any any Al / Mis
In Conf
3AL 89062 AA AA 83 / 266
266
5.2 Features Accessibility versus Particular NE States
Some functions accessibility depends on particular NE States Conditions.

The following table gives those conditions:

Menu / options Visibility Accessibility condi- Comment
condition tion
Configuration
–MIB > Align Down – (CT and local access Always available for
–MIB > Align Global Tables Down granted) or (OS and lo- Craft Terminal or avail-
cal access denied) able on OS only if local
access is denied
–MIB > Align Up – CT or (OS and local ac- Always available for
cess denied) Craft Terminal or avail-
able on OS only if local
access is denied
–MIB > Compare – CT or (OS and local) ac- Always available for
cess denied Craft Terminal or avail-
able on OS only if local
access is denied
–APA/MPO > APA Tributary Involve- APA Autho- – –

ment rized
–APA/MPO > Phase Amplitude Confi- APA Autho- – –

guration rized
–APA/MPO > APA Authorization SNM not as- – only for Constructor
signed mode
–Protection Group > Enable/Disable – Protection Available see Availability status

Protection Group
Port
–Phase Modulator – Margin Measurement see MM icon in NE state

not working panel
–Increase Channel Power – Margin Measurement see MM icon in NE state

–Decrease Channel Power not working panel
–Channel Power Config
–FEC Error Insertion > Single FEC – Margin Measurement see MM icon in NE state
Error Insertion not working panel
only for Constructor
mode
–Decision Threshold – Far End Margin Mea- see FMM icon in NE

surement not working state panel
–Laser Management > ALS Control > – ALS Enabled or (ALS –

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Disable ALS/Laser Off Status = Disabled and

(ALS Current State = La-
ser On or in test))
3AL 89062 AA AA 84 / 266
266
Menu / options Visibility Accessibility condi- Comment
condition tion
–Laser Management > ALS Control > – ALS Enabled or (ALS –

Disable ALS/Laser On Status = Disabled and

(ALS Current State = La-
ser Off or in test))
–Laser Management > Test Restart – ALS Enabled only in Constructor

mode
–Laser Management > Manual Re- – ALS Enabled –

start
Submerged Line
–Sub Segment Multi Repeater Com- – Multiple line command MLC state in panel
mands not in progress
–Sub Segment Repeaters List (Mea- – (CT and OS not con- –

surement and OA Commands) nected) or Sub Segment
not accessible
–BU Sub System List (Measurement – CT and OS not con- –

and OA Commands) nected
Supervision
–Dump NE MIB – Alignment state different –

of Align Up
Subrack
–Pre–Ampli Power Adjustment – Far End Margin Mea- see FMM icon in NE
–Compensation Output Power – Far End Margin Mea- see FMM icon in NE
–Post–Ampli Output Power Adjust- – Margin Measurement see MM icon in NE state

ment not working panel
Views
–Submerged Line – SNM not assigned Stand Alone Mode
–Automatic Pre Emphasis APA Autho- SNM not assigned Stand Alone Mode (see
rized Note 1)
Note 1 : If one APA procedure is running while NML assignment state changes from free to assigned, force
and abort APA menus are always accessible to allow operator to stop currently running procedure. When
procedure is stopped or aborted, APA menus become greyed and APA view is not anymore accessible
as soon as the operator navigates to another view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 85 / 266
266
5.3 Features Accessibility versus Constructor Mode
The following table details the features which are only available if Constructor mode is started, and the
impacts on those features when Constructor mode is stopped.

$ "" & "
$
%

"
ALS
Laser Management > Test Restart Action Menu not available

Managed at TP level + Transmission view
Global command level
APA
Configuration > APA/MPO > APA Autho- Action Menu not available
rization
Configuration > APA/MPO > MPO Modify value OK button not available
Phase Amplitude Config
(Phase Modulator Amplitude, Phase
Modulator Limits)
BU Subsystem
Submerged Line > BU Spur/Trunk Latch- Action Menu not available

ing Controls
External Points
External Points > Partner Alarm Article/ Value visible Menu not available
Bit
External Points > Switch mode Modify value OK button not available
FecDecoding
Port > FEC Error Correction Modify value OK button not available
(Get/Replace)
FecEncoding
Port > FEC Error Insertion > Insert Config Action Menu not available
(duration / rate) + State not available
state visible
Port > FEC Error Insertion > Insert Action Menu not available
(state) + State not available
state visible
Port > FEC Error Insertion > Single Insert Action

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Config + Menu not available

(rate) state visible State not available
3AL 89062 AA AA 86 / 266
266
$ "" & "
$
%


"
Port > FEC Error Insertion > Single Insert Action Menu not available
(state) + State not available
state visible
Measurement
Equipment > Measure > Measure Polling All Measure- Only the following are accessible in non–
ment Points constructor mode:
are accessi- WTA
ble WRA
Trib i – LineSend (on PAU)
Trib i – LineReceive (on RCAU)
Trib i – SDHSend (on FDU)
Trib i – SDHReceive (on FEU)
Equipment > Measure > Measure All Measure- Only the following are accessible in non–
Thresholds ment Thresh- constructor mode:
olds accessi- WTA_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade (dBm)
ble WTA_SendLightLevelDegrade (dBm)
WRA_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade (dBm)
WRA_SendLightLevelDegrade (dBm)
FEU#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade
(dBm)
FDU#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade (dBm)
TCAU#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade
(dBm)
RCAU#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDe-
grade(dBm)
PAU#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade
(dBm)
RAU#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade
(dBm)
PTA#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade
(dBm)
PRA#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade
(dBm)
FEU#<N>_Stm64RS_BER(1E–x)
FDU#<N>_WdmFec_BER(1E–x)
NE
Supervision > NE > Cold Reset NE Action Menu not available, Administrator has ac-
cess to Warm Reset
Protection Group
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Configuration > Protection Group > Modify value OK button not available
Protection Group Config
Repeater Sub System / BU Module
3AL 89062 AA AA 87 / 266
266
$ "" & "
$
%


"

Submerged Line > Sub segment Re- Modify value OK button not available
peaters List
(Accessibility status)
Submerged Line > BU Subsystem List Modify value OK button not available
Slemsegment
Supervision > NE > Slemsegment > IFF Action Main menu not available
Management (contains Enable / Disable IFF)
Configuration > Initialize Line Config Action Main menu not available
(contains menus: with Local File and with
Remote File)
Supervision > NE > Slemsegment > Seg- Modify value OK button not available
ment Parameters
(Reply Indication
slemOrientationSenseX
request Indication
R0R1AdirectionFrequency
R0R1BdirectionFrequency
R0R1ResponseFrequency
R0R1ResponseDataRate
R3R4SupervisoryFrequency)
Slem Subsegment
Submerged Line > Subsegment Para- Modify value OK button not available
metres
Subrack
Subrack > Subrack Configuration Action Menu not available
Tributary Protection
Port > Trib Protection Config Modify value OK button not available
(Configuration)
WDM SLTE Parameters
Supervision > NE > Characteristics Modify value OK button not available

(Modify SLTE Local Code)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 88 / 266
266
6 ALARMS
Alarms are displayed in the Subrack, Board and Port views with some coloured squares.
Each coloured square is associated to one Probable cause, which can group several unitary alarms called
Specific problems.
To know the Specific problems raised on one Probable cause:
– Move the mouse cursor on the coloured square,

– The raised Specific problems are then displayed in a tool tip.
Each raised alarms, with its associated Probable cause and Specific problem, is logged in Alarm Surveil-
lance component.
N.B. Some Probable causes concern only one SLTE alarm. In that case no Specific problem is used.
The Probable cause is sufficient to identify the alarm.
6.1 Underlying Resource Unavailable (URU)
The URU probable cause is automatically raised by the 1353SH on a port whose associated board has
at least one raised alarm.
The URU probable cause is useful for alarms analysis: looking at Transmission/Reception view, you can
navigate to alarmed port view. In that port view, if URU icon is alarmed, it is because at least one alarm
is raised on the associated board (i.e. underlying resource).
6.2 Transmission Alarms Synthesis
The TRA icon displayed in vertical NE state panel (see chapter 4) represents an alarm synthesis of Trans-
mission and Reception alarms.
This synthesis is useful for alarms analysis: looking at Equipment view, if TRA icon is alarmed, you can
navigate to Transmission/Reception views to analyse which Tributary is affected. Navigation to affected
port(s) is then possible to get the exact alarm list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 89 / 266
266
6.3 NML Alarms Mapping
All alarms detected on the NE are displayed in the 1353SH Equipment view. Some of these EML alarms
are also displayed in 1354SN Transmission views.

The following table lists which EML alarms are concerned.
Probables causes which are only used for NML usage are not visible in the ASAP (Alarm Severity configu-
ration).
EML NML
Transmission Probable cause SpecificProblem TTP Object name Probable Cause

Object
fecDecoding Fault Flag Detected FEC Fault Flag Detected
Signal Failed markerMismatch Marker Mismatch
lossOfFrame FEC lossOfFrame
Signal Degraded fecLBER FEC Signal Degrade
fecHBER Excessive BER
uncorrected- FEC Uncorrected

Blocks Blocks
Remote Alarm aMSDetected AMS

Modulation Signal
Detected
Performance fecBER15min Threshold Crossed

Thresholds Crossed 15min
fecBER24Hour Threshold Crossed

1Day
tribTx Transmit Problem* Transmit Problem
Transmit Failed Transmit Failure
tribRx Signal Degraded Optical Signal De-

graded
Loss Of Signal lossOfData Loss Of Data
sdhRx Signal Degraded b1LBER SPI Degraded Signal
b1HBER Excessive BER
Performance b1BER15min Threshold Crossed

Thresholds Crossed 15min
b1BER24Hour Threshold Crossed

1Day
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Signal Failed lossOfData Loss Of Signal
postAmp Transmit Failed sllFail MUX/DEMUX Transmit Failure
3AL 89062 AA AA 90 / 266
266
Transmission Probable cause SpecificProblem TTP Object name Probable Cause
Object
postAmp PreEmphasis Not MUX/DEMUX PreEmphasis Not

Equalized Equalized
preAmp Signal Failed rllFail Loss Of Signal
* not visible at EML level
6.4 Alarms List
See TERA10 Alarms document (3DW 10228 AAAA PCGNA, Ed2)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 91 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
92 / 266
7 PERFORMANCE COUNTERS
7.1 Performance Counters Management

7.1.1 Activate Performance Counters Collection
a) From a Port view
To activate or desactivate a performance point counter in a port:
• Select in the Port view the concerned port,

• Click on the Port menu.
• Select the Performance Point Counters... option.
Figure 52. Performance Point Counters dialogue box
• The push buttons 15 Minutes and 24 Hours allow activation or desactivation of the counter.
• Click on the OK push button to validate your modifications and close the window.
The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box, without modifica-
tions.
N.B. Each port can have his own Performance Point Counter: on sdhRx port with selection
of RST block (B1 counters) and on fecDecoding port (FEC counter)
b) From Performance Points list
To display the list of the Performance points:
• Click on the Diagnosis menu.

• Select the List of option.
• Select the Perf Points... option.
The following window is displayed, this window is resizeable.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 93 / 266
266
Figure 53. Performance Points List dialogue box
The list displays the board performance points. For each board the performance points already active
are displayed:
• /WDay: a 24 Hours performance point is already started.

• /W15: a 15 Minutes performance point is already started.
Two types of request are available:
1) Unitary Performance Counter Request
• In the Equipment list, select one tributary.

• Click on Details button, the Performance Point Counters dialogue box (see Figure 52. ) is dis-
played
• Click on the chosen performance point counter(s).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
tions.
3AL 89062 AA AA 94 / 266
266
2) Global Measure Request
• You can select one or several tributaries in Equipment TPs list,


– to select all Equipment TPs click on the Select all button.
• In the Global command area, you choose the action for the counters 15 Minutes or/and 24 Hours
with the option buttons: Disable, Start, Stop.
– Disable, no global command is applied for this period

– Start, allows to start for the TPs selected in the list, all performance point counters
– Stop, allows to stop for the TPs selected in the list, all performance point counters
7.1.2 Force Performance Collection
To force the Performance counters collection:
– Click on the Configuration menu.

– Select the Performance option.
– Select the Forced Performance Collection option.
Figure 54. Force performance collection confirmation box

7.1.3 Show Performance Data
To display the TP Performance data:
– Select in Port view the concerned port.

– Select the Show TP Performance data option.
– Select the 15 Minutes or 24 Hours option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 95 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
Figure 55. TP Performance History Report data window
3AL 89062 AA AA
96 / 266
7.2 Performance Thresholds Management

– From the Transmission/Reception view:

• Select one or several port,

• Click on WDM Transmission menu,
• Select the Perf Threshold Global Cmds option,
• Select the name of the Performance Thresholds (for this example wdmFEC),
– From the Port view:
• Click on the Port menu.

• Select the Performance Thresholds option.
• Select the name of the Performance Thresholds (for this example wdmFEC),
For the FEC counters, the following window is displayed.
Figure 56. Performance Thresholds dialogue box
The immediate thresholds (Collecting Period: Immediate) are used to raise alarms when transmission
quality is decreasing.
The adjustment of those thresholds can also be used to have the same B1 immediate thresholds in the
SLTE as the one configured in Terrestrial NEs (ADMs) present in the network.
– Modify one or several values,

The field values correspond to the x of 1E–x, that is 10 –x.
– Click on OK to confirm your operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 97 / 266
266
7.3 Performance Alarms Reset
N.B. Dummy tributaries are not concerned by this function.

This function allows to clear performance alarms of some or all tributaries. This is useful as soon as the

reason of those alarms is clarified, to not wait for the automatic clear at the end of the next period (15
minutes or 24 hours).
This function will recover all remaining error counters from the SLTE, will clear current error counters and
will clear performance alarms.
– Click on the Supervision menu.

– Select the NE option.
– Select the Performance Reset option.
Two options are displayed:
1) Clear Alarms on Whole NE. The alarms are cleared on all tributaries.
• When you click on this command the following confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 57. Performance reset confirmation box
• Click on OK to execute the command, then an error message or the following message is dis-
played:
Figure 58. Performance reset success message box
2) Clear Alarms on Trib... The alarms are cleared for the selected tributaries.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• When you click on this command the following window is displayed:
3AL 89062 AA AA 98 / 266
266
Figure 59. Perf Alarms Reset on Tributaries dialogue box
• Select the affected tributaries:
– to select all the tributaries click on All Tributaries button.
• Click on OK to execute the reset on the selected tributaries.

tions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 99 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
100 / 266
8.1 Measurement Management

8.1.1 Activate Measurements
a) NE General Measurement Points (for TERA10 C–D only)
From the Equipment view, measurements can be run on the subracks:
• Click on the Configuration pull–down menu.

• Select the Measure option.
• Select the Measure Polling option.
Figure 60. Measure Polling dialogue box
b) Board Measurement Points
From a subrack view, measurements can be run on a selected board of this subrack:
• From the Equipment view, open the subrack view in which the requested board is located.
• Click on the requested board.
• Click on the Equipment pull–down menu.
• Select the Measure option.
• Select the Measure Polling option (see Figure 66. ).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 101 / 266
266
This window displays the measurement points accessible on the chosen board.
• To run measurements, click on toggles then on OK to validate the choices.
c) All the Measurement Points in a list
To display the list of the Measurement points for the whole NE:
• Click on the Diagnosis menu.

• Select the List of option.
• Select the Meas Points... option.
The following window is displayed. This window is resizeable.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 102 / 266
266
Figure 62. Measurement Points List dialogue box
The list displays the boards where the measurement requests are possible. For each board the mea-
surement points already active are displayed:
• / WDay: a 24 Hours measurement point is already started.

• / W15: a 15 Minutes measurement point is already started.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 103 / 266
266
1) Unitary Measure Request

– In the Equipment list, select one board.

– Click on Details button, the following window is displayed:
– Click on the chosen measurement points.

– Click on OK, to execute the command.
The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box, without modi-
fications.
2) Global Measure Request
– In the Equipment list (see Figure 62. ), select the affected boards:
• to select a continuous group of tributaries keep the Shift button on and click on the
first element to be selected and then on the last,
• to select a discontinuous group of tributaries keep the Ctrl button on and click on
every element to be selected,
• to select all the boards click on Select All button.
– In the Global command area, select with the option button: Start or Stop for 15 Minutes
and 24 Hours measurement.
– Click on OK.
A In Progress window is displayed during the update setting up. You can stop the operation with
clicking on Cancel.
The measurement points are updated in the list (see Figure 62. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 104 / 266
266
8.1.2 Show NE Measurement Data
To do specific research on all measurements already recovered from the NE:


– Select the Show NE Measurement Data option.
Figure 64. NE Measurement Data view
This window can also be accessed using Performance icon on the rigth part of the Front Panel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 105 / 266
266
8.1.3 View Last Measurements
This function gives a rough display of the latest analog measurements recovered from the NE


– Select the View option.
– Select the Analog Measures option.
Figure 65. Analog Measures view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 106 / 266
266
8.1.4 TERA10 Measurement Points List
N.B. All Internal Level measurement points are only available in Constructor mode.
All measurement points in the SLTE are characteristic of individual boards.

The SLTE does not manage measurement periods. Measurements reading is activated in the SLTE by
the reception of a reading request from OS.
The list of measurement points is flexible according to the NE configuration (mainly the number of Wave-
lengths managed).
The following table gives the measurement points for each board.
Legend: N refers to the Tributary number.
Note 1: The line receive light level is recovered from the first amplifier in the Tributary receive path.
This may be any one of the receive compensation amplifier (CAU_RX) or the receive amplifier (RAU).
Note 2: This measurement does not concern the first amplifier in the Tributary receive path (i.e. one
of the CAU_RX or the RAU). For this amplifier, the ”receive light level” is known with the ”Line Receive
# <N>” measurement point.
(*): Accessible only in Constructor mode
!"
WTA WTA (Optical Levels) Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)
LPM_1 or 2 WTA LPM <1 or 2> int (Inter- Pump Laser # 1 / 2 bias current (mA)
associated to WTA nal Levels) (*) Pump Laser # 1 / 2 output power (mW)
Pump Laser # 1 / 2 Temperature ( C)
WRA WRA (Optical Levels) Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)
LPM_1 or 2 WRA LPM <1 or 2> int (Inter- Pump Laser # 1 / 2 bias current (mA)
associated to WRA nal Levels) (*) Pump Laser # 1 / 2 output power (mW)
WBA WBA (Optical Levels) Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)
LPM_1 or 2 WBA LPM <1 or 2> int (Inter- Pump Laser # 1 / 2 bias current (mA)
associated to WBA nal Levels) (*) Pump Laser # 1 / 2 output power (mW)
STU STU opt (Optical Levels) Send Light Level (dBm)
STU int (Internal Levels) (*) Pump Laser # 1 / 2 bias current (mA)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Pump Laser # 1 / 2 temperature ( C)
3AL 89062 AA AA 107 / 266
266
!"
TRIB # <N> SDH Receive#<N> (Receive SDH Receive Light Level (dBm)
(pseudo board) Optical Level)

Line Send#<N> (Trib Send Line send light level (dBm)
OptPath Level)
Line Receive#<N> (Trib Re- Line Receive Light Level (dBm)

ceive OptPath Level)
SDH Send#<N> (Send Opti- SDH send Light Level (dBm)

cal Level)
BLOCK_TX_<N> BLOCK (Optical Levels) Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)

(pseudo board)
BLOCK_RX_<N> BLOCK (Optical Levels) Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)

(pseudo board)
PAU # <N> Line Send#<N> (Trib Send Line send light level (dBm)
OptPath Level)
CAU_RX # <N> or Line Receive#<N> (Trib Re- Line Receive Light Level (dBm)
RAU# <N> ceive OptPath Level)
(see note 1 )
FDU# <N> SDH Send#<N> (Send Opti- SDH send Light Level (dBm)
cal Level)
FEU # <N> SDH Receive#<N> (Receive SDH Receive Light Level (dBm)
Optical Level)
CAU_TX # <N> TCAU opt# <N> (Opti- Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)
cal Levels) (*)
TCAU int# <N> (Inter- Pump Laser bias current (mA)

nal Levels) (*) Pump Laser output power (mW)
Pump Laser temperature ( C)
CAU_RX # <N> RCAU opt # <N> (Opti- Send Light Level (dBm)
cal Levels) (*) Receive Light Level (dBm)
(see note 2)
RCAU int # <N> (Inter- Pump Laser bias current (mA)

nal Levels) (*) Pump Laser output power (mW)
FDU # <N> FECDEC int # <N> (Internal Signal Laser bias current (mA)
Levels) (*)
SDU2 # <N> SDU2 int # <N> (Internal Signal Laser bias current (mA)
Levels) (*)
PAU # <N> PAU opt# <N> (Optical Lev- Receive Light Level (dBm)
els) (*)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PAU int # <N> (Internal Lev- Pump Laser # 1 / 2 bias current (mA)
els) (*) Pump Laser # 1 / 2 output power (mW)
Pump Laser # 1 / 2 temperature ( C)
3AL 89062 AA AA 108 / 266
266
!"
RAU # <N> RAU opt # <N> (Optical Lev- Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)
els) (*)
RAU int # <N> (Internal Lev- Receive/Send Light Level (dBm)

els) (*)
RXU # <N> RXU opt # <N> (Optical Lev- Receive Light Level (dBm)
els) (*)
SLU # <N> SLU opt # <N> (Optical Lev- Signal Laser Send Light Level (dBm)
els) (*)
SLU int # <N> (Internal Lev- Signal Laser bias current (mA)
els) (*) Signal Laser Temperature ( C)
TMU # <N> TMU opt# <N> (Optical Lev- Send Light Level (dBm)
els) (*)
TXU TXU opt# <N> (Optical Lev- Send Light Level (dBm)
els) (*)
TXU int # <N> (Internal Lev- Signal Laser bias current (mA)
els) (*) Signal Laser temperature ( C)
BCAU_TX BCAU_TX opt (Optical Lev- Send Light Level (dBm)

els) Receive Light Level (dBm)
BCAU_TX int (Internal Lev- Pump Laser bias current (mA)

els) (*) Pump Laser output power (mW)
BCAU_RX BCAU_RX opt (Optical Send Light Level (dBm)

Levels) Receive Light Level (dBm)
BCAU_RX int (Internal Lev- Pump Laser bias current (mA)

els) (*) Pump Laser output power (mW)
BPAU BPAU opt (Optical Levels) Send Light Level (dBm)

Receive Light Level (dBm)
BPAU int (Internal Levels) Pump Laser bias current (mA)

(*) Pump Laser output power (mW)
PTA_PSS PTA opt (Optical Levels) Send Light Level (dBm)

(*) Receive Light Level (dBm)
with i=[1..6]
PTA int # <N> (Internal Pump Laser bias current (mA)

Levels) (*) Pump Laser output power (mW)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 109 / 266
266
!"
PRA_PSS PRA opt (Optical Levels) Send Light Level (dBm)

(*) Receive Light Level (dBm)

PRA int (Internal Levels) Pump Laser bias current (mA)
(*) Pump Laser output power (mW)
LCU LCU opt (Optical Levels) Send Light Level (dBm)

Receive Light Level (dBm)
Channel Power Level (mV)
LCU int (Internal Levels) (*) Pump Laser bias current (mA)
Pump Laser output power (mW)
BLU BLU opt (Optical Levels) Send Light Level (dBm)

(MNGT Subrack)
BLU int (Internal Levels) (*) LED current (mA)
LED output power (mW)
LED temperature ( C)
BPAU BPAU opt (Optical Levels) Send Light Level (dBm)

(MNGT Subrack) Receive Light Level (dBm)
AU int (Internal Levels) (*) Pump Laser bias current (mA)

Pump Laser output power (mW)
Table 2. TERA10 Measurement Points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 110 / 266
266
8.1.5 Line Equipment Measurement Points
N.B. This function is available only in Stand Alone mode (1354SN not connected to 1353SH), as-
signment state is visible in permanent item panel (SNM Item).
The Line Equipment include the different types of Repeaters and the Branching Units.
The measurements are mainly input power, output power and pump current of optical amplifiers, compos-
ing the Repeaters and the Branching Units (see chapter 2.11).
The following table gives the measurements for each type of repeater and for the Add and Drop Branching
Unit.
Line Measurements Point Unit

Equipment Name
STC Input power P.In dBm

Repeater Output power P.out dBm
(R0, R1) Pump 1 reserve current I.P1 %
Pump 2 reserve current I.P2 %

Pump current 1480 nm I.P %
Pump current 980 nm –– ON/OFF
Intermittent fault flag

Pump current (apply to the pair of the pump lasers in series) I.P %
Intermittent fault flag –– ON/OFF
Branching Input power (apply to the OA) P.In dBm

Unit Output power (apply to the OA) P.Out dBm
(for OA Add Pump current (apply to one pump of the 2 pumps (BU 2 pumps) I.P %
and Trunk) or to the pair of the pump lasers in series (BU 4 pumps))
Table 3. Line Equipment Measurement Points
No thresholds are managed for the Line Equipment measurements at EML level.
The measurements on Line Equipment can only be performed from the Submerged Line View and are
effectively performed when the Measurement push button is clicked.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 111 / 266
266
8.2 Measurement Thresholds Management
8.2.1 Display Measurement Thresholds

N.B. Available only if a measurement is running.
The threshold(s) associated to each measurement point are displayed and some can be modified by the
operator:
– Select the Measure Thresholds option.
Equipment
Board Configuration ...

Slots Labels On/OFF Measure Thresholds
Ampli Power >
Connectivity Config ...
Figure 66. Measure menu
Figure 67. Measure Thresholds dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. The thresholds displayed in the window depend on the selected board.
3AL 89062 AA AA 112 / 266
266
For each measurement type, a high and a low threshold are displayed. Some can be modified:
– Enter the new threshold value(s).

– Click on OK to validate modified thresholds.
Global command option:
N.B. This option is only relevant for boards which have modifiable thresholds.
– In the Measure Thresholds view (see Figure 67. ), modify the affected values,
– Click on the Global Command button. The following window is displayed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 68. Measure Thresholds Global command dialogue box
3AL 89062 AA AA 113 / 266
266
– In the Equipment list, select the affected boards:


to be selected,
• to select all the boards, click on Select All button.
– Click on OK.
N.B. Some measurement thresholds are only visible in Constructor mode.
Figure 69. Global Command Confirmation box
– Click on OK, the command is executed for all the selected boards.
8.2.2 Optical Thresholds Auto–Adjustment
N.B. Dummy tributaries are not concerned by this function.
This function allows to adjust some measurement thresholds near the current measured value.
N.B. This function may hide slow optical measurement drifts. By changing threshold values, it avoids
potential threshold cross alarm to be raised on previous threshold values. So, it has to be used
only when needed.
– Click on the Supervision pull down menu,
– Select the NE option,
– Select the Optical Thresholds AutoAdjustment option. The following confirmation box is dis-
played:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 114 / 266
266
Figure 70. Optical Thresholds Auto–Adjustment confirmation box
– Click on OK to confirm the auto–adjustment. Then a successful message or a failure message is dis-
played at the end of this operation.
Figure 71. Optical Thresholds Auto–Adjustment success message box
N.B. A MIB align up operation is necessary to recover new optical thresholds.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 115 / 266
266
8.2.3 TERA10 Measurement Thresholds List
For each Measurement Threshold, a high and a low value is managed.

(*): Accessible only in Constructor mode.

(**): For TERA 10 A–B, this threshold value is applicable to all tributaries.
Board Threshold name Write

permissi
on
WTA WTA_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R/W
WTA_SendLightLevelDegrade R/W
WTA_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) R
WTA_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) R
LPM_TX LPM_TX_PumpLaserTemp (*) R
LPM_TX_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
LPM_TX_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) R
WRA WRA_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R/W
WRA_SendLightLevelDegrade R/W
WRA_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) R
WRA_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) R
LPM_RX LPM_RX_PumpLaserTemp (*) R
LPM_RX_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
LPM_RX_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) R
WBA WBA_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R/W
WBA_SendLightLevelDegrade R/W
WBA_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) R
WBA_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) R
STU STU_RX_OutputPowerDegrade R
STU_RX_OutputPowerFail (*) R
STU_RX_PumpLaserTemp (*) R
STU_RX_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
FEU #<N> FECENC#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FECENC_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
3AL 89062 AA AA 116 / 266
266
permissi
on
SEU2 #<N>
SEU2_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
SEU2_ReceiveLightLevelFail (*) R
SLU#<N> SLU#<N>_SignalLaserTemperature (*) R
SLU#<N>_SignalLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
SLU_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) (**) R
SLU_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
TMU#<N> TMU#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) R
TMU_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
TXU#<N> TXU_SignalLaserTemp (*) R
TXU_SignalLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
TXU_SignalLaserOutputPowerDegrade (*) R
TXU_SignalLaserOutputPowerFail (*) R
TXU_PumpLaserTemp (*) R
TXU_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
TXU_PumpLaserOutputPowerDegrade (*) R
TXU_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) R
TXU_SendLightLevelFail (*) R
CAU_TX/ CAU_TX/RX#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
RX_#<N>
CAU_TX/RX#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) R
CAU_TX/RX_PumpLaserTemp (*) (**) R

with i in [1..3]
CAU_TX/RX_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
CAU_TX/RX_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) (**) R
CAU_TX/RX_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
CAU_TX/RX_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 117 / 266
266
permissi
on

PAU #<N>t

PAU#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
PAU#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) R
PAU1_PumpLaserTemp (*) (**) R
PAU1_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
PAU1_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) (**) R
PAU2_PumpLaserTemp (*) (**) R
PAU2_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
PAU2_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) (**) R
PAU_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
PAU_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
RAU #<N> RAU#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
RAU#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) (**) R
RAU_PumpLaserTemp (*) (**) R
RAU_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
RAU_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) (**) R
RAU_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) (**) R
RAU_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
RAU_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
RXU#<N> RXU_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade (*) (**) R
RXU_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
FDU#<N> FECDEC_SendLightLevelDegrade R
FECDEC_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
FECDEC_SignalLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
FECDEC_SignalLaserTemperature (*) (**) R
SDU2#<N> SDU2_SendLightLevelDegrade R
SDU2_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
SDU2_SignalLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SDU2_SignalLaserTemperature (*) (**) R
3AL 89062 AA AA 118 / 266
266
permissi
on
BCAU_TX/RX_
BCAU_TX/RX#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
#<N>
BCAU_TX/RX#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelFail (*) R
BCAU_TX/RX_#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) R
BCAU_TX/RX_#<N>_SendLightLevelFail (*) R
BCAU_TX/RX_PumpLaserTemp (*) (**) R
BCAU_TX/RX_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
BCAU_TX/RX_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) (**) R
BPAU_ #<N> BPAU_#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
BPAU_#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelFail (*) R
BPAU_#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade (*) R
BPAU_#<N>_SendLightLevelFail (*) R
BPAU_PumpLaserTemp (*) R
BPAU_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
BPAU_TX_PumpLaserOutputPower (*) R
PTA_PSS #<N> PTA#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
PTA#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade R
with i in [1..6] PTA_PumpLaserTemp (*) (**) R
PTA_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
PTA_PumpLaserOutputPowerDegrade (*) (**) R
PTA_PumpLaserOutputPowerFail (*) (**) R
PTA_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
PTA_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 119 / 266
266
permissi
on

PRA_PSS #<N>

PRA#<N>_ReceiveLightLevelDegrade R
PRA#<N>_SendLightLevelDegrade R
with i in [1..6] PRA_PumpLaserTemp (*) (**) R
PRA_PumpLaserBiasCurrent (*) (**) R
PRA_PumpLaserOutputPowerDegrade (*) (**) R
PRA_PumpLaserOutputPowerFail (*) (**) R
PRA_ReceiveLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
PRA_SendLightLevelFail (factory value) (*) (**) R
LCU LCU_Channel1/2_SendLightLevelDegrade R
LCU_Channel1/2_SendLightLevelFail (*) R
LCU_Channel1/2_SignalLaserTemp (*) R
LCU_Channel1/2_SignalLaserBiasCurrent (*) R
LCU_Channel1/2_SignalLaserOutputPowerDegrade (*) R
LCU_B#<N>_Channel1/2_SignalLaserOutputPowerFail (*) R
BLU BLU_SendLightLevelDegrade R
BLU_SendLightLevelFail (*) R
BLU_LEDTemp (*) R
BLU_LEDBiasCurrent (*) R
BLU_LEDOutputPower (*) R
Table 4. TERA10 thresholds

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 120 / 266
266
9 FEC FRAME AND AMS SIGNAL
9.1 FEC Features

N.B. Dummy tributaries are not concerned by those features.
9.1.1 SLTE Local Code
This function allows the display of SLTE local code. This code is used to define markers inserted into the
FEC frame.
– In the Supervision pull down menu, click on the NE option.

– Click on the Characteristics... option as follows.
Supervision
NE > Warm Reset NE >

Access State > Cold Reset NE >
Alarms > Performance Reset >
Upload Remote Inventory Optical Thresholds AutoAdjustment >
Dump NE MIB Characteristics...
Address Setting...
Slem Segment >
Figure 72. Display NE Characteristics
Figure 73. NE Characteristics dialogue box
Only available in Constructor mode:
– The SLTE local code may be modified by entering a new value in the SLTE Local Code field.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 121 / 266
266
9.1.2 Marker Configuration
The marker is composed of 2 fields: the SLTE local code, followed by the Tributary number. The marker
is used to check if the received and filtered wavelength is the expected one.

Markers are inserted in the overhead of the FEC frame and are received by the far–end SLTE. The far–end
SLTE compares the expected marker (part of SLTE configuration) with the received one and raises an
alarm if they are different.
The marker configuration concerns either the FDU board or the FEU board, but displayed information are
different.
On each FEU board, you can display the marker automatically inserted by the SLTE in the FEC frame,
for the concerned Tributary. For this inserted marker, the SLTE local code part is configurable, see chapter
NE Characteristics.
On each FDU board, you can display the received marker and the expected marker, for the concerned
Tributary. The expected marker is settable.
a) On FEU board
• Open the Port view of a FEU board (fecEncoding port) of the Tributary subrack.
Figure 74. Marker Configuration dialogue box for the FEU board
b) On FDU board
• Open the Port view of a FDU board (fecDecoding port) of the Tributary subrack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 122 / 266
266
Figure 75. Marker Configuration dialogue box for the FDU board
• Enter the values:
– SLTE Local Code field: 3 characters maximum

– Tributary Number field: 3 characters maximum
• Click on OK to validate your modifications and close the window.

tions.
9.1.3 FEC Type
This function allows to display the FEC Type.
– Open the Port view of a FDU or a FEU board (fecDecoding port or fecEncoding port) of the Tributary
subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the FEC Type ... option.
The following dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 76. FEC Type dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The possible FEC Types are: FEC, SuperFec1, SuperFec2 or Excalibur

3AL 89062 AA AA 123 / 266
266
9.1.4 FEC Error Correction
N.B. Parameter modifications only available in Constructor mode

This function allows to enable or disable the FEC error correction, per Tributary (on FDU board).

– Open the Port view of a FDU board (fecDecoding port) of the Tributary subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the FEC Error Correction ... option.
Figure 77. FEC Error Correction dialogue box
– The possible values are: Enable, Disable.

The State of the FEC correction is given at the bottom of the Termination point view:
Figure 78. FEC correction state
9.1.5 FEC Error Correction Global Command
These FEC commands can be executed for several tributaries simultaneously.
– In the Reception view, select all the affected ports:
• to select a continuous group of tributaries keep the right mouse button on to draw an area
around the tributaries,
• to select a discontinuous group of tributaries keep the Shift button on and click on every ele-
ment to be selected,
– Click on the WDM Transmission pull down menu and on the FEC Global Commands option:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 124 / 266
266
WDM Transmission
Show Protection Group >
Laser Global Commands >
AMS Global Commands >

FEC Global Commands > FEC Error Correction...
LS Criterion Global Commands >
Perf Threshold Global Cmds >
Protection Global Cmds >
LS Hold Off Time ...
Figure 79. FEC global commands in Reception view
– Select the FEC Error Correction... option, a confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 80. FEC Error Insertion confirmation box
– Click on OK, the FEC Error Correction dialogue box opens (see Figure 77. ) and see paragraph
9.1.4.
N.B. The global command is interrupted at the first unsuccessful command and an error message
is displayed.
N.B. Only available in Constructor mode.
N.B. Only available on R1 Tributary.
This function allows to insert FEC errors in frames (on the FEU board). This is available for FEC correction
testing.
– insertion with specific duration and specific number of errors per FEC frame
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– single insertion with a specific number of errors, which will be inserted only once
3AL 89062 AA AA 125 / 266
266
1) Parameters configuration

– Open the Port view of a FEU board (fecEncoding port) of the Tributary subrack.

– Click on the Insert Config ... option.
The following window is displayed for the TERA10 A–B:
Figure 81. TERA10 A–B FEC Error Insertion configuration dialogue box
– FEC Error Insertion Duration (ms): enter a value in ms

– FEC Error Insertion Rate (errors per frame): number of errors per frame from 64 to 960
by step of 64, choose a value with the option button
– Click on OK to validate your modifications and close the window.

fications.
The following window is displayed for the TERA10 C–D:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 82. TERA10 C–D FEC Error Insertion configuration dialogue box
3AL 89062 AA AA 126 / 266
266
– FEC Error Insertion Duration (ms): enter a value
– FEC Error Insertion Rate (errors per frame): number of errors per frame, enter the new
value in agreement with the limiting values (Min, Max) displayed in the dialogue box when
the parameter field is selected.

fications.
2) Insertion
– Click on the Insert option. The following confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 83. Insert FEC Error confirmation box
The State of the FEC error insertion is given in the Termination point view (see Figure 87. ).
1) Parameters configuration
– Click on the Single Insert Config ... option.
The following window is displayed for the TERA10 A–B:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 127 / 266
266
Figure 84. TERA10 A–B Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration dialogue box
– The Single FEC Error Insertion Rate (Errors per frame) parameter can be modified from
64 to 960 by step of 64 with the option button.
– Click on OK to validate your modification and close the window.

fications.
The following window is displayed for the TERA10 C–D:
Figure 85. TERA10 C–D Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration dialogue box
– Single FEC Error Insertion Rate (Errors per frame): enter a value in agreement with the
limiting values (Min, Max) displayed in the dialogue box when the parameter field is selec-
ted.
– Click on OK to validate your modification and close the window.

fications.
N.B. The Insertion Rate value is the same for all tributaries: if you change the value
for one FEU board, the value is changed for all FEU boards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 128 / 266
266
2) Insertion

– Click on the Single Insert option. The following confirmation box is displayed:
Figure 86. Insert Single FEC Error confirmation box

fications.
The State of the FEC error insertion is given at the bottom of the Port view:
Figure 87. States of FEC error insertion and single FEC error insertion
N.B. Single FEC Error Insertion and FEC Error Insertion statuses are only displayed in
Constructor mode.
9.1.7 FEC Error Insertion Global Command
N.B. Only available on R1 Tributary.
These FEC commands can be executed for several tributaries simultaneously.
– In the Transmission view, select all the affected ports:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Click on the WDM Transmission pull down menu and on the FEC Global Commands option (see
Figure 79. ),
3AL 89062 AA AA 129 / 266
266
– Select the FEC Error Insertion Config ... option a confirmation box is displayed:

Figure 88. FEC Error Insertion confirmation box
– Click on OK, the FEC Error Insertion dialogue box opens (see Figure 79. ) and see paragraph 9.1.6.

N.B. The global command is interrupted at the first unsuccessful command and an error message
is displayed.
See the previous paragraph.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 130 / 266
266
9.2 AMS Features
N.B. Dummy tributaries are not concerned by this feature.

9.2.1 AMS Insertion
This function allows to enable or disable the insertion, if necessary, of an AMS (Alternate Maintenance
Signal) in place of the received signal detected as incorrect.
This can concern either the replacement of the received SDH signal (on FEU board) or the replacement
of the received Submarine signal (on FDU board).
To enable/disable the AMS insertion:
– Open the Port view of the FEU or FDU board (fecEncoding or fecDecoding port) of the Tributary sub-
rack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the AMS Insertion ... option.
Figure 89. AMS Insertion dialogue box
– You can choose with the option button Enabled or Disabled

– Click on OK to validate the operation
The state of the AMS insertion feature is given in the Termination point view:
Figure 90. State of AMS Insertion

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 131 / 266
266
9.2.2 AMS Insertion Global Commands
The AMS commands can be executed for several tributaries simultaneously.

– In the Transmission or Reception view, select all the affected ports,

– Click on the WDM Transmission pull down menu and on the AMS Global Commands option,
– Click on the AMS Insertion (on fecEncoding) option:
WDM Transmission
Channel Power Global Cmds >
AMS Global Commands > AMS Insertion (on fecEncoding)
FEC Global Commands >
Wavelength Frequency Offset ...
Figure 91. AMS global commands
Figure 92. AMS Insertion confirmation box
– Click on OK.
A dialogue box opens, see Figure 89.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– You can choose with the option button Enabled or Disabled, then click on OK to validate the opera-
tion.
3AL 89062 AA AA 132 / 266
266
The state of the AMS insertion feature is given in the Termination point view, see Figure 90.
N.B. If a postAmp or preAmp is selected a message box is displayed to warn operator that no global
command will be applied to aggregate.
9.2.3 AMS Pattern
This function allows to set the AMS pattern inserted, if necessary, toward SDH equipment.
If an AMS signal is detected on the signal coming from the submerged line, this Submarine AMS signal
is replaced by the AMS pattern.
The AMS pattern is a 8–character pattern (4 bytes). You set here the 4 first characters (2 bytes). The 4
other characters are calculated by complementing to 1 the 4 first characters.
– Open the Port view of the FDU board (fecDecoding port) of the Tributary subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the AMS Pattern ... option.
Figure 93. AMS Pattern dialogue box
– Enter the AMS pattern value (only the four first characters)
– Click on OK to validate the operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 133 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
134 / 266
10 OPTICAL SIGNAL
10.1 Connectivity View

N.B. Only available for TERA10 D R3
This function allows to display the Connectivity view.
The Connectivity view is useful to:
– Show all components involved in a block along with their connecting fibre
– Allow navigation from a selected icon to the concerned subrack or concerned board view
The Connectivity view is animated with correlated alarms which are calculated from board equipment
alarms
N.B. In case of incorrect Mechanical Configuration content (undeclared necessary board, incoher-
ence in Block identifier, ...), the Connectivity view of a Block is incomplete. It is interrupted where
the inconsistency is met.
To display the Connectivity view:
– In the Views pull down menu, click on the Connectivity option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 135 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
The Connectivity view is displayed:

Click on the chosen BLOCK x (x is the Block number)
Figure 94. Initial Connectivity view
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
136 / 266
Figure 95. Connectivity view with selected Block 1
The Connectivity view displays:
– The Transmit part in the upper part of the view
– The Receive part in the middle of the view
– The table with all Blocks and the list of their associated tributaries in the lower part of the view
To navigate to Board view or to Subrack view:
– Double click on an icon in the Connectivity view.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 137 / 266
266
10.2 SDH Optical Parameters
This function allows to display the SDH port optical parameters: Optical Reach, Optical Wavelength.

To display the optical parameters:

– Open the Port view of a sdhTx or sdhRx board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the View Optical Parameters ... option.
Figure 96. Optical Parameters dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 138 / 266
266
10.3 Tributary Wavelength Value
This function allows to display the Tributary wavelength either sent to submerged line (on TMU board),
or expected from submerged line (on RXU board) or LCU board.
This value can be displayed for the port of the TMU and RXU boards.
– Open the Port view of a TMU board (sent to line) or an RXU board (expected from line).
– In the Port pull down menu (see Figure 100. ), click on the Wavelength ... option.
Figure 97. Wavelength dialogue box
Example for LCU board:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 139 / 266
266
10.4 Tributary Wavelength Frequency Offset
This option allows to manually adjust the channel frequency.

– Open the Port View of a TMU board (tribTx port) of the Tributary subrack

– Select the Port pull down menu.
– Click on Wavelength Frequency Offset ... option.
Figure 99. Wavelength Frequency Offset dialogue box
The Global SLTE Configuration parameters are displayed and can be modified:
– Enter the new values in agreement with the limiting values (Min, Max, Step) displayed in the dialogue
box when the parameter field is selected. A step of 1 GHz is equivalent to around 0.002 nm.
N.B. Step value is 0.5 GHz for TERA 10 A–B–C and 1 GHz for TERA 10 D.
If the keyboarded value is wrong, the field is displayed with a red colour. You must enter another value.

N.B. A MIB align down is necessary after the Wait To Restart Time modification.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 140 / 266
266
10.5 Channel Power
This function allows to manage the channel power value of a Tributary before multiplexing stage.
The following table defines the available features depending on the type of Tributary (normal, dummy, LCU
board) and the type of SLTE (TERA10 A–B–C–D)

on tribTx Port (TMU / on PAU Board of each on each LCU Board

TXU Board) of each Trib- Dummy Tributary
utary
TERA10 A–B Channel Power Value Amplifier Output Power val- none
(modifiable) ue (modifiable) (cf.
+ increase / decrease chapter 10.5)
TERA10 C–D Channel Power Value (not Channel Power Value (not on Channel 1 and 2:
modifiable) modifiable) Channel Power Value (not
+ increase / decrease + increase / decrease modifiable)
+ large increase / decrease + large increase / decrease + increase / decrease
+ large increase / decrease
10.5.1 Channel Power Menu
To manage the Channel Power value of a Tributary:
– Open the Port view of a TMU / TXU board.
Port
Wavelength ...
Phase Modulator ...
Channel Power > Channel Power Config ...
Laser Management > Channel Power ...
Large Increase Channel Power
Large Decrease Channel Power
Figure 100. Channel Power menu
N.B. The Channel Power Config option is only available for TERA10 A–B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Large Increase / Large Decrease Channel Power option is only available for TERA10 C–D
N.B. Those menus are also available on PAU Board menu for TERA10 C–D Dummy Tributaries and
LCU Board menu.
3AL 89062 AA AA 141 / 266
266
10.5.2 Channel Power Value on one Tributary
N.B. This function concerns normal Tributaries and TERA10 C–D Dummy Tributaries.

This function allows to display the channel power value (pre–emphasis) in dBm of a Tributary before multi-

plexing stage (on TMU / TXU board).
The displayed value is the value (in dBm) set by the NE after an increase/decrease channel power com-
mand.
To display the Channel Power value of a Tributary:
– In the Channel Power menu, click on the Channel Power ... option.
Figure 101. Channel Power dialogue box
The Channel Power value is in dBm.
– Click on Cancel to close the window.
10.5.3 Increase/Decrease Channel Power on one Tributary
N.B. This function concerns normal Tributaries and TERA10 C–D Dummy Tributaries.
This function allows to modify by small steps the channel power value (pre–emphasis) in dBm of a Tribu-
tary before multiplexing stage (on TMU / TXU board).
The step value is 0.2 dBm for TERA10 A and TERA10 B

The step value is 0.1 dBm for TERA10 C and TERA10 D
– In the Channel Power menu, click on Increase Channel Power or Decrease Channel Power op-
tion.
– In the confirmation box, click on OK to confirm your operation.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. A MIB align up operation is necessary to recover new exact value updated by the NE.
3AL 89062 AA AA 142 / 266
266
10.5.4 Large Increase/Decrease Channel Power on one Tributary
N.B. This function concerns TERA10 C–D normal Tributaries and TERA10 C–D Dummy Tributaries.
This function allows to modify by steps of 1 dBm the channel power value (pre–emphasis) in dBm of a
Tributary before multiplexing stage (on TMU / TXU board) .
– In the Channel Power menu, click on Large Increase Channel Power or Large Decrease Channel
Power option.
– In the confirmation box, click on OK to confirm your operation.

10.5.5 Increase/Decrease Channel Power Global Commands
This function allows to modify by small steps, the channel power value (pre–emphasis) in dBm for several
Tributaries simultaneously (on several TMU / TXU boards).
The step value is 0.2 dBm for TERA10 A–B

The step value is 0.1 dBm for TERA10 C and TERA10 D
To increase/decrease the Channel Power value for several Tributaries:
– In the Transmission or Reception view, select all the affected tributaries:
– In the WDM Transmission pull down menu:

– Select the Channel Power Global Cmds option.
– Select the Increase or Decrease Channel Power option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 143 / 266
266
WDM Transmission


Channel Power Global Cmds > Increase Channel Power (on tribTx)
AMS Global Commands > Decrease Channel Power (on tribTx)
FEC Global Commands > Large Increase Channel Power (on tribTx)
Wavelength Frequency Offset ... Large Decrease Channel Power (on tribTx)
Figure 102. Channel power global commands
– In the displayed confirmation box, click on OK to confirm your operation.

10.5.6 Large Increase/Decrease Channel Power Global Commands
N.B. Only available for TERA10 C–D
This function allows to modify by steps of 1 dBm, the channel power value (pre–emphasis) in dBm for sev-
eral tributaries simultaneously (on several TMU / TXU boards).
To large increase/decrease the Channel Power value for several tributaries:
– In the Transmission or Reception view, select all the affected tributaries:
– In the WDM Transmission pull down menu:

– Select the Channel Power Global Cmds option.
– Select the Large Increase or Large Decrease Channel Power option.
– In the displayed confirmation box, click on OK to confirm your operation.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 144 / 266
266
10.5.7 Channel Power configuration on one Tributary
N.B. Only available for TERA10 A–B

N.B. This function only concerns normal tributaries. For dummy tributaries, see chapter 10.6 Ampli
power.
This function allows to set a new channel power value (pre–emphasis) in dBm of a Tributary before multi-
plexing stage (on TMU / TXU board) .
– Open the Port view of a TMU / TXU board (tribTx port) of the Tributary subrack,
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Channel Power Config... option.
The Channel Power value is in dBm.
– Enter the new Channel power value.
– Click on OK to execute the modification.

N.B. A MIB align down operation is necessary to download new value to the NE.
10.5.8 Channel Power on LCU Board
In the LCU board, two lasers are available. The two channel powers can be set to a new value:
– Open the Subrack view and select the LCU board,
– In the Equipment menu, click on the Channel Power option.
– Choose Channel Power 1 or Channel power 2 option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 145 / 266
266
Equipment
Board Configuration ...

Measure >

Slots Labels ON/OFF
Wavelength ...
Channel Power > Channel Power 1 Channel Power 1...
Connectivity Config ... Channel power 2 Increase Channel Power 1
Decrease Channel Power 1
Large Increase Channel Power 1
Large Decrease Channel Power 1
Figure 104. Channel Power menu for LCU Board
The functions proposed are the same for channel 1 and channel 2. See the previous sections for more
details.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 146 / 266
266
10.6 Amplifier Power
This function allows the operator to configure the output power (dBm) of some Amplifiers:
– Output Power Level (on WTA, WRA WBA boards)

– Compensation Power Level (on CAU_TX and BCAU boards)

– Dummy Tributary Output Power Level (on PAU board), only available for TERA10 A–B
To display the Ampli power, in a Subrack view:
– In the Equipment pull down menu, click on the Ampli Power option.
Equipment
Measure >
Slots Labels On/OFF
Ampli Power > Output Power Level
Figure 105. Ampli Power for a WRA board
The option displayed depends of the board type.
10.6.1 WTA / WRA / WBA Output Power Level
For the WTA,WRA, WBA boards, the Output power level can be modified.
– In Ampli Power menu, click on Output Power Level... option .
Figure 106. Amplifier Output Power dialogue box
The Output Power Level is displayed and can be modified:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Enter the new value in agreement with the limiting values (Min, Max) displayed in the dialogue box
when the parameter field is selected.
3AL 89062 AA AA 147 / 266
266

10.6.2 PAU Output Power Level (TERA10 A–B Dummy Tributaries)
For the PAU boards, the Output power level can be modified.
– In Ampli Power menu, click on Output Power Level... option.
Figure 107. Amplifier Output Power dialogue box
The Amplifier Output Power is in dBm.
You have the choice (do not do both):
• Either you enter a new value, or you increase / decrease the value by step of 1 by clicking on
Increase or Decrease push button,
• Click on OK to confirm your operation.
tions.
N.B. If you set a new value, a MIB align down operation is necessary to download the new value
to the NE.
N.B. If you increase / decrease the value, a MIB align up operation is necessary to recover the exact
new value updated by the NE.
10.6.3 Compensation Power Level
For the CAU_TX and BCAU boards, the Compensation Power level can be modified.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– In Ampli Power menu, click on Compensation Power Level... option.
3AL 89062 AA AA 148 / 266
266
Figure 108. Compensation Output Power dialogue box
The Compensation power is in dBm, two possible values: 0 dBm, 5 dBm.
– Enter a new Compensation power value with the option button,

10.6.4 WTA Input Power Level
This function allows to manage the Input power of the Post Amp Board (WTA)
– Open the Subrack view and select the WTA board,
– In the Equipment menu, click on the Input Power ... option.
Figure 109. Input Power dialogue box
– Enter the new Input Power value and click on OK.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. A MIB align down operation is necessary to download new value to the NE.
3AL 89062 AA AA 149 / 266
266
10.7 Decision Threshold
This function allows to increase/decrease Eyes decision threshold at the receive side in order to have a
better accuracy in the received optical signal decoding.

– Open the Port view of the RXU board (tribRx port) of the Tributary subrack.
– In the Port menu, click on the Decision Threshold option.
Figure 110. Decision Threshold dialogue box
The Decision Threshold parameters are displayed and can be modified:
– Enter the new values in agreement with the limiting values (Min, Max) displayed in the dialogue box
when a parameter field is selected.
– Click on OK to validate the values and to close the window.

N.B. A MIB Align down operation is necessary to download the new values to the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 150 / 266
266
10.8 Phase Modulator
This function allows to configure the phase modulator parameters of a Tributary.

– Open the Port view of a TMU / TXU board (tribTx port) of the Tributary subrack.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Phase Modulator... option.
Figure 111. Phase Modulator dialogue box
The Phase Modulator parameters are displayed and can be modified:
N.B. The unit is mV for TERA 10 A–B–C and % for TERA 10 D.
– Click on OK to validate the values and to close the window.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 151 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
152 / 266
11 Automatic Pre–emphasis Adjustment
N.B. Only available in Stand Alone mode

N.B. Dummy tributaries are not concerned by this feature

This function provides procedures to homogenize transmission quality of WDM Submarine equipment by
power adjustment of each channel. Measurement quality is based on FEC Bit Error Rate evaluation. APA
is performed during installation of network, but can be useful for readjustment due to component ageing
or capacity upgrade.
APA features are available only if APA is authorized, except for APA Tributary Involvement and MPO
Phase Amplitude configuration.
11.1 APA Authorization
To set the APA Authorization:
– In Configuration pull down menu, click on APA/MPO option,

– Click on APA Authorization ... option.
Figure 112. APA Authorization dialogue box
– Choose the APA Authorization status: Enabled or Disabled with the option button
– Click on OK push to validate your modification and to close the window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 153 / 266
266
11.2 APA View
N.B. Only available with the APA authorized.

The APA view is accessible by Views menu.

Views
Previous Esc
Equipment
External Points
Transmission
Reception
Submerged Line
Connectivity
Open object Alt+O
Zoom Scroll Mode Alt+Z
Close Alt+Q
– Click on Automatic Pre Emphasis in Views menu, the following view is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 154 / 266
266
Figure 114. APA view
From this view, the operator can visualize a table with one row per channel. The two first columns are fixed
and the others can be moved with the scroll bar.
N.B. IMPO and ILFT cells are available only for involved and Out Of Service Tributaries. Other celles
are available for involved and In Service Tributaries.
The tributaries not involved in APA procedure and/or ”out of service” are greyed. For example, in the
Figure 114. the tributaries 2 and 4 are not involved.
The columns are:
– Tributary: contains the Tributary number and the wavelength.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– IMPO: Individual MPO (Stopped, Running).
– Reference Power (RPi) in dBm: contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value. Threshold Global >
3AL 89062 AA AA 155 / 266
266
– Current Power (Pi) in dBm: contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value.
– Channel Margin (Cmi) in dB: contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value.

– Number of Uncorrected Blocks: contains an integer or ’???’ if unknown value.

– Channel Margin Discrepancy (delta Cmi) in dB: contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value.
– System Margin (Sm) in dB: contains a real or ’???’ if unknown value.
– Reference System Margin (RSm) in dB: contains an integer or ’???’ if unknown value.
– APA Channel Status: a string (undefined, excessive cumulated correction, local transmission failure,
far end transmission failure, bad power variation).
– Saturated Trib: the Tributary state is Not Saturated or saturated.
– ILFT States: the ILFT state is Running or Stopped.
In the panel, at the bottom of the view (see Figure 114. ), the following attributes are displayed in little
coloured squares:
– APA state (possible values are described below).
– Margin Measurement state (possible values are described below).
– Serial MPO state (possible values are described below).
APA, Margin Measurement, Serial MPO states can take following values:
– Stopped: green background colour for cleared severity.
– Running: purple background colour for indeterminate severity.
– APA Standby: (Excessive Correction Standby, Transmission Failure Standby, Power Variation
Standby, More Than 5 Iterations Standby) blue background colour for warning severity.
– MM Standby: (Transmission Failure Standby, Power Variation Standby) blue background colour for
warning severity.
– APA Aborted: (Excessive Correction Aborted, Transmission Failure Aborted, Power Variation
Aborted, More Than 5 Iterations Aborted) blue background colour for warning severity.
– MM Aborted: (Power Limitation Aborted, Transmission Failure Aborted, Power Variation Aborted)
blue background colour for warning severity.
The operator can send actions using APA pull down menu in menu bar.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 156 / 266
266
11.3 Reset Reference Power
This function resets the reference Power of all channels involved in APA procedure and the reference sy-
stem margin into the NE.
N.B. APA, MM and SMPO procedures must be stopped or aborted.
To activate the reset:
– In the APA view, click on APA menu:
APA
Reset RPI
APA >
Serial MPO >
Individual MPO >
Figure 115. Reset RPI command
– Click on Reset RPI option
After execution, a message box is displayed:
Figure 116. Reset RPI message box
– Click on OK to close the window.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 157 / 266
266
11.4 Refresh Measurements
This function allows to see the instantaneous APA measurement values.

To refresh measurement:

– In the APA view, click on the APA menu (see Figure 115. )
– Click on Refresh Measurements option
After execution, a successful message box is displayed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 158 / 266
266
11.5 APA Commands
The Automatic Pre Emphasis Adjustment procedure (APA) is the main facility to optimize all channel mar-
gin discrepancies by performing several iterations of margin measurement and Pre Emphasis adjustment.
– In the APA view, click on APA pull down menu (see Figure 115. ),
– Click on APA option.
Three commands are displayed in a sub–menu.
– Click on to execute the chosen command.
This allows to activate, force or abort APA procedure by selecting Start APA, Force APA or Abort APA.
11.5.1 Start APA
N.B. APA, MM SMPO and IMPO must be stopped or aborted.
After execution, a message box is displayed if the command is successfully completed: ”Activate
command successful”.
• Click on OK to close the message box.
11.5.2 Force APA
N.B. APA must be in standby, MM, SMPO and IMPO must be stopped or aborted.
After execution, a message box is displayed.
• Click on OK to close the window.
11.5.3 Abort APA
N.B. APA must be in running state.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 159 / 266
266
11.6 Margin Measurement Commands (MM)
N.B. The operator can activate this procedure at any time only if no APA procedure is started.

The Margin Measurement procedure (MM) is a sub part of APA procedure which only calculates all the

channel margin discrepancies.
– Click on Margin Measurement option.
Three commands are displayed in a sub–menu.
This allows to activate, force or abort Margin Measurement procedure by selecting Start MM, Force
MM or Abort MM.
11.6.1 Start MM
N.B. APA, MM, SMPO and IMPO must be stopped or aborted.
• Click on OK to execute the command.
11.6.2 Force MM
N.B. MM must be in standby, APA, SMPO and IMPO must be stopped or aborted.
11.6.3 Abort MM
N.B. MM must be in running state.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 160 / 266
266
11.7 Serial MPO (SMPO)
This function allows the operator to activate a Modulation Parameter Optimization (MPO) procedure on
all the wavelength. This procedure is used in addition to the APA procedure. Only the channels involved
in the APA are concerned with the MPO.

– Click on Serial MPO option.
Two commands are displayed in a sub–menu.
This allows to state, start or abort SMPO procedure by selecting State Serial MPO, Start Serial MPO
or Abort Serial MPO.
11.7.1 Start Serial MPO
11.7.2 Abort Serial MPO
N.B. SMPO must be in running state

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 161 / 266
266
11.8 Individual MPO (IMPO)
This function is used only for installation or upgrade purpose. Only one channel is running at the same
time.

– Click on Individual MPO option.
Two commands are displayed in a sub–menu.
This allows to start or abort IMPO procedure by selecting Start Individual MPO or Abort Individual
MPO.
11.8.1 Start Individual MPO
Figure 117. Start Individual MPO dialogue box
• Select one Tributary in the list displayed.

• Click on OK.
A warning message is displayed:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 162 / 266
266
Figure 118. Individual MPO confirmation box

tions.
A message box is displayed at the end of the command execution.

tions.
11.8.2 Abort Individual MPO
N.B. IMPO must be in running state

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 163 / 266
266
11.9 Individual LFT (ILFT)
The Individual Laser Frequency Tuning Procedure is available to find the best wavelength frequency off-
set.

– Click on Individual LFT option.
Two commands are displayed in a sub–menu. They allows to start or abort ILFT.
11.9.1 Start Individual LFT
– In the Individual LFT menu, click on Individual LFT Start
Figure 119. Start Individual LFT dialogue box
• Select one Tributary in the displayed list.

• Click on OK.
A warning message is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 164 / 266
266
Figure 120. Individual MPO confirmation box

tions.
A message box is displayed at the end of the command execution.
11.9.2 Abort Individual LFT
N.B. ILFT must be in running state

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 165 / 266
266
11.10 APA Tributary Involvement
The APA channel involvement indicates the channels involved in the APA & MM & SMPO & IMPO proce-
dures.

– Click on APA Tributary Involvement ... option.
Figure 121. APA Tributary Involvement dialogue box
– In the Tributary List, select the affected tributaries.

– With the option button, choose: Involved or Not involved.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 166 / 266
266
11.11 MPO Phase Amplitude Configuration
N.B. Parameter modifications are only available in Constructor mode.

This function allows to display and modify the range of the amplitude of the phase modulator configuration.
– Open the Port view of the concerned board

– In Port menu, click on Phase Modulator Limits option,
Figure 122. MPO Phase Amplitude Configuration dialogue box
The Phase Modulator Amplitude Limits are displayed and can be modified:
• Minimum Value: enter a real value

• Maximum Value: enter a real value
N.B. The unit is mV for TERA 10 A–B–C and % for TERA 10 D.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 167 / 266
266
11.12 APA Algoritm Parameters Configuration

This function allows to display and modify the APA Algorithm Parameters.

– Click on APA Algorithm Parameters ... option.
Figure 123. APA Algorithm Parameter Configuration dialogue box
The Global SLTE Configuration parameters are displayed and can be modified:
• Channel Power Variation Step, it indicates the power value step used in APA correction and also
in the saturation detection tests. It is modified by step of 0.1 dBm.
• Saturation Limit Slope, it indicates the threshold slope from which the channel is detected as
saturated. It is modified by step of 0.1 dBm.
• Saturation Detection Limit Slope, it indicates the threshold slope from which the channel is de-
tected as saturated. It is modified by step of 0.1 dBm.
• Channel Power Stress Step, it indicates the channel power value step by which a channel is
decreased when it is stressed. It is modified by step of 0.1 dBm.
• Narrow Channel Margin Discrepancy Threshold, It is used in the Pre–emphasis Not Equalized
test activation. It is modified by step of 0.1 dBm.
• Large Channel Margin Discrepancy Threshold, It is used in the Pre–emphasis Not Equalized
test activation. It is modified by step of 0.1 dBm.
– Click on OK to execute the modification.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 168 / 266
266
12 LASER MANAGEMENT (SHUTDOWN / RESTART)
12.1 Laser Commands

To display the Laser Commands:
– Open the concerned Port view.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Laser Management option:
Port
Wavelength ...
Phase Modulator ...
Channel Power ...
Laser Management > ALS Configuration ...
Manual Restart
Test Restart
ALS Control >
These commands are described in the next sections.
The State of the ALS is given at the bottom of the Termination point view:
Figure 125. ALS states
The possible ALS States are:
– Laser State: ON, OFF, in Test, AutoRestart, Manual Restart or Manual Restart Test.
– ALS Auto Restart: Enabled or Disabled.
– ALS Status: Enabled, Disabled or Problem.
– ALS Active: ON or OFF.
– Standby Laser State: ON, OFF (only for STU Raman Supy)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 169 / 266
266
12.2 ALS Configuration
This option allows to configure the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS).

– In the Laser Management pull down menu, click on ALS Configuration ... option.

Figure 126. Automatic Laser Shutdown dialogue box
The following parameters are displayed and can be modified:
• ALS Auto Restart, two states:

– Enabled: if the laser is stopped, the restart is automatically done by the SLTE after a wait
time of x seconds (x is the value displayed in Wait To Restart Time field),
– Disabled: if the laser is stopped, the restart must be manual.
• Wait To Restart Time: number of seconds between a laser shutdown and a laser automatic re-
start.

N.B. A MIB align down is necessary after the Wait To Restart Time modification.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 170 / 266
266
12.3 Manual Restart
To restart laser manually:

– In the Laser Management pull down menu, click on Manual Restart option.
Figure 127. Manual restart confirmation box
– Click on OK to confirm the manual laser restart.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 171 / 266
266
12.4 Test Restart

To test the laser restart:

– In the Laser Management pull down menu, click on Test Restart option.
Figure 128. Test Restart Confirmation box
– Click on OK to confirm the test Laser restart.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 172 / 266
266
12.5 ALS Control
This function allows the control of the ALS state and the laser state.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Laser Management option,
– Select the ALS Control option:
Port
Channel Power ...
Wavelength ...
Channel power config ...
Manual Restart
Test Restart
ALS Control > Enable ALS
Disable ALS/Laser Off
Disable ALS/Laser On
Three options are allowed:
• Enabled ALS: the laser will operate with the automatic protection,
• Disable ALS / Laser Off: the laser will be stopped,
• Disable ALS / Laser On: the laser activation will be forced.
– Select one command and click on OK.

– Click on OK.
The function is executed and at the end, a box is displayed with: ALS Control Command Successful. See
chapter 5.2 for ALS Control Command Accessibility.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 173 / 266
266
12.6 Laser Cut Off
This function allows to either Shutdown the laser (Enable Laser Cut Off) or Restart the laser (Disable Laser
Cut Off).

12.6.1 Single Laser Cut Off
– In the Port view, select the Port pull down menu and the Laser management option.
– Click on ALS Control, (the options displayed depend on the board type)
Port
Wavelength ...
Phase Modulator ...
Channel Power ...
Manual Restart
Test Restart
ALS Control > Enable Laser Cut Off
Disable Laser Cut Off
– Click on Enable Laser Cut Off or Disable Laser Cut Off.

– Click on OK.
12.6.2 Laser Cut Off on LCU Board
– In the Board view, select the Board pull down menu and the Laser management option.
Port
Navig to Subrack
Laser Management > Enable Laser 1 Cut Off
Disable Laser1 Cut Off
Enable Laser 2 Cut Off
Disable Laser 2 Cut Off
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 131. Laser Management options for LCU board
3AL 89062 AA AA 174 / 266
266
– Click on the chosen command for the laser 1 or 2.
– Click on OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 175 / 266
266
12.7 Laser Global Commands
The laser commands can be executed on several tributaries simultaneously.

To do several commands:

– In the Transmission or Reception view, select all the affected tributaries,
– Click on the WDM Transmission pull down menu and on the Laser Global Commands option:
WDM Transmission

Laser Global Commands > ALS Control >
Channel Power Global Cmds > ALS Configuration ... (on tribTx)
AMS Global Commands > Manual Restart (on tribTx)
FEC Global Commands > Test Restart (on tribTx)
Wavwlength Frequency Offset ...
Figure 132. Transmission Laser global commands
WDM Transmission

Laser Global Commands > ALS Control >
Channel Power Global Cmds > Enable Laser Cut Off (on tribRx)
AMS Global Commands > Disable Laser Cut Off (on tribRx)
FEC Global Commands > ALS Configuration ... (on sdhTx)
Protection Global Cmds > Manual Restart (on sdhTx)
Perf Threshold Global Cmds > Test Restart (on sdhTx)
Figure 133. Reception Laser global commands

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. The Test Restart (on tribTx) option is displayed only in Constructor mode
The allowed functionalities are described in the previous sections.
3AL 89062 AA AA 176 / 266
266
12.8 Laser Shutdown Configuration for OPS Networks
The OPS (Optical Path Switch) equipment aims to optimize the optical path protection of an end–to–end
network. To perform optical switch, the OPS reacts on received loss of data.
For that, NEs like SLTE which are connected to an OPS need to shutdown their laser in certain conditions.
For TERA10 SLTE, this specific laser shutdown mechanism is provided by two features accessible on the
sdhTx port (signal emission to OPS equipment).
At the bottom of the sdhTx port view, attributes statuses are displayed in panels:
– LS Line Criterion (enabled or disabled),

– LS MS AIS Criterion (enabled or disabled).
Figure 134. Attributes statuses
12.8.1 Laser Shutdown Line Criterion
The Laser Shutdown Line Criterion function allows to enable or disable laser shutdown while receiving
LOS, LOF, or AMS from the Line due to a problem on Submarine links (Line).
To modify the LS Line Criterion:
– Open the Port view of the sdhTx port (FDU board).
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Laser Shutdown Criterion option.
– Click on the LS Line Criterion... option.
Figure 135. Laser Shutdown Line Criterion dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Modify the value (Enable or Disable) by clicking on the option button.

3AL 89062 AA AA 177 / 266
266
12.8.2 Laser Shutdown MS AIS Criterion
The Laser Shutdown MS AIS Criterion function allows to enable or disable laser shutdown while receiving
MS–AIS from the Line due to a problem on terrestrial links (SDH).

To modify the LS MS AIS Criterion:
– Open the Port view of the sdhTx port (FDU board).
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Laser Shutdown Criterion option.
– Click on the LS MS AIS Criterion ... option.
Figure 136. Laser Shutdown MS AIS Line Criterion dialogue box
– Modify the value (Enable or Disable) by clicking on the option button.

12.8.3 Laser Shutdown Criterion Global Commands
The LS Line criterion commands can be executed for several tributaries simultaneously.
To do several commands:
– In the Reception view, select all the affected tributaries,
– Click on the WDM Transmission pull down menu and on the LS Criterion Global Commands op-
tion:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 178 / 266
266
WDM Transmission
Channel Power Global Cmds >

LS Criterion Global Commands > LS MS AIS Criterion ... (on sdhTx)
FEC Global Commands > LS Line Criterion ... (on sdhTx)
Figure 137. LS Criterion Global Commands
Figure 138. Laser Cut Off confirmation box
– Click on OK to confirm the global command.

The functions allowed are described in the previous sections.
12.8.4 Laser Shutdown Hold Off Time
This function is used to configure the delay before performing a laser shutdown. The LS Hold Off Time
attribute is needed in an OPS network in order to give enough time to an OPS switch and avoid unneces-
sary laser shutdowns.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the LS Hold Off Time ... option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 179 / 266
266
Figure 139. LS Hold Off Time dialogue box
– Laser Shutdown Hold Off Time (ms): enter a new value in agreement with the limiting values (Min,
Max, Step) displayed in the dialogue box when the parameter field is selected.
If the keyboarded value is wrong, the field is displayed with red colour. You must enter another value.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 180 / 266
266
13 PROTECTION MANAGEMENT
N.B. Protection management is not applicable for dummy tributaries.

13.1 Protection Group
Protection Sub System subrack (PSS) is a type of subrack dedicated to Tributaries protection manage-
ment (1+N or 1:N). It allows the traffic to be switched onto a protecting resource when fault conditions occur
on a normal Tributary, or when an operator initiates a changeover (via a force or a manual operation).
13.1.1 Show Protection Group
This function allows to display in Transmission or Reception view all the tributaries, or only the tributaries
which are part of an identified protection group.
– In the Transmission or Reception view (see Figure 45. ), click on the WDM Transmission pull down
menu:
WDM Transmission
Show Protection Group > Show All Prot. Groups

Laser Global Commands > Show Prot. Group 1
Channel Power Global Cmds > Show Prot. Group 2
FEC Global Commands >
Figure 140. Show Protection Group options
– Choose the display type with the menu options:
• Show All Prot. Groups

• Show Prot. Group 
The corresponding Transmission or Reception view is displayed.

An example is given for the Show All Prot. Group 1 selection. The view label refers to the selection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 181 / 266
266
Figure 141. Transmission view for Protection Group 1
13.1.2 Protection Group Configuration
N.B. Parameter modifications are only available in the Constructor mode.
To display and configure one protection group:
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Protection Group option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 182 / 266
266
Configuration
MIB >
NE Time ...
2 Mb Order Wire ...
Dummy Tributaries List ...
APA/MPO >
Performance >
Initialize Line Config >
Protection Group > Enable/Disable Protection Group...
Protection Group Config...
Figure 142. Configuration menu Protection Group option
– In the Protection Group menu, click on Protection Group Config... option.
Figure 143. Protection Group Configuration dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
This window displays the protection group parameters for all protection groups:
– In the Protection Group List select one protection group.
3AL 89062 AA AA 183 / 266
266
The RX Protection Group Type: 1+N or 1:N, value chosen with the option button.

• RX Revertive: Yes or No, value chosen with the option button

• RX Wait to Restore Time (ms): enter an integer value
• RX Signal Fail Switch Period (ms): enter an integer value
• RX Signal Degrade Switch Period (ms): enter an integer value
The Wait to Restore Time is the waiting period before reverting to ensure that the Signal Fail or Sig-
nal Degrade alarm is no longer being detected at the receive side.
When switching to the protecting channel, the transmit switch is operated first. Then the receive
Protection Sub System monitors the receive protection channel. This channel switch is in fact done
after Signal Fail or Signal Degrade Switch Period to ensure that the quality has been improved
and that no alarm is raised.
– Click on OK to validate your choice.

N.B. A MIB align down operation is necessary to download the new value in the NE. If the
Protection Group Type has been changed, it must be followed by a MIB align up opera-
tion.
13.1.3 Enable/Disable Protection Group
N.B. The Availability status of the Protection group must be Available.
This function allows to enable/disable protection groups:
Disabling a protection group will force all associated channels to be unprotected.

Enabling a protection group will make protection possible on all associated channels.
– In the Protection Group menu (see Figure 142. ) , click on Enable/Disable Protection Group ...
option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 184 / 266
266
Figure 144. Enable/Disable Protection Group dialogue box
Two lists are displayed in this window: the Disabled Protection Groups and the Enabled Protection
Groups. You can move the protection groups from one list to another:
– Click on the protection group(s) in the list,
– Click on the arrow icon to move it in the other list.
– Click on OK to validate your choice.

13.1.4 Tributaries Protection Configuration Coherency
For protection purpose, tributaries are grouped in protection groups of 1+N tributaries.
Within each protection group, some rules need to be respected:
– In a protection group of 1+N Tributaries, N Tributaries are defined as protected and one Tributary is
defined as protecting. Only one Tributary protects the other tributaries of the group. See chapter 18.1
to configure Tributary subrack protection scheme.
– In a protection group of 1:N Tributaries, N+1 Tributaries are defined with one Tributary only for low–
priority traffic. This one is the protecting Tributary. See chapter 18.1 to configure Tributary subrack
protection scheme.
– In a protection group, some Tributary parameters need to be configured in the same way in order to
offer the same level of services in case of switch.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 185 / 266
266
Those parameters are the following:
Parameter View Comment

Signal Degrade Alarm List sdhTx and sdhRx ports See paragraph 13.2.2
Signal Fail Alarm List sdhTx and sdhRx ports See paragraph 13.2.2
Line ALS Enabled/Disabled tribRx port See paragraph 12.5

To be forced to Disable ALS
Wavelength Frequency Offset tribTx port See chapter 10.4
SDH ALS Enabled/Disabled fecDecoding port See paragraph 12.5

To be forced to Disable ALS
AMS Insertion fecEncoding and fecDecoding ports See chapter 9.2
AMS Pattern fecDecoding port See chapter 9.2
Laser Shutdown Line Criteria fecDecoding port See chapter 12.8
Laser Shutdown MS AIS Criteria fecDecoding port See chapter 12.8
FEC Error Correction fecDecoding port See chapter 9.1.4
B1 HBER/LBER threshold fecEncoding port See paragraph 7.2
FEC HBER/LBER threshold fecDecoding port See paragraph 7.2
Table 5. Protection Configuration Coherency
The selective display of protection group in the Transmission view can be used to check and adjust Tribu-
tary configuration coherency for those parameters.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 186 / 266
266
13.2 Tributary Protection
13.2.1 Tributary Protection Switch examples

In order to visualize optical paths, the protecting channel is represented with blue links, and in case of
switch, the protected one is displayed in dotted line.
In Figure 145. Tributary#1 is switched onto Tributary#2. And Tributary#4 is ready to protect other Tribu-
taries.
1 (1554.00 nm)
Blue
2 (1554.80 nm)
Spare
3 (1555.60 nm)
4 (1556.40 nm)
Spare
Blue
5 (1557.20 nm)
6 (1558.00 nm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 145. Example of (1+N) switched Transmission channel view
3AL 89062 AA AA 187 / 266
266
1 (1554.00 nm)
Blue 2 (1554.80 nm)

Spare
3 (1555.60 nm)
4 (1556.40 nm)
Blue Spare
5 (1557.20 nm)
6 (1558.00 nm)
Figure 146. Example of (1+N) switched Reception channel view
13.2.2 Tributary Protection Configuration
N.B. Only available in Constructor mode for modification
N.B. Only available in the sdhRx/Tx Port view
This function allows to display and modify some configuration parameters depending on whether the port
is an SDH Transmit direction one (sdhTx) or an SDH Receive direction one (sdhRx).
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Trib Protection Config ... option (see Figure 149. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 188 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 147. sdhTx Protection Configuration dialogue box
189 / 266
Figure 148. sdhRx Protection Configuration dialogue box
• Hold Off Time (ms): integer (only on protected sdhTx)

• Protection Signal Degrade: inhibit or allow (only on protected sdhTx)
• In Signal Degrade Alarm Configuration and Signal Fail Alarm Configuration areas: the Alarms
List and the Selected Alarms are displayed giving the probable causes and the specific prob-
lems combined items.
To modify the selected alarms:
– Click on the alarm(s) in the list,
– Click on the arrow icon to move it in the other list.
• Click on OK to validate your choice.
tions.
N.B. Apart from Alarm Configuration lists, only Protection Group ID attribute is common to Tx
and Rx sides. The other attributes are only available on SDH transmit side (i.e. from
sdhTx).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 190 / 266
266
13.2.3 Tributary Protection Commands
N.B. Only available in the sdhRx, sdhTx ports view

This function allows to send commands to initiate or release a protection process in the sdhTx / sdhRx
Port view.
– In the Port menu, click on Trib Protection Commands option.
Port
View Optical Parameters ...
Laser Shutdown Criterion >
Laser Management >
Trib Protection Config ...
Trib Protection Commands > Invoke Lockout
Release Forced
Manual
Figure 149. Trib Protection Commands options
For each action, Invoke or Release, three types of invocation are available: manual, forced or lockout.
– Click on the chosen command in the menu,
– Click on OK to send your command.

N.B. An Invoke lockout on protecting Tributary will disable its associated protection group.
N.B. A Release Lockout on protecting Tributary will enable its associated protection group.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 191 / 266
266
13.2.4 Tributary Protection Statuses
In the sdhTx and sdhRx ports, some protection statuses are displayed:

– Protection switch status: bridge (sky blue), no switch (green), signalDegrade (yellow), signalFail (yel-

low), force (yellow) or manual (yellow) (only on protected tributaries)
– Protection lockout status: lockout (sky blue) or not lockout (green)
– Protection role, only if protection is revertive: protected (green) or protecting (yellow). This field is only
available on sdhTx port.
– Operational state: disabled (sky blue) or enabled (green)
– Availability status: available (green) or not available (sky blue)
Figure 150. Protection statuses on sdhTx port
13.2.5 Example of Manual Invoke of a tribTx port
In the Reception view:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 192 / 266
266
Blue
1 (1554.00 nm)
2 (1554.80 nm)
Spare
3 (1555.60 nm)
Blue
4 (1556.40 nm)
Spare
5 (1557.20 nm)
6 (1558.00 nm)
Figure 151. Reception channel view
– Select the concerned sdhTx with click on its icon.
Display the corresponding Port view:
• Select in the Views menu, the Open object option

or:
• Double click on its icon
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 193 / 266
266
The following view is displayed:

Blue
Blue
Figure 152. Port view
– In the Port menu, select Trib Protection Commands option,
– Select Invoke option
– Select Manual option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 194 / 266
266
The selected sdhTx switch is invoked, the Protection Switch icon in the bottom of the Port view is updated.
Other icons remain unchanged.
Figure 153. Protection icons after manual invoke
The Reception view is now as Figure 146.
13.2.6 Example of Manual Release of a tribTx port
In the Reception view (see Figure 146. ):
– Select the concerned sdhTx with click on its icon.
Display the corresponding Port view (see Figure 152. ):
• Select in the Views menu, the Open object option

or:
• Double click on its icon
– In the Port menu, select Trib Protection Commands option
– Select Release option
– Select Manual option
– Click on OK to send your command.

The selected sdhTx switch is released, the Protection Switch icon in the bottom of the Port view is updated.
Other icons remain unchanged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 195 / 266
266
Figure 154. Protection icons after manual release
The Reception view is now as Figure 151.
13.2.7 Error Cases
a) If you can not invoke or release a switch of a protected Tributary:
• Check the following general states of the associated protection group:
– Protection Availability state must be Available
– Protection Operational state must be Enable
• Check the priority management. The priority degrees of the protection mechanisms are (in de-
scending order):
– Lockout Invoke
– Force Switch
– Auto Switch (Signal Fail)
– Auto Switch (Signal Degrade)
– Manual Switch
b) Practice examples of impossible invoke or release switch:
In any case, check that Protection Lockout state is Not Lockout for the Tributary.
If it is Lockout, check that the Tributary is in service before doing a release Lockout.
1) You can not invoke Manual Switch:
– check that Protection Switch state is not ’No Switch’
2) No switch on a Tributary is done after invoke manual switch:
– check if another Tributary of the same Protection Group is not already switched with a high-
er priority
3) You can not invoke Force Switch on a Tributary:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– check that Protection Switch state is not already ’Force’
3AL 89062 AA AA 196 / 266
266
4) You can not release Manual Switch on a Tributary :
– check that Protection Switch state is ’Manual’

– If Protection Switch state is ’Signal Degrade’ or ’Signal Fail’, you can release manual
switch if protection group is no revertive mode (check its value in Protection Configuration
window).
5) You can not release force switch on Tributary i:
– check that Protection Switch state is Force
6) No switch is done on reception of one alarm which usually generates a Signal Degrade
switch:
– check that in Protection Configuration window that Signal Degrade state is ’Allow’
7) No switch is done on reception of one alarm which usually generates a Signal Fail
switch:
– check that in Protection Configuration window this alarm is in the selected alarms list
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 197 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
198 / 266
14 SUBMERGED SEGMENT (LINE CONFIGURATION AT SEGMENT LEVEL)
N.B. This function is available only in Stand Alone mode except for Segment Parameter and IFF
Management functions. Assignment state is visible in permanent item panel (SNM Item).
14.1 Segment Management
14.1.1 Segment Parameters
Information about the current segment can be displayed as follows:
– Select the NE option, then the Slem Segment option.
Supervision
NE > Warm Reset NE >

Access State > Cold Reset NE >
Alarms > Performance Reset >
Upload Remote Inventory Optical Thresholds AutoAdjustment >
Dump NE MIB Characteristics ...
Address Setting ...
Slem Segment > Segment Parameters ...
Segment Tributaries Conf ...
IFF Management >
Figure 155. Slem Segment options
– Select the Segment Parameters ... option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 199 / 266
266
Figure 156. Segment Parameters dialogue box
Only in Constructor mode, the following parameters can be modified:
• SLTE Orientation, click on the option button to choose: X or Y

• Request Indication on, click on the radio button to choose: Aggregate or Tributary. If Tributary
selected, enter the Tributary number.
• Reply Detection on, click on the radio button to choose: Aggregate or Tributary. If Tributary se-
lected, enter the Tributary number.
• Modulation Level, enter the level value
• R0R1 A Direction Frequency, use the option button to select a value (2,5%, 5%, 10%)
• R0R1 B Direction Frequency, use the option button to select a value
• R0R1 Response Data Rate, use the option button to select a value
• R0R1 A Response Frequency, use the option button to select a value
• R3R4 A Supervisory Frequency, use the option button to select a value
In case of Raman Supy expected, segment parameters are different. Request Indication can not be
configurable because always aggregate and modulation level is replaced by aggregate Raman Supy
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(see Figure 157. ).
3AL 89062 AA AA 200 / 266
266
Figure 157. Segment Parameters dialogue box for Raman Supy
Only in Constructor mode, the following parameters can be modified for the Raman Supy :
• SLTE Orientation, click on the option button to choose: X or Y

• Reply Detection on, click on the radio button to choose: Aggregate or Tributary. If Tributary se-
lected, enter the Tributary number.
• Aggregate Raman Supy, use the option button to select a value
• R0R1 A Direction Frequency, use the option button to select a value
• R0R1 B Direction Frequency, use the option button to select a value
• R0R1 Response Data Rate, use the option button to select a value
• R0R1 A Response Frequency, use the option button to select a value
• R3R4 A Supervisory Frequency, use the option button to select a value
– Click on the OK push button to validate your modifications and close the window.
The Close push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box, without modifications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 201 / 266
266
14.1.2 Segment Tributaries Configuration
N.B. Only available in Constructor mode for modifications.

N.B. Not available if Raman Supy is expected.

To configure the segment parameters:
– Click on the Supervision pull down menu.
– Select the Segment Tributaries Conf... option.
Figure 158. Segment Tributaries Configuration dialogue box
N.B. Only R1 Tributaries are available in this list.
– Select one Tributary in the Tributaries List.
The following parameters can be modified by using the corresponding option buttons:
• Modulation Percentage
• Aggregate Participation: to decide if the tributary will be part (Enabled) of the aggregate or not
(disabled). The aggregate is possibly used for commands (measurements or settings).
– Click on the OK push button to validate your modification and close the window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 202 / 266
266
14.1.3 IFF Management

The Intermittent Fault Flag (IFF) management is only available for R3/R4 Repeaters and when this Inter-
mittent Fault Detection function is available for the customer.
To enable or disable the IFF management:
– Click on the Supervision pull down menu.
– Select the IFF Management option, then choose:
• Enable, to enable the IFF management

• Disable, to disable the IFF management
Figure 159. IFF Confirmation box
– Click on the OK push button to confirm the execution.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 203 / 266
266
14.2 View Settings/Thresholds
This option displays the list of the setting and threshold values for the repeaters and BUs of one segment.


– Select the View Settings/Thresholds option.
Figure 160. Settings/Thresholds dialogue box
– Select one segment and click on the View push button.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 204 / 266
266
Figure 161. Settings/Thresholds list window
For the selected segment, the list of Settings/Thresholds is displayed. You can print the list or search
characters with the File and Search commands in the menu bar of the window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 205 / 266
266
14.3 Initialize Line Configuration

N.B. This command is accessible either on the TERA10CT or on the 1353SH.

This function allows to initialize or re–initialize the Wet Plant configuration from a data configuration file
called EDF file. This configuration covers the whole segment content: Subsegments, Repeaters, BUs,
RCEs.
The data configuration file is present on the TERA10CT and on the 1353SH. It is the same as the one used
by the 1354SN (one file per segment).
In case of this data file changes (Repeater or BU replacement, Repeater addition), this file will be updated
on the 1354SN (using save EDF 1354SN command) but not automatic update is done on the TERA10CT
or the 1353SH. A copy of the 1354SN updated file is done at Initialize Line Config command using ’with
Remote File’ option.
N.B. This ”Initialize Line Config” command sets a default value to the accessibility state of each wet
plant equipment. The default value is defined according to the value of the LINE_ACCESSIBIL-
ITY_FIBRE_PAIR variable in the EMLIM param.cfg file (/usr/1353sh/eml/sub/wdmsubnr5/conf/
param.cfg). This variable allows to define which fibre pair the SLTE is connected to, and so
which Subsystem the SLTE is able to access (to do measurement or setting). The change of
that variable needs a restart of the EMLIM process before sending the Initialize Line Config
command..
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Initialize Line Config option.
Configuration
MIB >
NE Time ...
2 Mb Order Wire ...
Dummy Tributaries ...
APA /MPO >
Performance >
Measure >
Initialize Line Config > with Local File
with Remote File
Figure 162. Initialize Line Config options
– Choose one the following options:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• with Local File: indicates that the data configuration file used to initialize the line configuration
is the local file
3AL 89062 AA AA 206 / 266
266
• with Remote File: indicates that the data configuration file used to initialize the line configura-
tion is goten from 1354SN (where the data file is updated). After that command, the local file
is a fresh copy of the remote file.

– Click on OK
N.B. The Remote File command is more reliable because you are more sure to use the up–to–date
data file. But because the Line configuration file is not supposed to change often, the Local File
should be sufficient.
N.B. A MIB align down operation followed by a MIB align up operation are necessary to fully take
into account the line configuration file.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 207 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
208 / 266
15 SUBSEGMENT, REPEATERS AND RCE
15.1 Subsegment Parameter Management

This function allows the display and/or management of the Repeaters contained in that portion of the sub-
merged cable (between an NE and a Branching Unit (BU) or between two BUs).
The Subsegments are displayed in the left part of the Submerged Line view.
Information about a Subsegment can be displayed as follows:
– In the Views pull down menu, select the Submerged Line option.
The Submerged Line view is displayed as in Figure 47.
– In this view select the Subsegment for which the parameters have to be displayed.
– Select the Subsegment Parameters ... option.
SubmergedLine
Subsegment Parameters...
Subsegment Repeaters List...
Subsegment RCEs List ...
Subsegment Multi Repeaters Commands >
BU Parameters...
BU Spur Latching Controls...
BU Trunk Latching Controls...
BU Subsystem List...
View Settings/Thresholds
Figure 163. Submerged Line menu

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 209 / 266
266
Figure 164. Subsegment Parameters dialogue box
– Use the Accessibility option button to make the list and characteristics of all the Repeaters (of the
selected Subsegment) accessible or not for the operator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 210 / 266
266
15.2 Repeaters Management
The NE can be interfaced with the following Repeaters:

– the R0 Repeater
– the R1 Repeater
– the R3 Repeater
– the R4 Repeater
– the R4.10 Repeater
This function allows the operator to display the list of all Repeaters on the selected Subsegment and to
display the characteristics of each of them.
15.2.1 Repeaters List
The Repeaters list can be displayed as follows:
– In the Submerged Line view, click on the Subsegment for which the Repeaters list has to be dis-
played.
– Select the Subsegment Repeaters List... option.
N.B. You can also display the Repeaters list by double clicking on the Subsegment in the Submerged
Line view.
Figure 165. Repeater dialogue box
This window allows the selection of the Repeaters to be listed:
• Enter the name of the specific Repeater.

• Click on OK to validate your choice.
The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box.
The Repeater Subsystem window (like in Figure 167. for example) is then displayed.
Or:
• Click on the Search Repeaters button.

The following list of the all Repeater names is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 211 / 266
266
Figure 166. Repeaters List dialogue box
N.B. Maximum number of Repeaters is 300.
15.2.2 Repeater Parameters
Once the Repeaters list is displayed (see Figure 166. ), the parameters of one Repeater can be accessed:
– Select a name in the list.

– Click on OK to submit the choice.
N.B. You can also display the parameters by double clicking on the Repeater name in the list.
One of the following windows is displayed:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 212 / 266
266
Figure 167. R0 Repeater Subsystem dialogue box
N.B. For R0 and R1 Repeaters, Address value is the same for all the Subsystems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 213 / 266
266
N.B. The numbers of Subsystems may vary from 1 to 8.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 214 / 266
266
For each Subsystem associated to a Subsegment and only in Constructor mode, the State (Acces-
sible or Not Accessible) can be modified by the operator:
• Click on the option button(s) to choose the value(s).

• Click on Apply to validate your modifications and close the window.

The Close push button closes the dialogue box, without modifications.
Three push buttons are available in the Repeater Subsystem window to send command if the Sub-
system and Subsegment are accessible.
N.B. If the Subsystem is not accessible, all the push buttons are greyed
15.2.3 Repeater Commands
Once the Repeater parameters are displayed (see Figure 167. Figure 168. Figure 169. Figure 170. ),
you can send:
– Measurement commands (see paragraph a)

– Setting commands (see paragraph b)
Any command needs a modulation of the optical signal to send the request to the Repeater and receive
the response.
For R4.1 Repeaters, that modulation can have 2 levels of amplitude. For any request, the choice of the
level will be done by the 1353SH depending on a configured mode in the EMLIM param.cfg file
(/usr/1353sh/eml/sub/wdmsubnr5/conf/param.cfg) using the MEAS_REPEATER_MODULA-
TION_MODE variable. Two values are possible:
– ’low_only’: only one request will be sent to the R4.1 Repeater with a low level of modulation
– ’low_and_high’: a first request will be sent to the R4.1 Repeater with a low level of modulation and
if no reply is received, a second request will be sent to the R4.1 Repeater with a high level of modula-
tion.
This variable is adjusted at System installation. But in rare cases it can be necessary to modify it after Sy-
stem ageing. If it is modified, the EMLIM process needs to be restarted to take new values into account.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 215 / 266
266
a) Measurement command
To send a measurement command to a subsystem:

• In the Repeater Subsystem window, click on the Measurement push button of the subsystem.

Figure 171. Repeater Subsystem Measurement dialogue box
N.B. The Request Location and Reply Detection lists contain only Tributaries that have
channel Request / Reply available.
N.B. For TERA10 C–D, if the STU board is present, the Request Location list contains only
the ”Aggregate (Raman Supy)” choice.
• Adjust the modulation index by means of the Modulation Index Adjustment option button.
This index can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus Four. The incre-
ment or decrement is based on the default SLTE configuration.
• In the Request Location list, select one Tributary.

• In the Reply Detection list, select one Tributary.
• Click on the Measurement push button.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Click on the OK push button to send the measurement command.

The Close push button closes the dialogue box.
3AL 89062 AA AA 216 / 266
266
b) Setting command
N.B. If the Subsystem is not accessible no command can be sent.

To send a setting command to a subsystem:

• In the Repeater Subsystem window, click on the OA X or OA Y push button of the subsystem.
Figure 172. Repeater OA Commands dialogue box
N.B. The Request Location list contains only Tributaries that have channel Request avail-
able
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 217 / 266
266
• Adjust the modulation index by means of the Modulation index Adjustment option button.


• Click on one of the following push buttons:
– Switch Pumps
– Set Pumps
– Reset OA (only for R0 and R1 Repeaters)
– Reset Global OA (only for R0 and R1 Repeaters)
– Reset Intermittent Fault Detection (optional and only for R3 and R4 Repeaters)
Switch Pumps
When you click on the Switch Pumps push button, the following window is displayed (an exam-
ple for R3, R4 Repeater):
Figure 173. Switch Pump OA Command dialogue box
The Switch Pumps Command option button allows you to set the pumps to On (”Switch Pumps
ON”) or to Off (”Switch Pumps OFF”). But it is not possible to set more than one pump Off.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 218 / 266
266
Set Pumps
When you click on the Set Pumps push button, the following window is displayed:
Figure 174. Setting Pump OA Command dialogue box
The Set Pumps Command allows you to set a value to the Set Pumps to Setting (1 to 4) with
the option button.
Reset OA
When you click on the Reset OA push button (R0/R1 Repeaters), a confirmation box is dis-
played. After confirmation the command is send.
Reset Global OA
When you click on the Reset Global OA push button (R0/R1 Repeaters), a confirmation box
is displayed. After confirmation the command is send.
Reset Intermittent Fault Detection
When you click on the Reset Intermittent Fault Detection push button (R3/R4 Repeaters), a
confirmation box is displayed. After confirmation the command is send.
N.B. The line command is available only if the Subsystem and Subsegment are accessible.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 219 / 266
266
15.3 Multi Repeater Commands
This function allows you to send Measurement Setting command or Reset IFF command to a list of Re-
peaters.

The actions are accessible as follows:
– In the Submerged Line view, click on the Subsegment for which commands have to be sent.
– Select the Subsegment Multi Repeaters Commands option.
SubmergedLine
Subsegment Parameters...
Subsegment Repeaters List...
Subsegment RCEs List ...
Subsegment Multi Repeaters Commands > Multi Repeaters Measurement ...
BU Parameters... Multi Repeaters Adjustment ...
BU Spur Latching Controls... Multi Repeaters Reset IFF ...
BU Trunk Latching Controls...
BU Subsystem List...
Figure 175. Subsegment Multi Repeaters Commands sub–menu
Three options are available. For each of them, a warning dialogue box proposes you to open another main
window because the command can take a long time.
As the OS is blocked during all multi commands, a new view can be open with the Open New Submerged
Line Window option of the Views menu. A flag MLC (Multiple Line Command) in the alarm panel indicates
that a multiple line command is under progress.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 220 / 266
266
15.3.1 Multi Repeaters Measurement
To send a measurement command to several repeaters:

– Click on the Multi Repeaters Measurement option.

Figure 176. Multi Repeaters Measurement Command dialogue box
– Adjust the modulation index by means of the Modulation Index Adjustment option button.
This index can be set to Default, Plus One to Plus four or Minus One to Minus Four. The increment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
or decrement is based on the default SLTE configuration.
– In the Request Location list, select one Tributary.

– In the Reply Detection list, select one Tributary.
3AL 89062 AA AA 221 / 266
266
– Use the All repeater type area to select the Subsystems to which the measurement command is to
be sent:
• The Accessible Subsystems list is displayed in alphabetical order. You can sort it by Subsystem

by clicking on the Sort by Subsystem radio button.

• To select a continuous group of tributaries, keep the <Shift> key pressed while clicking on the
first element to be selected and then on the last.
• To select a discontinuous group of tributaries, keep the <Ctrl> key pressed while clicking on ev-
ery element to be selected.
• To select all the Subsystems, click on the All Repeaters radio button.
– Click on OK.

N.B. The multi command is interrupted at the first unsuccessful command and an error
message is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 222 / 266
266
15.3.2 Multi Repeaters Adjustment
To send a setting command to several repeaters:

– Click on the Multi Repeaters Adjustment option.

Figure 177. Multi Repeaters Setting Command dialogue box
It contains a multiple selection list of accessible optical amplifiers from the Subsystem for setting and
some command parameters.
N.B. The Request Location and Reply Detection lists contain only Tributaries that have channel
Request / Reply available.
N.B. For TERA10 C–D, if the STU board is present, the Request Location list contains only the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
”Aggregate (Raman Supy)” choice.
3AL 89062 AA AA 223 / 266
266

– In the Request Location list, select one Tributary or Aggregate or Default.

– In the R0 / R1 repeater types areas:
• Use the Set Pump 1 Command and Set Pump 2 Command option buttons to select a value
between 1 and 16.
• Select in the Accessible Subsystems List the subsystems to which the setting command is to
be sent:
The Accessible Subsystems list is displayed in alphabetical order. You can sort it by Subsystem
– To select a continuous group of tributaries, keep the <Shift> key pressed while clicking on
the first element to be selected and then on the last.
– To select a discontinuous group of tributaries, keep the <Ctrl> key pressed while clicking
on every element to be selected.
– To select all the Subsystems, click on the All Repeaters radio button.
– In the R3 / R4 repeater types areas:
• Use the Set Pumps Command option buttons to select a value between 1 and 4.
• Proceed as above to select in the Accessible Subsystems List the subsystems to which the set-
ting command is to be sent
– Click on OK.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 224 / 266
266
15.3.3 Multi Repeaters Reset IFF
N.B. Only available for R3 and R4 Repeaters.

To send a Reset IFF command to several repeaters:

– Click on the Multi Repeaters Reset IFF option.
Figure 178. Multi Repeaters Reset IFF Command dialogue box
N.B. The Request Location list contains only Tributaries that have channel Request available
N.B. For TERA10 C–D, if the STU board is present, the Request Location list contains only the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
”Aggregate (Raman Supy)” choice.
3AL 89062 AA AA 225 / 266
266

– In the Request Location list, select one Tributary or Aggregate or Default.

– Use the R3 / R4 repeaters type area to select the Subsystems to which the Reset IFF command is
to be sent:
• The Accessible Subsystems list is displayed in alphabetical order. You can sort it by Subsystem
• To select a continuous group of tributaries, keep the <Shift> key pressed while clicking on the
first element to be selected and then on the last.
• To select a discontinuous group of tributaries, keep the <Ctrl> key pressed while clicking on ev-
ery element to be selected.
• To select all the Subsystems, click on the All Repeaters radio button.
– Click on OK.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 226 / 266
266
15.4 RCE Management
This function allows the operator to display the list of all RCEs on the selected Subsegment and to display
15.4.1 RCEs List
The RCEs list can be displayed as follows:
– In the Submerged Line view, click on the Subsegment for which the RCEs list has to be displayed.
– Select the Subsegment RCEs List ... option.
Figure 179. Remote Control Equalizers List dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 227 / 266
266
15.4.2 RCE Parameters
Once the RCE list is displayed (see Figure 179. ), the parameters of one RCE can be accessed:


Figure 180. RCE Subsystem Command dialogue box
N.B. The numbers of Subsystems may vary from 1 to 8. In Figure 180. there are 4 Subsystems.
For each Subsystem associated to an RCE and only in Constructor mode, the State (Accessible
or Not Accessible) can be modified by the operator:

• Click on Apply to validate your modifications and to close the window.
Two push buttons are available in the Repeater Subsystem window to send command if the Subsys-
tem and Subsegment are accessible:
N.B. If the Subsystem is not accessible, all the push buttons are greyed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 228 / 266
266
15.4.3 RCE Commands
Once the RCE parameters are displayed (see Figure 180. ), you can send a command to a subsystem.
N.B. If the Subsystem is not accessible no command can be sent.

To send a command to a subsystem:
• In the RCE Subsystem Command window, click on the TEQ X or TEQ Y push button of the sub-
system.
Figure 181. RCE TEQ Commands dialogue box
able.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 229 / 266
266

• Click on the Set Slope push button.
Figure 182. Setting TEQ Slope Command dialogue box
The Set TEQ Slope Command allows you to set a value to the Set Slope to Setting (1 to 16)
with the option button. The default value is Set Slope to Setting 8.
– Click on OK.
fications.
• Click on OK to confirm the execution of the command.
N.B. The Line Command is available only if the Subsystem and Subsegment are accessible.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 230 / 266
266
16 BRANCHING UNITS MANAGEMENT
This function allows to display and/or to manage the Branching Units characteristics.
The NE can be interfaced with the following Branching Units:

– the Add and drop BU (R2.0, R3.0, R3.1 and R3.3)
16.1 Branching Units Parameters
The parameters relative to a specific Branching Unit can be displayed as follows:
displayed.
– Click on the SubmergedLine pull down menu (see Figure 163. ).
– Select the BU Parameters... option.
The number of Setting Values displayed depends on the BU release:
• for BU R2.0 and BU R3.1: 16 setting values

• for BU R3.0 and BU R3.3: 4 setting values
Figure 183. R2.0 BU Parameters dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 231 / 266
266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
232 / 266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
266
3AL 89062 AA AA
233 / 266
Only in Constructor mode, the Spur Latch Relay Access state and the Trunk Latch Relay Access
state can be modified by the operator:
• For each of them, click on the option button to choose the value (Accessible or Not Accessible).
• Click on Apply to validate your modification.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 234 / 266
266
16.2 Branching Unit Subsystem Parameters
This function allows the operator to display the list of all Subsystems for one Branching Unit and to display
16.2.1 Subsystems list
N.B. The maximum number of Subsystems is 4 with a maximum of 2 Add and Drop Subsystems.
The Subsystems list can be displayed as follows:
– In the Submerged Line view, click on the branching unit (BUx) for which the Subsystems list has to
be displayed.
– Select the BU Subsystem List... option.
N.B. You can also display the Subsystems list by double clicking on the BU in the Submerged Line
view.
Figure 187. BU Subsystems List dialogue box
N.B. Maximum number of BUs is 20.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 235 / 266
266
16.2.2 Subsystem Parameters
Once the Subsystems list is displayed (see Figure 187. ), the parameters of one Subsystem can be ac-
cessed:

N.B. You can also display the parameters by double clicking on the BU Subsystem name in the list.
One of the following windows is displayed:
Figure 188. R3.0 BU Module dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 236 / 266
266
Figure 189. R3.1 BU Module dialogue box
The following characteristics can be modified in Constructor mode:
For each Module associated to a Subsystem and only in Constructor mode, the State (Accessible
or Not Accessible) can be modified by the operator:

• Click on Apply to validate your modifications and close the window.
Three push buttons are available in the BU Module window to send command if the Module and Sub-
system are accessible.
N.B. If the Module is not accessible, all the push buttons are greyed
16.2.3 Subsystem Commands
Once the Repeater parameters are displayed (see Figure 188. Figure 189. ), you can send:
– Measurement commands (see paragraph a)

– Setting commands (see paragraph b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 237 / 266
266
a) Measurement command
To send a measurement command to a module:

• In the BU Module window, click on the Measurement push button of the module.

Figure 190. BU Module Measurement dialogue box
• Adjust the modulation index by means of the Modulation Index Adjustment option button.

• In the Reply Detection list, select one Tributary.
• Click on the Measurement push button.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Click on the OK push button to send the measurement command.

The Close push button closes the dialogue box.
3AL 89062 AA AA 238 / 266
266
b) Setting command
To send a setting command to a module:

• In the BU Module window, click on the OA Y, OA X, OA Add or OA Trunk push button of the
module.
N.B. Depending on the Module, the OA Add push button may be absent.
Figure 191. BU OA Commands dialogue box
able.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 239 / 266
266
• Click on one of the following push buttons:

– Switch Pumps

– Set Pumps
– Reset Intermittent Fault Detection (optional and only for R3.0 and R3.3 BUs)
Switch Pumps
When you click on the Switch Pumps push button, the following window is displayed:
Figure 192. Switch Pump OA Command dialogue box
The Switch Pumps Command option button allows you to set the pumps to On (”Switch Pumps
ON”) or to Off (”Switch Pumps OFF”). But it is not possible to set more than one pump Off.
Set Pumps
When you click on the Set Pumps push button, the following window is displayed:
Figure 193. Setting Pump OA Command dialogue box
The Set Pumps Command allows you to set a value to the Set Pumps to Setting (1 to 4) with
the option button.
Reset Intermittent Fault Detection
When you click on the Reset Intermittent Fault Detection push button (R3.0/R3.3 BUs), a con-
firmation box is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 240 / 266
266
Figure 194. Reset Confirmation box
– Click on OK to send the measurement command.

After confirmation the command is send.
After execution a message box is displayed giving the result of the command.
Figure 195. Reset Message box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 241 / 266
266
16.3 Branching Unit Spur Latching Commands
N.B. This function is only available for the R3.0, R3.1 and R3.3 Branching Units.

This function allows the operator to send commands to BU in order to latch/unlatch the Spur relay.

N.B. To send BU Latch Commands, Spur Latch Relay must be in Accessible state (see paragraph
16.1).
displayed.
– Select the BU Spur Latching Controls... option.
Figure 196. BU Spur Latching Controls dialogue box
– Adjust the modulation index by means of the Modulation index Adjustment option button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– In the Reply Detection list, select one Tributary.
3AL 89062 AA AA 242 / 266
266
– Click on the Spur Latch or Spur Unlatch push button.
• Click on OK to confirm.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 243 / 266
266
16.4 Branching Unit Trunk Latching Commands
N.B. This function is only available for the R3.0, R3.1 and R3.3 Branching Units.

This function allows the operator to send commands to BU to latch/unlatch the Trunk relay.

N.B. To send BU Latch Commands, Trunk Latch Relay must be in Accessible state (see paragraph
16.1).
displayed.
– Select the BU Trunk Latching Controls... option.
Figure 197. BU Trunk Latching Controls dialogue box
– Adjust the modulation index by means of the Modulation index Adjustment option button.
– In the Request Location list, select one tributary.
– Click on the Trunk Latch or Trunk Unlatch push button.

• Click on OK to confirm.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 244 / 266
266
17 OTHER FUNCTIONS
17.1 Reset
17.1.1 Warm Reset NE
N.B. Either normal or dummy tributaries are concerned by this function.
This function allows to reset the SLTE software while keeping its current configuration data.
– Select the Warm Reset NE option. Two commands are allowed:
• on Whole NE, after confirmation in a displayed confirmation box, the warm reset is executed
on the whole NE,
• on Tribs..., the warm reset is executed on the selected tributaries. The following dialogue box
is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 198. Warm Reset on Tributaries dialogue box
3AL 89062 AA AA 245 / 266
266
– In the Tributaries list, select the tributaries to be reset:


to be selected,
• to select all the tributaries click on All Tributaries button.
– Click on OK to validate the warm reset and to close the dialogue box.
17.1.2 Cold Reset NE
N.B. Either normal or dummy tributaries are concerned by this function.
This function allows to reset the SLTE software and to set its configuration data to the default values.
Such command does not change configuration data in the OS
– Select the Cold Reset NE option. Two commands are allowed:
• on Whole NE, the cold reset is executed on the whole NE,
• on Tribs..., the cold reset is executed on the selected tributaries. The following dialogue box
is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 246 / 266
266
Figure 199. Cold Reset on Tributaries dialogue box
– In the Tributaries list, select the affected tributaries:
to be selected,
• to select all the tributaries click on All Tributaries button.
– Click on OK to validate the warm reset and to close the dialogue box.
N.B. A MIB align down operation is recommended to reinitialize with previous SLTE configuration
kept by the OS.
N.B. Warning! After a Cold Reset, it is not recommended to do a MIB align up, otherwise pre-
vious SLTE configuration will be totally lost.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 247 / 266
266
17.2 Tributaries Status (In/Out of Service)
N.B. Dummy tributaries are not concerned by this function

This function allows to set each Tributary ”In Service” or ”Out of Service”.

This function is useful during a capacity upgrade (or downgrade).
When a Tributary is ”Out of Service”, the SLTE is equipped for future use but the channel is not yet used
for transmission. The Tributary does not support traffic. The SLTE does not report associated Transmis-
sion alarms to the OS or to the Craft terminal.
When a Tributary is ”In Service”, the Tributary is used in the SLTE transmission, and is taken in account
in SLTE supervision.
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Tributaries Status ... option.
Configuration
MIB >
NE Time ...
2 Mb Order Wire ...
Dummy Tributaries List ...
APA/MPO >
Performance >
Measure >
Protection group >
Initialize Line Config >
Figure 200. Display tributaries status
N.B. If a Tributary is part of a protection group, before setting this Tributary ”Out of Service”, send
an Invoke Lockout command to disable the protection mechanism (see chapter 13.2.3).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 248 / 266
266
Figure 201. Tributaries Service dialogue box
Each Tributary is associated to one wavelength.
– For each Tributary, select the option ”In Service” or ”Out of Service”.
– Click on OK to validate your choices and to close the window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 249 / 266
266
17.3 Dummy Tributaries

To list the dummy tributaries present in the SLTE:

– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Dummy Tributaries List... option.
Figure 202. Dummy Tributaries List dialogue box
In the Dummy Tributaries List area are listed the Dummy tributaries declared on the SLTE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 250 / 266
266
17.4 2 Mb Order Wire Status (In/Out of Service)
N.B. Only available in Constructor mode for modifications

N.B. Dummy tributaries are not concerned by this function

This function allows to set each 2Mb Order Wire auxiliary channel ”In Service” or ”Out of Service”.
When a 2Mb Order Wire channel is ”Out of Service”, the SLTE does not report associated alarms to the
OS or to the Craft terminal.
The SLTE has three 2Mb Order Wire channels per Tributary. Those channels are carried by the FEC frame
to allow, for example, telephone communication between stations.
N.B. Alarms related to 2Mb Order Wire auxiliary channels are not considered as Transmission
alarms.
– In the Configuration pull down menu (see Figure 200. ), click on the 2 Mb Order Wire... option.
Figure 203. Tributary 2 Mb Order Wire dialogue box
This dialogue box allows to modify the status of each 2Mb Order Wire channel.
Two options can be selected: ”Out of Service, In Service”.
– Select a Tributary in the Tributaries list,

– Select an Order Wire in the Order Wire list,
– Select ”Out of Service” or ”In Service” with the option button,
– Click on OK to validate your choices and to close the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 251 / 266
266
17.5 External Points

For TERA10, 16 external input points are available.

They have all modifiable labels.
Eight external input points are dedicated to fan states. They have no modifiable labels.
To configure an external input point:
– From the External Points view, select an input point,

or:
– From the External Points view, double click on the concerned row in the External Input points list.
Figure 204. Configuring External Input Point dialogue box
• User Label: a string has to be entered to define the point label.
– Click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box.
For TERA10, 8 external output points are available.

They have all modifiable characteristics.
To configure an external output point:
– From the External Points view, select an output point,

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
or:
– From the External Points view, double click on the concerned row in the External output points list.
3AL 89062 AA AA 252 / 266
266
Figure 205. Configuring External Output Point dialogue box
• User Label: a string has to be entered to define the point label

• State: On or Off, choose with the option button
• Station Output Control Type: Latching or Momentary, choose with the option button
• Momentary Contact Time: indicates duration in case of momentary contact time (in ms modulo
10)
– Click on OK to validate the modifications and close the dialogue box.

17.5.3 External Output Points Switch Mode
To modify the Switch Mode of an external output point:
– Select in the External Points view an output point,

– Click on the External Points pull down menu,
– Select the Switch Mode ... option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 253 / 266
266
Figure 206. Switch Mode Selection dialogue box
The parameter displayed is:
• Station Output Switch Mode: Manual or Automatic, choose with the option button
– Click on OK.
17.5.4 External Output Points Partner Alarm
For the External Output Points, you can display the Partner Alarm if the switch mode is ’automatic’.
A Partner Alarm is any alarm recovered from the SLTE. This alarm will trigger the External point physical
output.
– Select in the External Points view an output point,

– Select the Partner Alarm ... option.
Figure 207. Partner Alarm dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. This Partner alarm is chosen using Alarm Article/Bit Selection menu option (see paragraph
17.5.5).
3AL 89062 AA AA 254 / 266
266
17.5.5 External Output Points Partner Alarm Article/Bit
N.B. Only available in the Constructor mode

If the selected external point is in Automatic mode, the operator will initialize the associated alarm. The
default value is: article 0, bit 0 which means no associated alarm.
To modify the associated alarm:
– Select in the External Points view the concerned output point,

– Select the Partner Alarm Article/Bit ... option.
Figure 208. Partner Alarm Article/Bit dialogue box
– Enter Article Number and Bit Number for the alarm which will be associated to the selected external
output point.
N.B. Refer to the TERA 10 Alarms operator manual for Article Number and Bit Number values.
– Click on OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 255 / 266
266
17.6 OS/TERA10CT Address Setting
Different addresses exist: one for the OS, one for the spare OS and one for the TERA10CT (Craft Termi-
nal).

Those addresses are stored by the NE to check supervision connections.

This function allows modification of these addresses, but a check is done to forbid an OS or the TERA10CT
to modify its own address:
– the OS can modify spare OS and TERA10 CT addresses

– the spare OS can modify OS and TERA10 CT addresses
– the TERA10 CT can modify OS and spare OS addresses
To modify an address:
– In the Supervision menu, select the NE option
– Click on Address Setting ... option
Figure 209. Address Setting dialogue box
– Enter the new addresses (address modification of its own address is disabled).
– Click on OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 256 / 266
266
18 SLTE UPGRADE
18.1 Subrack Configuration

This function allows to update the SLTE mechanical arrangement due to adding or removing subracks.
All spare racks are added to current configuration to make possible the addition of new subracks.
18.1.1 Rules for TERA10 A–B Subrack Type Selection
The Subrack Type list content depends on the type of rack in which you have selected a subrack in the
Equipment view. The list gives the possible subrack types.
Rack Type
Tributary/Protection Rack Common Rack Spare Rack
Tributary Transmit Amplifier Tributary

Dummy Tributary Transmit Mux Dummy Tributary
Protection Subsystem Receive Amplifier Transmit Amplifier
Not Used Receive Demux Transmit Mux
Line Coupler Receive Amplifier
Not Used Receive Demux
Line Coupler
Protection Sub System
Not Used
Table 6. TERA10 A–B Subrack Type lists
Some rules are defined to add, remove or move subracks:
– A Tributary physical subrack is represented by 2 graphical subracks: 1 and 2 (or, 3 and 4).
To avoid conflicts, only one of the 2 graphical subracks can be modified:
• subrack 2 (resp. subrack 4) has the possibility to be removed or replaced by another Tributary
or a Protection Subsystem.
• subrack 1 (resp. subrack 3) cannot be changed and its list contains only ’no choice’.
– A Protection Subsystem is represented by one graphical subrack (subrack 1 or 3).

Subracks 2 and 4 have no sense in case of Protection Subsystem and so their list contains only ’no
choice’.
– To change the identifier of a Tributary or a Protection Subsystem, or to replace a Tributary into a

Protection Subsystem (and vice versa), the old Tributary or Protection Subsystem must be first re-
moved. For that, the type ’Not Used’ must be applied to it. And then a new Tributary or Protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Subsystem can be configured at this location.
3AL 89062 AA AA 257 / 266
266
– To add a new Tributary:
• Subrack type and Tributary identifier must be added

• Do a MIB align down followed by a MIB align up

• If the Tributary is part of SLTE protection, fill in protection information and do a second MIB align

down followed by a MIB align up must be done.
– To replace a subrack in a Common rack, the old subrack must be first removed. For that, the type
’Not Used’ must be applied to it. And then a new subrack can be configured at this location.
– To replace the subrack configuration in a Spare rack (i.e. before MIB align down and up), it is not nec-
essary to modify the subrack with ’Not Used’ state. The old state is removed automatically contrary
to other rack types.
Error cases
If ’Invalid attribute value’ dialogue box is displayed:
– Check that Tributary you want to add is not already present in another location. Look at Tributary Iden-
tifier.
– Check that the old Tributary has been first done at this location (’not Used’ type)
18.1.2 Rules for TERA10 C–D Subrack Type Selection
The Subrack Type list content depends on the type of rack in which you have selected a subrack in the
Equipment view. The list gives the possible subrack types.
Rack Type
RACK–2D RACK–4S RACK SPARE

RACK–2S–1D (subrack 3) RACK–2S–1D (subrack 1 & 2)
RACK–1D–2S (subrack 1) RACK–1D–2S (subrack 3 & 4)
Tributary Tributary Tributary

Dummy Tributary Tributary Amplifier Dummy Tributary
Protection Subsystem Transmit Amplifier Tributary Amplifier
Not Used Transmit Mux Transmit Amplifier
Receive Amplifier Transmit Mux
Receive Demux Receive Amplifier
Receive Booster Receive Demux
Line Coupler Receive Booster
Management Subrack Tributary Mux/Demux
Tributary Mux/Demux Block Compensation Amplifier
Block Compensation Amplifier Block Pre–Emphasis Amplifier
Block Pre–Emphasis Amplifier LoadingChannel Unit
LoadingChannel Unit Management Subrack
Not Used Protection Sub System
Not Used
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Table 7. TERA10 C–D Subrack Type lists
Legend:
RACK–2D = 2 Double Subracks
3AL 89062 AA AA 258 / 266
266
RACK–4S = 4 Single Subracks
RACK–2S–1D = 2 Single Subracks + 1 Double Subrack
RACK–1D–2S = 1 Double Subrack + 2 Single Subracks
RACK–SPARE = Spare Rack used to add a Subrack in a new Rack
Double Subracks are Tributary, Dummy Tributary and Protection Subsystem.

Single Subracks are others.
Some rules are defined to add, remove or move subracks:
– A Tributary physical subrack is represented by one graphical subrack (subrack 1 or 3).

Subracks 2 and 4 have no sense in case of Protection Subsystem and so their list contains only ”no
choice”.
– A Protection Subsystem is represented by one graphical subrack (subrack 1 or 3).

Subracks 2 and 4 have no sense in case of Protection Subsystem and so their list contains only ”no
choice”.
– To change the identifier of a Tributary or a Protection Subsystem, or to replace a Tributary into a

Protection Subsystem (and vice versa), the old Tributary or Protection Subsystem must be first re-
moved. For that, the type ”Not Used” must be applied to it. And then a new Tributary or Protection
Subsystem can be configured at this location.
– To add a new Tributary:
• Subrack type and Tributary identifier must be defined

• If the subrack is added in a Spare Rack, fill in the Row Identifier and the Rack Identifier
• If the Tributary is part of SLTE protection, fill in protection information
• If the Common Release is R3, fill in the Block Identifier
• Do a second MIB align down followed by a MIB align up
– To add a new Protection Subsystem:
• Subrack type and PSS identifier must be defined

• If the subrack is added in a Spare Rack, fill in the Row Identifier and the Rack Identifier
• Fill in protection information in the subrack configuration
• Fill in protection group information in the protection group configuration
• Do a second MIB align down followed by a MIB align up
– To replace a subrack in a Common rack, the old subrack must be first removed. For that, the type
”Not Used” must be applied to it. And then a new subrack can be configured at this location.
– To replace the subrack configuration in a Spare Rack (i.e. before MIB align Down and up), it is neces-
sary to modify the subrack with ”Not Used” state. The old state is removed automatically contrary to
other rack types.
Error cases
If ”Invalid attribute value” dialogue box is displayed:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Check that Tributary you want to add is not already present in another location. Look at Tributary Iden-
tifier.
– Check that the old Tributary has been first done at this location (”Not Used” type)
3AL 89062 AA AA 259 / 266
266
18.1.3 Mechanical and Protection Configuration
To modify the subrack configuration:

– Open the Equipment view and select the subrack,

– Click on the Subrack menu,
– Click on the Subrack Configuration... option.
Figure 210. Mechanical and Protection Configuration dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 260 / 266
266
Figure 211. Mechanical and Protection Configuration dialogue box for a Spare
Configuration Status field indicates if this Subrack Mechanical Configuration has been modified since
last time we uploaded SLTE configuration.
– Choose one subrack type in the Subrack Type list (see paragraph 18.1.1).
1) If the Subrack type chosen is Tributary or Dummy Tributary:
– Enter the Tributary Identifier

The Tributary Identifier is between 1 and N (N depends on the SLTE) and is unique (two
tributaries cannot have the same identifier).
– Enter the other parameters.
2) If the Subrack Type is Protection Subsystem:
– Enter the PSS Identifier

The PSS Identifier is between 1 and N (N depends on the SLTE) and is unique (two Protec-
tion Subsystem cannot have the same identifier).
– Enter the other parameters.
– Click on OK.
N.B. The mechanical configuration updates will be fully taken into account after a MIB align down
command, followed by a MIB align up command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 261 / 266
266
18.1.4 Examples
a) Add a Tributary Subrack

• Choose Subrack Type ’Tributary’.

• Complete the Tributary Identifier.
• Do a MIB align down command, followed by a MIB align up command.
• If the Tributary is part of the SLTE protection, complete the protection information using the Me-
chanical and Protection Configuration dialogue box (see Figure 210. ).
b) Add a Common Subrack
• Choose the corresponding subrack type.
• You may need to adjust the Subrack content, i.e. add or remove units. For that use the Board
Configuration menu (see Figure 213. ).
c) Add a Protection Subsystem
• Choose the corresponding subrack type.
• Complete the PSS Identifier.
• Complete the protection information using the Mechanical and Protection Configuration dia-
logue box (see Figure 210. ).
• Complete the protection group information using the Protection Group Configuration dialogue
box (see Figure 143. ).
d) Move an existing Subrack
• Remove the Tributary from initial location by choosing the ’Not Used’ type in the list.
• In new location, if subrack is not empty, remove the existing subrack by choosing the ’Not Used’
type in the list.
• In new location, choose the wanted Subrack Type in the list and complete necessary informa-
tion Tributary Identifier for Tributary Subrack or PSS Identifier for Protection Subsystem.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 262 / 266
266
18.2 Board Configuration
N.B. Only available for TERA10 C–D


This function allows to add or remove Boards in some subrack types: Block Compensation Amplifier, Block
Pre–Emphasis Amplifier, Tributary Mux / Demux, Tributary Amplifier, Loading Channel Unit.
Subracks must be filled or emptied depending of the need. The operator may add several boards at the
same time.
a) To add a board
– In the target Subrack view select an ”Not Used” board,

– In the Equipment pull down menu, click on the Board Configuration ... option.
Figure 212. Board Configuration dialogue box
– Select the Board Type in the list.

– Click on OK to validate your choice and to close the dialogue box.
N.B. The Conectivity attributes must be filled with the Connectivity Configuration function
(see chapter 18.3)
N.B. A MIB align down operation and a MIB align up is necessary to download the new values
to the NE.
b) To remove a board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– In the target Subrack view select the board,

– In the Equipment pull down menu, click on the Board Configuration ... option.
3AL 89062 AA AA 263 / 266
266
– In the Board Configuration dialogue box select the Board Type: Not Used

N.B. A MIB align down operation and a MIB align up is necessary to download the new values

to the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 264 / 266
266
18.3 Board Connectivity Configuration

This function allows to display the connectivity configuration.

The Block Identifier concerns the BPAU, Trib MUX/DEMUX, BCAU and LCU boards.
The Position within a Block concerns the BCAU boards.
– In the Subrack view select one subrack,

– In the Equipment pull down menu, click on the Connectivity Config... option.
The dialogue box is displayed depends on the selected subrack type.
Figure 213. BPAU or Trib MUX/DEMUX Connectivity Configuration dialogue box
Figure 214. BCAU Connectivity Configuration dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 265 / 266
266
Figure 215. LCU Connectivity Configuration dialogue box
Figure 216. TribAmp Connectivity Configuration dialogue box
– Enter the new values

END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 266 / 266
266
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.2 Edition scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.3 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 ALARMS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 TERA10 A–B Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 Subrack and Board Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.2 Port Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2 TERA10 C Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.2 Port Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.3 TERA10 D Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.3.2 Port Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

L.Foresta J. Berthomieu
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
NR5 EQP–SPEC. OPER HDBK
Release 7.0 on
ED 01 SC.3.6:TERA 10 ALARM
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 102
102
HISTORY

Paragraph

1.1 J. Berthomieu 01–09–24 All Creation (SMS5.5)
1 J. Berthomieu 01–10–11 All Update after re–reading remarks
2 C. Mandroux 02–05–29 All Update after re–reading remarks

3CK 00051 0002 ASZZA, Ed2



NMU/GT/96/022, Ed1

8AY 02000 0000 ASZZA, Ed4


3BP 22100 0008 DSZZA, Ed1

See NMU Web Server


3AL 71310 0001 PBZZA, Ed1
[11] ASN Villarceaux, 1353SH5 Submarine TERA10 Operator manual,

3DW XXXXX AAAA PCGNA, Ed3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 102
102
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document lists the alarms of TERA10 A, B, C and D
1.1.2 Edition scope
None
This manual is intended for all the operators of the 1353NM in charge of managing TERA10 Submarine
NEs.
The document that should be read before starting this document is:
– 1353SH5 1353SH5 Submarine TERA10 Operator manual [11]
– Chapter 2: Alarms List
• TERA10 A–B Alarms

• TERA10 C Alarms
• TERA10 D Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 102
102
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.6:TERA 10 ALARM
102
3AL 89062 AA AA
4 / 102
2 ALARMS LIST
2.1 TERA10 A–B Alarms

The following list indicates for each alarm:
Element name / Article and Bit / Probable Cause name / Specific Problem name / Alarm type.
The alarm types are:
– Eqp = Equipment alarm

– Comm = Communication alarm
– QoS = Quality of service alarm
The Article and Bit fields are necessary to configure the Partner Alarm of External Output Points
2.1.1 Subrack and Board Alarms
OBJECT ARTICLE BIT PROBABLE CAUSE SPECIFIC PROBLEM TYPE

CAU 213–464 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
9 Transmit Failed Sll Fail Comm
15 Transmit Failed Over Current Comm
16 Transmit Degraded Transmit Degrade Comm
17 Transmit Degraded Sll Degrade Comm
22 Transmit Degraded Converter Fail Comm
24 Unit Failed Unit Fail Eqp
25 Unit Failed Sll Fail Eqp
30 Unit Failed Converter Fail Eqp
31 Unit Failed Over Current Eqp
32 Unit Degraded Unit Degrade Eqp
33 Unit Degraded Sll Degrade Eqp
34 Unit Degraded Laser Op Power OO Limits Eqp
35 Unit Degraded Laser Bias Power OO Limits Eqp
36 Unit Degraded Laser Temp OO Limits Eqp
40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Comm
41 Signal Failed Rll Fail Comm
48 Signal Degraded Signal Degrade Comm
49 Signal Degraded Rll Degrade Comm
56 Miscellaneous Initialising Eqp
72 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
73 Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch None Eqp
74 Internal Communication Problem None Eqp
75 Configuration Problem None Eqp
DEMUXC2 764 24 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 102
102
DEMUXC4 772 24 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp


DEMUXW11_1 772 40 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
FAN_1 675–716 48 Unit Failed Fan8 Fail Eqp
57 Unit Failed Fan1 Fail Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 102
102
FAN_2 717–758 48 Unit Failed Fan8 Fail Eqp


FECDEC 591–632 24 Unit Failed Unit Fail Eqp
25 Unit Failed Laser Op Power Fail Eqp
26 Unit Failed Loss Of Fec Clock Sync Eqp
27 Unit Failed Loss Of SDH Clock Sync Eqp
27 Unit Failed Loss Of Sdh Fec Clock Sync Eqp
29 Unit Failed Loss Of Reference Clock Eqp
33 Unit Degraded Laser Op Power Degrade Eqp
34 Unit Degraded Laser Bias Current OO Limits Eqp
38 Unit Failed Initialise Fail Eqp
LINECOUPLER 779 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
10 Internal Communication Problem Eqp
SubrackConfigModuleCommsFail
16 Replaceable Unit Missing BreakerModuleRemoved Eqp
21 Power Problem SubrackPowerFail Eqp
22 Power Problem RackSupplyBreakerAlarm Eqp
23 Power Problem SubrackBreakerAlarm Eqp
30 Internal Communication Problem BackplaneCommsFail Eqp
31 Configuration Problem BackplaneConfigError Eqp
72 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackMissing Eqp
73 Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch UnexpectedSubrack Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
74 Internal Communication Problem SubrackCommsFail Eqp

75 Configuration Problem SubrackConfigError Eqp
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 102
102
FECENC 87–128 24 Unit Failed Unit Fail Eqp
25 Unit Failed Loss Of Fec Clock Sync Eqp

26 Unit Failed Loss Of SDH Clock Sync Eqp

28 Unit Failed Loss Of Reference Clock Eqp
29 Unit Failed Loss Of Sdh Fec Clock Sync Eqp
LPM_1 761 48 Unit Failed Unit Fail Eqp
64 Miscellaneous Nose Cone Removed Eqp
65 Miscellaneous Rll Fail Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 8 / 102
102
LPM_1 769 64 Miscellaneous Nose Cone Removed Eqp


MIP 773–774 41 Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 102
102
MUXC2 759 24 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp


MUXW11_1 763 40 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
OPU 633–674 8 Orderwire Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
14 Orderwire Transmit Failed Converter Fail Comm
15 Orderwire Transmit Failed Over Current Comm
16 Orderwire Transmit Failed O V H Tx Loss Of Data Comm
20 Orderwire Transmit Failed Ch1 EOW Tx Fail Comm
23 Orderwire Transmit Failed O V H Tx Loss Of Clock Comm
25 Unit Failed O V H Tx Loss Of Data Eqp
26 Unit Failed Ch1 EOW Tx Fail Eqp
40 Orderwire Signal Failed Signal Fail Comm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
41 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch1 EOW Rx Loss Of Clock Comm

42 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch2 EOW Rx Loss Of Clock Comm
3AL 89062 AA AA 10 / 102
102
OPU 633–674 43 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch3 EOW Rx Loss Of Clock Comm
46 Orderwire Signal Failed Converter Fail Comm
47 Orderwire Signal Failed Over Current Comm

48 Orderwire Signal Failed O V H Rx Loss Of Data Comm

49 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch1 EOW Rx Loss Of Signal Comm
52 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch1 O V H Rx Loss Of Signal Comm
55 Orderwire Signal Failed O V H Rx Loss Of Clock Comm
56 Orderwire A M S Ch3 EOW Rx A I Sdetected Comm
57 Orderwire A M S Ch3 O V H Tx A I Sinserted Comm
58 Orderwire A M S Ch3 O V H Rx A I Sinserted Comm
59 Orderwire A M S Ch3 EOW Tx A I Sinserted Comm
66 Orderwire A M S Ch1 O V H Rx A I Sdetected Comm
70 Orderwire A M S Ch2 O V H Rx A I Sdetected Comm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 102
102
PAU 465–506 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm


34 Unit Degraded Laser 1 Op Power OO Limits Eqp
35 Unit Degraded Laser 1 Bias Current OO Limits Eqp
36 Unit Degraded Laser1 Temp OO Limits Eqp
37 Unit Degraded Laser2 Op Power OO Limits Eqp
38 Unit Degraded Laser2 Bias Current OO Limits Eqp
39 Unit Degraded Laser2 Temp OO Limits Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 12 / 102
102
PRA 777–778 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Eqp
9 Transmit Failed Sll Fail Eqp
15 Transmit Failed Over Current Eqp

16 Transmit Degraded Transmit Degrade Eqp

17 Transmit Degraded Sll Degrade Eqp
26 Unit Failed LaserOpPowerFail Eqp
40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Eqp
41 Signal Failed Rll Fail Eqp
48 Signal Degraded Signal Degrade Eqp
49 Signal Degraded Rll Degrade Eqp
PROT 773–774 21 Power Problem Subrack Power Fail Eqp
22 Power Problem Rack Supply Breaker Alarm Eqp
23 Power Problem Subrack Breaker Alarm Eqp
PSU1 773–774 64 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
67 Unit Failed None Eqp
PSU2 773–774 68 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
PSU_1 45– 86 64 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
PSU_1 759 64 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 102
102


71 Communication Problem None Eqp
PTA 775–776 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Eqp
9 Transmit Failed Sll Fail Eqp
15 Transmit Failed Over Current Eqp
16 Transmit Degraded Transmit Degrade Eqp
17 Transmit Degraded Sll Degrade Eqp
22 Transmit Degraded Converter Fail Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 102
102
PTA 775–776 36 Unit Degraded Laser Temp OO Limits Eqp
40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Eqp
41 Signal Failed Rll Fail Eqp

48 Signal Degraded Signal Degrade Eqp

49 Signal Degraded Rll Degrade Eqp
RAU 507–548 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
11 Transmit Failed Nose Cone Removed Comm
42 Signal Failed Tracking Filter OO Lock Comm
RPM 45– 86 12 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
RSU 773–774 60 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 15 / 102
102
RXAMP 764 8 Replaceable Unit Missing Subrack Config Module Eqp
Removed
10 Internal Communication Problem Subrack Config Module Comms Eqp

16 Replaceable Unit Missing Breaker Module Removed Eqp
21 Power Problem Subrack Power Fail Eqp
30 Internal Communication Problem Backplane Comms Fail Eqp
31 Configuration Problem Backplane Config Error Eqp
72 Replaceable Unit Missing Subrack Removed Eqp
74 Internal Communication Problem Subrack Comms Fail Eqp
75 Configuration Problem Subrack Config Error Eqp
RXDEMUX 772 8 Replaceable Unit Missing Subrack Config Module Eqp
Removed
10 Internal Communication Problem Eqp
SubrackConfigMModuleCommsF
ail
RXU 549–590 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
42 Signal Failed Loss Of Data Comm
78 Unit Synchronisation Problem Rx Path Sync Fault Comm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 16 / 102
102
SCU 773–774 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp


52 Miscellaneous InterSLTECommsFail Eqp
53 Miscellaneous AbnormalCondition Eqp
SIU 764 56 Unit Failed Unit Fail Eqp
SLU 129–170 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
9 Transmit Failed Laser Op Power Fail Comm
10 Transmit Failed Wavelength OO Limits Comm
17 Transmit Degraded Laser Op Power Degrade Comm
26 Unit Failed Wavelength OO Limits Eqp
33 Unit Degraded Laser Op Power Degrade Eqp
SPC 759 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
SPCI_1 759 56 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
SPCI_2 759 60 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 17 / 102
102
STU 771 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm


TPM 45– 86 8 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
TMP 759 41 Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 18 / 102
102
TMU 171–212 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
10 Transmit Failed Initialise Fail Comm

11 Transmit Failed Phase Mod Drive Fail Comm

12 Transmit Failed Rz Drive Fail Comm
13 Transmit Failed Nrz Drive Fail Comm
14 Transmit Failed Als Active Comm
18 Transmit Degraded Temp OO Limits Comm
20 Transmit Degraded Rz Drive Degrade Comm
21 Transmit Degraded Nrz Drive Degrade Comm
27 Unit Failed Phase Mod Drive Fail Eqp
28 Unit Failed Rz Drive Fail Eqp
29 Unit Failed Nrz Drive Fail Eqp
36 Unit Degraded Rz Drive Degrade Eqp
37 Unit Degraded Nrz Drive Degrade Eqp
43 Signal Failed Loss Of Clock Sync Comm
78 Unit Synchronisation Problem Als Sync Fault Comm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 19 / 102
102
TRIB_2PSU 45– 86 16 Replaceable Unit Missing Breaker Module Removed Eqp


24 Replaceable Unit Missing Config Module Removed Eqp
26 Internal Communication Problem Config Module Comms Fail Eqp
72 Replaceable Unit Missing Subrack Missing Eqp
76 Miscellaneous Subrack Over Temperature Eqp
TSU 773–774 56 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
TXAMP 759 8 Replaceable Unit Missing Subrack Config Module Eqp
Removed
12 Replaceable Unit Missing Suite Config Module Removed Eqp
14 Internal Communication Problem Suite Config Module Comms Fail Eqp
16 Replaceable Unit Missing Breaker Module Removed Eqp
TXMUX 763 8 Replaceable Unit Missing Subrack Config Module Eqp
Removed
Fail
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 20 / 102
102
WBA 768 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
11 Transmit Failed Pump Nose Cone Degrade Comm


WRA 765 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
11 Transmit Failed Pump Nose Cone Removed Comm
78 Unit Synchronisation Problem Laser Sync Fault Comm
WTA 760 40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Comm
78 Unit Synchronisation Problem Als Sync Fault Comm
79 Unit Synchronisation Problem Laser Sync Fault Comm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 21 / 102
102
2.1.2 Port Alarms


fecDecoding 3– 44 32 Far End Signal Degraded None Comm
3– 44 33 Far End Signal Failed Far End Signal Fail Mod Comm
3– 44 34 Far End Signal Failed Far End Signal Fail Opt Pow Comm
3– 44 35 Far End Signal Failed Far End Muxed Signal Fail Comm
3– 44 36 Far End Transmit Degraded None Comm
3– 44 40 Fault Flag Detected None Comm
fecDecoding 87–128 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
9 Transmit Failed Loss Of Fec Clock Sync Comm
10 Transmit Failed Loss Of SDH Clock Sync Comm
12 Transmit Failed Loss Of Reference Clock Comm
13 Transmit Failed Loss Of Sdh Fec Clock Sync Comm
64 AMS A M S Insert Comm
65 AMS A M S Detected Comm
66 AMS M S A I S Insert Comm
67 AMS M S A I S Detected Comm
76 Loss Of Frame None Comm
fecDecoding 591–632 40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Comm
41 Signal Failed Marker Mismatch Comm
42 Signal Failed Loss Of Fec Clock Sync Comm
43 Signal Failed Loss Of Frame Comm
44 Signal Failed Loss Of Sdh Fec Clock Sync Comm
49 Signal Degraded Fec L BER Comm
50 Signal Degraded Fec H BER Comm
51 Signal Degraded Uncorrected Blocks Comm
64 AMS A M S Inserted Comm
65 AMS A M S Detected Comm
66 AMS M S A I S Insert Comm
67 AMS M S A I S Detected Comm
68 Performance Thresholds Fec BER15min Comm
Crossed
69 Performance Thresholds Fec BER24 Hour Comm
Crossed
fecDecoding 591–632 70 Performance Thresholds Fec Block Errors15min Comm
Crossed
71 Performance Thresholds Fec Block Errors24 Hour Comm
Crossed
76 Loss Of Frame None Comm
postAmp 765 40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Comm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 22 / 102
102
postAmp 768 40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Comm


preAmp 760 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
11 Transmit Failed Pump Nose Cone Removed Comm
sdhRx 3–44 63 Protection Configuration QoS
Problem InconsistentConfWithinProtection
Group
sdhRx 87–128 40 Signal Failed Signal Fail Comm
43 Signal Failed Loss Of Frame Comm
44 Signal Failed Loss Of SDH Clock Sync Comm
45 Signal Failed Loss Of Sdh Fec Clock Sync Comm
50 Signal Degraded B1 L BER Comm
51 Signal Degraded B1 H BER Comm
68 Performance Thresholds B1 BER15min Comm
Crossed
69 Performance Thresholds B1 BER24hour Comm
Crossed
77 Loss Of Signal None Comm
sdhTx 3–44 71 Protection Configuration QoS
Problem InconsistentConfWithinProtection
Group
sdhTx 591–632 8 Transmit Failed Transmit Fail Comm
10 Transmit Failed Loss Of Fec Clock Sync Comm
11 Transmit Failed Loss Of SDH Clock Sync Comm
12 Transmit Failed Loss Of Sdh Fec Clock Sync Comm
23 Transmit Failed Loss Of Reference Clock Comm
tribRx 3– 44 72 Signal Degraded None Comm
73 Signal Failed None Comm
tribRx 549–590 77 Loss Of Signal None Comm
tribTx 3– 44 41 Indeterminate None Comm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
74 Transmit Degraded None Comm

75 Transmit Failed None Comm
tribTx 171–212 77 Loss Of Signal None Comm
3AL 89062 AA AA 23 / 102
102
2.2 TERA10 C Alarms

Element name / Article, Release and Bit / Probable Cause name / Specific Problem name / Alarm type

– Epq = Equipment alarm

– Com = Communication alarm
The Article and Bit fields are necessary to configure the Partner Alarm of External Output Points.
The Release field defines the release of the subrack. For a Board, it concerns the subrack which holds
the Board. For a Port, it concerns the subrack which holds the Board supporting the Port. The subrack
content for each release is defined in the Tera 10 Operator Manual, in chapter 2.6 Physical Description.
For example for Tributary subracks, R1 Tributary has release 0 and R3 Tributary has release 1.
OBJECT ARTICLE RELEASE BIT PROBABLE CAUSE SPECIFIC PROBLEM TYPE

AMP 6 0 24 Unit Failed UnitFail Eqp
25 Unit Failed PumpLaserFail Eqp
26 Unit Failed ConverterFail Eqp
27 Unit Failed OverCurrent Eqp
32 Unit Degraded SllDegrade Eqp
33 Unit Degraded PumpLaserDegrade Eqp
40 Signal Failed RllFail Eqp
48 Signal Degraded RllDegrade Eqp
73 Replaceable Unit Type Mis- None Eqp
match
74 Internal Communication None Eqp
Problem
78 Transmit Degraded None Eqp
79 Transmit Failed None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 102
102
BCAMP 79 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
58 Internal Communication ConfigModuleCommsFail Eqp
Problem
62 Internal Communication BackplaneCommsFail Eqp

Problem
match
74 Internal Communication SubrackCommsFail Eqp
Problem
BCAU 80 0 24 Unit Failed UnitFail Eqp
match
Problem
78 Transmit Degraded TransmitDegrade Com
79 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
BDX_1 15 1 32 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
match
Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 25 / 102
102
BLU 5 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
25 Unit Failed LaserFail Eqp

27 Unit Failed InitialiserFail Eqp

33 Unit Degraded LaserDegrade Eqp
match
Problem
BPAMP 209 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
BPAU 210 0 24 Unit Failed UnitFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 26 / 102
102
CAU_RX 569 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
9 Transmit Failed SllFail Com
15 Transmit Failed OverCurrent Com


17 Transmit Degraded SllDegrade Com
22 Transmit Degraded ConverterFail Com
24 Unit Failed UnitFail Eqp
25 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
32 Unit Degraded UnitDegrade Eqp
34 Unit Degraded LaserOpPowerOOLimits Eqp
35 Unit Degraded LaserBiasCurrentOOLimits Eqp
36 Unit Degraded LaserTempOOLimits Eqp
40 Signal Failed SignalFail Com
41 Signal Failed RllFail Com
48 Signal Degraded SignalDegrade Com
49 Signal Degraded RllDegrade Com
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 27 / 102
102
CAU_TX 565 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com


match
Problem
CIU_1 4 0 40 Replaceable Unit Missing None Com
41 Replaceable Unit Type Mis- None Com
match
42 Internal Communication None Com
Problem
43 Unit Failed None Com
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
DEMUXC2 8 0 36 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
DEMUXW11_1 30 0 40 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 29 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
FAN 9 1 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 30 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
FAN_1 561 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
FAN_2 561 0 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 31 / 102
102
FECDEC 574 0 24 Unit Failed UnitFail Eqp

26 Unit Failed LossOfFecClockSync Eqp

27 Unit Failed LossOfSDHClockSync Eqp
28 Unit Failed LossOfSdhFecClockSync Eqp
29 Unit Failed LossOfReferenceClock Eqp
33 Unit Degraded LaserOpPowerDegrade Eqp
38 Unit Failed InitialiseFail Eqp
match
Problem
FECENC 562 0 24 Unit Failed UnitFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 32 / 102
102
LCU 236 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail1 Eqp
25 Unit Failed SllFail2 Eqp
26 Unit Failed SignalLaserFail1 Eqp


28 Unit Failed WavelengthOOLimits1 Eqp
29 Unit Failed WavelengthOOLimits2 Eqp
32 Unit Degraded SllDegrade1 Eqp
33 Unit Degraded SllDegrade2 Eqp
34 Unit Degraded SignalLaserDegrade1 Eqp
match
Problem
LCU_SUB- 235 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
RACK
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 33 / 102
102
LINECOUPLER 8 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
10 Internal Communication SubrackConfigModuleComm- Eqp
Problem sFail

Problem
72 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackRemoved Eqp
match
Problem
LPM_1 12 0 48 Unit Failed UnitFail Eqp
64 Miscellaneous NoseConeRemoved Eqp
65 Miscellaneous RllFail Eqp
match
Problem
LPM_1 12 1 48 Unit Failed LaserFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 34 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 35 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 36 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 37 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
MIP 31 0 41 Replaceable Unit Type Mis- None Eqp
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 38 / 102
102
OBJECTr ARTICLE RELEASE BIT PROBABLE CAUSE SPECIFIC PROBLEM TYPE
MNGT 3 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing OptionsModuleRemoved Eqp
62 Internal Communication BackplaneCommsFail Com
Problem
63 Configuration Problem BackplaneConfigError QOS

64 Replaceable Unit Missing AuxiliaryModuleRemoved Eqp
match
Problem
MPU_1 3 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
32 Replaceable Unit Missing UnitRemoved Com
match
34 Internal Communication CommsFail Com
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
Problem
match
MUXC2 8 0 32 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 39 / 102
102
MUXW11_1 14 0 40 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 40 / 102
102
OPU 575 0 8 Orderwire Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
14 Orderwire Transmit Failed ConverterFail Com
15 Orderwire Transmit Failed OverCurrent Com

16 Orderwire Transmit Failed OVHTxLossOfData Com

20 Orderwire Transmit Failed Ch1EOWTxFail Com
23 Orderwire Transmit Failed OVHTxLossOfClock Com
25 Unit Failed OVHTxLossOfData Eqp
26 Unit Failed Ch1EOWTxFail Eqp
40 Orderwire Signal Failed SignalFail Com
41 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch1EOWRxLossOfClock Com
46 Orderwire Signal Failed ConverterFail Com
47 Orderwire Signal Failed OverCurrent Com
48 Orderwire Signal Failed OVHRxLossOfData Com
49 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch1EOWRxLossOfSignal Com
52 Orderwire Signal Failed Ch1OVHRxLossOfSignal Com
55 Orderwire Signal Failed OVHRxLossOfClock Com
56 Orderwire A M S Ch3EOWRxAISdetected Com
57 Orderwire A M S Ch3OVHTxAISinserted Com
58 Orderwire A M S Ch3OVHRxAISdetected Com
59 Orderwire A M S Ch3EOWTxAISinserted Com
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

match
Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 41 / 102
102
OPU 575 0 75 Configuration Problem None Eqp
PAU 568 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com


34 Unit Degraded Laser1OpPowerOOLimits Eqp
35 Unit Degraded Laser1BiasCurrentOOLimits Eqp
36 Unit Degraded Laser1TempOOLimits Eqp
match
Problem
PRA 33 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 42 / 102
102
PROT 31 0 21 Power Problem SubrackPowerFail Eqp


match
Problem
PSU1 31 0 64 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
PSU_1 3 0 40 Replaceable Unit Missing None Com
match
Problem
PSU_1 8 0 64 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 43 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 44 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 45 / 102
102
match

Problem
PTA 32 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
match
Problem
RAU 572 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
11 Transmit Failed NoseConeRemoved Com
42 Signal Failed TrackingFilterOOLock Com
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 46 / 102
102
RFU 561 0 24 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match

Problem
RPM 561 0 36 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
RSU 31 0 60 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
RXAMP 15 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail
Problem
match
Problem
RXAMP 15 1 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 47 / 102
102
RXBOOST 23 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem

Problem
match
Problem
RXDEMUX 30 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail
Problem
match
Problem
RXU 573 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
11 Transmit Failed NoseConeRemoved Com
42 Signal Failed LossOfData Com
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

78 Unit Synchronisation Prob- RxPathSyncFault Com
lem
3AL 89062 AA AA 48 / 102
102
SCU 31 0 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match

Problem
SIU 7 0 24 Unit Failed InitialiserFail Eqp
match
Problem
SIU 15 0 48 Miscellaneous Initialising Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 49 / 102
102
SLU 563 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
9 Transmit Failed LaserOpPowerFail Com

10 Transmit Failed WavelengthOOLimits Com

17 Transmit Degraded LaserOpPowerDegrade Com
26 Unit Failed WavelengthOOLimits Eqp
match
Problem
SMU 9 1 24 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
SPC 9 0 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
SPCI_1 9 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 50 / 102
102
STU 10 1 24 Unit Failed LaserFail Eqp


match
Problem
match
Problem
78 Transmit Failed None Com
79 Transmit Degraded None Com
TDX 50 0 24 Unit Failed WavelengthFail Eqp
32 Unit Degraded WavelengthDegrade Eqp
match
Problem
TMP 4 0 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
TMP 8 0 41 Replaceable Unit Type Mis- None Eqp
match
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

match
3AL 89062 AA AA 51 / 102
102
match

match
match
match
match
match
match
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 52 / 102
102
TMU 564 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
10 Transmit Failed InitialiseFail Com

11 Transmit Failed PhaseModDriveFail Com

12 Transmit Failed RzDriveFail Com
13 Transmit Failed NrzDriveFail Com
14 Transmit Failed AlsActive Com
18 Transmit Degraded TempOOLimits Com
20 Transmit Degraded RzDriveDegrade Com
21 Transmit Degraded NrzDriveDegrade Com
27 Unit Failed PhaseModDriveFail Eqp
28 Unit Failed RzDriveFail Eqp
29 Unit Failed NrzDriveFail Eqp
36 Unit Degraded RzDriveDegrade Eqp
37 Unit Degraded NrzDriveDegrade Eqp
43 Signal Failed LossOfClockSync Com
match
Problem
78 Unit Synchronisation Prob- AlsSyncFault Com
lem
TMX_1 49 0 32 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 53 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
TPM 561 0 32 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
TRIB 561 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
76 Miscellaneous SubrackOverTemperature Eqp
TRIBMUXDE- 49 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
MUX
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
TSU 31 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
match
Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 54 / 102
102
TXAMP 9 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail
12 Replaceable Unit Missing SuiteConfigModuleRemoved Eqp

14 Internal Communication SuiteConfigModuleCommsFail Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
TXAMP 9 1 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
TXMUX 14 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 55 / 102
102
WBA 19 0 40 Signal Failed RllFail Com

56 Miscellaneous SllFail Eqp

57 Miscellaneous SllDegrade Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
WRA 16 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
11 Transmit Failed PumpNoseConeRemoved Com
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

78 Unit Synchronisation Prob- LaserSyncFault Com
lem
3AL 89062 AA AA 56 / 102
102
WRA 16 1 56 Miscellaneous SllFail Com
57 Miscellaneous SllDegrade Com
58 Miscellaneous PumpNoseConeRemoved Com


lem
match
Problem
WTA 11 0 40 Signal Failed SignalFail Com
match
Problem
lem
lem
WTA 11 1 40 Signal Failed RllFail Com
lem
lem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 57 / 102
102
2.2.2 Port Alarms

fecDecoding 560 0 32 Far End Signal Degraded None Com

33 Far End Signal Failed FarEndSignalFailMod Com

34 Far End Signal Failed FarEndSignalFailOptPow Com
35 Far End Signal Failed FarEndMuxedSignalFail Com
36 Far End Transmit De- None Com
graded
40 Fault Flag Detected None Com
fecDecoding 574 0 40 Signal Failed SignalFail Com
41 Signal Failed MarkerMismatch Com
42 Signal Failed LossOfFecClockSync Com
43 Signal Failed LossOfFrame Com
44 Signal Failed LossOfSdhFecClockSync Com
49 Signal Degraded FecLBER Com
50 Signal Degraded FecHBER Com
51 Signal Degraded UncorrectedBlocks Com
64 AMS AMSInserted Com
65 AMS AMSDetected Com
66 AMS MSAISInsert Com
67 AMS MSAISDetected Com
68 Performance Thresholds FecBER15min Com
Crossed
69 Performance Thresholds FecBER24Hour Com
Crossed
70 Performance Thresholds FecBlockErrors15min Com
Crossed
71 Performance Thresholds FecBlockErrors24Hour Com
Crossed
76 Loss Of Frame None Com
fecEncoding 562 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
9 Transmit Failed LossOfFecClockSync Com
10 Transmit Failed LossOfSDHClockSync Com
12 Transmit Failed LossOfReferenceClock Com
13 Transmit Failed LossOfSdhFecClockSync Com
64 AMS AMSInsert Com
66 AMS MSAISInsert Com
76 Loss Of Frame None Com
postAmp 11 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 58 / 102
102
postAmp 11 1 56 Transmit Failed SllFail Com


preAmp 16 0 40 Signal Failed SignalFail Com
preAmp 16 1 40 Signal Failed RllFail Com
sdhRx 560 0 63 Protection Configuration InconsistentConfWithinProtec- QOS
Problem tionGroup
sdhRx 562 0 40 Signal Failed SignalFail Com
44 Signal Failed LossOfSDHClockSync Com
50 Signal Degraded B1LBER Com
51 Signal Degraded B1HBER Com
68 Performance Thresholds B1BER15min Com
Crossed
69 Performance Thresholds B1BER24hour Com
Crossed
77 Loss Of Signal None Com
sdhTx 560 0 71 Protection Configuration InconsistentConfWithinProtec- QOS
Problem tionGroup
sdhTx 574 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
9 Transmit Failed LaserOpPowerFail Com
10 Transmit Failed LossOfFecClockSync Com
11 Transmit Failed LossOfSDHClockSync Com
12 Transmit Failed LossOfSdhFecClockSync Com
17 Transmit Degraded LaserOpPowerDegrade Com
23 Transmit Failed LossOfReferenceClock Com
tribRx 560 0 72 Signal Degraded None Com
73 Signal Failed None Com
tribRx 573 0 77 Loss Of Signal None Com
tribTx 560 0 41 Indeterminate None Com
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

tribTx 564 0 77 Loss Of Signal None Com
3AL 89062 AA AA 59 / 102
102
2.3 TERA10 D Alarms

Element name / Article, Release and Bit / Probable Cause name / Specific Problem name / Alarm type

– Eqp = Equipment alarm

– Com = Communication alarm
The Article and Bit fields are necessary to configure the Partner Alarm of External Output Points
The Release field defines the release of the subrack. For a Board, it concerns the subrack which holds
the Board. For a Port, it concerns the subrack which holds the Board supporting the Port. The subrack
content for each release is defined in the Tera 10 Operator Manual, in chapter 2.6 Physical Description.
For example for Tributary subracks, R1 Tributary has release 0 and R3 Tributary has release 1.

AMP 6 0 24 Unit Failed SllOOLimits Eqp
match
Problem
BCAMP 79 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 60 / 102
102
BCAU 80 0 24 Unit Failed SllOOLimits Eqp


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
BLU 5 0 24 Unit Failed SllOOLimits Eqp
25 Unit Failed SignalLEDFail Eqp
27 Unit Failed InitialiserFail Eqp
33 Unit Degraded SignalLEDDegrade Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 61 / 102
102
BPAMP 235 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem

Problem
match
Problem
BPAU 236 0 24 Unit Failed SllOOLimits Eqp
match
Problem
BPAU 288 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 62 / 102
102
BPAU 288 1 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp


match
Problem
CAU_RX 288 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
match
Problem
CAU_RX 288 1 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 63 / 102
102
CAU_RX 595 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com


match
Problem
CAU_TX 288 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
match
Problem
CAU_TX 288 1 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 64 / 102
102
CAU_TX 591 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 65 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 66 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 67 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 68 / 102
102
FAN_1 587 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match

Problem
FAN_2 587 0 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
FECDEC 600 0 25 Unit Failed LaserOpPowerFail Eqp
57 Miscellaneous LsSdhCriterionActive Eqp
58 Miscellaneous LsLineCriterionActive Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 69 / 102
102
FECENC 588 0 25 Unit Failed LossOfFecClockSync Eqp


match
Problem
LCU 262 0 24 Unit Failed SllOOLimits1 Eqp
25 Unit Failed SllOOLimits2 Eqp
match
Problem
LCU_SUB- 261 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
RACK
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 70 / 102
102
LINECOUPLER 8 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail

Problem
match
Problem
LPM_1 12 0 55 Unit Failed OverCurrent Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 71 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 72 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 73 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Problem
MIP 31 0 41 Replaceable Unit Type Mis- None Eqp
match
3AL 89062 AA AA 74 / 102
102
MNGT 3 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing OptionsModuleRemoved Eqp
62 Internal Communication BackplaneCommsFail Com
Problem
63 Configuration Problem BackplaneConfigError QOS

64 Replaceable Unit Missing AuxiliaryModuleRemoved Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
Problem
match
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 75 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 76 / 102
102
OPU 601 0 8 Orderwire Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
23 Orderwire Transmit Failed OVHTxLossOfClock Com
25 Unit Failed OVHTxLossOfData Eqp


48 Orderwire Signal Failed OVHRxLossOfData Com
55 Orderwire Signal Failed OVHRxLossOfClock Com
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 77 / 102
102
OPU 601 1 8 Orderwire Transmit Failed Ch1OVHTxFail Com

10 Orderwire Transmit Failed Ch2OVHTxFail Com

12 Orderwire Transmit Failed Ch3OVHTxFail Com
24 Unit Failed Ch1EOWTxFault Eqp
25 Unit Failed Ch1OVHTxFault Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 78 / 102
102
PAU 594 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com


match
Problem
PRA 33 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
26 Unit Failed HardwareFail Eqp
match
Problem
PROT 31 0 21 Power Problem SubrackPowerFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 79 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 80 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 81 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 82 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
PTA 32 0 24 Unit Failed SllFail Eqp
26 Unit Failed HardwareFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 83 / 102
102
RAU 598 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com


42 Signal Failed TrackingFilterOOLock Com
match
Problem
RFU 587 0 24 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
RSU 31 0 60 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 84 / 102
102
RXAMP 15 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail

Problem
match
Problem
RXAMP 15 1 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
RXBOOST 23 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 85 / 102
102
RXDEMUX 30 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail

Problem
match
Problem
RXU 599 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
match
Problem
78 Unit Synchronisation Prob- RxPathSyncFault Com
lem
RXU 599 1 24 Unit Failed PumpLaserFail Eqp
25 Unit Failed RegenerationFail Eqp
lem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 86 / 102
102
SCU 31 0 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match

Problem
SDU2 600 1 24 Unit Failed SignalLaserFail Eqp
25 Unit Failed DataBufferOverflow Eqp
26 Unit Failed DataParityError Eqp
27 Unit Failed RefClockFail Eqp
28 Unit Failed OverheadFail Eqp
32 Unit Degraded SignalLaserDegrade Eqp
33 Unit Degraded Ch1EOWTxFault Eqp
56 Miscellaneous AlsActive Eqp
57 Miscellaneous LsSdhCriterionActive Eqp
58 Miscellaneous LsLineCriterionActive Eqp
match
Problem
SEU2 588 1 24 Unit Failed OverheadFail Eqp
25 Unit Failed DataBufferOverflow Eqp
26 Unit Failed DataParityError Eqp
27 Unit Failed RefClockFail Eqp
32 Unit Degraded Ch1OVHTxFault Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 87 / 102
102
SIU 7 0 24 Unit Failed InitialiserFail Eqp


match
Problem
SIU 15 0 48 Miscellaneous Initialising Eqp
match
Problem
SLU 589 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
26 Unit Failed WavelengthOOLimits Eqp
match
Problem
SMU 9 1 24 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
SPC 9 0 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 88 / 102
102
match

Problem
match
Problem
27 Unit Failed ModulationDriveFail Eqp
match
Problem
27 Unit Failed ModulationDriveFail Eqp
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 89 / 102
102
TDX 50 0 24 Unit Failed WavelengthOOLimits Eqp


27 Unit Failed SensorFail Eqp
32 Unit Degraded SensorDegrade Eqp
match
Problem
TMP 4 0 48 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match
Problem
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 90 / 102
102
TMU 590 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com

18 Transmit Degraded TempOOLimits Com

27 Unit Failed PhaseModDriveFail Eqp
28 Unit Failed RzDriveFail Eqp
29 Unit Failed NrzDriveFail Eqp
36 Unit Degraded RzDriveDegrade Eqp
37 Unit Degraded NrzDriveDegrade Eqp
43 Signal Failed LossOfClockSync Com
match
Problem
lem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 91 / 102
102
match

Problem
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 92 / 102
102
TRIBAMP 287 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem

Problem
match
Problem
TRIBAMP 287 1 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
TRIBMUXDE- 49 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
MUX
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 93 / 102
102
TSU 31 0 56 Replaceable Unit Missing None Eqp
match

Problem
TXAMP 9 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail
12 Replaceable Unit Missing SuiteConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
14 Internal Communication SuiteConfigModuleCommsFail Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
TXAMP 9 1 56 Replaceable Unit Missing ConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem
Problem
match
Problem
TXMUX 14 0 8 Replaceable Unit Missing SubrackConfigModuleRemoved Eqp
Problem sFail
Problem
match
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Problem
3AL 89062 AA AA 94 / 102
102
TXU 590 1 24 Unit Failed SllOOLimits Eqp
25 Unit Failed SignalLaserFail Eqp
26 Unit Failed SignalModulationFail Eqp


33 Unit Degraded SignalLaserDegrade Eqp
34 Unit Degraded SignalModulationDegrade Eqp
57 Miscellaneous TemperatureOOLimits Eqp
58 Miscellaneous AlsActive Eqp
lem
match
Problem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 95 / 102
102


match
Problem
match
Problem
WRA 16 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
56 Miscellaneous AggregateFaultFlag Com
match
Problem
lem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 96 / 102
102
WRA 16 1 56 Miscellaneous SllFail Com
57 Miscellaneous SllDegrade Com
58 Miscellaneous PumpNoseConeRemoved Com

59 Miscellaneous AggregateFaultFlag Com

lem
match
Problem
match
Problem
lem
lem
lem
lem
match
Problem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 97 / 102
102
2.3.2 Port Alarms



graded
graded
fecDecoding 600 0 41 Signal Failed MarkerMismatch Com
42 Signal Failed LossOfFecClockSync Com
66 AMS MSAISInserted Com
Crossed
Crossed
Crossed
Crossed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 98 / 102
102
fecDecoding 600 1 40 Signal Failed MarkerMismatch Com
42 Signal Failed LossOfSignal Com


Crossed
Crossed
Crossed
Crossed
fecEncoding 588 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
fecEncoding 588 1 64 AMS AMSInserted Com
postAmp 2 0 50 Indeterminate None Eqp
51 Teq Indication None Com
51 Teq Indication None Eqp
postAmp 2 1 50 Indeterminate None Eqp
51 Teq Indication None Com
51 Teq Indication None Eqp
postAmp 11 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
postAmp 11 1 56 Transmit Failed SllFail Com
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

3AL 89062 AA AA 99 / 102
102


Problem tionGroup
Problem tionGroup
sdhRx 588 0 41 Signal Failed RllFail Com
44 Signal Failed LossOfSDHClockSync Com
Crossed
Crossed
sdhRx 588 1 40 Signal Failed RllFail Com
Crossed
Crossed
Problem tionGroup
Problem tionGroup
sdhTx 600 0 8 Transmit Failed TransmitFail Com
sdhTx 600 1 78 Transmit Degraded None Com
tribRx 599 0 42 Loss Of Signal LossOfData Com
tribRx 599 1 41 Loss Of Signal LossOfData Com
tribTx 586 0 41 Indeterminate None Com
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 100 / 102
102
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
tribTx
OBJECT
01
586
ARTICLE
1
RELEASE
75
74
41
BIT
Indeterminate
Transmit Failed
Transmit Degraded
PROBABLE CAUSE
None
None
None
102
3AL 89062 AA AA
SPECIFIC PROBLEM
Com
Com
Com
TYPE
101 / 102
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
END OF DOCUMENT
102
3AL 89062 AA AA
102 / 102
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.1 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 UNREPEATERED SUBMARINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.1 URW configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.1.2 1666UT configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2 URW/1666UT physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.1 Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.2 URW/1666UT R2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.3 URW/1666UT R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.4 URW/1666UT R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3 URW/1666UT EQUIPMENT VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.1 URW/1666UT graphical representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.1.1 URW/1666UT NE symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.1.2 URW/1666UT equipment views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1.3 URW/1666UT alarm icons bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2 URW/1666UT common views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2.1 External Points view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3 URW views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.3.1 Rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.3.2 Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.3 Board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.4 1666UT views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
01 040130 N.Bradshaw J.Berthomieu

V.Porro
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
Release 7.0 on
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 88
88
3.4.1 Rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.2 Subrack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4.3 Board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4.4 Port view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.4.5 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.4.6 Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4 URW/1666UT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.1 Raman Pump Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.2 Amplifier Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.3 Laser management (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.3.1 ALS criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.3.2 Shutdown Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4 Voting Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.5 Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.5.1 Channel Power value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.5.2 Increase/Decrease Channel Power value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.6 Wavelength Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.7 SSU Expected Signal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.8 SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.9 Decision Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.10 FEC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.10.1 AMS Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.10.2 FEC Error Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.11 External points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.11.3 Partner Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.12 Performance Counter Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.12.1 Performance Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.12.2 Performance Thresholds Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.12.3 Forced Performance Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.12.4 Show NE Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.1 Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.1.1 Transponder NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.2 URW/1666UT Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2.1 URW/1666UT R2.1 Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2.2 URW/1666UT R2 Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.2.3 URW/1666UT R1 Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.2.4 Measurement Points Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.2.5 Measurement Thresholds Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2.6 Polling Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6 ALARM MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.1 URW/1666UT R2.1 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.2 URW/1666UT R2 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6.2.3 Quality of service alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

6.3 URW/1666UT R1 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 88
88
6.3.3 Quality of service alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 88
88
FIGURES

Figure 1. URW management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Figure 2. 1666UT for 1x2.5 Gbit/s transmission system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 3. NE maximum layout of URW/1666UT R2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 4. NE maximum layout of URW/1666UT R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 5. Possible layout of URW/1666UT R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 6. URW/1666UT NE symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 7. Views pull down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 8. URW/1666UT alarm icons bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 9. URW/1666UT horizontal icons bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 10. URW/1666UT vertical icons bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 11. External Points view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 12. URW rack view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 13. URW subrack view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 14. URW board view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 15. 1666UT rack view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 16. 1666UT subrack view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 17. 1666UT board view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 18. 1666UT port view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 19. 1666UT transmission view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 20. 1666UT reception view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 21. Raman pump power option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 22. Raman pump power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 23. Ampli power option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 24. Amplifier Output power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 25. ALS Criteria option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 26. ALS Criteria dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 27. ALS State icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 28. Shutdown Threshold dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 29. Voting logic option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 30. Voting logic dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 31. Channel Power option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 32. Channel Power dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 33. Channel Power confirmation dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 34. Wavelength option in Port menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 35. Wavelength option in Board menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 37. Expected signal list options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 38. SSU Expected Signal List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 39. SBS management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 40. Disable SBS Confirmation dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 41. SBS state icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 42. Decision threshold option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 43. Decision threshold configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 44. AMS Management option for FECDEC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 45. AMS state icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 46. FEC Error Insertion options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 47. FEC Error Insertion dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. Insert FEC Error confirmation dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Figure 49. Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 50. Insert Single FEC Error confirmation dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 4 / 88
88
Figure 51. States of AMS insertion, FEC error insertion and single FEC error insertion icons . . . 51
Figure 52. External Input Points Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 53. External Output Points Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 54. Partner alarm dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 55. Performance Thresholds option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Figure 56. Counters configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Figure 57. Forced Performance Collection option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 58. Performance collection confirmation dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 59. Show NE Performance Data option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 60. Report Request Control dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 61. Performance Counters Tabular Report dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 62. Measure Threshold option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 63. URW/1666UT UTU board Measure thresholds dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 64. URW/1666UT RPU board Measure thresholds dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 65. URW/1666UT OPA board Measure thresholds dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 66. Measure Threshold option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 67. URW/1666UT Measure Polling dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 68. Immediate measure confirmation dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 69. Subrack with measure polling icons on several boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 70. Show NE measurement data option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 71. Report Request Control dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 72. Example of measurement data dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 73. Analog Measures option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 74. Example of measurement data in text format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
TABLES
Table 1. URW/1666UT NE types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 2. URW/1666UT Color icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 3. URW/1666UT R2.1 measurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 4. URW/1666UT R2 measurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 5. URW/1666UT R1 measurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 88
88
HISTORY

Paragraph

1.1 J.Berthomieu 00–01–21 All Creation (1353SH 5.3)
1.2 J.Berthomieu 00–05–10 All Update with re–reading remarks
1 J.Berthomieu 00–07–06 All Update with re–reading remarks
2.1 J.Berthomieu 00–09–28 All Update with the URW/1666UT Release 2
2 J.Berthomieu 00–11–28 All Update with re–reading remarks
3 J.Roger 03–12–22 All Update with URW/1666UT Release 2.1, including

SSU management.
[1] EMLCore 98 Introduction manual,

3BP 22100 0066 OMZZA
[2] EMLCore 98 Getting Started manual,

3BP 22100 0067 OMZZA
[3] 1353SH5 Generic NE Management manual,

3AL 71389 0015 OMZZA
[4] 1353SH5 Performance Management manual,

3AL 71389 0016 OMZZA
[5] 1353SH5 Transmission Management manual,

3AL 71389 0019 OMZZA
N.B. Some references of the above documents have to be updated with the NM7 documents.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 88
88
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document describes all the functionalities provided by the 1353NM to manage the Unrepeatered
Submarine NEs.
– Alcatel URW/1666UT Release 2.1 in two configuration types:
• 1666UT Transponder
• URW (Optical Amplifiers OPA, RPS)
• URW (Optical Amplifiers RPS 2.0, OPA27 1.0, BBA 1.0)
• URW (Optical Amplifiers RPS 1.0, RPS 1.1)
– EMLCore 98 Introduction manual [1],

– EMLCore 98 Getting started manual [2],
– 1353SH5 Generic NE Management manual [3],
– 1353SH5 Performance Management manual [4],
– 1353SH5 Transmission Management manual [5].
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 88
88

– Chapter 2: Unrepeatered Submarine Transmission System

• Overview
• URW/1666UT physical description
– Chapter 3: URW/1666UT Equipment views

• URW/1666UT graphical representation
• URW/1666UT common views
• URW views
• 1666UT views
– Chapter 4: UW/1666UT functions
• Raman pump power

• Amplifier power
• ALS
• Voting Logic
• Channel power
• Wavelength information
• SSU Expected Signal List
• SBS
• Decision threshold
• FEC features
• External points
• Performance counter management
– Chapter 5: Analog Measurements
• Principles
• URW/1666UT measurement points
– Chapter 6: Alarm Mapping
• URW/1666UT R2.1 alarms

• URW/1666UT R2 alarms
• URW/1666UT R1 alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 8 / 88
88
1.3 Terminology
1.3.1 Abbreviations
BBA Beach Booster Amplifier
BER Bit Error Ratio
CT Craft Terminal
FFU Fixed Filter Unit
NE Network Element
OA Optical Amplifier (RPU, OPA, BBA)
OPA Optical Post Amplifier
OS Operation System
OWE Orderwire Equipment

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RC Remote Control
RPA Remote Post Amplifier
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 88
88
RPR Remote Pre Amplifier
RPS Raman Pump Source

RPU Remote/Raman Pump Unit

RX Reception
SPC IF SPC Interface (Supy IF)
SSU Safety Shutdown Unit
STPD Submarine Transponder
SW Switch
TP Transmission Point
TX Transmission
UTU Unrepeatered Transmitter Unit
URU Unrepeatered Receiver Unit
URW Unrepeatered WDM System
VLU Voting Logic Unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 10 / 88
88
2 UNREPEATERED SUBMARINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
2.1 Overview
All the unrepeatered WDM NEs are manageable from the Alcatel 1353NM Element Management
application and the Craft Terminal 1320NX or 1320CT application.
In the URW/1666UT context, the 1353NM can supervise and control the unrepeatered network elements.
It manages the optical amplifiers and the Transponders. There are as many URW/1666UT network
elements as fiber pairs. Each NE manages all the subracks serving one fiber pair.
The management system manages physical network elements, providing configuration, fault and
performance management of network elements. It provides a comprehensive set of analogue
performance data in order to check the quality of transmission and the safety shutdown mechanism if
triggered. The URW/1666UT management system, being based on 1353NM, is able to support all of the
optional packages of the 1353NM (e.g. loo, resilience).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 88
88
2.1.1 URW configuration overview
The URW NE is used in the unrepeatered WDM systems for the Nx2.5 Gbit/s and Nx10 Gbit/s applications.
According to the configuration, it contains additional subracks including Raman or Remote Pump Source

(RPS) units, high power booster amplifiers (OPA) and Beach Booster Amplifiers (BBA). It includes also

a system based on a VLU or a SSU to insure the automatic shutdown of the URW large power equipment.
As shown in the following figure, the URW NE offers two management interfaces:
– F interface to communicate with a Craft Terminal (i.e. 1320NX application)

– QB3* interface to communicate with an EML OS (i.e. 1353NM application)
The Craft Terminal linked to the URW is based on the Alcatel 1320NX. This application consisting in
NECTAS basic software and the appropriate NE application software, runs on an industry standard
portable personal computer.
1353NM 1353NM 1320NX

Craft
Terminal
QB3*
Q3 interface
interface
F interface
Cable
WDM FP #1 optical fiber
FP #2 optical fiber
SDH LTE URW
ADM 2.5 Gb/s or 10 Gb/s
Figure 1. URW management system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 12 / 88
88
2.1.2 1666UT configuration overview
1666UT is dedicated to 1x2.5 Gbit/s applications. It contains a Transponder which encapsulates a SDH
signal (STM–16) into a FEC–encoded signal (2,5 Gbit/s) and vice–versa. According to the configuration,
it can also contain amplifier subracks based exclusively on the Raman Pump Source units.
As shown in the following figure, the 1666UT offers two management interfaces:
– F interface to communicate with a Craft Terminal (i.e. 1320NX application)

– QB3* interface to communicate with an EML OS (i.e. 1353NM application)
The Craft Terminal linked to the 1666UT is based on the Alcatel 1320NX. This application consisting in
NECTAS basic software and the appropriate NE application software, runs on an industry standard
portable personal computer.
1353NM 1353NM 1320NX

Craft
Q3 QB3* Terminal
interface interface
F interface
SDH (2.5 Gbit/s) Line (2.7 Gbit/s)

Cable
optical fiber
ADM 1666UT optical fiber
Figure 2. 1666UT for 1x2.5 Gbit/s transmission system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 88
88
2.2 URW/1666UT physical description
2.2.1 Generalities

The URW/1666UT is a multi–racks equipment.
The NE type of the URW/1666UT depends on the subracks configuration as follows:
Subracks NE type NE Release

Configuration
0...10 OA boards URW ”2.1”
1 Transponder subrack and

1666UT ”2.1”
0...10 OA boards

1666UT ”2.0”
0...8 OA boards

1666UT ”1.0”
0...4 OA boards
Table 1. URW/1666UT NE types
Layouts of URW/1666UT are shown in Figure 3. , Figure 4. and Figure 5.
The number of OA boards depends on the cable length.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 88
88
2.2.2 URW/1666UT R2.1
There are up to 2 racks within an URW/1666UT R2.1 NE.

Subrack 1 Subrack 5
Transponder OA
Subrack 2 Subrack 6
OA OA
Subrack 3
OA
Subrack 4
OA
Rack 1 Rack 2
Connector Panel
S F U O U F T P P
P E T P R D M S S
C U U U U U P U U
2 1
Transponder (only for 1666UT)
Connector Panel
E
S S T P P
M
P S P M S S
T
C U OA OA P U U
Y
2 1
S
L
O
T
OA
Figure 3. NE maximum layout of URW/1666UT R2.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 15 / 88
88
Subrack Types
There are two types of subrack:

a) Transponder subrack (specific to a Transponder wavelength), only available in 1666UT

configuration.
b) Optical Amplifier (OA) subrack, which contains two optical units: a Left Unit and a Right Unit. Each
one corresponds to a unit type: RPU or OPA.
Any subrack can be fitted in any location of any rack.
For Transponder subrack, the sequence of boards is fixed. It is not the case for optical amplifier subrack.
But for both subrack types, some boards may not be expected in certain configurations. For instance, as
there must be only one SPC board for one NE, if the Transponder subrack is present it includes the SPC
board, if not it is the first OA subrack which includes the SPC unit.
Besides, there will be only a maximum of one VLU or one SSU board in the configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 16 / 88
88
2.2.3 URW/1666UT R2
There are up to 3 racks within an URW/1666UT R2 NE.


Transponder OA OA
Subrack 2 Subrack 6
OA OA
Subrack 3 Subrack 7
OA OA
Subrack 4 Subrack 8
OA OA
Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3
Connector Panel
S F U O U F T P P
P E T P R D M S S
C U U U U U P U U
2 1
Connector Panel
S S V T P P
P P L M S S
C C U OA OA P U U
I 2 1
OA
Figure 4. NE maximum layout of URW/1666UT R2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 17 / 88
88
Subrack Types


configuration.
b) Optical Amplifier (OA) subrack, which contains two optical units: a Left Unit and a Right Unit. Each
one corresponds to a unit type: RPU or OPA or BBA.
Any subrack can be fitted in any location of any rack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 18 / 88
88
2.2.4 URW/1666UT R1
There are up to 2 racks within an URW/1666UT R1 NE.

TRU TRU
Subrack 1 Subrack 1
Transponder OA
Subrack 2
OA
Subrack 3
OA
Subrack 4
OA
Rack 1 Rack 2
Connector Panel
S F U O U F T P P
P E T P R D M S S
C U U U U U P U U
2 1
Connector Panel
S S T P P
P P M S S
C C OA P U U
I 2 1
Fan unit
OA
Figure 5. Possible layout of URW/1666UT R1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 19 / 88
88
Subrack Types


configuration.
b) Optical Amplifier (OA) subrack, used for RPA or RPR.
For each subrack type, the sequence of board types is fixed. But some boards may be absent in certain
configurations: for instance, as there must be only one SPC unit for one Transponder, if the Transponder
subrack is present it includes the SPC unit, if not it is the first OA subrack which includes the SPC unit.
Depending on the configuration, a FFU board can replace a SPCI board in OA subracks.
N.B. The Fan units are not represented in the Equipment views.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 20 / 88
88
3 URW/1666UT EQUIPMENT VIEWS
The equipment supported by the 1353NM are the following:


• URW (Optical Amplifiers OPA, RPS)
• URW (Optical Amplifiers RPS 2.0, OPA27 1.0, BBA 1.0)
• URW (Optical Amplifiers RPS 1.0, RPS 1.1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 21 / 88
88
3.1 URW/1666UT graphical representation
3.1.1 URW/1666UT NE symbols

The URW/1666UT NEs are represented on the Network Topology view as shown below.
Figure 6. URW/1666UT NE symbols

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 22 / 88
88
3.1.2 URW/1666UT equipment views
There are four types of equipment views: the rack view, the subrack view, the board view and the port view.
Transmission/Reception views and External points view are also available for the URW/1666UT.

N.B. Transmission/Reception views are only available for the 1666UT

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 23 / 88
88
3.1.3 URW/1666UT alarm icons bars
There are two alarm icons bars, an horizontal one (at the top of the views) and a vertical one (at the right
of the views).

Horizontal icons bar
Vertical icons bar
Figure 8. URW/1666UT alarm icons bars
The horizontal alarm icons bar shows an alarm synthesis for the whole NE. For each severity, the number
of alarms of this severity is displayed inside a square containing an acronym which corresponds to the
severity. The color of each square is in green if there is no alarms of this severity, or in the color
corresponding to the severity if there is at least one alarm of this severity:
• critical (acronym CRI, default color Red)

• major (acronym MAJ, default color Orange)
• minor (acronym MIN, default color Yellow)
• warning (acronym WNG, default color Cyan)
• indeterminate (acronym IND, default color White)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. URW/1666UT horizontal icons bar
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 88
88
Supervision state
Alignment state
Local access state
Operational state
NML Assignment state
External Points Alarm Status
Shutdown Due To External LOS
Shutdown Due To External Switch
Figure 10. URW/1666UT vertical icons bar
– round: abnormal status,

– square: normal status.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 25 / 88
88
The icons have significant colors. The colors are different depending on the status icon:
Icon Status Color Details

SUP –supervised = green The supervision state indicates whether
–activating = brown or not the NE is under OS or TERA10CT
–declared = near dark supervision.
ALI –aligned = green The alignment state indicates whether or

–aligning = brown not the NE and the OS or the TERA10CT
–in configuration = sky blue MIBs are aligned.
”a key” –granted = sky blue The local access state (icon with a key
–denied = white symbol) indicates whether the NE is
managed by a craft terminal or by the
OS.
Q3 –enabled = green The operational state (Q3 icon) indicates

–disabled = red whether or not the communication with
the OS is established.
NML –free = green

–active = alarm severity color
EXT –cleared = green Synthesis of all alarms relative to

–active = alarm severity color external Input Points.
CTC –cleared = green Craft Terminal is connected to NE (OS

–active = alarm severity color information).
AF –disable = green Secondary alarms visible.

–enable = dark blue Secondary alarms not visible.
SEL –no shutdown = green It indicates whether or not there is a

–shutdown = red shutdown due to an external loss of
signal.
SES –no shutdown = green It indicates whether or not there is a

–shutdown = red shutdown due to an external switch.
Table 2. URW/1666UT Color icons

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 26 / 88
88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.2.1 External Points view
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3.2 URW/1666UT common views
Figure 11. External Points view
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
27 / 88
3.3 URW views
3.3.1 Rack view

OA
subrack
OA
subrack
OA
subrack
OA
subrack
Figure 12. URW rack view example
N.B. Example of URW rack view with one Transponder rack and two OA subracks. All the subracks
are optional depending on the configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 88
88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.3.2 Subrack view
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
Figure 13. URW subrack view example
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
29 / 88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.3.3 Board view
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
Figure 14. URW board view example
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
30 / 88
3.4 1666UT views
3.4.1 Rack view

Transponder
subrack
OA
subrack
OA
subrack
Figure 15. 1666UT rack view example
N.B. Example of 1666UT rack view with one Transponder rack and two OA subracks. All the
subracks are optional depending on the configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 31 / 88
88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.4.2 Subrack view
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
Figure 16. 1666UT subrack view example
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
32 / 88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.4.3 Board view
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
Figure 17. 1666UT board view example
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
33 / 88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.4.4 Port view
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
Figure 18. 1666UT port view example
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
34 / 88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.4.5 Transmission view
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
OpticalSPISink
Figure 19. 1666UT transmission view example
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
fecSource OptPath Source
35 / 88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3.4.6 Reception view
OptPathSink
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
fecSink
OpticalSPISource
Figure 20. 1666UT reception view example
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
36 / 88
4 URW/1666UT FUNCTIONS
4.1 Raman Pump Power

N.B. This feature is only available for RPU board type of an OA subrack.
This feature allows to configure the global output power of the raman pump source.
– In the subrack view, select the RPU board.
– In the Equipment pull down menu, click on Raman Pump and then on the Pump Power option.
Figure 21. Raman pump power option
Figure 22. Raman pump power dialogue box
– The value can be increased/decreased by step of 10 mW by clicking on Increase or Decrease push

button. A new value can be entered directly in the field.
The Pump Power value is an estimated value of the new configured value. The NE is in charge of
the exact value definition.
– Click on OK.
Min. and max values are configurable using CT. These values are between 0 and 1500 mW.
N.B. After that type of configuration, a configuration misalignment between 1353NM and NE should
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
appear. A MIB upload action needs to be done.
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 37 / 88
88
4.2 Amplifier Power
N.B. This feature is only available for BBA and OPA boards types.

This function allows the operator to configure the output power level (dBm) signal of the amplifier. This is

useful at the end of the system life.
To configure the amplifier output power level:
– In the subrack view, select the BBA or OPA board.
– In the Equipment pull down menu, click on the Ampli power and then on the Output Power Level
option.
Figure 23. Ampli power option
Figure 24. Amplifier Output power dialogue box
– The value can be increased/decreased by step of 0.2 dBm by clicking on Increase or Decrease
push button. A new value can be entered directly in the field.
The Amplifier Power value is an estimated value of the new configured value. The NE is in charge
of the exact value definition.
– Click on OK.
The new value entered must be between the min and the max values.
Min. and max values are configurable using CT.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 38 / 88
88
4.3 Laser management (ALS)
4.3.1 ALS criteria

N.B. This feature is only available for RPU and OPA boards types.
This function displays the values of the ALS criteria which can automatically shutdown the pump.
– In the board view, select the RPU or OPA board.

– In the Board pull down menu, click on the Laser Management and then on the ALS Criteria ...
option.
Figure 25. ALS Criteria option
Figure 26. ALS Criteria dialogue box
The ALS critera values displayed are:
– Primary signal: enabled or disabled,

– Secondary signal: enabled or disabled,
– Loopback signal 1: enabled or disabled,
– Loopback signal 2: enabled or disabled.
– Click on Close.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 39 / 88
88
The ALS state feature is given at the bottom of the board view.

Figure 27. ALS State icon
4.3.2 Shutdown Threshold
N.B. This feature is only available for BBA board type.
This function allows to display and set an optical input power low threshold (in dBm) which triggers the
laser shutdown on a BBA board.
– In the board view, select BBA board view.

– In the Board pull down menu, click on the Laser Management and then on the Shutdown
Threshold ... option.
Figure 28. Shutdown Threshold dialogue box
– Click on Cancel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 40 / 88
88
4.4 Voting Logic
N.B. This feature is only available in a configuration containing a VLU board.

This function displays the number of external channels which participate to the voting logic for primary
signal shutdown of all the Raman pumps of the NE.
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Voting Logic ... option.
Figure 29. Voting logic option
Figure 30. Voting logic dialogue box
The number of Voting Channels is displayed.
– Click on Close.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 41 / 88
88
4.5 Channel Power
4.5.1 Channel Power value

N.B. This feature is only available for UTU board type of a Transponder subrack.
The value displayed is the the channel power value (in dBm) of a port set by the NE after an
increase/decrease channel power remote control.
To display the Channel Power value:
– Open the port view for the UTU board.
Figure 31. Channel Power option
– Click on Cancel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 42 / 88
88
4.5.2 Increase/Decrease Channel Power value
The value can be increased or decreased by step of 0.2 dBm.

To increase/decrease the Channel Power value:

– Open the port view for the UTU board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on Channel Power ... and then on the Increase Channel Power
or Decrease Channel Power option (see Figure 31. ).
The following confirmation dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 33. Channel Power confirmation dialogue box
– Click on OK.
N.B. The NE modifies a configuration table with the new channel power value. The alignment state
becomes ”misaligned” so the operator has to upload the configuration to see the new value.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 43 / 88
88
4.6 Wavelength Information
N.B. This feature is available for the port of the UTU or RPU board type.

This feature allows the operator to display the Transponder wavelength.

– Open the port view of the UTU board or the board view of the URU board.
• For the UTU board, in the Port pull down menu, click on the Wavelength ... option.
Figure 34. Wavelength option in Port menu
• For the URU board, in the Board pull down menu, click on the Wavelength ... option.
Figure 35. Wavelength option in Board menu
The following dialogue box is displayed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Click on Close.
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 44 / 88
88
4.7 SSU Expected Signal List
N.B. This feature is only available in a configuration containing a SSU board type.
This feature displays the status of each expected signal of the SSU board, the status may be “used” or
“ignored”.
To display the SSU expected signal:
– From any view, in the Configuration pull down menu, click on the Expected Signal List option.
Figure 37. Expected signal list options
– The following dialogue box is displayed.
Figure 38. SSU Expected Signal List dialogue box
– Click on OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 45 / 88
88
4.8 SBS
N.B. This feature is only available for the port of UTU board type of the Transponder subrack.

SBS (Stimulated Brouillouin Scattering) allows the operator to enable/disable the SBS modulation, which

is a low frequency current laser modulation.
To enable/disable the SBS:
– Open the port view of the UTU board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on SBS ... and then on Enable or Disable option.
Figure 39. SBS management options
– A confirmation dialogue box is diplayed.
Figure 40. Disable SBS Confirmation dialogue box
– Click on OK.
The SBS state feature is given at the bottom of the port view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 41. SBS state icon
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 46 / 88
88
4.9 Decision Threshold
N.B. This feature is only available for the Transponder subrack.

This feature allows to increase/decrease Eyes decision threshold at the receive side in order to have
accurately the received optical signal decoding.
– Open the port view of the URU board (optPathTTPSink port).
– In the Port menu, click on the Decision Threshold ... option.
Figure 42. Decision threshold option
Figure 43. Decision threshold configuration dialogue box
– The threshold value can be increased/decreased by step of 1 by clicking on Increase or Decrease

push button.
The Decision Threshold value is an estimated value of the new configured value. The NE is in charge
of the exact value definition.
– Click on Ok.
Min. and max. values are configurable using CT. The values are between 0 and 4095.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 47 / 88
88
4.10 FEC Features
4.10.1 AMS Management

N.B. This feature is only available for the FEC port view of the FECENC or FECDEC boards of the
Transponder.
This feature controls the insertion of an AMS (Alternate Maintenance Signal) in place of a SDH signal
detected as incorrect. This feature can be enabled or disabled from the FEC port view.
To enable/disable the AMS insertion:
– Open the port view of the FECENC or FECDEC board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on the Enable AMS Insertion or on the Disable AMS Insertion
option.
Figure 44. AMS Management option for FECDEC board
– Click on OK in the confirmation dialogue box.
The state of the AMS insertion feature is given at the bottom of the port view.
Figure 45. AMS state icon

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 48 / 88
88
This feature allows the operator to insert FEC errors in frames (only available for the FECENC board). This
is available for FEC correction test.
– insertion with specific duration and specific number of errors by frame,

– single insertion with a specific number of errors.
1) Parameters Configuration
– Open the port view of a FECENC board.
– In the Port pull down menu, click on FEC Error Insertion and then on Insert Config ...
option.
Figure 46. FEC Error Insertion options
Figure 47. FEC Error Insertion dialogue box
The following parameters are modifiable:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Insertion Duration: in ms from 10 to 64000 by step of 10 ms,

• Insertion Rate: number of errors per frame from 64 to 960 by step of 64.
– Click on OK.
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 49 / 88
88
2) Insertion


– In the Port pull down menu, click on FEC Error Insertion and then on the Insert option
(see Figure 46. ).
The following confirmation dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 48. Insert FEC Error confirmation dialogue box
– Click on OK.
The State of the FEC error insertion is given in the port view (see Figure 51. ).
1) Parameters Configuration
– In the Port pull down menu, click on FEC Error Insertion and then on the Single Insert
Config ... option (see Figure 46. ).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 49. Single FEC Error Insertion Configuration dialogue box
The Insertion Rate parameters can be modified from 64 to 960 by step of 64.
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 50 / 88
88
N.B. The Insertion Rate value is the same for all tributaries: if you change the value
for one FECENC board, the value is changed for all FECENC boards.
– Click on OK.
2) Insertion
– In the Port pull down menu, click on FEC Error Insertion and then on the Single Insert
... option (see Figure 46. ).
Figure 50. Insert Single FEC Error confirmation dialogue box
– Click on OK.
The State of the FEC error insertion feature is given at the bottom of the Port view.
Figure 51. States of AMS insertion, FEC error insertion and single FEC error insertion icons
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 51 / 88
88
4.11 External points

– For URW/1666UT NE, 28 external input points are available.

Characteristics modification:
From the External Points view you can configure one of the external input points:
– Either double click on the concerned row in the external points list, or click on the concerned row and
then in the External Points pull down menu, click on the Config ... option.
Figure 52. External Input Points Configuration dialogue box
– When the configuration of the external point is completed, click on OK.
– For URW/1666UT NE, 20 external output points are available.

Characteristics modification:
From the External Points window you can configure one of the external output points:
– Either double click on the concerned row in the external points list, or click on the concerned row and
then in the External Points pull down menu, click on the Config ... option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 52 / 88
88
Figure 53. External Output Points Configuration dialogue box

• State: On or Off.
• Station Output Control Type: Latching or Momentary.
• Momentary Contact Time: indicates duration in case of momentary contact time (in ms modulo
10).
– When the configuration of the external point is completed, click on OK to validate.
4.11.3 Partner Alarm Management
When an external output point is configured in automatic switch mode, this option gives a partner alarm
which will automatically command the output point. When the alarm is raised on the NE, the external output
point is set on.
The partner alarm is displayed as a probable cause name and the user label of the concerned managed
object.
The option can only be configured using the craft terminal.
– Select the concerned row in the external points list in the External Points window,
– In the External Points pull down menu, click on the Partner Alarm ... option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 53 / 88
88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Click on Close.
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
Figure 54. Partner alarm dialogue box
88
3AL 89062 AA AA
54 / 88
4.12 Performance Counter Management
4.12.1 Performance Counters

Two kinds of counters are managed.
a) FEC counters
Two accumulation periods are supported: 15 minutes and 24 hours. For each TP (1 for each
Transponder), a current block, a previous block and n more recent blocks of counters are stored in
the Transponder. The list of activated TPs is configurable and separately managed for CTs and OS.
Once TP performance collect is activated from management systems, the Transponder manages the
collect and transfer on request all or part of the block counters.
One day of 15 minutes counters and one week of daily counters are stored in the Transponder.
The FEC alarm threshold configuration is part of the Transponder configuration. A low and a high
thresholds are defined for each counter to raise a non urgent alarm or an urgent alarm when they
are crossed.
b) B1 byte counters
The B1 byte (at the Regeneration section) is extracted from each STM16 frame and collected
according to performance monitoring principles. Counters cumulate an error number.
The management procedure is the same as for FEC counter: accumulation periods, collect,
threshold and alarm generation.
The Transponder manages at least two different counter lists (OS and CT).
4.12.2 Performance Thresholds Configuration
N.B. This feature is only available for 1666UT configuration.
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on Performance and then on the Performance
Thresholds option.
– Select the requested counter name.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 55. Performance Thresholds option
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 55 / 88
88
For the FEC counters, the following dialogue box is displayed.

Figure 56. Counters configuration dialogue box
– Click on OK.
4.12.3 Forced Performance Collection
To force a performance collection:
– In the Configuration pull down menu, click on Performance and then on the Forced Performance
Collection option.
Figure 57. Forced Performance Collection option
The following confirmation dialogue box is displayed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 58. Performance collection confirmation dialogue box
– Click on OK.
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 56 / 88
88
4.12.4 Show NE Performance Data
To display a NE performance collection:

– In the Diagnosis pull down menu, click on Show NE Performance data and then on the 15 Minutes
or 24 Hours option.
Figure 59. Show NE Performance Data option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 60. Report Request Control dialogue box
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 57 / 88
88
– In the Performance Entity area, explore the equipment tree to select the NE with performance data
to be displayed.
– In the Report Period area:
• choose one of the following options: Last... Until, Lastest, Current or User Specific,

• if Last... Until, Lastest or Current option has been previously selected, choose one of the

following options: 15minutes, Hour, Day, Week, Month or Year.
• the From and/or To fields can be modified.
– The Granularity field can be modified (15min or day).
– Click on Apply.
Figure 61. Performance Counters Tabular Report dialogue box
– In the File pull down menu, click on Exit.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 58 / 88
88
5.1 Principles
Analog measurements are used for transmission network elements such as the Transponder, in order to
follow as closely as possible the deterioration of equipment with age and to be warned as early as possible
of any impeding problem. Indeed, those equipments must satisfy stringent requirements for long period
of time (typically 25 years).
From the point of view of the operator, there are two ways of interacting with the OS:
a) Operator query: the operator uses a specific dialogue box to request the current value of
measurements (of a Measurement Point). The OS relays this request to the NE, which responds with
the measurement values. The OS can then display the results to the operator, as well as are recording
these values in a measurement database.
b) Periodic polling: for the operator, this works along the same principles as for Performance
Monitoring. The following steps can be distinguished:
1) In a preliminary setup phase, the operator specifies which measurements are to be polled
(choice of measurement points), as well as the time interval between polls for each
measurement point (15 min., 1 day).
2) For each measurement point, the OS periodically requests current measurement values from
the NE and stores them in its database.
5.1.1 Transponder NEs
The Transponder NEs perform analog measurements continually, independently of the OS.
Measurements are transferred to the OS in blocks called Measurement Points, on OS request. The NE
does not periodically store measurement values as in performance monitoring: on OS measurement
request, the NE sends back the current (present) value of each measurement.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 59 / 88
88
5.2 URW/1666UT Measurement Points
Measurements are set in measurement points. A measurement point includes several measurement
values.

The URW/1666UT Transponder does not manage measurement periods. Measurements reading
is activated in the Transponder by the reception of a reading request from OS.
All measurement points in the URW/1666UT are characteristic of individual boards.
High and low alarm thresholds can be defined for measurement points. An alarm is raised when a
measurement is out of range (high or low threshold). In that case, the value sent to the OS is the peak
value or the threshold value.
The value sent to the OS is the peak value or the threshold value.
5.2.1 URW/1666UT R2.1 Measurement Points
The following boards support analog measurements:
• FEU
• UTU
• FDU
• URU
• RPU
• OPA
• SSU
The following table gives the measurement points by board.
Board Measurement point Measurements
FEU FEU_Received_Signal Received Light Level (dBm)
UTU UTU_Signal_Laser Signal Laser Bias Current (mA)
Signal LaserTemperature (C)
Signal Laser Output Power (dBm)
UTU_Pump_Laser Pump Laser Bias Current (mA)
Pump Laser Temperature (C)
Pump Laser Output Power (dBm)
UTU_Output_Power Sent Light Level (dBm)
URU URU_Filtered_Signal Filtered Light Level (dBm)
URU_Pump_Laser Pump Laser Bias Current (mA)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Pump Laser Output Power (dBm)
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 60 / 88
88
FDU FDU_Signal_Laser Signal Laser Bias Current (mA)


RPU RPU Pump Laser Bias Current (mA)
Unit Output power (mW)
OPA OPA Pump Laser Bias Current (mA)
Pump Output power (mW)
Unit Input power (dBm)
Unit Output power (dBm)
SSU SSU ASE#1 Power (dBm)
ASE#2 Power (dBm)
Signal#1 optical level (dBm)
Table 3. URW/1666UT R2.1 measurement points
5.2.2 URW/1666UT R2 Measurement Points
• FEU
• UTU
• FDU
• URU
• RPU
• BBA
• OPA
Legend:
• L means Left
• R means Rigth
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• is the Optical Amplifier subrack number within the equipment
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 61 / 88
88


Pump Laser Output Power (mW)
RPU_ L/R RPUR2 L/R Pump Laser Bias Current (mA)
Unit Output power (mW)

BBA_ L/R BBA L/R Pump Laser Bias Current (mA)
OPA_L/R OPA27 L/R Pump Laser Bias Current (mA)
Table 4. URW/1666UT R2 measurement points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 62 / 88
88
5.2.3 URW/1666UT R1 Measurement Points

• FEU
• UTU
• FDU
• URU
• Raman Pump Sources (0 to 4 according to the configuration)
RPS_1 Raman1_Pump_Values Laser Bias Current (mA)
Laser Bias Temperature (C)
Output power (mW)
Output power (mW)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Output power (mW)
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 63 / 88
88


Output power (mW)
Table 5. URW/1666UT R1 measurement points
5.2.4 Measurement Points Management
a) General measurement management
1) Polling period selection
The operator chooses the polling periods for each Measurement Point (MP).
For the Transponder, 15 minutes and 24 hours periods are available for each Measurement
Point (MP).
2) Start/Stop measurement collection
The operator can start/stop measurement collection for several MPs.
The OS can automatically stop the measurement collection (stop supervision).
b) Measurement collection
The Transponder does not maintain measurement values. Each measurement is only taken on
request from OS.
To be homogeneous with the Performance counter monitoring, the OS will manage polling periods
with the following rules: a day is from midnight to midnight and 15 minutes periods starts on the hour
and at 15, 30 and 45 minutes past.
1) 15 minutes measurement collection
The OS starts the measurement collection of a list of MPs.
Measurements are collected at the beginning of each period (0, 15, 30, 45 past).
Measurements are collected one Transponder after the other. The measurement period in the
Transponder is not very accurate, it varies between 1 Period and 2 Periods according to the
following parameter: for each Transponder to be requested, the transit delay of the request in
the network, the measurement delay and response processing and the transit delay of the
response.
After an OS/NE isolation for a short period (less than a polling period), missing values of the
current polling period are collected.
2) 24 hours measurement collection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The OS starts the measurement collection of a list of MPs.
Measurements are collected at midnight.
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 64 / 88
88
c) Measurement peak collection
When a threshold alarm is raised, the OS recovers the measurement peak value. The Transponder
maintains peak measurements for each measurement (last peak measurement and time it was
detected). If the Transponder is not fast enough to pick up the peak value then the treshold value is
returned.
d) Time management
The OS modifies the effective duration of the period according to time changes.
Time changes have no impact on the measurement management for the Transponder.
5.2.5 Measurement Thresholds Management
High and low threshold are defined for each measurement value. Some of them can be modified:

– In the Equipment pull–down menu, click on Measure and then on the Measure Thresholds option.
Figure 62. Measure Threshold option
The following dialogue box is then displayed.
The thresholds displayed in the dialogue box depend on the selected board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 65 / 88
88
a) For a UTU board

Figure 63. URW/1666UT UTU board Measure thresholds dialogue box
b) For a RPU board
Figure 64. URW/1666UT RPU board Measure thresholds dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 66 / 88
88
c) For a OPA board
Figure 65. URW/1666UT OPA board Measure thresholds dialogue box
– Click on OK.
5.2.6 Polling Management
The measurements relative to a selected measurement point can not be performed separately.
There are three possible ways to run the measurements for a specific measurement point:
– a polling 24 hours: a measurement is automatically performed by the OS every 24 hours,

– a polling 15 minutes: a measurement is automatically performed by the OS every 15 minutes,
– an immediate measurement: a measurement is immediatelly performed when requested.
For a PM, these three possibilities can be chosen simultaneously.
To display the polling management dialogue box:

– In the Equipment pull–down menu, click on Measure and then on Measure Polling option.
Figure 66. Measure Threshold option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 67 / 88
88
The following dialogue box is displayed (example for UTU board):

Figure 67. URW/1666UT Measure Polling dialogue box
– To select three ways to run the measurements, click on the corresponding check boxes for each
group of measurements,
– Click on OK.
a) When an immadiate measure is chosen, a confirmation dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 68. Immediate measure confirmation dialogue box
Click on OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 68 / 88
88
b) An icon, for each choice (24 Hours or 15 Minutes), is displayed in the high part of the concerned
board in the subrack view. For example:
Figure 69. Subrack with measure polling icons on several boards
In a graphical interface, measurements can be selected using many criterias.

– In the Diagnosis pull–down menu, click on the Show NE Measurement Data option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 69 / 88
88
Figure 70. Show NE measurement data option
Figure 71. Report Request Control dialogue box
– In the Performance Entity area, explore the equipment tree to select the NE with measurement data
to be displayed.
– In the Report Period area, the From and/or To fields can be modified.
– In the Reporting Criteria area, the Granularity fields can be modified (15min, day, immediate or
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
peak).
– Click on Apply.
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 70 / 88
88
Figure 72. Example of measurement data dialogue box
– In the File pull down menu, click on Exit.
To display these measurements:
– From any view, in the Diagnosis pull–down menu, click on View and then on Analog Measures
option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 73. Analog Measures option
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 71 / 88
88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.7: URW1666UT
88
Figure 74. Example of measurement data in text format
3AL 89062 AA AA
72 / 88
6 ALARM MAPPING
6.1 URW/1666UT R2.1 alarms

The mapping list of this section concerns the URW/1666UT Release 2.1 NEs.
NE alarms:
Alarm Description (NECTAS) Probable Cause (1353NM)
All types of subracks alarms:
Alarm Description (NECTAS) Probable Cause (1353NM) Specific Problem
SBM removed supplyBreakerFailure synchroSupplyUnitFail
Tributary subrack specific alarms:
Alarm Description (NECTAS) Probable Cause (1353NM) Specific Problem
SBM removed supplyBreakerFailure synchroSupplyUnitFail
Fan Unit removed coolingFanFailure unitMissing
Fan fail synthesis coolingFanFailure ventilationsSystemFailure
Boards Common alarms:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 73 / 88
88
SSU board alarms:
Alarm Description (NECTAS) Probable Cause Specific Problem

(1353NM)

SSU shutdown active ShutdownDueToExter
nalLOS
SSU Comm fail internalBusFailure
Signal#x Input power OOL OpticalInputPowerThr signal1

esholdCrossed signal2
signal3
signal4
VLU board alarms:
VLU shutdown active shutdownDueToExternalLOS
VLU / TMP communication failed internalBusFailure
OPA specific board alarms:
Optical Amplifier input power OOL opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Optical Amplifier output power OOL opticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
OPA & RPU boards alarms:
Unit Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Unit Config error configurationOrCustomizationError
Unit Comm fail internalBusFailure
Main Unit Connector cover removed frontDoorOpen
Pump Laser Output Power OOL pumpLaserPowerThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Bias Current OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Temperature OOL pumpLaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 74 / 88
88
FEU board alarms:

FEC–Enc Comm Fail internalBusFailure
PLL OOL (Phase Locked Loop Out of Limits) timingProblem
RLL OOL (Received Light Level Out Of Limits) opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
UTU board alarms:
UTU Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
UTU Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
UTU Comm fail internalBusFailure
Cover Plate removed mainOpticalConnectorCoverOpen
Pump Laser Bias Current OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Temp OOL LaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Power OOL LaserPowerThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Bias Current OOL LaserBiasThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 75 / 88
88
OPU board alarms:

URU board alarms:
URU cover current replaceableUnitProblem
URU comm. fail (Receiver unit card/TMP unit comm. internalBusFailure

fail)
Unit Cover removed mainOpticalConnectorCoverOpen
Laser Temperature OOL pumpLaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Laser Bias Current OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Laser Output Power OOL pumpLaserPowerThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FLL OOL (Filtered Light Level Out Of Limits) opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
TF OOL (Tracking Filter Out Of Lock) OpticalFilterOutOfLock
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 76 / 88
88
FDU board alarms:

FEC Dec Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
FEC Dec Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
FEC Dec Comm fail internalBusFailure
PLL 155MHz OOL (Phase Locked Loop) timingProblem
PLL 2.4GHz OOL (Phase Locked Loop) timingProblem
Laser Over Temp pumpLaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Laser Power OOL (Out Of Limit) pumpLaserPowerThresholdCrossed
Laser Bias OOL (Out Of Limit) pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
SPC board alarms:
Comm fails internalBusFailure
SPCIF board alarms:
PSU board alarms:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 77 / 88
88
TMP board alarms:

TMP unit / Backplane communication fail internalBusFailure
FFU board alarms:
FFU / TMP communication failed internalBusFailure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 78 / 88
88
6.2 URW/1666UT R2 alarms
The mapping list of this section concerns the URW/1666UT Release 2 NEs.
Connector cover removed frontDoorOpen
Cover Plate removed mainOpticalConnectorCoverOpen
Fan fail synthesis coolingFanFailure
Fan Unit removed coolingFanFailure

(replaceableUnitProblem2)

FFU/TMP communication failed internalBusFailure


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SBM removed sypplyBreakerFailure
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 79 / 88
88


TMP unit / Blackplane communication fail internalBusFailure
Unit Cover removed mainOpticalConnectorCoverOpen
URU comm. fail (Receiver unit card/TMP unit comm. internalBusFailure

fail)
URU cover current replaceableUnitProblem
VLU/TMP communication failed internalBusFailure
PLL 155MHz OOL (Phase Locked Loop) timingProblem
PLL 2.4GHz OOL (Phase Locked Loop) timingProblem

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 80 / 88
88


6.2.3 Quality of service alarms
24 h FEC uncorrected block alarm fecUncorrectedErrorThresholdCrossed1Day
Laser Bias Current OOL (Out Of Limit) pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Optical Amplifier input power OOL opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Optical Amplifier output power OOL opticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Bias Current OOL (Out Of Limit) pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
RLL OOL (received Light Level Out Of Limits) opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Bias Current OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 81 / 88
88
6.3 URW/1666UT R1 alarms
The mapping list of this section concerns the URW/1666UT Release 1 NEs.

Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
Configuration module removed replaceableUnitProblem
External SD input externalShutdown
Fan fail synthesis coolingFanFailure


FFU Comm fail internalBusFailure
Minor Unit Connector cover removed minorOpticalConnectorCoverOpen

Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
Own Connector cover removed opticalConnectorCoverOpen

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 82 / 88
88


Scrambler drive OOL scramblerProblem
Shelf power fail replaceableUnitProblem
SPC Communication fail internalBusFailure

(internalBusFailure1)
TMP Config error ConfigurationOrCustomizationError
TMP unit / Blackplane communication fail internalBusFailure
Unit Comms fail internalBusFailure
Unit Over Current replaceableUnitProblem
AMS detected aMS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
AMS inserted aMSinserted
B1 HER detected excessiveBER
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 83 / 88
88
B1 LER detected degradedSignal

Buffer Overflow fecCorrectionOverflow

Data Loss cqtLossOfData
FEC error High alarms excessiveBER
FEC error Low alarms degradedSignal
Input clock fail lossOfClock
LOF (loss of frame) lossOfSdhFrame
LOS lossOfSignal
Loss of received optical signal opticalSignalDegraded
Loss of signal lossOfSignal
MS–RDI rDldetected
ODL lossOfData
PLL 155MHz OOL timingProblem
PLL 2.4GHz OOL timingProblem
PLL OOL timingProblem
Receive Degraded farEndReceivedDegraded
Transmit fail transmitFailure
Transmitter output power OOL transmitFailure
Uncorrected blocks fecUncorrectedBlocks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 84 / 88
88
6.3.3 Quality of service alarms

15 min B1 error rate ThresholdCrossed15Min
15 min B1 error ratio ThresholdCrossed15Min
15 min FEC corrected error alarm ThresholdCrossed15Min
15 min FEC uncorrected block alarm fecUncorrectedErrorThresholdCrossed15Min
24 h B1 error rate ThresholdCrossed1Day
24 h B1 error ratio ThresholdCrossed1Day
24 h FEC corrected error alarm ThresholdCrossed1Day
24 h FEC uncorrected block alarm fecUncorrectedErrorThresholdCrossed1Day
Laser Bias Current OOL (Out Of Limit) pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Loopback Power OOL LoopbackPowerThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Bias Current OOL (Out Of Limit) pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Bias OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Pump Laser Temperature OOL pumpLaserTemperatureThresholdCrossed
Pump Lasers fail LaserFailure
RLL OOL (received Light Level Out Of Limits) opticalInputPowerThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Bias Current OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed
Signal Laser Bias OOL pumpLaserBiasThresholdCrossed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 85 / 88
88
SLL OOL OpticalOutputPowerThresholdCrossed


Wavelenght OO Limits WavelenghtOutOfLimit
Wavelenght OO Lock WavelenghtOutOfLock

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 86 / 88
88
INDEX
NUMBERS Channel Power, 42

Decision threshold, 47
1666UT External points, 52

Alarms FEC, 48
R1.0, 82 Performance management, 55
R2.0, 79 Raman pump power, 37
R2.1, 73 SBS, 46
Common views, 27 SSU expected signal list, 45
Equipment views, 21 Voting logic, 41
Functions, 37 Wavelength information, 44
Graphical representation, 22
Overview, 13
Physical Description, 14 G
Physical views, 31
Graphical representation
1666UT, 22
A URW, 22
Alarm mapping, 73
ALS O
Criteria, 39
Output Power, Raman pump, 37
Shutdown threshold, 40
Overview
AMS Management, 48
1666UT, 13
Analog Measurements, Principles, 59
URW, 12
C
P
Channel power, 42
Performance Counters, 55
Common views
Amplifier power, 38
1666UT, 27
Performance Management, 39, 41, 55
URW, 27
Performance Counters, 55
Counters Configuration, 47, 55, 56
Performance management
Forced performance collection, 56
E Performance thresholds configuration, 55
Show NE performance data, 57
Equipment views Physical views
1666UT, 21 1666UT, 31
URW, 21 URW, 28
External Points, 52
External points
External input points, 52 S
External output points, 52
SSU expected signal list, 45
Partner alarm management, 53
Stimulated Brouillouin Scattering, 46
F
U
FEC Error Management, 49
URW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FEC Features, 48
Alarms
Functions
R1.0, 82
ALS, 39
R2.0, 79
Amplifier power, 38
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 87 / 88
88
R2.1, 73 Physical views, 28
Common views, 27
Equipment views, 21
Fonctions, 37 W

Graphical representation, 22

Wavelength Information, 44
Overview, 12
Physical Description, 14
END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 SC.3.7: URW1666UT
3AL 89062 AA AA 88 / 88
88
1353NM EQP–SPEC. OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.1 Document Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.2 Edition Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.3 Target Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 LAUNCHING MELODIE SNMP EML–USM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 NE CONFIGURATION AND SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3.1 NE Configuration display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 NE Reset function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3 Maintenance Alarm Reset function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4 Opening a PPI configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.5 Opening a loopback configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.6 Opening a software version management window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.7 Opening a software download window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.8 Opening a performance monitoring window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.9 Opening a NTP server configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 PPI CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1 PPI statuses visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2 PPI statuses modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.1 Loopback statuses visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2 Loopback request on a tributary port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6 SOFTWARE VERSION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

L.Foresta T.Thomazo
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1353NM
Release 7.0 on
ED 01 SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI
3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 36
36
6.1 Versions consultation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.2 Software activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

8 PERFORMANCE MONITORING CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
9 NTP SERVER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 36
36
Figure 1. Starting Melodie SNMP EML–USM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Figure 2. NE Configuration screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 3. Reset NE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Figure 4. Reset NE confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Figure 5. Result dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 6. Reset Maintenance Alarm command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 7. Reset Maintenance Alarm confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 8. Opening a PPI configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 9. Opening a loopback configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 10. Opening a software version management window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 11. Opening a software download window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 12. Opening a performance monitoring window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 13. Opening a NTP server configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 14. PPI configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 15. PPI status modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 16. PPI status modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 17. Confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 18. Result dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 19. Loopback configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 20. Loopback request on a tributary port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 21. Confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 22. Result dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 23. The screen is automatically refreshed after a loopback request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 24. Version Management screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 25. Software activation confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 26. Software activation wait dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 27. Software activation result dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 28. Software download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 29. Launching the download operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 30. Software download confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 31. Software download progress dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 32. Software download result dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 33. Software activation wait dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 34. Performance monitoring screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 35. Request for changing perf. collection status (es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 36. Confirmation dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 37. Result dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 38. The screen has been refreshed with the new perf. collection status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 39. NTP server configuration screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 40. NTP server address modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 41. Confirmation dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 42. Result dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
01
Edition
HISTORY
Authors
T. Thomazo
Date
SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI

01–03–30
as internal document, for internal use only
All
Page /
Paragraph
Creation in Word
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
Observations
4 / 36
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 Document Scope
This document describes all functionalities provided by the 1353SH+ EML–USM component to manage
Melodie SNMP NEs.
1.1.2 Edition Scope
None.
1.1.3 Target Audience
This manual is intended for all the operators of the 1353NM in charge of managing Mélodie SNMP Nes.
1.2 Document Structure
♦ Chapter 2 : LAUNCHING MELODIE SNMP EML–USM
♦ Chapter 3 : NE CONFIGURATION AND SUPERVISION
♦ NE Configuration display
Ne Reset function
Maintenance Alarm Reset function
Opening a PPI configuration window
Opening a loopback configuration window
Opening a software version management window
Opening a software download window
Opening a performance monitoring window
Opening a NTP server configuration window
♦ Chapter 4 : PPI CONFIGURATION
PPI statuses visualization
PPI statuses modification
♦ Chapter 5 : LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Loopback statuses visualization
Loopback request on a tributary port
3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 36
36
♦ Chapter 6 : SOFTWARE VERSION MANAGEMENT
Versions consultation

Software activation

♦ Chapter 7 : SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
♦ Chapter 8 : PERFORMANCE MONITORING CONFIGURATION
♦ Chapter 9 : NTP SERVER CONFIGURATION
1.3 Terminology
1.3.1 Definitions
– EML–USM: This term stands for Mélodie SNMP EML–USM component.
– EML : the Element Manager Layer Subsystem. In the 1353SH platform, this subsystem is responsi-
ble for configuration and management of NE.
– 1353SH: It is an Alcatel platform designed for the supervision of Alcatel transmission equipments.
1.3.2 Abbreviations
– EML Element Management Layer
– GUI Graphical User Interface
– MIB Management Information Base
– NE Network Element
– PPI PDH Physical Interface
– RX Receive function
– TX Transmit function
– USM User Services Manager

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 36
36
2 LAUNCHING MELODIE SNMP EML–USM
Melodie SNMP EML–USM is launched via the PNM Supervision | ShowEquipment menu, as following:
Figure 1. Starting Melodie SNMP EML–USM
The EML–USM main screen is then displayed, which shows a list of parameters related to the whole NE
(see NE CONFIGURATION AND SUPERVISION chapter).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
8 / 36
3 NE CONFIGURATION AND SUPERVISION
Figure 2. NE Configuration screen.
3.1 NE Configuration display
The screen on the Figure 2. above is Melodie SNMP EML–USM main screen. It is displayed via PNM Su-
pervision | ShowEquipment menu (see INTRODUCTION chapter), and shows a list of read–only parame-
ters related to the whole NE :
NE characteristics :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– NE specificities: recalls the type of the NE.
– Modulation: indicates the modulation type used by the equipment.
3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 36
36
– MUX protection: specifies whether MUX protection is present or not.
– Local loop: specifies the local loop status; if this status value is present, the transmitted data are sent
back to the other side of the radio link (reception side).

– Station number: specifies the phone number of the equipment.
Channel 1/Channel X characteristics:
– Tx Level: specifies the current value (in dBm)of the output power.
– Tx Frequency: specifies the current value (in kHz) of the frequency in the transmitter.
– Rx frequency: specifies the current value (in kHz) of the frequency in the receiver.
– Bit Rate Configuration: specifies the bit rate for the card. This bit rate is the same for all protected
channels.
Received power :
– Nominal Level: specifies the nominal received power (in dBm).
– Propagation: specifies the accepted variation (in dB) of the nominal received power .
Click on the Refresh button to reload these parameters from the NE. The NE Configuration screen is then
refreshed.
Click on the Exit button to exit from EML–USM process. The NE Configuration screen is then killed.
Two operations can be performed on the NE via the Supervision menu :
– reset the NE ,
– reset the maintenance alarm .
3.2 NE Reset function
The NE can be resetted by selecting the Supervision | Reset NE menu, as following:
Figure 3. Reset NE command
A confirmation dialog box is then displayed, as on Figure 4. Click on Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the
reset NE command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 10 / 36
36
Figure 4. Reset NE confirmation dialog
If confirmed, the NE Reset command is sent to the NE. The result is then displayed on a dialog box, as
on Figure 5. :
Figure 5. Result dialog
3.3 Maintenance Alarm Reset function
The maintenance alarm on the NE can be resetted by selecting the Supervision | Reset Maintenance
Alarm menu, as following:
Figure 6. Reset Maintenance Alarm command
A confirmation dialog box is then displayed, as on Figure 6. Click on Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the
reset NE command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 11 / 36
36
Figure 7. Reset Maintenance Alarm confirmation dialog
If confirmed, the Maintenance Alarm Reset command is sent to the NE. The result is then displayed on
a dialog box, as on Figure 5.
3.4 Opening a PPI configuration window
PPI configuration (i.e. tributary ports free/connected statuses configuration) can be visualized and modi-
fied by selecting the Tributary Ports | Interface Configuration menu, as on Figure 8. :
Figure 8. Opening a PPI configuration window
A window is opened, with PPI configuration loaded from the NE (see PPI CONFIGURATION chapter).
3.5 Opening a loopback configuration window
Tributaries loopback configuration can be visualized and modified by selecting the Tributary Ports |
Loopback menu, as on Figure 9. :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. Opening a loopback configuration window
3AL 89062 AA AA 12 / 36
36
A window is opened, with tributaries loopback configuration loaded from the NE (see LOOPBACK CONFI-
GURATION chapter).
3.6 Opening a software version management window

Software versions on the NE can be managed by selecting the Software Management | Version Con-
sultation|Activation menu, as on Figure 10. :
Figure 10. Opening a software version management window.
A window is opened, with software versions configuration loaded from the NE (see SOFTWARE VERSION
MANAGEMENT chapter).
3.7 Opening a software download window
Software packages can be downloaded on to the NE by selecting the Software Management | Software
Download menu, as on Figure 11. :
Figure 11. Opening a software download window.
A window is opened, where the operator chooses parameters for the software package to be downloaded
(see SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD chapter).
3.8 Opening a performance monitoring window
The operator can enable/disable perf. collection via the performance monitoring window, by selecting the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Performance Monitoring | Enable/Disable Perf. Collection menu, as on Figure 12. :
3AL 89062 AA AA 13 / 36
36
Figure 12. Opening a performance monitoring window.
A window is opened, which shows current statuses for 15 minutes and 1 day perf. collection (see PER-
FORMANCE MONITORING chapter).
3.9 Opening a NTP server configuration window
The operator can visualize and configure the NTP server IP address for one NE via the NTP configuration
window, by selecting the NTP | NTPServerConfiguration menu, as on Figure 13. :
Figure 13. Opening a NTP server configuration window.
A window is opened, which shows the current NTP server configuration (see NTP SERVER CONFIGURA-
TION chapter).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 14 / 36
36
4 PPI CONFIGURATION
Figure 14. PPI configuration screen
4.1 PPI statuses visualization
PPI (PDH Physical Interface) configuration screen (cf. Figure 14. ) is displayed via the Tributary Ports
| Interface Configuration menu of EML–USM main window (see NE Configuration chapter). It shows all
tributary ports free/connected statuses on NE :
– The name of the tributary port.
– Its TX status (Connected or disconnected).The Connected value means that the Transmission side
is active.
– Its RX status (Connected or disconnected).The Connected value means that the Reception side is
active.
The Refresh button reloads PPI statuses from the NE on this screen, which is then refreshed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Close button closes this window. Note that EML–USM process still runs (EML–USM main window
still exists).
3AL 89062 AA AA 15 / 36
36
4.2 PPI statuses modification
Tributary ports statuses modification requires two phases:

1) On PPI configuration screen, make all changes you want. Click on a given tributary status button

to change it; e.g. if you click on Trib_2Mb#1 Tx status, the DISCONNECTED status is changed to CON-
NECTED and the button is selected (cf. Figure 15. , Figure 16. ). If you want to connect (or disconnect)
every tributary port on the TX side, click on the Connect All (or Disconnect All) button on this column,
and all buttons on this TX side will be selected (or deselected).
Figure 15. PPI status modification .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 16 / 36
36
Figure 16. PPI status modification .
2) Click on the Apply button to validate these modifications. i.e. send them to the NE. A confirmation
dialog is then displayed and asks for confirmation, as on Figure 17. Click on Yes to confirm.
Figure 17. Confirmation dialog
If confirmed, statuses modifications are sent to the NE. A result dialog box is then displayed, as following:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 17 / 36
36
N.B: Note that modifying tributaries free/connected statuses implies a change on the NE configuration,
so these modifications may take a quite long time (one or several minutes) to be effective; i.e. if the opera-
tor immediatly clicks on the Refresh button after the result dialog is displayed, the displayed statuses for
the tributaries are the older ones and not the ones newly modified!
So it is recommended not to ask for a Refresh operation immediatly after applying modifications on tribu-
taries statuses; anyway the screen will be automatically refreshed when tributaries statuses change on
the NE (thanks to traps mechanisms, the EML–USM knows when tributaries statuses have changed and
refreshes its screen consequently).
The Cancel button cancels all modifications done on this screen (and not applied on the NE) and refreshes
it with PPI statuses reloaded from the NE. This button has the same role as the Refresh button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 18 / 36
36
5 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION
Figure 19. Loopback configuration screen
5.1 Loopback statuses visualization
Loopback configuration screen (cf. Figure 19. ) is displayed via the Tributary Ports | Loopback menu
of EML–USM main window (see NE Configuration chapter). It shows all tributary ports loopback statuses
on NE :
– The name of the tributary port.
– Its loopback status (Active or inactive).
The Refresh button reloads loopback statuses from the NE on this screen, which is then refreshed.
still exists).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 19 / 36
36
5.2 Loopback request on a tributary port
With this remote control, the received data are sent back to the other side of the radio link. This remote
control is applied to one and only one tributary at a time per board. Therefore, if the ’distant loop’ is applied

on port index 1, and if it is request on port index 2, it is automatically deactivated from port index 1.

The operator can request loopback on a tributary port via the Request Loopback menu, by selecting the
concerned tributary as on Figure 20. :
Figure 20. Loopback request on a tributary port.
A confirmation dialog is then displayed and asks for confirmation, as on Figure 21. Click on Yes to confirm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 20 / 36
36
Figure 21. Confirmation dialog
If confirmed, statuses modifications are sent to the NE. A result dialog box is then displayed, as following:
The screen is automatically refreshed with new loopback statuses, as on Figure 23. :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 21 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
Figure 23. The screen is automatically refreshed after a loopback request.
22 / 36
6 SOFTWARE VERSION MANAGEMENT
The version management screen on Figure 24. , is displayed via the Software Management | Version
Consultation|Activation menu (see NE Configuration chapter), and provides the following services to
manage software versions on the NE:

– Versions consultation
– Software activation
Figure 24. Version Management screen
6.1 Versions consultation
This feature allows to visualize on the version management screen (cf. Figure 24. ) all software packages
available on the NE.
There may be one or two software packages on the NE at a time:
– The ACTIVE software package, i.e. the one which is running,
– And the ACTIVABLE one, newly downloaded, and present only until it is activated.
For each software package, the version management screen displays the main characteristics:
– The software identity
– The software version
– The software sub–version
If there is no activable software package on the NE, the frame containing its characteristics (on the right
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
part of screen) is not displayed.
The Refresh button reloads software versions configuration from the NE on this screen, which is then re-
freshed.
3AL 89062 AA AA 23 / 36
36
still exists).

6.2 Software activation

This feature allows to activate the activable version on the NE: the activable software package becomes
then the active one. Once activated, the activable software package is no more present on the NE.
To activate the activable software package on the NE, click on the Activate button. (This button is disabled
if there is no activable software package on the NE.)
A confirmation dialog is then displayed, as on Figure 25. Click on Yes to confirm.
Figure 25. Software activation confirmation dialog
If confirmed, the activable software is activated on the NE. During this operation, a wait dialog is displayed
as on Figure 26. , warning that the NE is being resetted.
Figure 26. Software activation wait dialog.
When activation has completed, a result dialog is displayed, as on Figure 27. The NE is now running with
the new activated software package.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 24 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI
Figure 27. Software activation result dialog
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
Click on the OK button to acknowledge, the version management screen is then closed.
25 / 36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
26 / 36
7 SOFTARE DOWNLOAD
This functionality allows to download a software package on to the NE, so that it becomes the activable
software package. If an activable software package is already present on the NE, it is replaced by the newly
downloaded one.
Figure 28. Software download screen
A software download operation is launched via the Software Management | Software Download menu
(see NE Configuration chapter). The software download screen is displayed as on Figure 28. , on which
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
the operator chooses parameters for the download operation:
– The name of the file to be downloaded; to find it , the operator can navigate and browse directories
and files into the file system.
3AL 89062 AA AA 27 / 36
36
– Either the NE is implicitly activated once the download operation has completed. This option is selec-
ted by clicking on the Implicit Activation checkbutton.
Once these parameters are configured, the download operation is launched by double–clicking on the se-

lected file, or by clicking on the Download button, as on Figure 29. :

Figure 29. Launching the download operation
A confirmation is then displayed as on Figure 30. Click on Yes to confirm.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 28 / 36
36
Figure 30. Software download confirmation dialog
If confirmed, the download operations starts. During the operation, a wait dialog is displayed as on
Figure 31. , which shows in real–time how the download operation progresses:
Figure 31. Software download progress dialog
Once the download operation has completed, a result dialog displays the total size (in number of bytes)
transferred to the NE, as on Figure 32. Click on OK to acknowledge.
Figure 32. Software download result dialog

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
If the Implicit Activation option has been checked, an activation operation is immediatly launched on the
NE, and a wait dialog is displayed, as on Figure 33. :
3AL 89062 AA AA 29 / 36
36
Figure 33. Software activation wait dialog
For further details on software activation and its completion, see the SOFTWARE VERSION MANAGE-
MENT chapter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 30 / 36
36
8 PERFORMANCE MONITORING CONFIGURATION
Figure 34. Performance monitoring screen.
The performance monitoring screen (cf. Figure 34. ) is displayed via the Performance Monitoring | En-
able/Disable Perf. Collection menu (see NE Configuration chapter). It shows current statuses (enabled
or disabled) for 15 minutes and 1 day perf. collection for the given NE, and allows to change one or all of
these statuses.
N.B.: Limitation on the total number of NEs simultaneously concerned by performance collection:
– There is no limitation for 1 day performance collection. So the maximum number of A9400 NEs col-
lected is 1000.
– For 15 minutes performance collection, do not collect performance on more than 50 NEs simulta-
neously. Otherwise system performance will be affected. This is a user guideline (no control will be
done by the SH).
The Refresh button reloads perf. collection statuses and refreshes the screen.
The Close button closes this window.
To change one or both 15 minutes and 1 day perf. collection statuses, click on the corresponding checkbut-
ton(s) and validate by the Apply button. For example, to disable only 15 minutes Perf. collection, click on
the Disable 15 minutes Perf. Collection button and then on the Apply button, as on Figure 35. :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 31 / 36
36
Figure 35. Request for changing perf. collection status (es)
A confirmation dialog bow is the displayed, as on Figure 36. Click on Yes to confirm.
Figure 36. Confirmation dialog.
If confirmed, a command is sent to the EML–IM process to change the perf. collection status. A result dia-
log box is then displayed, as following:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 32 / 36
36
Figure 37. Result dialog.
The perf. collection screen is then automatically refreshed with the new perf. collection status, as on
Figure 38. The checkbutton to change this status has its label also modified (Enable 15 minutes Perf.
Collection instead of Disable 15 minutes Perf. Collection) according to this new status.
Figure 38. The screen has been refreshed with the new perf. collection status.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 33 / 36
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI
36
3AL 89062 AA AA
34 / 36
9 NTP SERVER CONFIGURATION
Figure 39. NTP server configuration screen.
The NTP server configuration screen (cf. Figure 39. ) is displayed via the the NTP | NTPServerConfigura-
tion menu (see NE Configuration chapter). It shows the current NTP server IP address for the concerned
NE, and allows the operator to modify it. Once the NTP server address modified, the NE automatically
resynchronizes its time with the newly set server.
The Refresh button reloads the NTP server address from the NE on this screen, which is then refreshed.
The Close button closes this window.
To change the NTP server address on the NE, set the new server IP address and click on the Apply button
to validate, as on Figure 40. :
Figure 40. NTP server address modification.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
A confirmation dialog bow is the displayed, as on Figure 41. Click on Yes to confirm.
3AL 89062 AA AA 35 / 36
36
Figure 41. Confirmation dialog.
If confirmed, the new NTP server address is sent to the NE. A result dialog box is then displayed, as follow-
ing:
Figure 42. Result dialog.
N.B: Note that modifying the NTP server address implies a change on the NE configuration, so these modi-
fications may take a quite long time (one or several minutes) to be effective; i.e. if the operator immediatly
clicks on the Refresh button after the result dialog is displayed, the displayed NTP server address is the
older one and not the one newly modified!
So it is recommended not to ask for a Refresh operation immediatly after applying a modification on the
NTP server configuration; anyway the screen will be automatically refreshed when the new configuration
is taken into account on the NE (thanks to traps mechanisms, the EML–USM knows when the server confi-
guration has changed and refreshes its screen consequently).
The Cancel button cancels all modifications done on this screen (and not applied on the NE) and refreshes
it with NTP server configuration reloaded from the NE. This button has the same role as the Refresh but-
ton.
END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 89062 AA AA 36 / 36
36
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 3AL 89062 AAAA Ed.01

1350NM
1353NM
Release 7.0 on NR5 EQP. SPEC. OPERATOR’S HDBK
VOL.3/3
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 912+6=918
– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 353.664 Kbites
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

AVVERTENZA – WARNING
IL MANUALE COMPLETO È COSTITUITO DA TRE VOLUMI – QUESTO È IL VOL.3/3
THE COMPLETE HANDBOOK IS COMPOSED BY THREE VOLUMES – THIS IS VOL.3/3
– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 8 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 8

8 REGISTERS FROM 1 TO 8 ARE NECESSARY
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
1 ASSEMBLARE VOL.1/3 – ASSEMBLE VOL.1/3
2 ASSEMBLARE VOL.2/3 – ASSEMBLE VOL.2/3
3 TARGHETTE VOL.3/3 - LABELS VOL.3/3
4 FRONTESPIZIO VOL.3/3 - FRONT VOL.3/3 2
5 INSERIRE SEPARATORE ’1’ - INSERT REGISTER ’1’
6 SC.3.1: WDM 3.x TERRESTR. MNG 128 1/128 128/128
8 SC.3.2: WDM 2.x TERRESTR. MNG 36 1/36 36/36
CONTINUA – continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 VOL.3/3 RELEASED
3AL 89062 AAAA TQZZA Y 1/ 6
6

CONTINUA – continues
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
9 INSERIRE SEPARATORE ’3’ - INSERT REGISTER 3’
10 SC.3.3: WDM SUBMARINE PFE 100 1/100 100/100
12 SC.3.4: WDM SUBMRN OALW16&40 154 1/154 154/154
15 SC3.5: WDM SUBMRN TERA10 266 1/266 266/266
16 INSERIRE SEPARATORE ’6’ – INSERT REGISTER ’6’
16 SC.3.6:WDM SUBMRN TERA10 ALARMS 102 1/102 102/102
17 SC.3.7: WDM SUBMRN 1666UT/OA 88 1/82 82/82
19 SC.3.8: SNMP MELODI MANUAL 36 1/36 36/36
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 912
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 456
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.

• Source files: ALICE 6.10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6
Site
FCG
Originators 1353NM
Moglia–Mandroux
Picot–Figard NR5 EQP–SPEC. OPER. HDBK
Berthomieu
RELEASE 7.0 ON
Domain : 0ND
Division : NM
Rubric : 1353NM
Type : 1353NM NR5 EQP–SPEC. OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
Distribution Codes Internal : External :
Approvals
Name V.Scortecci M.Uszynski N.Bradshaw

App.
Name L.Foresta
App.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6

INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI
– ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10

• sistemazione ’figlist’
SE SI RIFÀ IL tocustom: ELIMINARE I BODY INDEX E IL LORO RIFERIMENTO NEI toc
3AL 89062 AAAA

Ed.01
1350NM
1353NM
Release 7.0 on
Equipment mgmt for Alcatel NE supported by 1350 in NR 5.x

NR5 EQP. SPEC. OPERATOR’S HDBK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6
1350NM
1353NM

Release 7.0 on
VOL.3/3
1350NM
1353NM
Release 7.0 on

VOL.3/3
1350NM
1353NM
Release 7.0 on
3AL 89062 AAAA Ed.01 NR5 EQP. SPEC. OPERATOR’S HDBK VOL.3/3
1350NM 1353NM
Equipment mgmt for Alcatel NE supported by 1350 in NR 5.x Release 7.0 on
1350NM
1353NM
Release 7.0 on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
VOL.3/3 RELEASED
6
3AL 89062 AAAA TQZZA
Y
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
6/ 6

1353NM Equipment Specific - Operator's Handbook Vo.l3 - 3 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

1353NM Equipment Specific - Operator's Handbook Vo.l3 - 3 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

NR5 Equipment Specific Operator’s Handbook

3AL 89062 AAAA Ed.01

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2 1686WM NETWORK EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

01 040130 V.SCORTECCI ITAVE B.Moglia ITAVE

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 1 / 128

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3 WDM TERRESTRIAL MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

5 ALARM MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.1.4 Environmental alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 2 / 128

6 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 3 / 128

Figure 1. Inter–office line system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 49. Default configuration after upload operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 4 / 128

Figure 57. 1686OR 3.1 Transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Figure 58. 1686OR 3.1 Reception view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Figure 103. Set port in service confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 5 / 128

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 6 / 128

Edition Authors Date Page / Observations

1.1 J.Berthomieu 99–08–25 All 1353SH5 1686WM 3.1 scope

Applicable documents (for Alcatel Internal use only)

[1] TSD–France, Manuel Qualite Branche Systemes de Transmission – TSD,

[2] TSD, TSD Product Life–Cycle,

[3] TSD, Product Control Plan,

[4] TSD, 1353SH5.0 Quality Assurance Plan,

[5] Alcatel/NMU, NMU Application Development Process,

[6] Alcatel/NMU, NMU Documentation Management Procedure,

[7] Alcatel/NMU, Amendment of SQF, DMP, DIP, PDL procedures,

[8] Alcatel/NMU, EMLCore 98 Technical Requirement Specification,

[9] Alcatel/NMU, NMU Technical Glossary,

See NMU Web Server

[10] TSD Vimercate, 1353SH R5 Technical Requirements Specification,

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 7 / 128

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

[13] Alcatel/NMU, EMLCore 98 Introduction manual,

[14] Alcatel/NMU, EMLCore 98 Getting Started manual,

[15] Alcatel/NMU 1353SH3.1 Operator Manual EML Construction,

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 8 / 128

1.1.1 Document scope

1.1.2 Edition scope

1.1.3 Target audience

– QB3* NE Management Manual.

ED 01 SC.3.1:WDM 3.X TERRESTR.MNG

3AL 89062 AA AA 9 / 128

This document is composed of the following chapters:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.